JP2020018563A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A ninth passage DRt9 is connected in the middle of a sixth passage DRt6 via an opening D6148. A flow outlet DOPout for allowing balls reaching and end of the sixth passage DRt6 to flow out to a game area is disposed in an upper part in a vertical direction of a first winning hole. In the meantime, a flow outlet DOP6out for allowing balls flowing into the ninth passage DRt9 to flow out to a game area is disposed while its position is allowed to differ to one side in a horizontal direction relative to the first winning hole. Accordingly, balls reaching an end of the sixth passage DRt6 easily enter the first winning hole, and balls flowing into the ninth passage DRt9 do not easily enter the first winning hole. Consequently, balls do not flow down to the ninth passage DRt9 in the middle, thus allowing a player to expect that the balls reach an end of the sixth passage DRt6 and hence enhancing interest in a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 130

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art There has been known a gaming machine including a passage through which a ball can enter, and a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable and changing the ease of entry of the ball into the passage (Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-124169 A

  However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the interest in the game is insufficient.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a passage through which a ball can enter, and a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable and changing the likelihood of the ball entering the passage. And a rolling member formed so that the ball that has entered the passage can roll, and the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball that rolls the rolling member, The ball is displaced to the side where the ball easily enters the passage or to the side where the ball is difficult to enter the passage, and the rolling member is formed so that the ball can drop in the course of the ball rolling path.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the displacement member utilizes a weight of a ball rolling on the rolling member to make it easier for the ball to enter the passage. Is displaced.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, when a predetermined number or more balls roll on the rolling member, the rolling ball is dropped from the rolling member. Equipped with a drop means to make it easier.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning device, a collecting gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning device, a collecting gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a distribution device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a distribution device. It is a front view of a receiving member and a distribution device. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and distribution apparatus in the XVI-XVI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and distribution apparatus in the XVII-XVII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and distribution apparatus in the XVIII-XVIII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and distribution apparatus in the XVII-XVII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and distribution apparatus in the XVIII-XVIII line of FIG. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the sorting device when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXII in FIG. 16. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the distribution device when viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter and a big hit type in a special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is the figure which showed the time change of the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device of the 1st round in each big hit type, and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member of the distribution device. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. FIG. 5 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of a first operation unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in a production standby state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in an effect standby state. 41 is a side view of the first operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40. FIG. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an intermediate effect state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in an intermediate effect state. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an overhang state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in an overhang state. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a displacement amount and a displacement angle of a supported member according to a rotation displacement of a rotation member. FIGS. 7A and 7B are schematic diagrams illustrating the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the supported member on the driven side when the rotating member rotates in a tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the angle accompanying rotation of a rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back case and a 2nd operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a back case and a 2nd operation unit. 28A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. is there. 33A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and center frame taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. is there. 30A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame along the line LIVa-LIVA in FIG. 30, and FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 30. is there. It is an exploded front perspective view of a raising / lowering reversal effect device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a raising / lowering reversal production device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a vertically reversing member, an intermediate arm member, a direct acting plate member, and a shaft rotating member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the upside-down reversing member, the intermediate arm member, the direct acting plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in (a) of FIG. 57, and (b) of FIG. FIG. 11B is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the upside down member, the intermediate arm member, the direct acting plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. (A) to (c) are front views of the rendering device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a part of composition of a 3rd operation unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of a third operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a part of composition of a 3rd operation unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of a third operation unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (A) And (b) is a rear view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (A) And (b) is a front view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (A) And (b) is a front view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm members, the driving mode of the drive motor, and the output of the detection sensor in chronological order. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit along a line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. (A) to (d) are schematic front views of the operation units, which schematically explain an example of a combination operation of the operation units in a time series. (A) to (d) are schematic front views of the operation units, which schematically explain an example of a combination operation of the operation units in a time series. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a lower frame. It is a rear perspective view of a lower frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower frame. It is a top view of a lower frame. It is a front view of a lower frame. It is a rear view of a lower frame. (A) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXa in FIG. 78, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXb in FIG. 78. FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI of FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI of FIG. 77. FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII of FIG. (A) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the lower frame in the LXXXIVa part of FIG. 81, and (b) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the lower frame along the line LXXXIVb-LXXXIVb in FIG. 77. FIG. 78 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing a transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member, and corresponds to a cross section taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77. FIG. 78 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing a transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member, and corresponds to a cross section taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77. FIG. 78 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing a transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member, and corresponds to a cross section taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77. It is a front perspective view of a lower frame in a 3rd embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a lower frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower frame. It is a top view of a lower frame. It is a front view of a lower frame. It is a rear view of a lower frame. (A) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVa in FIG. 93, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVb in FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line XCVI-XCVI of FIG. 92. FIG. 93 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line XCVI-XCVI of FIG. 92. FIG. 109 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. 94. FIG. 95 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line XCIX-XCIX of FIG. 94. FIG. 93 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame illustrating a transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member, and corresponds to a cross section taken along line XCVI-XCVI of FIG. 92. FIG. 93 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame illustrating a transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member, and corresponds to a cross section taken along line XCVI-XCVI of FIG. 92. FIG. 93 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame illustrating a transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member, and corresponds to a cross section taken along line XCVI-XCVI of FIG. 92. FIG. 103 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CIII-CIII in FIG. 102 (b). It is a partial expanded sectional view of a lower frame in a 4th embodiment. It is a rear view of a lower frame. It is a partial expanded sectional view of a lower frame in a 4th embodiment. It is a rear view of a lower frame. (A) is a top view of the dish member in the fifth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member taken along line CVIIIb-CVIIIb in FIG. 108 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the dish member in the CVIIIc-CVIIIc line of a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the sixth embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along line XCIX-XCIX in FIG. 94, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the seventh embodiment. 94 corresponds to the cross section taken along line XCIX-XCIX. It is a front view of the game board in an 8th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a lower frame. It is a rear perspective view of a lower frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower frame. It is a top view of a lower frame. It is a front view of a lower frame. It is a rear view of a lower frame. (A) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIIIa in FIG. 116, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIIIb in FIG. 116. (A) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the lower frame, and (b) is a partial enlarged rear view of the lower frame. (A) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the lower frame, and (b) is a partial enlarged rear view of the lower frame. (A) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the lower frame, and (b) is a partial enlarged rear view of the lower frame. (A) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CXXIIa-CXXIIa in FIG. 115, (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CXXIIb-CXXIIb in FIG. ) Is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in FIG. 119. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the lower frame in 9th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of the lower frame in 10th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged rear view of the lower frame in 11th Embodiment. It is a partial enlarged rear view of a lower frame in a twelfth embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame in a 13th embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower frame. It is a front view of a lower frame. (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of a lower frame. (A) to (c) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame in the fourteenth embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of the lower frame in 15th Embodiment. (A) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the lower frame along the line CXXXIIIa-CXXXIIIa in FIG. 132 (a), and (b) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the lower frame along the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 132 (b). FIG. FIG. 119 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, which corresponds to a cross section taken along line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in FIG. 119.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the near side of the drawing is referred to as a front (front) side, and the far side of the drawing is referred to as a rear (back) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left (left). ) Side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of ball guiding nails (shown below the center frame 86. In the upper half of the game area, Are not shown), a windmill (not shown), rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit. 80 and the like, and its peripheral edge is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

  The base plate 60 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows a player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are provided in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws and the like are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by.

  The base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof can be shielded so as to be invisible to the player.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be properly used depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability-change jackpot, a 4R probability-change jackpot, and a 4R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “4R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after four rounds of jackpots, and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. In the high-probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability increases during a predetermined number of changes (100 changes in the present embodiment), and the second symbol hit probability described later increases. This includes a game state in which a ball can easily enter the winning opening 140. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300 described later in the first round of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game changes by 100 times. During the number of times, it is in a high probability state. If it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is reduced to the time-saving state for 100 times of change.

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed. Then a long time is set. When the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 140 as compared to when the electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during probable change or during working hours, the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 140a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 140a is opened during the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened per hit, are not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared with the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 (start winning) as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and outputs the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that varies and displays the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes through as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 so as to fill an opening 511 a of the rear case 510 described later, and the center frame 86 borders the window 60 a of the base plate 60. It is arranged. That is, when viewed from the front, the center frame 86 appears to be disposed so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are spaced apart from each other in the front-back direction. Have been.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower portions are displayed. Are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of “」 ”), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is held for a predetermined time. Only the operating state (opened).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, during the probability change and during the working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 140a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. May be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 140 from which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is also one of winning ports in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 140 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 is different from the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 140, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured to have three prize balls to be paid out when a prize is awarded, and to have five prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the second winning opening 140.

  The second winning port 140 is provided with an electric accessory 140a. The electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged). State), so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened (increased) is increased. Further, during the probable change and during the working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer than during the normal working hours. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 140 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is always in a state capable of winning.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winning accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, when the ball is passed through the through gate 67 during the probable change or during working hours, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 tends to be opened, and the second winning opening 140 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, the pachinko machine 10 can aim at the first winning opening 64 by “right-handing” or the second winning opening 140 by “left-handing”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with a method of shooting a ball in accordance with the playing state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Need to be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way of hitting the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided substantially at the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position may be the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. The present invention is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 140 is guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the out port 71. The out-opening 71 is provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged (not shown). ).

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and an opening / closing plate 65b of a specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 11). Solenoid 209 composed of a solenoid with a large open port for opening and closing the front side with the lower side as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected thereto, and the MPU 201 is connected to these via an input / output port 205. It transmits various commands and control signals.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 631, 731, 782, 861.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. FIGS. 6A and 6B are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 6A illustrates a closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b in which the opening / closing plate 65b is closed so as to regulate the flow of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a. In FIG. An open state of the opening / closing plate 65b in which the opening / closing plate 65b is opened so as to allow the ball to flow down is illustrated. Note that FIG. 2 is appropriately referred to in the description of FIG. 5 and FIG.

  In the open state of the opening and closing plate 65b (see FIG. 6B), the variable winning device 65 receives the ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b, and opens the opening and closing plate 65b so that it can be guided to the specific winning opening 65a. The upper surface of the opening / closing plate 65b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the rear side.

  Since the electric accessory 140a is disposed above the left and right central portions of the opening / closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the ball that lands on the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to a ball that deviates from the electric accessory 140a and flows down. . That is, the landing of the ball on the opening / closing plate 65b does not occur at the left and right central portions, but mainly at the left and right outer portions of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the arrangement of the ball that lands on the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to a position closer to the left and right outer sides of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  Note that the arrangement of the ball after landing on the opening / closing plate 65b is not limited to this. That is, depending on how the ball flows after landing on the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball may be arranged near the left and right center positions of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curved so as to secure a space on the side of the opening / closing plate 65b (see the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). ) Is formed as a curved surface that projects downward from the lower end of the front end portion facing the rear surface side), so that the ball that bounces near the left and right center positions of the opening / closing plate 65b and the front design member 141. It is possible to reduce the degree of losing momentum due to collision. Thereby, the possibility that the ball is arranged near the left and right center position of the opening / closing plate 65b can be increased.

  The center of the radius of curvature of the lower curved portion of the front design member 141 may be located at the front or the rear. In the present embodiment, by forming the radius of curvature in the lateral view below the front side, a larger space on the side of the opening / closing plate 65b can be secured. In addition, since the left and right widths of the front design member 141 are reduced toward the lower side at the left and right end portions, a space between the front design member 141 and the open / close plate 65b can be easily secured on the left and right sides.

  In the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b is guided to the specific winning opening 65a almost without omission. On the front side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that is inclined downward and rearward is disposed at an upper and lower position where the ball can be guided to the ball passage hole 163b.

  The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right end portions of the lower surface portion 163a so that the ball rolled to the left and right outer sides by the lower surface portion 163a can move over with less resistance. A guide plate portion 163a2 is formed on the left and right sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 in order to reduce the flow resistance of a ball that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b on the left and right sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1.

  The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-like portion extending frontward and leftward and rightward inward from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163, and has a front end surface that is displaced rearward toward the left and right inward. It is formed.

  Accordingly, when the ball rolling on the opening / closing plate 65b comes into contact with the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided to flow down along the slope of the inclined surface. 163a1 can be guided with little resistance. Therefore, when the opening / closing plate 65b starts the closing operation in a state where the ball rides on the opening / closing plate 65b, the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b is performed even if the ball is disposed on the left and right sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1. The degree of inhibition can be reduced.

  That is, for example, the flow of the sphere is deteriorated, and the closing of the opening / closing plate 65b is delayed, or the ball that has flowed backward due to the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b rebounds on the rear wall of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening / closing plate 65b again, By applying a load in the direction (front side) to open the opening / closing plate 65b, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the opening / closing plate 65b is unintentionally opened or malfunctions occur.

  When the opening / closing plate 65b operates from the open state to the closed state, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed by a rising operation. That is, the ball that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning opening 65a by the operation of the opening / closing plate 65b. The riding ball is guided to the specific winning opening 65a almost without omission.

  At this time, if the arrangement of the balls on the opening / closing plate 65b is shifted left and right or the number of balls is large, the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b may be delayed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the shapes of the lower surface portion 163a, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 are devised, the flow of the ball guided to the specific winning opening 65a is retained. Therefore, the quickness of the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b can be maintained.

  Instead of devising the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening / closing plate 65b on which the ball rides in the open state is formed in a planar shape (see FIG. 6B). Therefore, the ball that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b once flows backward, and then flows in the left / right direction by the action of the shape of the receiving member 163, and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the collision of the ball on the opening / closing plate 65b.

  That is, even if a plurality of balls land on the opening / closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls temporarily move rearward in parallel, so that collision of the balls on the opening / closing plate 65b can be avoided. Therefore, the rolling surface of the opening / closing plate 65b has a shape having a left-right inclined surface like the lower surface portion 163a, and the rolling surface on the opening / closing plate 65b is compared with the case where the left and right flows are formed on the rolling balls. Since the possibility of irregular movement of the ball can be reduced, unintended operation failure can be prevented.

  The receiving member 163 is provided with a contact surface portion 163a3 that comes into contact with the rotating front end portions at the left and right ends of the opening / closing plate 65b when the opening / closing plate 65b is in a closed state, and that enhances the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b. I have. The contact surface portion 163a3 is formed as a pair of left and right, and is formed so as to be capable of surface contact instead of point contact by a shape design according to the shape of the opening / closing plate 65b. Therefore, it is easy to stabilize the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b, In addition, since the load at the time of contact is received on the surface, stress concentration can be avoided, so that durability can be improved.

  In addition, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed below the contact surface portion 163a3 and has a surface shape that is substantially parallel to the opening / closing plate 65b that is disposed to face with a slight gap. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail safe when contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening / closing plate 65b becomes defective for some reason.

  In the present embodiment, the fixed member 161 that restricts the flow of the ball is disposed on the front side of the contact surface portion 163a3, and the ball is basically configured not to collide with the contact surface portion 163a3. However, for example, if the pivotal tip of the opening / closing plate 65b that comes into contact with the contact surface portion 163a3 is missing, there is a possibility that the repeatability of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state may not be maintained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the normal contact between the opening / closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front / rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening / closing plate 65b and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4. This makes it possible to maintain the stability of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b. Thereby, the reproducibility of the arrangement of the open / close plate 65b in the closed state can be improved.

  Note that the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening / closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since the contact surface portion 163a3 comes into contact with the opening / closing plate 65b when the shape is normal, there is a disadvantage that the load is easily accumulated, but the area for dispersing the load can be enlarged, and the opening / closing plate 65b can be enlarged. , The magnitude of the local load applied to the contact surface portion 163a3 can be reduced.

  When the opening / closing plate 65b operates from the open state to the closed state, the game ball being received by the opening / closing plate 65b can be received in a manner of being pushed into the opening / closing plate 65b by the shape of the front design member 141 described above. .

  That is, in a state in which the ball is received (for example, a state in which the ball slides sideways between the pivotal tip of the opening / closing plate 65b and the opening frame portion of the specific winning opening 65a), the ball contacts the lower shape of the front design member 141. In the case of contact, it can be made to flow down to the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being guided to the curved shape. This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which a ball that has deviated from the opening / closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path component 336, so that it is easy to secure a view to the third flow path component 336. can do.

  In the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball does not land on the opening / closing plate 65b. Therefore, in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b is located on the left and right sides of the electric accessory 140a. Is limited to

  Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the arrangement of the balls flowing down without being guided to the specific winning opening 65a in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b can be limited to the left and right outer positions with respect to the electric accessory 140a. Accordingly, a field of view can be ensured below the left and right end portions of the electrically driven accessory 140a at the left and right inner positions below the electrically driven accessory 140a.

  Next, the configuration of the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a (the side on which the ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a flows) will be described. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIGS. 7 and 8 show a state in which the components other than the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65 are removed from the components provided on the base plate 60.

  As shown in FIG. 8, at the rear position of the variable winning device 65 on the back side of the base plate 60, the balls having entered the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 2). Collecting trough 150 in which a path for flowing the gas to a ball discharge path (not shown) is formed.

  The collecting gutter 150 includes a groove-shaped portion forming a flow path, and a front side portion facing the base plate 60 in the groove-shaped portion is opened. When this open portion is closed by the base plate 60, a path for flowing the sphere to the sphere discharge path is completed.

  The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path portion 151 that forms a flow path of a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64, and a second flow path portion 152 that forms a path of a ball that has entered the second winning opening 140. And a plurality of third flow path portions 153 that respectively form left and right flow paths of a ball that has entered the general winning opening 63 disposed on both the left and right sides.

  The first channel portion 151 is configured as a channel inclined downward and leftward from the position behind the first winning opening 64, and the second channel portion 152 is inclined downward and rightward from the position behind the second winning hole 140. It is configured as a flow path. The third channel portion 153 is configured as a channel extending below the general winning opening 63.

  Therefore, in a front view, while the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are arranged at the left and right central positions of the game area, the flow of the ball entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is as follows. , From the center in the left and right direction to the left and right sides. Accordingly, a space can be provided below the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described later can be arranged using this space.

  FIG. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300, and FIG. 10 is a base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is shown, other parts are not shown, and other configurations to be assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted. The ground of the base plate 60 is visible. In FIG. 9, for convenience of description, the center frame 86 is illustrated in a state where the center frame 86 is assembled to the base plate 60.

  The fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the distribution device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is provided in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is provided in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  In the sorting device 300, the insertion hole 311 is fastened and fixed to the variable winning device 65 at the upper part, and the insertion hole 331 is fastened and fixed to the collecting gutter 150 at the left and right parts. That is, unlike the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 that are directly fixed to the base plate 60, the presence or absence of the distribution device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

  In other words, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 in the present embodiment can be used as they are depending on whether the distributing device 300 is provided or not. Thereby, regardless of the presence or absence of the distribution device 300, the variable winning device 65 and the common gutter 150 can be shared.

  Next, details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable prize device 65 is configured to be able to receive a ball from the game area through the specific prize port 65a, and the distribution device 300 configures a flowing path of the ball received by the variable prize device 65. In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player is changed based on the detection result of the ball flowing down the flow path of the distribution device 300, which will be described in detail later.

  FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like, and a fixed member arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161. A front design member 162 fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161 and a receiving member 163 arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161 and fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161 so as to be able to receive a ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a. And an intervening member 164 that is disposed on the back side of the receiving member 163 and is fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163 and intervenes as a connecting portion with the sorting device 300; and is disposed on the back side of the receiving member 163. And a state switching device 165 configured to be capable of switching the open / close state of the opening / closing plate 65b depending on the presence or absence of energization.

  The fixed member 161 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a front surface formed of a flat surface except for a through hole for screw insertion, a fastening position with the front design member 162, and a specific winning opening 65a. . On the other hand, the shape of the fixed member 161 on the back side has a three-dimensional shape that extends to the back side inside the thin portion that is in contact with the base plate 60 at the outer peripheral portion.

  In particular, the boundary 161a with the thin portion is formed in a horizontally long substantially elliptical frame shape, and a through hole large enough to dispose the boundary 161a is formed through the base plate 60. That is, the boundary portion 161a is a portion that is inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

  Inside the boundary portion 161a, a specific winning opening 65a, and a horizontally long plate extending slightly rearward from the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a in a horizontally elongated plate shape parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a. And a pair of left and right substantially T-shaped extended support plates 161b including a vertically long plate-like portion extending downward at an intermediate position of the horizontally long plate-like portion.

  The extension support plate 161b functions to support both a range behind the specific winning opening 65a and a flow path of the distribution device 300 described later. A projecting support portion 161c projecting from the horizontally long plate-like portion of the extension support plate 161b, a projecting support portion 161d projecting from the vertically long plate-like portion of the extension support plate 161b, and a lower edge of the boundary portion 161a The projecting support portion 161e projecting from the upper surface has a function as a portion for supporting the distribution device 300, and will be described later in detail.

  Inside the boundary portion 161a, the symmetrically projecting portion 161f projecting in a symmetrical shape below the right and left center position of the specific winning opening 65a comes into contact with the ball flowing down the distribution device 300 and guides the ball flowing down. Has functions.

  A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting a fastening screw screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged inside and outside the boundary 161a. A plurality of fastened portions 161h each having a female screw portion for screwing a fastening screw inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged inside the boundary portion 161a.

  The to-be-fastened portion 161i having a female screw portion for screwing the fastening screw inserted into the interposition member 164 is disposed outside the boundary portion 161a at a cut (left and right center position) of the boundary portion 161a. That is, of the through holes formed in the base plate 60, a connecting portion between the through hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for inserting the second winning opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 9). ), The fastened portion 161i is provided.

  The front design member 162 is formed of a light transmissive resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape so as to make the distance to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) uniform. The ball is allowed to flow down in a range on the back side of the front design member 162 and on the front side of the fixed member 161.

  On the back side of the front design member 162, there are provided a plurality of female screw portions which are provided at positions matching the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161 and which are formed so that the fastening screws inserted into the through holes 161g can be screwed therein. It includes a fastened portion 162a, and a plurality of extending portions 162b and 162c extending rearward in a shape that covers the fastened portion 162a from above.

  The extended portions 162b and 162c can prevent a ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a, so that the durability of the fastened portion 162a is reduced. Can be improved.

  Further, since the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162b and 162c are formed as inclined surfaces, the flow path of the ball can be restricted. That is, the upper surface of the extending portion 162b (two locations on the left and right sides) extending near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined downward and leftward and outward. The ball riding on the portion 162b can be suppressed from flowing toward the specific winning opening 65a. That is, the ball riding on the extending portion 162b falls downward on the left and right outer sides of the extending portion 162b, and then flows down toward the out port 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

  In addition, since the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162c (two locations at the left and right ends) extending at the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that incline down toward the left and right inner sides, a ball flowing on the extending portion 162c is formed. The downflow path can be combined with the downflow path of the sphere riding on the extension 162b. Thereby, compared with the number of flowing balls, the range in which the flowing balls are arranged can be narrowed (the arrangement density of the balls can be increased). (A space that is not configured).

  Although the front design member 162 shown in FIG. 11 is described in a plain color and has good visibility on the back side, the front design member 162 does not need to be formed in a plain color. For example, a sticker with a pattern or character may be attached to the front side of the front design member 162 to decorate it, or a groove may be formed in the front design member 162 with a geometric pattern, and light may be applied to the groove. By doing so, the geometric pattern may emerge and be visually recognized. Further, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-transparent after being plain or having the above-described decoration added thereto.

  The receiving member 163 is formed in a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) whose front side is opened from a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-described guide plate portion 163a2, contact surface portion 163a3, and auxiliary contact surface 163a4. A lower surface portion 163a that forms a flow lower surface inside the frame, a ball passage hole 163b that is provided as a through hole through which a ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, and a position that matches the fastened portion 161h of the fixed member 161. A plurality of insertion holes 163c through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the to-be-fastened portion 161h is inserted from the rear side, and a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted through the interposition member 164 is screwed. And a plurality of fastened portions 163e having female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted into the state switching device 165 are screwed.

  The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a left and right inclined surface which descends toward the left and right outer sides with the left and right center portions as vertices. Since the lower surface 163a1 is provided, the sphere flowing down the rear end of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is disposed so as to pass through the ball passage hole 163b with low resistance.

  The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 engaged with the back side of the receiving member 163. That is, the detection sensor SE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

  The intervening member 164 is formed of a light transmissive resin material, has a main body 164a having a light refracting surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a through-hole formed at an upper portion of the main body 164a to be fastened to the receiving member 163. A pair of insertion holes 164b through which fastening screws to be screwed into 163d can be inserted, a light emitting board 164c in which LEDs are arranged above the insertion holes 164b, and left and right ends on the lower end side of the main body 164a. A pair of fastened portions 164d formed with a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted into the distribution device 300 can be screwed, and a fastened portion of the fixed member 161 formed through the upper portion of the main body portion 164a. And an insertion hole 164e through which a fastening screw screwed into the portion 161i can be inserted.

  The light emitting board 164c is disposed in such a manner that the surface on which the LEDs are arranged is directed obliquely forward and upward. In an assembled state, the position directly above the specific winning opening 65a in front view (see FIG. 6), and the second winning It is located just below the mouth 140. From such an arrangement, the light from the light emitting substrate 164c easily enters the field of view of the player who desires to enter the second winning opening 140 or the specific winning opening 65a and looks at the location obliquely downward and downward.

  Therefore, by controlling to turn on the LED of the light emitting substrate 164c when a ball entering the second winning port 140 or the specific winning port 65a is detected, the ball entering the second winning port 140 or the specific winning port 65a is controlled. Can be easily grasped by the player as to whether or not the game has occurred.

  From the above configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened and fixed to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. Thereby, the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 can be firmly fixed as compared with a case where only the fastening and fixing of the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 are performed. In addition, since the arrangement of the distribution device 300 connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164 can be stabilized, the distribution of the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 to the distribution device 300 can be stabilized. Relative displacement can be suppressed.

  The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion portions 165a into which fastening screws to be screwed into the to-be-fastened portions 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, and has a plurality of openings for wiring passage and heat dissipation. A lower case portion 165b formed in a deep bottom box shape whose upper side is opened, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case portion 165b, and a plunger engaged with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c. A sliding portion 165d that slides and is rotatably supported by the lower case portion 165b in such an arrangement that the tip of the rotation protrudes from the front end of the lower case portion 165b, and is rotated by the sliding displacement of the sliding portion 165d. It has a moving part 165e and an upper lid part 165g that is fastened and fixed to the lower case part 165b by fastening screws inserted into the plurality of insertion holes 165f.

  The rotating tip of the rotating portion 165e is recessed so that the rod-shaped portion can be engaged, and a transmission projection 65c projecting rightward from the right end of the opening / closing plate 65b enters the recessed portion. Engaged. The transmission protrusion 65c is disposed at a position eccentric from a metal shaft rod 65d that forms a rotation axis of the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b can be caused with the rotation of the rotating portion 165e.

  13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the distribution device 300. 13 illustrates a perspective view of the distribution device 300 as viewed from above, and FIG. 14 illustrates a perspective view of the distribution device 300 as viewed from below.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the distribution device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 164 d of the interposition member 164 is formed so as to be inserted therethrough. A middle member 330 having a pair of insertion holes 331 that are fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the up-down direction and formed to penetrate a fastening screw screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting gutter 150; A substrate 350 housed between the member 330 and the upper member 310 and provided with a light emitting means 351 such as an LED on the front side is housed at a position between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310, and the state is determined depending on whether or not electricity is supplied. Switching device 360 configured to be switchable, and a slidable sliding device that is disposed below the middle member 330 and that slides back and forth between a front position and a rear position as the state of the state switching device 360 is switched. The displacement member 370 is disposed below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the slide displacement member 370 between the displacement member 370 and the middle member 330. And a lower member 380 having an insertion hole 381 to be formed.

  Before describing the details of the configuration of each unit, an overview of the functions of the distribution device 300 will be described. The distribution device 300 is a device that forms a flow-down path in which the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flows down.

  The sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163b flows down in the order of the inside of the upper member 310, the flow path components 334, 335, 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the inside of the lower member 380. The ball that has flowed down from the lower member 380 is discharged to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  The ball flowing down inside the distribution device 300 is configured so that the player can visually recognize the ball, and the flow-down mode allows the player to obtain not only a mere staging effect to entertain the eyes of the player, but also a player. An effect related to game profit, such as causing a change in profit.

  The difference in the manner in which the spheres flowing down inside the distribution device 300 flow down is mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. In other words, the location of the slide displacement member 370 when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380 causes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes.

  Therefore, the line of sight of the player is easily gathered at a place where the ball naturally flows down from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380 (a place where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged as described later). The device is designed on the premise of concentration.

  Next, the configuration of each part of the distribution device 300 will be described in detail. The upper member 310 is a U-shaped thin member formed of a light-transmitting resin material and has a U-shape in a top view, and includes the above-described insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 penetratingly formed to receive a ball, and a mark. A pair of colored (in this embodiment, red) transparent seal members 313, a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the opening 312 to the front side along the outer peripheral portion, and a middle member A plurality of insertion cylinder portions 315 having through holes through which fastening screws to be screwed into 330 can be inserted; a fastened portion 316 having a female screw into which the fastening screw inserted into the middle member 330 can be screwed; A pair of front and rear long projecting portions 317 that are elongated in the front-rear direction and protrude downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310 and are arranged side by side, and downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310. Is a long part in the left and right direction A pair of left and right inner protruding portions 318 disposed between the pair of front and rear long protruding portions 317, and a horizontally long portion protruding downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310. It includes a pair of left and right outer protrusions 319 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the pair of front and rear long protrusions 317, and a housing recess 320 formed as a recess having a size capable of disposing the upper portion of the substrate 350.

  The opening 312 is a passage-like portion (tunnel-like portion) that plays a role of receiving a ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and flowing the ball downward, and an upper front edge portion of the sensor SE1 ( The shape is such that it is cut along an inclined surface so as to be flush with the rear surface of the plate (see FIG. 12). Thus, the upper front edge of the opening 312 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the detection sensor SE1.

  Further, the opening 312 is formed with such an opening degree that does not enter the inside of the ball passage hole 163b when viewed in the opening direction of the ball passage hole 163b. Thereby, the flow resistance at the time of guiding the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b to the opening 312 can be reduced.

  The seal member 313 functions as a member that attracts the player's attention by being brilliantly visually recognized by receiving light emitted from the light emitting unit 351 of the substrate 350, and will be described in detail later.

  The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is inclined in accordance with the flow path of the sphere below the upper member 310. The first upper surface portion 314a disposed on the front side of the opening 312 is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side, and is connected to the front end of the first upper surface portion 314a and disposed on the left and right inner side. 314b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the left and right inner sides. The left and right intervals between the left and right second upper surface portions 314b are configured to be longer toward the near side, so that the visibility of the player who visually recognizes the ball between the second upper surface portions 314b can be secured.

  A counterbore for receiving the screw head of the fastening screw is formed on the upper surface side of the insertion cylindrical portion 315. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the player from visually recognizing the screw head of the fastening screw while inserting the fastening screw from above.

  The insertion tube portion 315 is arranged at a position that matches the fastened portion 332d having a female screw portion formed on the middle member 330. In particular, the to-be-fastened portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion cylinder portion 315 also serves as a support portion for supporting the rotating portion 363, which will be described in detail later.

  The fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is arranged such that the screw portion is upward and the screw head is downward. For this reason, the screw head is configured to be less noticeable to a player who is obliquely viewed from above, while the fastened portion 316 is arranged on the near side. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the distribution device 300 from being deteriorated due to the fastening screw, while the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 are fixed with strength.

  The fastening portion 316 is formed only on the right side because the insertion tube portion 315 is already disposed at two locations on the rear side, so that the fastening position on the front side is sufficient at one location, and the screw head faces downward. The reason for this is that the distributing device 300 can be improved in appearance by omitting the disposing device if it is unnecessary even if it is not noticeable and unnecessary. Note that the arrangement of the fastened portions 316 is not limited to this. For example, they may be provided on the left side, or may be provided on a left and right pair.

  The arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is set as a position that avoids the flow path of the ball and minimizes the deterioration of the appearance of the distribution device 300, which will be described in detail later.

  The lower surface portions of the front and rear long projecting portions 317, the left and right inner projecting portions 318, and the left and right outer projecting portions 319 formed in a pair each have the same location as a reference, and the lower the location, the farther the location is from the location. Formed as a surface. The curved surface has different shapes at the front and rear long projecting portions 317, the left and right inner projecting portions 318, and the left and right outer projecting portions 319, and there is an intention to control the flow-down state of the sphere based on the difference in the shapes.

  The middle member 330 includes a pair of the above-described insertion holes 331, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (substantially box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the rear side, and a frame shape (substantially having a lower bottom portion on the front side). A pair of front frame-shaped portions 333 formed in a box shape), a pair of first flow path forming portions 334 that are recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame-shaped portions 333 and constitute a flow path of a ball, A pair of second flow path forming parts 335 connected to the front end of the flow path forming part 334 to form a flow path of a sphere and recessed on the front side of the front frame-shaped part 333; A pair of third flow path components 336 which are connected to left and right inner ends of the front frame 335 to form a flow path of the sphere, and are recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame 333.

  Further, the middle member 330 has a left and right elongated shape behind the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and is formed to penetrate the lower bottom and functions as a discharge path for a ball. A partition plate portion 338 formed in a long plate shape in the front-rear direction so as to partition the third flow path component portion 336 left and right, and a left and right long rectangular shape from a lower side surface at a rear end portion of the third flow channel component portion 336. A pair of positioning projections 339 projecting as shape projections.

  The rear frame-shaped portion 332 does not form a ball flow path unlike the front side portion that forms a ball flow path, and is mainly configured as a portion that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame-shaped portion 332 is formed as a through-hole 332a formed vertically at the front end at the center in the left-right direction and configured to allow the slide displacement member 370 to be arranged, and a through-hole elongated in the left-right direction. A plurality of guide holes 332b formed through the lower bottom portion to guide the slide displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360, and a plurality of female screw portions formed with a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 so as to be screwable therein. It includes a fastened portion 332c and a cylindrical fastened portion 332d having at its upper end a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion cylindrical portion 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed.

  Since the front frame-shaped portion 333 is subjected to light diffusion processing on the inside of the frame and on the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom portion, the visibility of the rear side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 is reduced. The front frame-shaped portion 333 is formed in a substantially square frame shape in a top view, and an insertion hole 333a formed as a counterbore hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted. Is provided.

  The first flow path forming section 334, the second flow path forming section 335, and the third flow path forming section 336 are parts forming flow paths of the spheres, respectively, so that the flow direction of the spheres, the inclination angle, and the like are different. It is designed, but details will be described later.

  The opening 335a whose front side is opened at the connection position between the second flow path forming section 335 and the third flow path forming section 336 can enter the symmetrically protruding section 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning device 65. It is a gap for That is, the symmetrically protruding portion 161f is arranged so as to enter the inside of the flow path through the opening 335a so as to be able to contact the ball flowing down the distribution device 300.

  The discharge holes 337 are partitioned by a partition plate portion 338, and are configured as a pair of left and right sides, and are formed in a size that allows a ball to be discharged through at least two paths. That is, it has a left and right length at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In the present embodiment, since the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side on the lower member 380 disposed below the discharge holes 337, the discharge holes 337 are arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the spherical through holes of the detection sensors SE1. May be designed.

  The partition plate portion 338 has a function as a guide portion for guiding the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in addition to the function of partitioning the third flow path forming portion 336 as described above, and the details will be described later. The positioning projection 339 is fitted to the projection 383a of the lower member 380, and is a portion for avoiding a positional shift between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, which will be described in detail later.

  The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T-shape in which the lower portion 353 is longer in the left and right direction than the upper portion 352, and the lower portion 353 has a concave portion for positioning at the lower end on the left end side. A section 354 is provided.

  The recessed portion 354 is positioned in the left-right direction by engaging with the corresponding portion as the internal shape of the middle member 330, and the left and right long lower portion 353 is moved back and forth to the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330. The upper portion 352 is accommodated in the accommodating concave portion 320 of the upper member 310 so that the upper portion 352 is prevented from dropping upward, so that the arrangement is fixed. The details will be described later together with the intention of disposing the light emitting means 351.

  The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361 and a tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction. A sliding portion 362 engaged with the plunger and slidingly displaced together with the plunger; and a rotating portion 363 which is rotatably supported by being inserted into the left-side fastened portion 332d, and which rotates with the sliding displacement of the sliding portion 362. , Is provided.

  The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a recessed to receive the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 from above, an overhang portion 362b projecting rightward from the right side, and a lower surface. And a guided portion 362c projecting downward from the front-rear central portion and having an elongated oval cross section in the left-right direction.

  Since the disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above from the direction in which the concave portion 362a is formed, the slide portion 362 can be prevented from dropping upward. Therefore, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disk portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the middle member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disk portion 361a with an adhesive or the like.

  The guided portion 362c is a portion for preventing the displacement direction of the slide portion 362 from being shifted from the left-right direction by being inserted into the guide hole 332b of the middle member 330. In particular, in the present embodiment, the slide portion 362 can be maintained long by engaging the guided portion 362c and the guide hole 332b because it is formed to be long in the left-right direction. The cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be, for example, a circle or a rectangle.

  The rotating portion 363 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from above, and is formed in a vertically long tubular shape at the L-shaped connecting portion and has a size large enough to allow the fastened portion 332d of the middle member 330 to be inserted. A supporting cylindrical portion 363a having a hole, an upper cylindrical portion 363b projecting upward from a short-side end portion of the L-shape and being inserted into a through hole of the overhang portion 362b; A lower cylindrical portion 363c protruding downward from the side distal end portion in a cylindrical shape and inserted through the concave portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370.

  With the above-described configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder 363a as a central axis. The displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger slides and the slide portion 362 is displaced in the left-right direction, and the upper cylindrical portion 363b inserted through the through hole of the overhang portion 362b is displaced. The lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced, and as a result, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced.

  The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to be slid in the front-rear direction at a position between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 in the vertical direction, and includes a lower bottom portion and a lower member of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330. 380, a thin plate portion 371 sandwiched and supported from above and below, an upper projecting portion 376 projecting upward from the thin plate portion 371 in a pair of right and left, and a left and right center behind the upper projecting portion 376. And a recess 378 formed at the projecting end of the projecting portion projecting upward at the portion and formed so as to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

  The thin plate portion 371 has a pair of left and right supported holes 371a formed in the rear half and a front-rear end portion at the left and right center portions, and a left-right width shorter than an arrangement interval of the upper protruding portions 376. A recess 372 to be recessed, a pair of lower protrusions 373 projecting downward in a ridge shape along the edge of the recess 372, and a protrusion along left and right edges in the rear half. A plurality of upper and lower protruding ridges 374 protruding in both vertical directions in a strip shape, and a cylindrical protruding portion 375 protruding downward in a columnar shape from the rear end and inserted into the guide elongated hole 386 of the lower member 380. Prepare.

  The lower protruding ridge 373 and the upper and lower protruding ridges 374 are portions supposed to face and slide with the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 arranged on the upper and lower sides. This is a ridge for reducing the contact area between the member 330 and the lower member 380. Since the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced by reducing the contact area, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from becoming slow.

  The upper projecting portion 376 is a columnar portion having a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed so as to pass through the placement through-hole 332a and to enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332. The width of the gap between the left and right inner sides of the upper projecting portion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the displacement of the upper projecting portion 376 can be guided by the partition plate portion 338.

  In other words, the upper protruding portion 376 is arranged so as to sandwich the partition plate portion 338 in the gap between the left and right inner sides, and is configured such that displacement in the left and right direction is suppressed by contact with the partition plate portion 338. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be guided well, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-back direction.

  The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole in the left-right direction so as to correspond to the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 necessary for causing the slide displacement member 370 to be displaced in the front-rear direction. You.

  The projecting portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed is configured to enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 through the placement through hole 332a, so that the lower column of the rotating portion 363 is formed. The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the concave portion 378.

  As described above, the shape of the placement through-hole 332a has a shape including the entire range in which the upper projecting portion 376 to be inserted and the projecting portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed are arranged inside. Designed as a through hole.

  The lower member 380 includes the above-described insertion hole 381, a plate-like portion 382 formed in a long thin plate shape on the left and right, and a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) detection sensors below the plate-like portion 382. A sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape that enables the SE1 to be arranged side by side.

  The sensor holding frame portion 389 has an opening formed on the rear side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted, and the upper and lower side surfaces through which a ball passing through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 is opened, and other portions are closed. Formed.

  The plate-like portion 382 has through holes formed at positions matching the through holes of the detection sensor SE1 in the same manner as the through holes formed in the sensor holding frame portion 389 in the up-down direction. A projecting portion 383 projecting upward in a longitudinally elongated projecting shape at an intermediate position of the SE1 and a pair of projecting portions projecting left and right away from the front end of the projecting portion 383. And a pair of guide projections 384 projecting at a position rearward of the projection 383 at a position that can be inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370, and the guide projections 384. A pair of guide protrusions 385 formed as long protrusions in the front-rear direction at both left and right outer sides, and a long guide-like hole 386 extending colinearly with the protrusion 383 in a top view. , Curved surface protruding rearward on the front side Includes a curved surface portion 387 which is formed by Jo, an insertion hole 388 formed through the fastening screw is threaded insertable to the fastened portion 332c of the middle member 330, a.

  The ridge 383 is formed as a ridge having a slightly smaller left and right thickness than the width of the left and right gaps of the recess 372 of the slide displacement member 370. The slide displacement member 370 sandwiches the protrusion 383 between the recesses 372. Be placed. That is, the ridge 383 functions as a guide that guides the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

  The projecting portion 383a is designed such that the left and right inner ends are located at positions equivalent to the left and right outer ends of the positioning projecting portion 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the right and left outer ends of the positioning protrusion 339 are abutted against the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a, so that the left and right of the middle member 330 with the lower member 380 as a reference. The position in the direction can be appropriately determined. At the same time, the rear side surface of the front portion of the frame of the lower member 380 (the portion connecting the protruding portion 383 and the protruding portion 383a on the front end side) and the front side surface of the positioning protruding portion 339 are brought into contact with each other, thereby lowering the lower portion. The position of the middle member 330 in the front-rear direction with respect to the member 380 can be appropriately determined.

  Accordingly, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a displacement between the third flow path component 336 as the configuration of the middle member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as the configuration of the lower member 380.

  The guide projecting portion 384 is formed in a left-right elongated oval shape, is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370, and limits the displacement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to a displacement in a range where the guide protrusion 384 is arranged inside the supported hole 371a.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the collision between the slide displacement member 370 and the ridge 383, so that, for example, the forward end of the displacement is determined by the position where the slide displacement member 370 collides with the ridge 383. The durability of the ridge portion 383 can be improved as compared with the configuration. Therefore, the guide effect by the ridge portion 383 can be continued for a long time.

  The guide projecting portion 384 does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 even if it is broken, but functions as a portion for preventing collision with the projecting ridge 383. For this reason, the guide projection 384 is usually designed with sufficient strength so that it can be used for a set period of time (for example, three years) in a state where the guide projection 384 is not damaged. The strength of the guide projection 384 and the projection 383 may be designed in consideration of use in a state where the slide displacement member 370 collides. That is, the life of the guide projecting portion 384 may be set to be shorter than the set period (for example, two years), and the remaining period may be designed to withstand the strength of the projecting portion 383. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in shape can be improved.

  The guide protrusion 385 is arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left and right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, and is formed so that the thin plate portion 371 can be arranged in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left and right inner sides of the guide ridge 385. Thereby, the displacement in the front-rear direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be made small in the lateral displacement.

  The guide slot 386 is a slot formed with a left and right width that allows the cylindrical projection 375 of the slide displacement member 370 to be inserted. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is restricted in the front-rear direction by the cylindrical projection 375 being guided by the guide elongated hole 386.

  The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the flow of a sphere flowing down below the middle member 330. In the present embodiment, the flow of the ball that has entered the out port 71 is guided, but the details will be described later.

  A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being noticeably visually recognized. Further, the insertion holes 388 are arranged on the left and right sides and on the back side of the range where the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged. This can reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 obstructs the field of view of the sphere passing near the detection sensor SE1 or passing through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

  As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of portions, namely, the guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate portion 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371 a, the recess 372, and the lower protrusion 373. It is displaced in the front-rear direction by being guided by the ridge portion 383, the guide long hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion 375, the partition plate 338 for the upper protrusion 376, and the like. Thus, the load at the time of guidance can be shared among a plurality of positions, so that the load can be locally prevented, and the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion for guiding the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented from being damaged. Can be.

  As can be seen from this, the slide displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by at least a plurality of members of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, in the slide displacement member 370, at least the pair of upper projecting portions 376 are guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 is guided by the projecting ridge portion 383 of the lower member 380.

  Therefore, if the assembly between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor and the dislocation is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 is hindered. Here, it is preferable that the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 have a small displacement as a part that continuously configures the flow path of the sphere, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is good, A small displacement can be guaranteed.

  In other words, when the displacement of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is not performed favorably. Therefore, by detecting that the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is defective, In addition, it is possible to control to execute the error notification on the assumption that the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 may be defective.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state where the relative positions of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are in a poor state, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage.

  Next, details of the internal structure of the distribution device 300 will be described. Here, a configuration related to the flow of the sphere inside the distribution device 300 and a configuration that enters the flow path of the sphere will be mainly described.

  15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15, and FIG. FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize device 65 and the distribution device 300 along the line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15, and FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize device 65 and the distribution device 300 along the line XVIII-XVIII of FIG.

  In FIGS. 15 to 18, when shown, the opening / closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state arranged at a front position. First, the details of the flow path of the sphere flowing down inside the distribution device 300 will be described.

  When the open / close plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6B), the ball that has landed on the open / close plate 65b rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b. The sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163 b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310, and is guided to the first flow path component 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path forming section 334, the subsequent second flow path forming section 335, and the succeeding third flow path forming section 336 are all configured as inclined flow paths that are inclined downward, and the connected flow paths are connected to each other. Are formed in a spiral shape forming an angle of 90 degrees in a top view.

  That is, the first flow path forming part 334 is formed as an inclined flow path for causing the sphere to flow toward the front side in the front-rear direction, and the second flow path forming part 335 is based on the flowing direction of the sphere flowing down the first flow path forming part 334. The third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the sphere to flow down in the left-right direction rotated by 90 degrees, and the third flow path configuration part 336 is the same as the previous rotation direction based on the flow direction of the sphere that flows down the second flow path configuration part 335. It is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the sphere to flow down the back side in the front-rear direction rotated by 90 degrees in the direction.

  In this manner, by forming the flow-down path in a spiral shape having a bending angle of a right angle, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the flow velocity of the sphere increases as it goes downstream. More specifically, when the sphere flowing down the first flow path component 334 accelerates toward the front side, the downward flow in the subsequent second flow path component 335 has no longitudinal component. It is possible to realize a flow-down mode in which the influence of the acceleration in the configuration section 334 is suppressed. Further, in the third flow path forming section 336 following the second flow path forming section 335, the flow is directed backward in the backward direction opposite to the acceleration direction in the first flow path forming section 334. It is possible to realize a flow-down mode in which the influence is suppressed.

  Therefore, for example, unlike the flow-down mode in which the ball constantly flows down in the same direction (for example, the left direction) from the beginning, it is possible to easily avoid an excessive increase in the ball's flow-down speed on the downstream side. In other words, it is possible to make the flow velocity of the ball uniform over the entire flow path, to keep the player's attention to the ball high, and to easily avoid the situation where the player loses sight of the ball. It has the effect of being able to do so.

  Further, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path component 335, but it is easier to prevent clogging of the ball and backflow by forming the second flow path component 335. When the second flow path component 335 is not formed (when the length of the second flow path component 335 in the left-right direction is 0), that is, the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 are In the case of connection, it is necessary to reverse the flowing direction of the sphere at the connection point by 180 degrees from the flow on the near side to the flow on the rear side. In this case, the switching angle of the ball flowing direction is large, and in particular, it is necessary to reverse the velocity direction back and forth, so it is difficult to smoothly flow the ball down, and the ball tends to stay, clog, and backflow, May occur.

  On the other hand, if the switching angle in the downflow direction is 90 degrees or less as in the present embodiment (90 degrees in the present embodiment), the reversal of the velocity direction of the ball does not occur, so that the ball flows down smoothly. Stagnation, clogging, and backflow of the ball can be easily avoided.

  The flow path shape at the connection end of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, the above-mentioned symmetrically projecting part 161f is provided as a part for guiding the flow of the sphere in a manner to bend the flow direction of the sphere. Is done.

  The symmetric protruding portion 161f is formed such that a portion arranged on the downstream side of the sphere retreats from the path of the sphere than a portion arranged on the upstream side of the sphere. For example, the left and right widths of the symmetrically protruding portions 161f disposed to face each other are formed to be longer than the left and right widths of the partition plate portions 338 disposed adjacent to each other. In addition, the rear end portions on the left and right ends of the symmetrically protruding portion 161f that are arranged to face each other are disposed on the front side of the flow path side surface of the second flow path configuration portion 335 near the opening 335a (FIG. 17). reference).

  Thereby, when the ball collides with the symmetrically protruding portion 161f, it is possible to prevent the ball from being excessively decelerated or the ball from flowing backward.

  Further, at the connection end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the first flow path forming part 334, the side wall part 334a formed at the front left and right ends of the middle member 330 bends the flowing direction of the sphere. It is formed as a part that guides the flow of the sphere in an embodiment.

  At the upstream end of the first flow path component 334, the first flow path component 334 projects upward from the flow lower surface of the first flow path component 334 in a curved surface shape (see FIG. 16) whose arrangement decreases toward the front side. Curved protrusion 334b is formed as a portion for guiding the flow of the ball in a manner to bend the flow direction of the ball.

  In other words, the ball that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first flow path component 334, and contacts the side wall 334a during the flow, so that the flow direction can be switched. The flowing direction is switched by flowing down the flow path forming section 335 and abutting on the symmetrically protruding section 161 f during the flowing down, and flows down the third flow path forming section 336 to reach the discharge hole 337.

  The side wall portion 334a is formed in a shape capable of engaging with the projecting support portion 161d of the fixed member 161 and aligning the same. That is, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and the displacement in the left and right direction is regulated, so that the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 are aligned in the left and right direction. It can be performed.

  A description will be given of the inclination angle and the length ratio of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 in the longitudinal direction. Regarding the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction, the first flow path component 334 has an inclination angle to the horizontal of about 7 degrees, the second flow path component 335 has the inclination angle to the horizontal of about 5 degrees, The flow path forming part 336 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path configuration section 334, and set to a slightly gentle common inclination angle in the second flow path configuration section 335 and the third flow path configuration section 336.

  Regarding the length, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 has a front frame-shaped portion 333 formed in an outer square shape as an inner side surface in a top view, and the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame-shaped portion 333. It is formed so that a large square having the outer side surface. Here, in the present embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 is set to 21 mm, and the length of one side of the above-described large square is set to 45 mm. It is formed.

  Therefore, since the clearance with the flow path is 1 mm in total on both sides of the sphere, the sphere flows down in a state where there is almost no displacement in the width direction with respect to the generally used sphere having a diameter of 11 mm. . This is a small clearance, considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is about 19 mm. Can be suppressed.

  Among the parts constituting the ends of the flow path components 334 to 336 arranged on a square surrounding the periphery of the square front frame part 333, the upstream end of the first flow path component 334 is Since only the curved protrusion 334b to be configured is arranged inside (front side) of the apex of the square, the first flow path configuration section 334 is connected to the second flow path configuration section 335 and the third flow path configuration section 336. Shorter than that.

  Speaking from the actually measured values in a top view, the flow path formed by the second flow path configuration part 335 and the third flow path configuration part 336 has substantially the same length (33 mm at the center of the sphere), and the length is The length is about 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path component member 334 (22 mm between sphere centers).

  From the above-described ratios of the inclination angle and the length in the longitudinal direction of each of the flow path components 334 to 336, it can be explained that the time required for a sphere to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is not constant. That is, the passage time through the first flow path forming part 334 having the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length is equal to the second flow path forming part 335 having the slanted angle and 1.5 times the path length. And the time required to pass through the third flow path component 336.

  In the present embodiment, with such a configuration, the arrangement shifts to the rear side when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, and a part is hidden by the non-transparent resin portion of the detection sensor SE1. From the state in which the visibility of the ball is deteriorated, the ball can be displaced to the front side at an early stage, and the state can be switched to a state close to the player and in which the visibility of the ball is high. This makes it easier to avoid a situation where the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

  Further, when the visibility of the ball is high, slowing down the flow speed of the ball eliminates the need for the player to quickly move his or her line of sight toward the ball. Eye fatigue) can be reduced.

  When attention is paid to the sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 having high visibility, the sphere flows down in the left-right direction along the second flow path component 335. In comparison with the case, when the ball flows down in the front-rear direction along the third flow path component 336, the displacement amount of the ball in front view becomes smaller, so that the game burden of the player who pays attention to the ball is reduced. , Can be minimized when focusing on a sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336.

  In other words, since the length and the inclination angle are equal, the time required for the sphere to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow path component 336 Are equivalent, but the amount of displacement of the sphere in front view is different, and as a result, the apparent velocity of the sphere flowing down (the displacement velocity of the sphere in front view) flows down the third flow path component 336. The sphere that flows is slower than the sphere that flows down the second flow path component 335.

  The flow path of the ball changes only at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 where the game load is minimized and the ball is easily noticed, and the flow path of the ball in other portions is the flow path component 334 to 336. It is common in. Accordingly, the line of sight of the player tends to be naturally concentrated on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and the game burden on the player who concentrates the line of sight can be effectively reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the opening 335a is formed on the front side surface of the second flow path component 335 in order to ensure the visibility of the player who pays attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336. (See FIG. 17), it is possible to prevent the line of sight toward the third flow path component 336 from being obstructed by the meat of the second flow path component 335.

  Further, in the symmetrically protruding portion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a, only a portion necessary for contacting and guiding the flowing ball is formed, and the formation of a shape portion on the upper and lower sides is omitted. Is done. In other words, the symmetric protruding portion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion vertically, and a space is secured on the upper and lower sides (see FIG. 18). Therefore, the possibility that the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is obstructed by the symmetrically protruding portion 161f, as compared with the case where the symmetrically protruding portion 161f is formed with a vertical thickness. It can be lowered, and visibility can be improved.

  Further, it is configured such that spheres deviating from the opening / closing plate 65b and heading toward the out port 71 are gathered toward the field of view centered on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in the present embodiment, the ball that enters the out port 71 flows down below the third flow path component 336, contacts the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and is discharged downward.

  Therefore, assuming a line of sight for observing the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 from the obliquely upper front side, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down the back side of the third flow path configuration part 336. Therefore, the sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336 and the sphere entering the out port 71 are visible before and after the ball, so that the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is noticed. The total number of spheres that enter the field of view increases.

  In other words, whether the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a and flows down the third flow path forming portion 336 or the ball that does not enter the specific winning opening 65a but enters the out opening 71, Enters the field of view focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

  Therefore, irrespective of the ease with which the ball is directed to the specific winning opening 65a, that is, regardless of the nail configuration (the so-called good or bad gauge) implanted in the base plate 60, many of the shot balls (other winning openings 63, The rear end of the third flow path component 336 (the part that attracts the player's attention) is located at the position where the balls (excluding the balls that have entered the balls 64 and 140) and the position where the third flow path constituent part 336 overlaps. Thereby, the line of sight can be efficiently guided to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 by the flowing sphere.

  As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side is improved, but in this embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is reduced except for the rear end of the third flow path component 336. It is configured to lower.

  For example, a light diffusion processing surface 333b for generating a light diffusion effect in a shape following the prism is formed on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330. In FIG. 17, a portion visually recognized in a saw-tooth shape is the light diffusion processing surface 333 b, which is formed over substantially the entire inner periphery of the inner surface and vertically.

  When the effect of light diffusion occurs, light is diffused in multiple directions, so that the entire surface is visually recognized as shining. And the visibility on the back side deteriorates. According to the present embodiment, visibility is deteriorated in a state where light is emitted from the light emitting unit 351 of the substrate 350. Conversely, when light is not irradiated, at least as compared with a state where light is irradiated. Visibility can be improved.

  On the other hand, if there is a shielding object between the light and the light, the shadow of the shielding object is visually recognized as a black point, and the position of the shielding object can be easily determined.

  A processing surface similar to the light diffusion processing surface 333b is also formed in other portions. For example, there are a light diffusion processing surface 319a formed on the rear side surface of the left and right outer projecting portion 319, a light diffusion processing surface 332e formed on the rear side surface of the front portion of the rear frame portion 332 (FIG. 17). reference).

  The processing surface formed in the same shape is a plate-like portion extending on the back side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, and is formed on the front frame-like portion 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state. The light diffusion processing surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the portion to be covered and the light diffusion processing surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the front part of the middle member 330 before the rear frame portion 332 are exemplified. Is done.

  With these configurations, in the present embodiment, light diffusion is performed on the back surface, the lower surface, the inner surface of the vortex, and the upper surface of the vortex of the flow channel formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow channel components 334 to 336. The processed surface is formed, and the effect of changing the visibility by light irradiation is achieved.

  In a state where the light diffusion processing surface is not irradiated with light, the direction is changed in the left-right direction from the third flow path component 336 with the player's eyes paying attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 from the front side. The sphere can be hidden by the front frame 333 to make it harder to see immediately.

  Further, with a player's line of sight observing a ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 as viewed obliquely from above, let's see the ball that has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame 389 and has dropped. However, since the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processing surface 340, the light is irradiated on the light diffusion processing surface 340, so that it is difficult to identify the sphere after passing through the detection sensor SE1 and falling. .

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the profit obtained for the player is controlled to be changed depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

  Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the behavior of the sphere at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 in order to grasp how the ball has flowed from the rear end of the third flow path component 336. In addition, the power to pay attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 can be further improved.

  On the other hand, when the light is emitted from the light emitting unit 351, it is possible to configure a state where the shadow of the sphere is easily recognized as a black point. As described above, by switching between the light irradiation and the non-light irradiation depending on the situation, it is possible to switch between good and bad visibility of the ball. Further, depending on the presence or absence of the sphere on the front side of the black point, a situation where the black point is hidden by the sphere and a situation where the black point can be seen without being hidden by the sphere can be configured.

  As described above, the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed in the vicinity of the flow path components 334 to 336, but the flow formed by the flow path components 334 to 336 is consistent. It is formed on the side that does not come into contact with the ball that flows down the road.

  This can prevent the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 from being scraped due to contact with the sphere, and maintain the shapes of the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 for a long period of time. And the effect of light diffusion can be maintained.

  Furthermore, by contacting the sphere with the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, it is possible to prevent the sphere from flowing down and prevent the sphere from being decelerated. In addition, by ensuring the visibility inside the flow path, the visibility of the sphere is reduced while the sphere is flowing down the flow path formed by the flow path components 334 to 336. That can be avoided.

  The light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the setting of the size of the prism, it is possible to achieve the effect of causing the effect of light diffusion and the effect of decelerating the ball by collision with the ball.

  In the front frame-shaped part 333 of the middle member 330, the formation of the light diffusion processing surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the part to be fastened 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and the visibility is maintained high without any countermeasure. there is a possibility. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the visibility is reduced by the fastening screw.

  That is, by utilizing the fact that the fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transmissive, it can be used as a blindfold at a place where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processing surface 333b. When the front frame-shaped portion 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusion processing surface 333b shines brightly, and the fastening screw reflects and shines light where the light diffusion processing surface 333b is not formed. The visibility of the back side of the front frame portion 333 in the line of sight from the front side can be reduced, including the portion where the formation of the processing surface 333b is omitted.

  The light diffusion processing surface 332e of the middle member 330 is formed on the back side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336. For this purpose, besides making the surface brilliantly shine, a substrate 350 disposed on the back side is provided. And causing the state switching device 360 to function as a blindfold. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is arranged on the back side of the substrate 350 (see FIG. 17), the substrate 350 is blindfolded, and it is easy to prevent the state switching device 360 from being visually recognized by a player.

  The substrate 350 is accommodated in a form supported by the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330. The substrate 350 is disposed with a gap between the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 at the left and right central portions, and slides into the gap. The displacement member 370 is disposed (see FIG. 18). That is, the substrate 350 is arranged at a position where the slide displacement member 370 is sandwiched between the slide displacement member 370 and the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332.

  More specifically, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower portion 353 is sandwiched between the rear frame portions 332 at the left and right ends from the front and rear (see FIG. 17). In this supporting portion, the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 is provided with a thick portion 332f having a large thickness (see FIG. 16). Then, the slide displacement member 370 can be arranged in the gap (see FIG. 18).

  As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310, and is disposed to face the light diffusion processing surface 164 f formed on the interposition member 164 in front and rear.

  Therefore, when the light is emitted from the light emitting means 351 disposed on the upper portion 352, the light diffusion processing surface 164 f of the interposed member 164 can produce an effect of glittering brilliantly. Can be reduced in the visibility of the range.

  Here, when the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper part 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion processing surface 164f, the light diffusion processing surface 164f has a cross-sectional shape following the prism along the surface. Since the light is formed in the entire vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as light having a wide vertical width. Therefore, it can be seen from the player's point of view that the light is emitted above and below the specific winning opening 65a.

  In addition, in the field of view from the front side, the light diffusion processing surface 164f is disposed at the center on the left and right sides of the receiving member 163. Therefore, if it is formed at least in the arrangement gap of the pair of detection sensors SE1, a sufficient effect can be obtained.

  The lower portion 353 of the substrate 350 is disposed so as to irradiate light toward the seal member 313 and a portion disposed below the seal member 313 and in which a ball flows down, which will be described in detail later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, switching of the flow path of the ball passing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and its significance will be described. In the description of FIGS. 19 and 20, FIGS. 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15, and FIG. 20 is a cross-section of the variable prize device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. FIG. 19 and 20, in the case shown, the opening / closing plate 65b is illustrated in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is illustrated in a state disposed at a rear position.

  Here, the four left and right detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389, the flow of the sphere to each detection sensor SE1, and the function of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

  The four detection sensors SE1 are two sets arranged symmetrically, and include a positive detection sensor SE11 having a common function and a normal detection sensor SE12. The probable change detection sensor SE11 is provided on the inside in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is provided on the outside in the left-right direction.

  The functions of the four detection sensors SE1 are different from those of the detection sensors SE1 arranged behind the opening / closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 disposed behind the opening / closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor for paying out a prize ball. That is, when it is detected that the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, ten for one detection) of the winning ball is paid out. It is paid out to the player side by the control device 111 (see FIG. 4).

  On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389 is not a detection sensor for paying out prize balls, but as a detection sensor for changing the game state after the end of the big hit game by detecting the incoming ball. Function.

  In addition, as described later, in the present embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 disposed on the sensor holding frame portion 389 is used for switching whether or not to shift to the positive change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor for switching the presence or absence of the next jackpot acquisition.

  When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate portion 371 covers the upper part of the certainty detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the certainty detection sensor SE11. The passage of the sphere to is prevented. Therefore, the ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 as guided by the upper projection 376 of the slide displacement member.

  Since the upper side 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 has a front side surface 376a facing the sphere formed in an arc shape with a concave channel side, the flowing sphere smoothly flows toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. Can be.

  On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 retreats backward from above the probability change detection sensor SE11, and the slide displacement member 370 moves to the through hole. A ball is allowed to pass.

  That is, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the arrangement (front position or rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through-hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is controlled to be the probability change state. In other words, when the ball is not detected as passing through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and passes only through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the normal state (or the time reduction state). ).

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the jackpot type includes the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot. In order to realize this, in the present embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared as operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 for each big hit type.

  In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operation pattern such that the ball easily passes through the through-hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 in the case of the probability change jackpot. It is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the through-hole of the positive change detection sensor SE11 and to easily pass through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. The details of the control will be described later.

  As described above, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly connected to the profit obtained by the player, and the arrangement naturally draws the attention of the player. On the other hand, an illegal act of illegally switching the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 has been found not a little, and a measure against it has been emphasized.

  As a premise, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360 is energized. That is, when power is not supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the plunger and the slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are disposed on the right side by an urging spring (not shown), and the lower column portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 faces the front. By being disposed on the side, the slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the front position.

  On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and the slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left by the electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the concave portion of the slide displacement member 370). The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear side position by the rearward displacement of the portion inserted into the setting portion 378). This is a normal operation mode, and the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 correspond one-to-one.

  The person who performs the above-mentioned misconduct inserts a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the sorting device 300 from the ball payout opening or a gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1), for example. By pressing the thin metal wire against the slide displacement member 370 and pushing the slide displacement member 370 to the back side, there is a possibility that the state in which the ball can enter the positive change detection sensor SE11 may be illegally created. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the thin plate portion 371 is disposed below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming section 336 as the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 (see FIG. 18), It is difficult to press against the front end of the thin plate portion 371 when pressing the slide forming member 370 through the thin metal wire through the road forming portion 336, and press against the upper projecting portion 376. The front side surface 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 has a curved surface shape that allows the load to escape to the left and right sides as described above, so that even if a thin metal wire is pressed, the load can escape to the left and right sides. Thus, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is illegally displaced to the rear side position.

  Further, in addition to the path leading to the slide displacement member 370 being wound not in a straight line but in a spiral shape, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 itself is far from the front side surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the rear side. Since they are separated (about 10 cm), it is difficult to make the thin metal wires reach the slide displacement member 370 in the first place.

  From these configurations, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the state switching device 360 can be improved. That is, in the related art, in many cases, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is maintained by mechanically devising the mechanism for transmitting the driving force (displacement regulation) in response to the above-described misconduct. Is limited in the configuration of the state switching device 360. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the condition required for the state switching device 360 can be partially omitted by configuring the slide displacement member 370 such that a load is hardly applied in the first place, and the state switching device 360 can be freely designed. The degree can be increased.

  When a pressing load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 with a thin metal wire creeping through the third flow path component 336, the thin metal wire itself flows down the sphere trying to flow down the third flow path component 336. Therefore, it is difficult to make the sphere reach the positive change detection sensor SE11.

  As described above, depending on whether the ball passes through the through hole of the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, the profit obtained by the player greatly changes. It is desirable to avoid.

  In the conventional model, it is usual to configure the normal detection sensor SE12 to restrict the ball in the state where the ball is allowed to enter the positive change detection sensor SE11. However, in the present embodiment, the positive change detection is performed. In the state where the ball is allowed to enter the sensor SE11 (see FIGS. 19 and 20), no movable member is provided to restrict the ball from entering the normal detection sensor SE12, and the ball is also entered into the normal detection sensor SE12. This is a configuration that can be performed.

  Even with such a configuration, if at least one ball passes through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 when ten balls flow down, the probability change state after the jackpot game is secured. In the present embodiment, from such a concept, by omitting the disposition of the movable member that opens and closes the normal detection sensor SE12, the material cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, as a result of not disposing the movable member, there is a good effect that maintenance due to failure or malfunction of the movable member is not required, and the service life of the pachinko machine can be extended beyond the life of the movable member.

  On the other hand, as a device for guiding the ball to the detection sensor SE1 on the appropriate side as a device different from the movable member, the flow channel shape and the arrangement of the fixed protruding portions 317, 318, and 319 are used. And shape are devised. That is, a mechanism that prevents a ball larger than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear side position is fixedly arranged inside the flow path (that is, the protrusion). It is intended to be realized by the shape of the set portions 317, 318, 319). This will be described below.

  First, a device of the flow path shape will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal in the lateral direction toward the center in the left-right direction (toward the partition plate 338). (See FIG. 15).

  The inclination angle is set so that the angle and the direction are the same as the inclination of the second flow path component 335 in the longitudinal direction. It is possible to reduce bouncing of the ball when the ball flows in (bouncing away from the partition plate portion 338).

  Due to the inclination in the short direction, the arrangement of the spheres flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 can be brought closer to the partition plate part 338 side. Therefore, the ball when flowing down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336 toward the detection sensor SE1 can be disposed on the side close to the partition plate 338, and the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear position. In the arrangement state, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a situation in which the ball erroneously passes through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 disposed apart from the partition plate portion 338) may occur.

  Also, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the lateral direction, the flow path formed by the flow path components 334 to 336 has a left-right direction path formed only by the second flow path component 335. Since the inclination direction is the left / right center side (partition plate part 338 side), the speed in the left / right direction is generated in the left / right inward direction. This also makes it possible to reduce the possibility that a ball may accidentally pass through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 disposed apart from the partition plate 338).

  Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed projections 317, 318, and 319 will be described. It is the left and right inner protruding portions 318 that the spheres that have flowed down the third flow path forming portion 336 are first arranged close to each other. The left and right inner protruding portions 318 are the smallest protruding portions among the protruding portions 317, 318, and 319, but are located on the front side of the center of the detection sensor SE1 and on the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Since it is located on the front side more, it comes into contact with the ball passing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 without sliding while sliding on the partition plate 338.

  The protruding distal end surfaces of the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are configured as curved surfaces that are concave downward when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the protruding portion is more left and right than the front end side of the protruding portion. It is formed so as to extend outward and downward, and its front and rear ends are connected to form a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and abutted on the left and right inwardly protruding portions 318 receives a load in a direction in which the left and right outward components and the downward component are mixed, and flows down. .

  On the other hand, since the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are formed in a small size, the flowing direction of the ball is not determined by the load received from the left and right inner protruding portions 318 as being downward or left and right outward, but is merely a momentum. It functions as an attachment. Since the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged on the upstream side of the slide displacement member 370, the above-described force is generated regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

  The flow of the ball after coming into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 will be described separately. In a state where the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front side position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while abutting on the upper projecting portion 376 and the front and rear long projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 18). And flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

  The projecting end of the front and rear long projecting portion 317 has the same use as the upper projecting portion 376. That is, since the curved surface is formed as a curved surface for switching the flowing direction of the ball, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is substantially the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376 a of the upper projecting portion 376. As a guide, the upper protruding portion 376 forms a curved surface starting from the left and right inner sides and ending at a position rearward of the center position of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 when viewed from above (see FIG. 17). The long protruding portion 317 has a curved surface whose start point is the ceiling surface of the flow path and whose end point is a position close to the end point position (rear end position) of the front side surface 376a at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 when viewed in the left-right direction. (See FIG. 18).

  Here, the upper side surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward and leftward and outward, and the ball that is urged right and left outward by contact with the left and right inwardly protruding portion 318 takes advantage of the momentum. Since the ball flows down in the left and right outward directions, the ball can smoothly flow down.

  Further, the left and right outer protrusions 319 are formed above the sphere flowing down in the left and right directions, so that the sphere can be smoothly formed by suppressing the ball from jumping. Since the purpose of the left and right outer projections 319 is not switching of the ball flowing direction but suppression of ball bouncing, the shape of the left and right outer projections 319 is significantly different from that of the front and rear long projections 317. It is formed as a curved surface having a large radius of curvature formed from above SE11 to above the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the left and right outer protrusions 319 are disposed on the front side of the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (that is, the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), the left and right outer protrusions 319 are provided. When the setting portion 319 and the ball are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, the center of the ball is more likely to be located on the rear side than the thickness center of the left and right outer protrusion portions 319. Therefore, when the left and right outer protrusions 319 and the ball abut in the vertical direction, a load having a backward component can be easily applied to the ball, so that the ball flows backward to the front side. Can be prevented.

  With these configurations, it is possible to easily prevent clogging of a ball or backflow of a ball when a plurality of balls flow down.

  When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper protruding portion 376 are retracted behind the front and rear long protruding portion 317. Flows in contact with

  The front-rear long protruding portion 317 has a protruding end portion (curved surface) whose normal shape passes through the center of the third flow path forming portion 336, and the center of the through hole of the positive change detection sensor SE11. Since the center of thickness is arranged immediately behind the position, it is easy to apply a load in which the component in the left-right direction is suppressed to the ball in contact. This load functions as a load for causing the ball to flow obliquely downward and forward because the protruding tip of the front and rear long protruding portion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

  Therefore, the sphere that has not gone to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner protruding portions 318 receives the load from the front and rear long protruding portions 317 obliquely downward and forward, and flows toward the positive change detection sensor SE11.

  Here, depending on the contact point at the time of collision with the front and rear long protruding portion 317, there is a concern that the ball may rebound to the front side (backflow may occur), but in the present embodiment, as described above, the left and right inward collision occurs. Since the ball is urged obliquely downward and to the right and left outside by contact with the setting portion 318, even if the ball rebounds to the front side, the ball does not move toward the lower bottom rear end of the third flow path component portion 336 (see FIG. 20) or However, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the collision only occurs with the rear side surface (see FIG. 19) of the front frame-shaped portion 333 and the backflow of the third flow path component 336 occurs.

  What is unique in this embodiment is that, even when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position and the ball flows to the positive detection sensor SE11, the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position and the ball flows to the normal detection sensor SE12. As in the case, the ball is displaced leftward and rightward by the load from the left and right inner protrusions 318. This use will be described later.

  The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be slidable at a front position and a rear position. When the ball is flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 toward the slide displacement member 370, the slide displacement member 370 is moved. When the 370 performs the closing operation (the operation from the rear position to the front position), there is a possibility that a forward load is applied to the sphere, and the load in the direction in which the third flow path component 336 flows backward (forward) is applied to the sphere. May be given.

  In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if control is performed so that the closing operation is completed before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the sliding displacement member 370 in operation can be eliminated, so that the ball can flow backward. Can be reduced.

  In addition, the front surface of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing left and right outer sides, or the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged so as to collide with the ball without causing a third problem. The action of guiding the sphere that has reached the rear end of the flow path component 336 to the left and right sides can be produced. Thereby, the backflow of the sphere can be made hard to occur.

  In addition, since the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 (the operation from the front position to the rear position) is not the operation in the direction opposing the ball but the operation away from the ball, for example, the ball is Even if the operation is performed while riding on the thin plate portion 371, a load that pushes the ball back to the front side is less likely to occur. Therefore, in the opening operation, even if the control is executed at an arbitrary timing without considering the arrangement of the sphere, it is considered that the backflow of the sphere does not easily occur.

  When the sphere rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (before flowing to the left and right outer sides), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses the rotation with respect to the sphere. Since a load is applied in the direction (the direction in which the ball is rolled backward), the rotation of the ball can be stopped, and the flow of the ball can be stopped and the ball can be easily dropped.

  Therefore, when the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371 and the slide displacement member 370 is opened, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 with the current rolling force. And the ball can be easily guided to the positive change detection sensor SE11.

  The appearance of the distribution device 300 from the player's perspective in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment including the above-described distribution device 300 will be described. Hereinafter, as an example, the case where the angle of the line of sight with respect to the horizontal direction is different will be described separately.

  FIG. 21 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 in the direction of the arrow XXII in FIG. 16, and FIG. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in FIG. 16.

  As a premise, a player operating the pachinko machine 10 can play a game in a desired posture except for gripping and rotating the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, the player plays the game with the head sufficiently separated from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a line of sight (see FIG. 22) in a horizontal direction or a direction inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal. Alternatively, the game may be played by bringing the head closer to the pachinko machine 10 and viewing the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight (see FIG. 23) in a direction inclined downward by about 30 degrees from horizontal. In general, the former can secure a wider field of view, but it is difficult to notice small parts, while the latter has a narrower field of view, but small parts in the field of vision are more noticeable.

  FIG. 21 is shown as a reference, and hereinafter, description will be mainly given by comparing FIG. 22 and FIG. 21 to 23 show the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b for convenience.

  In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is illustrated by imaginary lines. Although the light emitting means 351 is arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), only the left half is shown for easy understanding. Since the functions of the light emitting means 351 arranged at the top are as described above, the three light emitting means 351 in the left half part arranged in the lower part 353 will be described here.

  First, the upper light emitting unit 351 emits light toward the seal member 313. As described above, since the seal member 313 is formed to be red and transparent, when light is emitted from the light emitting unit 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. Thereby, the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings can be improved. Since the seal member 313 is disposed right above the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 18), the third flow path component 336 can be noticed.

  Note that the formation of the light diffusion processing surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting unit 351 (see FIG. 18). Accordingly, it is possible to avoid that the light from the light emitting unit 351 is visually recognized as being extended in the vertical direction by the light diffusion processing surface 332e, and the periphery of the seal member 313 can be illuminated intensively.

  Note that the light emission control is not limited at all. For example, during the big hit game, control is performed so that the seal member 313 is irradiated with light in a situation where it is desired to pay attention to a ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. By doing so, the attention can be paid to the seal member 313, and the line of sight can be naturally guided to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 disposed below the seal member 313.

  Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side respectively correspond to the positions directly above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12. That is, the control of the light emitting means 351 is performed such that when the ball enters the certainty detection sensor SE11, the light emitting means 351 disposed directly above the certainty detection sensor SE11 emits light, while the ball is transmitted to the normal detection sensor SE12. By controlling the light-emitting means 351 disposed directly above the detection sensor SE12 to emit light when the ball has entered, it is possible to notify the player of the ball passage location.

  The light emitted from the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed to the light diffusion processing surface. That is, the light-emitting means 351 on the left and right center sides are disposed to face the light diffusion processing surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light-emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides are disposed to face the light diffusion processing surface 319a (see FIG. 17). ing. The light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 332e are formed above and below each part.

  Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting unit 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting unit 351, and is formed as a range extending vertically (as a band-like light extending vertically). Visible). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes, the visibility of light from the light emitting unit 351 can be improved.

  The angle (5 degrees) of the downward inclination from the horizontal in FIG. 22 is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 can be visually recognized. However, since the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-back direction, it is difficult to grasp a change due to the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in this view.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when viewed in the direction at an angle of 30 degrees from horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is narrower, so that it is compared to the direction viewed in FIG. Thus, the difficulty of confirming the switching of the flow-down mode of the sphere at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 increases. However, in this view, it is easy to grasp the displacement of the upper protruding portion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

  Since the arrangement through-hole 332a of the middle member 330 is formed as an opening having a minimum size enough to allow the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 to pass through, the inside of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 is formed. Can be hidden such that the state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) disposed at the position is difficult to visually recognize.

  During the actual jackpot game, a plurality of balls are guided to the specific winning opening 65a during the round game, and flow down the flow path components 334 to 336 in order. When a plurality of spheres are arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 at the same time, the line of sight toward the back sphere may be obstructed by the front sphere.

  For example, when a plurality of spheres are arranged in the third flow path component 336, those spheres are arranged at the same position in FIG. Therefore, the ball on the back side is hidden by the ball on the near side.

  When the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12, the ball flows from the rear end of the third flow path component 336 to the left and right directions. After deviating in the left-right direction from the third flow path component 336, the visibility is reduced by the light diffusion processing surface 333b of the front frame-shaped part 333. It is preferable to grasp the flow path from the downstream end position (the position of the ball P1) of the second flow path component 335 to the upstream end position (the position of the ball P2) of the third flow path component 336. If there is a sphere (a sphere that is slightly shifted in the left-right direction from the third flow path component 336), the sphere hides a sphere that is coming off the rear end of the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction.

  In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the positive change detection sensor SE11 or to the normal detection sensor SE12 can be determined by determining whether the flow direction of the ball has switched to the left or right outside at the rear end of the third flow path component 336. It is possible by visually recognizing it, and it is only necessary to pay attention to the inside of the third flow path component 336 and the vicinity of the right edge. In contrast, in the present embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path component 336 and the second flow path component 335 on the upstream side in the direction of the line of sight, the inside of the third flow path component 336 and the right The sphere is configured to be able to flow down along a path including the periphery (movement from the position of the sphere P1 to the position of the sphere P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the sphere flowing down the upstream side, a situation may occur in which it is difficult to grasp whether the sphere has flowed to the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

  Also, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the sphere flowing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and the sphere flowing through the second flow path component 335 are clearly separated in the vertical direction, so that the upstream side It is easy to avoid the situation where the ball is blindfolded. On the other hand, as the vertical width of the flow path visually recognized at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is smaller, the area of the sphere that can be visually recognized in the direction is reduced.

  In particular, the sphere that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path component 336, once flowing down diagonally to the right, goes to the positive change detection sensor SE11 regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, as described above. The flow path is switched between the flow path and the flow path toward the normal detection sensor SE12. For this reason, the area of the sphere visually recognized at the switching position becomes smaller as compared with the case where the sphere flows downward just as the sphere flows downward or the direction in which the sphere flows downward is switched to the right.

  As another mode of switching, it is assumed that the switching position is located on the more upstream side, such as in the case where the flow path of the sphere flows down just below or when the ball switches to the right. For example, in a case where the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are not formed and the sphere heading toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 flows down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path. The position is behind the center line of the component 336.

  On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right from the rear of the center line of the third flow path component 336 as in the present embodiment, the sphere moves below the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336. By dropping (falling by the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower bottom portion of the third flow path component 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), the sphere is added to the third flow path component 336 itself. In addition to the action of partially concealing the ball, the sphere is displaced to the left and right outside the range visually recognized through the third flow path component 336, so that the sphere is partially hidden by the front frame portion 333.

  Therefore, since the area of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 becomes visible from the viewpoint of the player, it becomes difficult to grasp which flow path the ball has flowed down. Become. Thereby, the attention power for the ball flowing down near the rear end of the third flow path component 336 can be further improved.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in a plurality of directional views (see FIGS. 22 and 23) described as directional views for identifying the flowing direction of the sphere flowing down the rear end of the third flow path component 336. Each has its strengths and weaknesses. Thereby, even if the method of visually recognizing the distribution device 300 is used, it is possible to allow the player to adjust and select a favorite visual recognition method, instead of requiring the player to perform a one-sided game, and to provide a wide variety of game modes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing the game.

  Although securing the player's view can be achieved by various methods, in the present embodiment, in particular, a gap is formed between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, so that the third flow path component portion is formed. Since the roof 336 can be in a state where it has been removed, the third flow path component 336 can be easily viewed.

  22 and 23, the visibility on the front side of the distribution device 300 will be described. Although not shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are arranged on the front side of the distribution device 300, so that the light is transmitted depending on the thickness of the member. Since less light is emitted, the field of view is obstructed.

  23 can be more easily recognized in the direction view of FIG. 23 than in the direction view of FIG. 22 because the range in which the field of view is blocked by the front design member 162 is smaller than in the direction view of FIG. There is.

  The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are basically formed in a flat shape as described above, and are configured so that refraction of light hardly occurs (see FIG. 12). This can prevent the visibility of the distribution device 300 from being deteriorated.

  The portion which cannot be formed into a flat shape in function is formed so as to have a small influence on visibility. For example, the protruding support portions 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the distribution device 300 do not obstruct the player's line of sight facing obliquely downward, so that the player sees the flow path components 334 to 336. (Upper rear, left and right outer, left and right lower, etc.).

  Further, for example, the symmetrically protruding portion 161f is formed at the center height of the sphere, and is formed to be thin with a minimum thickness in terms of strength (see FIG. 18). Thereby, even if the symmetrically protruding portion 161f is disposed between the ball and the eyes of the player, it is possible to prevent the entire ball from being hidden, so that the ball flowing down the flow path forming portions 334 to 336. Visibility can be ensured.

  The sphere that has deviated from the specific winning opening 65 a flows down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, and flows down toward the out opening 71. The effect of the ball flowing down to the out port 71 on the field of view will be described.

  FIGS. 22 and 23 illustrate an example of the arrangement of the spheres flowing down to the out port 71 with the opening / closing plate 65b in the open state. While the opening / closing plate 65b is open, the ball flowing down from above the opening / closing plate 65b rides on the opening / closing plate 65b and is guided to the specific winning opening 65a side. The ball is deviated to the left and right of 65b. These balls flow down between the extending portion 162b and the extending portion 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 and flow down to the out port 71.

  As shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, in the player's eyes, the arrangement of the spheres flowing through the inner rail 61 is below the respective flow path components 334 to 336, so that the spheres flowing through the inner rail 61 cause the respective spheres to flow. The visibility of the ball flowing down the components 334 to 336 can be prevented from being reduced.

  On the other hand, the flow of the ball flowing down the inner rail 61 is, like the flow of the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335, a mode in which the ball flows at a gentle angle toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area. In the same manner as a ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335, an effect of guiding the line of sight of the player to the left and right center positions of the game area is exerted. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the out port 71 and also to the third flow path component 336. That is, since the left and right positions of the out port 71 and the third flow path forming portion 336 are set to the same position (left and right center position), the player moves his or her line of sight up and down, and the out port 71 and the third flow path. The gaze is guided to a state where both of the components 336 can be visually recognized.

  Therefore, the ball hitting toward the game area is likely to efficiently enter the specific winning opening 65a (whether there is little wasted ball during the jackpot game) or deviates from the extended portion 162b and the extended portion. The effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path component 336 by the flowing ball irrespective of whether the flowing ball between the ball and the ball 162c frequently occurs (whether the wasteful ball during the jackpot game frequently occurs). Can be played.

  That is, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the line of sight of the player can be guided to the third flow forming unit 336 in a state where the ball flows down the second flow forming unit 335, and the ball is moved to the specific winning opening 65a. In the case where the player deviates, the line of sight of the player can be guided to the third flow path component 336 while flowing down the inner rail 61.

  The ball heading to the out port 71 usually has no effect in the game as a useless ball, but in the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, the ball heading out port 71 To the third flow path component 336.

  In the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball flows on the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b and passes through the front side of the second flow path forming section 335, so that the visibility of the second flow path forming section 335 can be reduced. There is.

  On the other hand, the second winning opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a are arranged above the left and right center position of the specific winning opening 65a, and the third flow path forming portion 336 is arranged below the left and right center position of the specific winning opening 65a. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down by the second winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a, so that the ball is prevented from flowing down on the front side of the third flow path forming portion 336. can do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the visibility of the vicinity of the third flow path component 336 and its rear end portion is reduced by a ball flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be secured by the formation length of the flow path components 334 to 336. An attempt is made to avoid an increase in space. That is, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the player's eyes, the arrangement interval between the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as a guide of the arrangement of the third flow path component 336. Are formed short.

  In addition, since the slide displacement member 370 is disposed below and behind the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), as shown in FIG. In this case, it is visually recognized that the slide displacement member 370 is disposed so close to the outer shape of the specific winning opening 65a as to bite.

  In addition, the flow path of the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a formed in the left and right elongated shape and has passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 disposed at the left and right ends thereof has a symmetrical flow path configuration. Through the parts 334 to 336, it is collected below the left and right central sides of the specific winning opening 65a. This makes it possible to shorten the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370, as compared to the case where the ball flows down the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, since the structure required as the flow path of the sphere can be a structure in which the left and right lengths become shorter toward the lower side, it can be easily arranged near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61. it can.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, although the design concept is such that the specific winning opening 65a is disposed close to the out opening 71, the specific winning opening 65a does not have a structure in which a ball flows down directly from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path forming portion 335, but has a second flow path. By adopting a structure in which the ball flows down backward from the left and right inner ends of the flow path forming section 335 by the third flow path forming section 336, the out port 71 (disposed on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface section 387). Opening) can be formed directly below the second flow path component 335. Thus, the vertical interval between the specific winning opening 65a and the out opening 71 is reduced.

  In this manner, the vertical winning width 65a and the slide displacing member 370 in the player's eyes can be reduced in the vertical arrangement width and the left and right width, so that in the design of the game area where the size in front view is limited to a certain standard, Since the vertical width of the area occupied by the winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

  For example, as in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a can be arranged near the lower end of the gaming area, so that the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in a symmetrical gaming area.

  Next, an example of the flow of the ball after entering the distribution device 300 and the operation pattern of the movable role (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) in consideration of the flow will be described.

  First, as a premise, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path forming section 334, the second flow path forming section 335, and the third flow path forming section 336 in order (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for a sphere to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 can be set arbitrarily. In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 in about 0.3 seconds. Designed.

  That is, after entering the specific winning opening 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow path component 334, 0.3 second to pass through the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path. It is configured so that it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the configuration unit 336.

  Therefore, even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a immediately after the opening and closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, the ball is disposed at the rear end of the third flow path forming unit 336 for 0.9 seconds. The configuration is such that the sphere does not reach the detected sensor SE1. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening / closing plate 65b is opened, the ball cannot pass through the position of the slide displacement member 370 and cannot pass through the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. The operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without fear of erroneous winning of the ball.

  Therefore, for example, in order to prevent erroneous winning in the V winning sensor as generally seen in a pachinko machine equipped with a V-variable attacker, a control for releasing the opening / closing plate for a short time at the start of the round game R (the operation of the opening / closing plate is not possible). Control with naturalness) can be made unnecessary. Thereby, the operation mode of the opening and closing plate for opening and closing the specific winning opening becomes a natural operation, and it is possible to provide the player with an environment in which the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the pachinko machine provided with the V-variable attacker in the above example, a ball entering immediately after the V-variable attacker is opened tends to cause an erroneous prize, but in the variable prize device 65 of the present case, as will be described later, immediately after opening. On the contrary, since a favorable effect (for example, an effect of hiding the operation of the slide displacement member 370 with the ball) is generated by the entering ball, it is possible to eliminate the necessity for preventing the ball from entering immediately after opening. .

  The time required for the passage of the sphere can be arbitrarily set depending on the length and inclination of each of the flow path components 334 to 336, the shape of the inner wall of the flow path (smooth or irregular shape, etc.).

  The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 24B schematically shows a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. FIG. 24C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c are stored. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which a big hit determination value of a first hit random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the winning start matches one of the determination values defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24 (b)) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is the big hit type. , And the type of the winning opening that triggered the special symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when a special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on a ball entering the first winning opening 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 falls within the range of “0 to 9”. Is defined in association with the jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24B).

  In the case of the jackpot A1, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  The jackpot A2 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “10 to 19” (see 202b2 in FIG. 24B).

  In the case of the jackpot A2, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  The jackpot B1 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “20 to 39” (see 202b3 in FIG. 24B).

  In the case of the jackpot B1, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  The jackpot B2 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “40 to 49” (see 202b4 in FIG. 24B).

  In the case of the jackpot B2, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  The jackpot C1 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 79” (see 202b5 in FIG. 24B).

  In the case of the jackpot C1, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  The jackpot C2 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 99” (see 202b6 in FIG. 24B).

  When the jackpot C2 is reached, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  As described above, in the case of a jackpot in a lottery of the special symbol 1 (a lottery based on a ball entering the first winning opening 64), in any case, a four-round jackpot game is selected. For this reason, it is not possible to expect a large amount of prize balls as compared with a case where a lottery is won in a lottery of a special symbol 2 described later. On the other hand, the four-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the fifteen-round jackpot game, so that the launch of a ball aiming at the subsequent jackpot acquisition can be started earlier.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 is a lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second winning opening 140), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 99”, and the big hit is obtained. a is defined in association with each other (see 202b7 in FIG. 24B).

  When the jackpot a is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  As described above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning opening 140), in any case, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is selected. Therefore, the player who wins the special symbol 2 lottery can obtain a larger amount of payout prize balls compared to the case where the special symbol 1 lottery is won. Motivation for performing a game for performing the second lottery (a game in which a ball is fired so as to enter the second winning port 140) can be increased.

  In addition, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed at the operation pattern X, there is little possibility that the disadvantage to the player will increase even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not secured. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern as an operation pattern which has a disadvantage that the visibility to the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated, but has an advantage that a ball can easily enter the specific winning opening 65a, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed. By setting the operation pattern of the jackpot variable prize device 65 in the third operation pattern, it is possible to reduce the influence of disadvantages and highlight only the advantage that the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened. .

  That is, the possibility that the jackpot game in the lottery of the special symbol 2 is prolonged can be reduced, so that a jackpot game that is comfortable for the player (the time efficiency of payout of prize balls is good) can be realized.

  In addition, the setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, as the jackpot type of the special symbol 2, a jackpot type in which the slide displacement member 370 is displacement-controlled by the operation pattern Y may be provided. The jackpot type may be provided in a small ratio (for example, about 20%).

  Accordingly, the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370 can be improved, so that it is possible to prevent the player from playing the jackpot game casually. That is, the player can visually recognize the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370, disappoint the player at the timing of the displacement operation, and enhance the interest of the player.

  As described above, during the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a in the case of the hit of the normal symbol is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily performed. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the certainty change state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot is obtained, the special symbol is easily changed to the jackpot a (a jackpot with a good profit balance). This makes it easier for the player to obtain a large amount of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 24 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24C). In addition, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as the determination value to be the hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 24C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, referring to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning opening 67 and the second random number table 202c, and win the normal symbol hit. Is determined. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is specified for each display mode.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the time change of the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 in the first round and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 in each jackpot type.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described. In the description of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 is appropriately referred to.

  In this control example, the driving mode differs only in the first round due to the difference in the jackpot type, and the driving mode is the same in the second and subsequent rounds. Therefore, the driving mode of the first round for each jackpot type will be described.

  In the case of the jackpot A1 or the jackpot A2, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to hold the open / close plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. , And after the elapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state where a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so that the opening operation for 0.2 seconds is performed at 1.0 second intervals, and the opening / closing plate 65b operates for a long time.

  In addition, the initial opening time is longer than a period in which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously fired, and a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls is used. The period is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, a round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of winning a pachinko ball) ) Is satisfied, the open / close plate 65b is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so as to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is completed.

  The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set in order to limit the number of balls entering one side of the specific winning opening 65a to one while the opening / closing plate 65b is opened. This is a setting of an opening time for preventing a plurality of balls from continuously entering the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a (hereinafter, also referred to as “balls with open balls”). It is not intended to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even if the opening time is 0.2 seconds, the ball reaches one ball at each of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a, and the ball may enter the specific winning opening 65a at once.

  In the case of the jackpot A1, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the open / close plate 65b. In the present embodiment, at the same time as the open / close plate 65b is displaced to the open state, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position. Drive control is performed so as to be displaced to the rear side position.

  Therefore, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 19), passes through the front side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the certainty detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 20). .

  At this time, since the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on one side is limited to one, the visibility of other balls is not reduced. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  In the case of the jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the open / close plate 65b. In the present embodiment, at the same time as the open / close plate 65b is displaced to the open state, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position. The drive control is performed so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position after 0.8 seconds have elapsed.

  As described above, the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17) is set to about 0.9 seconds. The slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position.

  Therefore, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), passes over the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17). .

  At this time, since the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on one side is limited to one, the visibility of other balls is not reduced. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes the normal detection sensor SE12.

  The concept that 0.8 seconds as the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is shorter than the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336, It is set from the idea of a time longer than the time required to reach 336.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path component 335 and reaches the third flow path component 336 approximately 0.6 seconds after the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening / closing plate 65b, the sliding displacement member is not moved until the ball reaches the third flow path forming portion 336. 370 can be displaced.

  Therefore, as long as the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball arranged in the third flow path forming portion 336 regardless of the ball entry timing ( See FIG. 22). Thereby, the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented from being conspicuous, and the attention force on the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 as the ball entering the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Can be improved.

  The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, since the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be generated before the ball reaches the third flow path forming portion 336, the possibility of the line of sight being blocked by the ball is low, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is reduced. Can be visually recognized by the player.

  However, even in this case, since the second flow path forming portion 335 is arranged close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and is arranged on the front side of the slide displacement member 370, the player's eyes Are easily collected on the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. That is, by displacing the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 (for example, by displaying “attention to the flowing sphere!” On the third symbol display device 81), the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is changed. Can be easily prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is configured to be divided at the center on the left and right, if the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is on one side of the left or right, the ball is generated. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized by observing the rear side of the third flow path component 336 on the other side (see FIG. 22) without being blocked by the flowing ball.

  As described above, in the case of the jackpots A1 and A2, the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is limited to one, so that attention to the spheres is improved. In addition to the above, it is possible for the player to easily recognize whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In the case of the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to hold the open / close plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. , And after the elapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state where a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so that the opening operation for 1.0 second is performed at 1.0 second intervals, and the opening / closing plate 65b is operated for a long time.

  In addition, the initial opening time is longer than a period in which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously fired, and a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls is used. The period is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, a round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of winning a pachinko ball) ) Is satisfied, the open / close plate 65b is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so as to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is completed.

  The opening time of 1.0 second in the second operation pattern is set as a time during which a plurality of balls can enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a while the opening and closing plate 65b is open. This is a setting of an open time for allowing a plurality of balls to enter the ball continuously on one side of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a (hereinafter, also referred to as “ball entry with a ball”).

  In the present control example, the interval between the launches of the spheres is set to 0.6 seconds. Therefore, even if the interval between the spheres of the sphere does not change from that at the time of launch, the opening / closing plate 65b is opened once in 1.0 second. In the meantime, two balls can enter the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, the next ball is connected to each of the flow path components 334 before two balls pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336. Entering 球 336 can be regulated.

  In the case of the jackpot B1, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. In the case of the big hit B2, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the big hit B1, the sphere that has passed through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 passes through the positive change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the big hit B2, the sphere that has passed through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is the normal detection sensor SE12. Pass through.

  At this time, the appearance of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is different between the case where one sphere is disposed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides and the case where there are two (or more) spheres. When one ball is arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, similarly to the case of the big hits A1 and A2, the visibility of the other balls is not reduced. The person can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  On the other hand, when two (or more) balls are arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the upstream ball is arranged on the line of sight of the player who views the downstream ball. Thus, the visibility of the ball on the downstream side may be reduced. Therefore, the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can improve the attention power of the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

  In the case of the jackpot C1, the jackpot C2, or the jackpot a, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to hold the open / close plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. , And after the elapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state where a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The open / close plate 65b is operated for a long period of time up to the operation time T1.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, a round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of winning a pachinko ball) ) Is satisfied, the open / close plate 65b is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so as to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In the present control example, the open / close plate 65b maintains the open state during the first round of the round game R, so that a situation may occur in which a plurality of balls enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a with a ball. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening / closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, before the two spheres pass through the respective flow path components 334 to 336, the next spheres The ball may enter the flow path components 334 to 336. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, the visibility of the sphere arranged on the downstream side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is higher in the third operation pattern than in the sphere arranged on the upstream side. It is easy for the situation to drop.

  In the case of the jackpot C1 or the jackpot a, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. In the case of the big hit C2, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot C1 or the jackpot a, the sphere that has passed through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 passes through the positive change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the jackpot C2, the sphere that has passed through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 It passes through the detection sensor SE12.

  As described above, the control mode is such that the open / close plate 65b is maintained in the open state regardless of whether the ball is passed through the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Since the time required for the arrival is controlled from the structure, the possibility of the malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 due to the biting of the ball can be eliminated.

  At this time, the appearance of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is different depending on whether one sphere is disposed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides. When one ball is arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, similarly to the case of the big hits A1 and A2, the visibility of the other balls is not reduced. The person can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  On the other hand, when two balls are arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the upstream ball is arranged on the line of sight of the player watching the downstream ball, so that the downstream ball is arranged. The visibility of the ball on the side may decrease. Therefore, the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can improve the attention power of the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

  In the third operation pattern, there is no restriction on the timing at which the specific winning port 65a can be pitched in the first round of the round game R. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 The arrangement of the spheres tends to be disorderly. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is likely to decrease.

  On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a has an effect that the progress of the round game R can be performed early. That is, the specified number of balls as the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls). It is easy to satisfy the winning at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being delayed.

  In particular, since the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled in the operating pattern X with a probability of 100% at the special symbol 2 jackpot, if the ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a, the ball will pass through the positive change detection sensor SE11. Has been promised. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is initially low.

  Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, while the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, priority is given to avoiding the prolongation of the jackpot game, thereby realizing the progress of the jackpot game in a short time. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

  Regardless of the jackpot type, when the first round of the round game R is completed, the timer means controls the electromagnetic solenoid to hold the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. 165c is driven and controlled, and after a lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, a round game R of the second round is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to the open state to thereby specify the special winning opening. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to open the opening 65a, and the opening / closing plate 65b operates for a long time. After the second round, since the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front position, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is discharged through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17).

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to close the specific winning opening 65a by displacing the opening / closing plate 65b to the closed state, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, as in the second round, the round game R of the third round to the final round (the fourth round) is repeated with the first inter-round interval Int1 interposed between the round game Rs, and the open / close plate 65b Is displaced between the closed state and the open state, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the timer means drives the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so as to hold the open / close plate 65b in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the elapse of the time.

  In the present control example, the case where the short opening movement of the opening / closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are executed only in the first round is not limited to this. For example, it may be executed in all rounds, or may be executed in rounds other than the first round (for example, the third round, the eighth round, the twelfth round, etc.).

  As described above, according to this control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening / closing plate 65b is changed by the difference in the opening pattern (first operation pattern to third operation pattern) of the opening / closing plate 65b, and each flow is changed. The visibility of the detection sensors SE1 disposed downstream of the road components 334 to 336 and the third flow channel components 336 can be made different. Thereby, the player who pays attention to the passage of the ball of the detection sensor SE1 arranged downstream of the third flow path component 336 can be motivated to devise the manner of firing the ball.

  For example, since the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may be reduced when a plurality of spheres are simultaneously arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336, if necessary (for example, the second operation pattern or By intentionally increasing the firing interval of the sphere (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In the first operation pattern, since the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is restricted, a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 can be avoided regardless of the firing mode.

  On the other hand, if the firing interval of the balls is increased, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a is extended, so that the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can select a game mode of the round game R in a game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and in a game mode in which avoidance of the round game R is avoided.

  For example, in order to visually recognize the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, a certain period of time (for example, 1.0 second) is left after the start of the round game R so that a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Is also good. In this case, a situation in which a ball is arranged in the third flow path forming unit 336 at the timing when the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 occurs (in the case of the operation pattern Y, 0.8 seconds after the start of the round game R) is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 from being interrupted by the ball.

  On the other hand, if a period until the launch of the ball is provided, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a is extended, so that the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can select a game mode of the round game R in a game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and in a game mode in which avoidance of the round game R is avoided.

  For example, according to the present embodiment, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are configured to be symmetrical left and right, and a ball can be made to enter from the right or left side through the specific winning opening 65a.

  That is, for example, the above-described launch mode for extending the launch interval of the ball and the launch mode for leaving a period until the launch of the ball are maintained in the left-side ball entry, and the ball on the right side in the arbitrary launch mode is maintained. Even if the game is fired, the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Specifically, as a launch mode in which the launch of the ball toward the specific winning opening 65a is divided into right and left, at least the first ball is fired to the right, and the number of balls (for example, the second) To the left and the remaining balls to the right.

  In this case, by not paying attention to the sphere flowing down the right flow path as each of the flow path components 334 to 336, paying attention to the sphere flowing down the left flow path, it is possible to prevent the line of sight from being blocked by other spheres. Meanwhile, it can be visually recognized whether or not the sphere flowing down the left flow path passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the ball is continuously fired toward the right portion of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid extending the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to prevent the round game R from being delayed.

  It should be noted that the distinction of the launching of the ball to the left and right is not intended to make one ball entering the left channel. In particular, it is sufficient that the number of spheres arranged in each of the left flow path components 334 to 336 can be limited to one in about 0.9 seconds until the number of spheres passes through the left flow path. In the above, it is only necessary to hit the ball so as to arbitrarily enter the left and right flow paths.

  Accordingly, when the opening width above the specific winning opening 65a is not long as in the present embodiment (for example, the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a or the arrangement of the nails (see FIG. 2), the entry path of the ball is a small number of paths. ), It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls heading toward the specific winning opening 65a collide with each other and one of the balls falls to the left and right outside of the specific winning opening 65a. In FIG. 2, the nail arrangement is asymmetrical in the left and right directions, but may be a symmetrical nail arrangement.

  Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is a unit fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

  FIG. 26 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit 500. In FIG. 27, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) provided in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is not shown, and the rear side is visible through the opening 511a. In the description of FIGS. 26 and 27, FIG. 2 is appropriately referred to.

  The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape having a front side opened from a bottom wall 511 and an outer wall 512 erected from an outer edge of the bottom wall 511. The rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in a front view).

  The rear case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion 512, and faces the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 2). A supporting plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

  The support plate portion 513 has a positioning protrusion 513a projecting toward the front side in a shape fittable with a fitting concave portion (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a base plate 60. And a plurality of insertion holes 513b formed so as to be able to insert a fastening screw to be fastened.

  The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning projections 513a into the fitting recesses of the base plate 60, and fastening screws are inserted into the insertion holes 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

  The shape of the positioning projection 513a is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in the present embodiment) of the fitting concave portion of the base plate 60 may be used, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having a smaller shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. When the inner shape of the fitting concave portion is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is correspondingly formed in a rectangular shape.

  The operation unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 disposed on the right inside of the rear case 510, a second operation unit 700 disposed on the lower inside of the rear case 510, And a third operation unit 800 disposed on the upper inside of the rear case 510. In addition, a substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED and a substrate having a light emitting means, such as an LED, are disposed on the inner left side of the rear case 510 so as to cover the substrate from the front side, and are formed of a light transmissive material, and light diffusion processing is performed entirely. The diffusion decoration plate LB1 to be formed is provided.

  Specifically, the first operation unit 600 is located at a position to the right of the opening 511a, the second operation unit 700 is located at a position below the opening 511a, and the third operation unit 800 is located at a position above the opening 511a. It is arranged on the bottom wall 511 of the case 510. First, an outline of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

  28 to 35 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operation unit 500. FIG. 28 illustrates the operation units 600 to 800 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 29 illustrates a state in which the first operation unit 600 changes from the effect standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the extended state. FIG. 30 illustrates a state in which the second operation unit 700 has changed from the effect standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the extended state.

  In FIG. 30, the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in a state where the surface facing the front side of the covering member 787 is different from the second operation unit 700 illustrated in FIG.

  28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated by imaginary lines. On the inside, the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side can be viewed well, but outside the center frame 86, it can be said that the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin member. In addition, the field of view is easily blocked by nails provided on the base plate 60, various winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., through gates 67, etc. (see FIG. 2). Thus, for example, in a state where the operation units 600 to 800 are arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in FIG.

  In addition, although the frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in FIG. 2 in relation to the configuration of the operation unit 500, its role is the same. In addition, although the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 has a curved shape that protrudes downward on the front side of the third operation unit 800, the center frame 86 does not curve downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86, On the inner frame side of 86, a circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed so as to protrude so as to cover the third operation unit 800 from the front side. Therefore, the role of rolling the ball on the upper side of the center frame 86 to the left and right sides is also the same as that shown in FIG. 2, and the upper part of the center frame 86 (the upper part of the outer frame) is the third operation. The unit 800 is disposed so as to straddle the upper side of the unit 800 from side to side.

  FIGS. 31 and 32 illustrate a state in which the third operation unit 800 has changed from the effect standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the overhang state. In FIG. 31, the first decoration member 870 faces the front side, and the individual operation state of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated. In FIG. 32, the second decoration member 880 faces the front side, and a series of the third operation unit 800 is arranged. The united state is illustrated.

  Since the displacement in which the state of FIG. 31 and the state of FIG. 32 are switched occurs in a displacement mode in which the linear motion displacement and the rotational displacement are combined, when executed in the effect standby state of the third operation unit 800, the surrounding decoration members and Since the decorative members 870 and 880 collide with each other and cause a problem, the third operation unit 800 is executed in the extended state.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state (or in a state in which the third operation unit 800 is displaced downward from the effect standby state by a degree sufficient to avoid collision of the decorative members 870 and 880), and the decorative member Assuming that the displacement of 870 and 880 is allowed in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) performs the reverse displacement (switching rotation operation). It is controlled, but details will be described later.

  FIG. 33 shows the third operation unit 800 in the overhang state and the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state slightly displaced from the overhang state, and FIG. 34 shows the first operation unit from the state of FIG. FIG. 35 illustrates a state in which the third operating unit 800 is displaced from the state of FIG. 33 to the effect standby state, and a state in which the first operating unit 600 is displaced to the extended state. Illustrated.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third operation unit 800 partially overlaps the displacement trajectory of the first operation unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second operation unit 700 in a front view. Therefore, for example, if the first operation unit 600 or the second operation unit 700 changes state from the effect standby state while the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), a collision may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the effect standby state is controlled to be executable on condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, or the third operation By controlling the state change of the unit 800 from the effect standby state to be executable on condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state, the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 It is possible to avoid overlapping in a front view. Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 can be improved (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state change of the second operation unit 700 to the overhang state is controlled to be executable on condition that the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the effect standby state, By changing the arrangement of the second operation unit 700 when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state to the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33), the second operation unit 700 is in front of the other operation units 600 and 800. It is possible to avoid overlapping visually. Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the operation units 600 to 800 can be improved (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

  In particular, as the visual recognition state of the second operation unit 700, there are a plurality of cases in which the second operation unit 700 is visually recognized in a protruding state closer to the opening 511a, and a case in which the second operation unit 700 is slightly retreated from the opening 511a but is closely disposed to the third operation unit 800. By configuring the state, the function of the second operation unit 700 as an effect device is improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first operation unit 600 is displaced on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. The second decorative rotation member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a box-shaped member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The box-shaped member 661 has a first effect surface 661a facing obliquely leftward in the effect standby state, and a first effect thereof. A second effect surface 661b formed on the back side of the surface 661a, and a third effect surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first effect surface 661a and the second effect surface 661b are provided. Each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c is arbitrarily decorated with figures, patterns, characters, and the like.

  In the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, where visibility from the front side is likely to decrease due to the arrangement of the center frame 86. However, since the first presentation surface 661a is inclined obliquely toward the player (the front surface is inclined 45 degrees toward the arrow L with respect to the arrow FB), the third effect surface 661a is oriented in the third direction. From the inside of the frame of the opening of the symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86, the first decorative rotation member 660 is visually recognized in a diagonal direction passing through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 in the player's eyes. The visibility of the presentation surface 661a can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 extends to the front of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player who visually recognizes the inside of the frame of the center frame 86 can be displayed. Face to face. In this case, since the second decorative rotation member 660 is in a posture in which the second production rotation surface 661b faces directly in front, the visibility of the second production surface 661b in the eyes of the player who visually recognizes the second decoration rotation member 660. Can be improved.

  As described above, the second decoration rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch the effect surfaces 661a to 661c to be visually recognized by the player according to the arrangement, and to increase the visibility of each effect surface 661a to 661c to be visually recognized by the player. For the purpose of improvement, the posture can be switched according to the arrangement.

  In other words, it is designed not only to change the attitude in a plane parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), but also to change the angle intended to be related to the player's line of sight. That is, since the player's line of sight is more frontward and rearward as the arrangement is closer to the center of the frame of the center frame 86, it is possible to improve the visibility by directing the production surface in the forward direction (the direction of arrow F). Therefore, the player's line of sight tends to be inclined as the arrangement becomes closer to the frame of the center frame 86, so that the visibility can be improved by making the presentation surface inclined to face the line of sight.

  With the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660, the overhang decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction with it. The overhanging decorative portion 652b has a decoration such as a figure or a pattern on the front of the board, and in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 34) of the first operation unit 600, the rear case 510 is not provided. By being arranged in the upper right corner, it is hidden so as not to be visually recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, when the first operation unit 600 is in the overhang state (see FIG. 28), the overhang decorative portion 652 b of the center frame 86 is overlapped with the right edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in front and back. It is configured such that a player can visually recognize it by being arranged inside the frame.

  In this state, the outer right end of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, using the decoration on the front of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that gives an illusion to the player as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is enlarged.

  More specifically, the right edge of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized is defined by the first operation unit 600, and the second decorative rotating member is in the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600. The left edge of the first presentation surface 661a at 660 substantially coincides with the region right end RE1 of the region where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, in the overhang state of the first operation unit 600, the overhang decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to extend beyond the region right end RE1 to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the decoration of the front of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 becomes the right end RE1 of the region. Can be visually recognized as if the player is expanding beyond. Thereby, a surprising effect can be realized.

  As an example of matching the above display and decoration, for example, a polka dot pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a decoration on the plate front of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is set to the same polka dot pattern, A typeface similar to the typeface of a number (for example, a number for notifying the success or failure of a lottery) variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a certain number is written on the front side of the board of the overhang decorative portion 652b. An example in which this is done is illustrated.

  As an example of associating the above-described display with the decoration, for example, six of the seven colors forming the rainbow are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the front of the overhanging decorative portion 652b remains. Or a wooden stick arranged so that the right end is aligned with the right end RE1 of the region on the third symbol display device 81, and a flame is imitated on the plate front of the overhanging decorative portion 652b. An example in which the decoration is performed and the ignition is associated with the extended state of the first operation unit 600 is illustrated.

  The effect of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type. By controlling the brightness of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, a plurality of types of effecting modes can be configured. The light emitting means for changing the brightness of the portion 652b will be described later.

  Further, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in a plurality of types. It is possible to prevent the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 from being restricted when the display area is enlarged.

  In addition, the target associated with the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to the display, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on the member (for example, the covering member 787) of the second operation unit 700. The decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the decoration (the decoration of the first covering portion 875 and the second covering) formed on the members (for example, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880) of the third operation unit 800. (Decoration of the setting part 885).

  FIG. 36 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600. The first operation unit 600 is configured in a complicated displacement mode in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is changed to the second decorative rotating member 660. , The player can visually recognize different appearances before and after the displacement.

  FIG. 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operation unit 600 includes a fixed unit 610 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed unit 610, A drive transmitting device 630 for transmitting a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620, a supported member 640 having one end rotatably supported at a rotating distal end of the rotating member 620; A first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably disposed at the other end of the supported member 640, a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650, A decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610.

  The fixed means 610 includes a base member 611 which is disposed facing the bottom wall 511 of the back case 510 in a front-rear direction, and a base member 611 which is disposed on the front side of the base member 611 and forms a space between the base member 611 and the base member 611. And a front lid member 612 fastened and fixed to the front cover member.

  The front lid member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for disposing the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, and a fixing portion 614. A support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the portion 614 and a guide elongated hole 616 formed as an elongated hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640. Prepare.

  The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape in which a straight portion and a curved portion are mixed, and details and operation thereof will be described later.

  The rotating member 620 is disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 formed in a long plate shape, and is externally supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610. A cylindrical portion 622, a transmission elongated hole 623 formed in a middle portion of the main body 621 as an elongated hole extending in a linear direction, and an axial direction of the cylindrical portion 622 at the other end (upper end) of the main body 621. A circular through hole 624 formed as a circular hole in a drilling direction parallel to the above, and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through hole 624. Prepare.

  A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm portion is in contact with the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm portion is in contact with the projection of the front lid member 612, and the direction in which the rotating member 620 is raised (front side). A biasing force is generated in the clockwise direction).

  In the shaft support of the cylindrical portion 622, a fastening screw is screwed into a female screw portion formed at the distal end of the support fastening portion 615 in a state where the support fastening portion 615 is inserted through the cylindrical portion 622. You. Thus, the rotating member 620 is supported by the support fastening portion 615 so as not to fall off.

  The transmission long hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed. However, details will be described later.

  The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding to the rear side through the through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, A transmission gear 633 pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613b of the front cover member 612 in a state meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613c of the front cover member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633. 634.

  In a state where the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c are inserted through the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, a fastening screw is screwed into a female screw portion formed at a distal end portion of the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c. As a result, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

  The front lid member 612 is formed with an arc-shaped hole 613d penetratingly formed along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c, and the arc-shaped hole 613d is located on the front side at the eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634. A cylindrical portion 634a protruding in a cylindrical shape is inserted through.

  The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member including a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633. The transmission gear cam 634 extends from the angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a in a plate shape in an outer radial direction from an angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a. Setting part 634b.

  The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d, and is inserted into the transmission elongated hole 623 of the rotating member 620 on the front side. Here, the widths of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. Thereby, the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides in the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced.

  The extension 634b is configured to be able to enter a detection groove of a photocoupler type detection sensor KS1 fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612. Thus, by reading a change in the output of the detection sensor KS1, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can comprehend the attitude of the transmission gear cam 634.

  The supported member 640 includes a long main body 641, a cylindrical portion 642 protruding from the rear side of the main body 641 and having a cylindrical cross-section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620. A tubular portion 643 protruding in parallel with the tubular portion 642, and an intermediate gear 644 formed to be meshable with the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 while being supported by the tubular portion 643. A bottomed tubular portion 645 formed in a large-diameter tubular shape having a perforated bottom portion behind the intermediate gear 644, and an end opposite to the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is disposed. And an extension support portion 646 extending to the front side in the portion.

  With the above-described configuration, a driving force can be transmitted between the gear teeth 625 and the intermediate gear 644 by meshing with the rotation displacement of the rotation member 620.

  In a state where the tubular portions 642 and 643 are inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, a fastening screw is screwed into a female screw portion formed at a distal end portion of the tubular portions 642 and 643. Thus, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are supported by the main body 641 of the supported member 640 so as not to fall off.

  The bottomed cylindrical portion 645 has a bottom rear surface located close to the front edge of the front lid member 612, and the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 654 a of the first decorative rotating member 650 can mesh with each other on the front front surface of the bottom portion. And an insertion hole 645b that is formed in a circular shape centered on the center of the cylinder and that can be inserted through the cylindrical support portion 651a. The details of the shape will be described later.

  The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotation member 660, and details thereof will be described later.

  The first decorative rotation member 650 includes a main body member 651 forming a rotation axis orthogonal to the first rotation member 650, a front rotation member 652 supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, and a front rotation member 652. An illumination board 653 fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b and provided with light emitting means such as an LED on the front side; a rear rotation member 654 coaxially fixed to the front rotation member 652 and fixed to the rear side; A wiring receiving member 655 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 651 from the front side to form a cylindrical space as a wiring passage, and a fastening screw that is disposed on the front side of the wiring receiving member 655 and inserted through the main body member 651 from the rear side. It includes a front decorative portion 656 that is fastened and fixed by being screwed in, and a shaft right-angle rotating member 657 that is externally fitted to and supported by a cylindrical portion formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

  The main body member 651 is provided with a cylindrical support portion 651a extending in a tubular shape on the back side. The cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female screw portions 651b formed at a position of the diameter of the distal end portion. On one side of a plane passing through the portion 651b, there is provided a cutout portion 651c cut out so as to reduce the wall portion.

  The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed to have a thickness through which electric wiring can be inserted, and the cutout portion 651c has a function as an opening for securing an entrance of the electric wiring.

  The cylindrical support portion 651a includes a center hole of the front rotation member 652, a center hole of the rear rotation member 654, an insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, a stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and a front lid in this order from the base end side. The fastening screw inserted through the long guide hole 616 of the member 612 and the female screw portion 651b at the distal end thereof is screwed into the female screw portion C2 to be fastened and fixed.

  That is, the above-described cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotation member 652, the rear rotation member 654, the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the collar C1, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 are coaxially supported by the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction, and are guided. It is configured to be displaceable along the long hole 616.

  The dish-shaped lid portion C2 has an opening C2a formed in a part of a circumferential portion thereof. In the assembled state, the opening C2a is arranged to face the notch portion 651c of the main body member 651, thereby providing a path for electric wiring. To form

  A part of the electric wiring passes through the inside of the rotation member 657 at right angles to the shaft and is guided into the inside of the second decoration rotation member 660, and the terminal is connected to a connector provided on the electric decoration board 662. Further, other wiring is formed on a gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (on the upper side, that is, on the side opposite to the main body member 651 on the upper and lower sides of the semi-cylindrical portion 655a). The terminal passes through the gap) and is guided behind the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and the terminal is connected to the connector of the illuminated board 653.

  The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference at the rear side end, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed so as to mesh with each other. The gear teeth 654a are formed along a part of the circumference, not the entire circumference, as an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

  The front rotating member 652 includes gear teeth 652a formed as bevel gears, and a projecting decorative portion 652b that protrudes radially outward. An illuminated board 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the overhanging decorative section 652b, and an effect of lighting or blinking the overhanging decorative section 652b with light from a light emitting unit arranged on the illuminated board 653 is executed. It is possible.

  Since the front rotation member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear rotation member 654, the rear rotation member 654 and the front rotation member 652 rotate integrally.

  The shaft perpendicular rotation member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular cylindrical portion formed by the half cylindrical shape portion 651d of the main body member 651 and the half cylindrical shape portion 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and the gear of the front rotary member 652. It has gear teeth 657a formed as bevel gears that can mesh with the teeth 652a.

  With such a configuration, the shaft perpendicular rotation member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotation member 652. That is, the front rotation member 652, the rear rotation member 654, and the shaft right-angle rotation member 657 are linked, but the operation will be described later in detail. The gear teeth 652a and 657a are formed along a part of the circumference, not the entire circumference, as an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

  The second decorative rotation member 660 includes a box-shaped member 661 fastened and fixed to the axis perpendicular rotation member 657, an electric decoration board 662 fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a box-shaped member 661. And a wiring fastening plate 663 which is disposed between the rotating member 657 and the right-angle rotation member 657 and is fastened and fixed to the distal ends of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

  In the present embodiment, the decoration board 662 is also rotationally displaced with the rotation of the box-shaped member 661 described later. Therefore, when being guided by the connector of the decoration board 662, the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are Where there is a possibility that the electric wiring passing between them may be twisted or the arrangement may be disordered, the function of the wiring retaining plate 663 having a through hole for temporarily retaining the wiring may cause twisting or disorder of the wiring. To avoid being placed in

  In the present embodiment, since the electric wiring is fixed to the electric decoration board 662, it is inevitable that the electric wiring is twisted. On the other hand, since the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not caused by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that is reversed at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, an excessive load is imposed on the electric wiring, The situation in which the wiring is cut off can be avoided.

  The second decorative rotation member 660 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is configured to be rotatable around a rotation axis (a rotation axis formed by the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side surface having the longest side. You.

  The shaft perpendicular rotation member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so that the wiring retaining plate 663 functions as a stopper and does not fall off. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the shaft right-angle rotating member 657, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second decorative rotating member 660 comes off the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

  The illuminated substrate 662 is disposed so that the thickness direction of the plate and the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661 match. On the side surface in the thickness direction of the illuminated substrate 662, the first effect surface 661a is illuminated by a light emitting unit such as an LED arranged on the front side and having an optical axis oriented in the thickness direction, and arranged on the back side and oriented in the thickness direction. The second effect surface 661b is illuminated by light emitting means such as an LED, and the third effect surface 661c is illuminated by light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the back side (the side illuminating the second effect surface 661b) and having an optical axis directed in the width direction. It is.

  As described above, the light emitting means arranged on the illumination board 662 functions to individually illuminate each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c, but the LED illuminating the third effect surface 661c is on the back side (the second effect surface 661b is not illuminated). By arranging the second production surface 661b on the front side (extending state of the first operation unit 600), the third production surface 661c (surface facing upward) is illuminated by being disposed on the front side. When the LED emits light, the second effect surface 661b can be illuminated by light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

  That is, unlike the case where the LEDs are arranged behind the illuminated substrate 662, it is possible to prevent the light from being hidden by the illuminated substrate 662, so that the second illuminating surface 661b is illuminated by the light illuminating the third illuminating surface 661c. Can also be illuminated. This makes it possible to increase the number of types of presentation modes that illuminate the second presentation surface 661b, and to improve the brightness of the second presentation surface 661b during a light emission presentation.

  The decoration fixing member 670 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material so that characters and figures for decoration can be visually recognized by a player, and includes an illumination substrate 671 that irradiates light diagonally left forward from the back side. . The arrangement of the decoration fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the line of sight of the player with respect to the decoration fixing member 670 is always a line of sight inclined obliquely to the right. That is, by inclining the direction of the light emitted from the electric decoration board 671 to the left, it is possible to irradiate the light on the side where the eyes of the player are easily arranged.

  The decoration fixing member 670 has a lower edge portion and a right edge portion which are raised on the rear side, and a front-rear gap is formed between the upper edge portion and the left edge portion and the front lid member 612. The front and rear gap functions as a gap that passes when the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced.

  40 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the effect standby state, FIG. 41 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 42 is a view in the direction of the arrow XLII in FIG. FIG. 10 is a side view of the first operation unit 600. Note that, for easy understanding of the shape, illustration of the base member 611 (see FIG. 38) and the fastening screws is omitted.

  In the effect standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (for example, parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission elongated hole 623. Thereby, the displacement resistance at the time of starting displacement while the cylindrical portion 634a slides on the transmission slot 623 can be reduced. That is, at the start of the displacement, the assistance of the inertia cannot be obtained as compared with the middle of the displacement, and the driving force required to be generated by the driving motor 631 tends to increase. Therefore, the displacement resistance is reduced as in the present embodiment. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 at the start of displacement.

  The same applies to the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the extended state (see FIG. 45). That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a disposed in the transmission slot 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (the position in the effect standby state and the position in the extended state) is the same as that of the transmission slot 623. The displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (that is, the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed to be along the longitudinal direction (for example, parallel). Thus, the load on the drive motor 631 at the time of starting the displacement of the rotating member 620 from both end positions can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In the present embodiment, since the radius R1 of the gear teeth 625 and the radius R2 of the gear teeth 654a are designed to have the same length, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 625 with respect to the intermediate gear 644 and the rear angle with respect to the intermediate gear 644 are determined. The rotation angle of the side rotation member 654 is the same angle.

  Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotation member 654 can be configured to be variable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 and the gear teeth 657a of the shaft right angle rotating member 657 mesh with each other, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is orthogonal to the rotation axis. The power is transmitted to the second decoration rotating member 660.

  The rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear tooth 652a of the front rotation member 652. That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625 (see FIG. 41).

  In this embodiment, since the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are the same (the gear ratio is 1), the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is The rotation angle between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625 is the same.

  Next, the displacement of the first operation unit 600 from the effect standby state will be described in chronological order. FIG. 43 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state. FIG. 45 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the extended state, and FIG. 46 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the extended state. In addition, illustration of the base member 611 and the fastening screw is omitted for easy understanding of the shape.

  The rotation angle of the rotation member 620 is set to 19 degrees between the effect standby state and the intermediate effect state, and the rotation angle of the rotation member 620 is 26 degrees between the intermediate effect state and the overhang state. Is set to

  In the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the narrow third effect surface 661c faces the front side. In the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the second effect surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

  As shown in FIG. 44, the guide elongated hole 616 is formed with a linear portion 616a formed on a straight line extending in the vertical direction from the upper end portion, and connected to the lower end portion of the linear portion 616a to form a curved line (substantially arc shape). And a curved portion 616b formed at the bottom.

  In the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600, the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connection portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, in the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

  Accordingly, the displacement of the axis O1 between the effect standby state and the intermediate effect state is a linear displacement along the linear portion 616a, and the displacement of the axis O1 between the intermediate effect state and the overhanging condition is a curved portion. It is configured to have a curved displacement along 616b.

  The first operation unit 600 is configured to be capable of changing the state as described above, and the rotation member 620 is disposed on the base end side of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving the driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 follow the displacement of the rotating member 620. .

  Therefore, without measures, there is a possibility that the displacement resistance generated between the guide slot 616 and the guide slot 616 due to the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide slot 616 becomes large. The configuration is made so that the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616 is along the displacement direction, so that the suppression is achieved.

  For example, the displacement of the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state (FIG. 41) is a displacement that tilts downward, and the guide slot 616 is also formed to extend downward. In addition, for example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the extended state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement that rises obliquely upward to the right, and the guide slot 616 is also formed to extend obliquely upward to the right. Have been.

  In this way, by making the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 and the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616 follow, the displacement resistance of the portion displacing the inside of the guide slot 616 (and the axis O1) is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. FIGS. 47A and 47B are schematic diagrams schematically showing the displacement amount and the displacement angle of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620. FIGS. It is a schematic diagram which shows the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven side of the supported member 640 when 620 rotates in the inclination direction in the aspect with a constant angular velocity. In addition, the positive and negative values of the numerical value are shown as a positive displacement amount and a negative value as an upward displacement amount. In FIG. 48B, the numerical value of FIG. 48A is shown as a bar graph.

  In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support position of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotation member 620 is illustrated at intervals of 10 degrees as the rotation angle of the rotation member 620, and the tension of the first operation unit 600 is shown. The rotating member 620 in the posture in the extended state is illustrated by a solid line.

  In FIG. 47, the angle θ is illustrated as an angle between a line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624, and a line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622. I have.

  The guide slot 616 functions as a slot for guiding the end of the supported member 640 where the axis O1 is disposed. The displacement in the guide elongated hole 616 is a displacement caused by the displacement of the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 with the rotation of the rotating member 620. In the following, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640, and the end of the supported member 640 where the axis O1 is provided is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

  An outline of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 includes the vertical displacement of the tip of rotation (the main driving side of the supported member 640) due to the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the posture displacement of the supported member 640. The resulting vertical displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640 is a result of the addition.

  In the effect standby state, in addition to the supported member 640 being in the vertical position, the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction (the arrangement of the rotating arm is 45 degrees left and right from the vertical). Range). In other words, the conditions for the displacement in the up-down direction are doubled.

  Both of these conditions are reversed in the extended state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are doubled. Therefore, the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement, and the speed is high at the end of the downward displacement.

  Next, details of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The displacement (tilt displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the extended state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

  Therefore, when the guide elongated hole 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may drop vigorously. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the first operation unit 600 be stopped in the intermediate effect state (the middle position of the tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the shape of the guide elongated hole 616, a mode in which a curved portion 616b is combined below the linear portion 616a is adopted. Accordingly, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced by its own weight and enters the curved portion 616b due to its own weight, the displacement resistance applied to the driven side of the supported member 640 can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from dropping vigorously beyond the arrangement in the intermediate effect state.

  The displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side in the linear portion 616a will be described. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the driven side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the production standby state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate production state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is on the left side of the linear portion 616a. (See FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced without changing its direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically reciprocated.

  Accordingly, the displacement of the supported member 640 in the vertical direction on the driven side can be kept small as compared with the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that the driven side of the supported member 640 has a linear portion. While being placed at 616a, the supported member 640 can be seen by the player in a displaced manner as if it were rotationally displaced about the driven side of the supported member 640.

  According to this displacement mode, since the sliding displacement in the left and right direction can be generated by using the advance by the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 around the driven side, the entire supported member 640 is moved from the start of the displacement. The load required for the displacement can be suppressed low as compared with the case where the slide displacement is performed in the left-right direction. Therefore, the load required at the start of the operation of the supported member 640 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required for the drive motor 631 can be reduced. Thus, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, while the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side is suppressed to a small value, the displacement of the main driving portion of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and the supported member 640 is maintained. The rotation direction on the driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the main driving portion is maintained in the counterclockwise direction in rear view (the direction is not switched). Accordingly, as described above, the direction of the change in the posture of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotation member 660 are maintained without being switched (without being inverted).

  Thereby, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are performing a reciprocating operation (return operation). The displacement mode can be a vigorous displacement mode.

  Further, even in a situation where the displacement of the driven portion of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the driven portion of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component, In addition, since the displacement is in the direction (downward) along the direction of gravity, the load required to start the displacement of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required for the drive motor 631 is reduced. can do. Thus, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

  The operation caused by the curved portion 616b will be described. The state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed at the connection between the linear part 616a and the curved part 616b is defined as the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600. As described above, the turning angle of the turning member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the range of the angle width of 20 to 45 degrees in FIG.

  First, as a premise, it is not necessary to adopt a curved portion for the guide slot 616. That is, the guide slot 616 may be composed of only a linear portion regardless of whether or not a bent portion is used to increase the displacement resistance in the intermediate effect state as described above.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting the curved portion 616b, the speed of the driven member 640 at the end of displacement is prevented from being excessively high. This will be described below.

  In both cases of being guided by the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, when the driven side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 is moved downward. Displacing downward is the same.

  The difference is that, when guided by the curved portion 616b, in the upper half portion of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 (rightward). A curved portion 616b is formed so as to be displaced and guided in the lower half of the curved portion 616b. In the lower half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 follows the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 (leftward). The curved portion 616b is formed so as to be guided to be displaced leftward.

  Thus, even before the amount of downward displacement of the supported member 640 on the driving side becomes large (tilting start side), the displacement of the driven member 640 on the driven side is swung right and left, so that the supported member 640 is swung left and right. It is possible to secure a large displacement speed of the driven side 640.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side from becoming excessive at the displacement end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically displaced along an arbitrary path from a specific initial position to an end position, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the result of integrating the speed in the vertical direction becomes equal. If the displacement is slow at the start of the displacement, the displacement speed increases at the end.

  When the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 47 for comparison, the displacement speed gradually increases from the tilt displacement start side of the rotating member 620. And becomes the maximum at the displacement end (displacement lower end) of the supported member 640. In other words, the vertical displacement of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period as compared with the vertical displacement UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide slot 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees to reach the displacement lower end. The quantity UE1 increases.

  Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis OE1, there is a possibility that the driven side of the supported member 640 may perform an operation of bouncing back, and when performing an effect of stopping the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement, the first operation unit 600 It adversely affects the performance.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting the curved portion 616 b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side increases becomes the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. The displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform.

  In this case, the term “uniform” is used not only to mean that the speed is brought to be the same over the entire range of the displacement, but also to mean that the magnitude of the speed is suppressed. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases on the side where the approach to the curved portion 616b starts, and enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b. After the start, the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side gradually decreases.

  That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, the displacement of the supported member 640 becomes monotonous by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. Can be avoided.

  Further, by lowering the speed required on the driven side of the supported member 640, that is, the displacement required per unit time at the lower end side of the curved portion 616b, the rotating member 620 is moved upward (lifted). When the operation is started, the amount of displacement for lifting the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time can be reduced in a unit time, so that the load on the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the rotation of the second decorative rotation member 660 associated with the rotation displacement of the rotation member 620 will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram illustrating a change in the angle θ [degree] with the rotation of the rotating member 620.

  The angle θ can be regarded as the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 about the circular through hole 624, and is directly connected to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. That is, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is defined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

  In this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the gear of the gear tooth 652a and the shaft right-angle rotating member 657. The rotation transmission ratio with the tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) is set to 1. Therefore, since the angle θ is the same as the rotation angle of the axis perpendicular rotation member 657, the change in the angle θ can be grasped as the change in the posture of the second decorative rotation member 660.

  The change of the angle θ is 45 degrees from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 44), and the intermediate effect of the first operation unit 600 is 45 degrees. The angle from the state to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 46) is 90 degrees.

  In the effect standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the first effect surface 661a is inclined leftward by 45 degrees (the third effect surface 661c is rightward by 45 degrees). Each time the state is switched in the order of the intermediate production state and the overhang state, the second decoration rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third production surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43), and then the second The production surface 661b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

  The setting of the angle θ is realized by designing the guide slot 616 for defining the attitude of the supported member 640. That is, in the present embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is designed to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the attitude of the second decorative rotation member 660 according to the angle θ.

  Thus, even when only the sensor for detecting the arrangement of the rotation member 620 is provided as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the second decorative rotation member 660 is controlled based on the output of the detection sensor KS1. The arrangement and posture can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

  That is, if the extension 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 41), and the drive motor 631 from that state is determined. The rotation angle of the rotation member 620 and the arrangement and posture of the second decoration rotation member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle of the second rotation member 620.

  Here, the change amount of the angle θ is not proportional to the rotation angle amount of the rotation member 620. Therefore, when determining the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotation member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not always necessary to obtain a numerical value by proportional calculation from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631. Further, even when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from being constant. Hereinafter, this will be described.

  The change in the angle θ is substantially the same as the change in the amount of change in the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side. That is, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the overhang state is generally larger than the angle change from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state (about 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees). Large (about 20 degrees while the rotation member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

  On the other hand, the change in the angle from the intermediate effect state to the overhang state is such that the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually decreases from the approach position to the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect. It is below the level of the angle change up to the state (down to about 7 degrees).

  As described above, the numerical value of the angle θ with respect to the rotation per unit angle of the rotation member 620 is configured to change in magnitude, so that the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 similarly changes. Can be configured. That is, in the range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is likely to be small and the posture can be easily maintained, while in the range where the numerical value of the angle θ is large, the second decorative rotation member 660 can be set. The rotation angle of the member 660 is likely to be large, and the surfaces facing the player (directing surfaces 661a to 661c) can be easily changed quickly.

  From the configuration described above, it is possible to form a gradual change in the displacement operation of the second decorative rotation member 660. In the displacement operation of the second decorative rotation member 660, as described above, the arrangement change and the posture change due to the displacement of the supported member 640 and the center of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. And rotation displacement about the rotation axis are simultaneously executed.

  The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement centered on the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a is such that the driven side of the supported member 640 changes from the linear portion 616a of the guide slot 616 to the curved portion 616b. It grows noticeably at the timing of entry.

  That is, in the tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate effect state is reached, and the upper and lower sides of the supported member 640 in the intermediate effect state slightly move up and down (bounce back). Even in this case, it is possible to maintain the state in which the second decorative rotating member 660 faces the third effect surface 661c toward the front side (see FIG. 43).

  On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate effect state, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotation member 660 when the rotation member 620 rotates at a constant speed increases, and the posture change in the rotation direction is changed. It is visually noticeable. That is, the player can visually recognize that the second decoration rotating member 660 is instantaneously rotationally displaced.

  In the present embodiment, at the rotation end (displacement lower end) of the rotation member 620, the second effect surface 661b of the second decoration rotation member 660 is directed to the front side, and is arranged in the vicinity of the decoration fixing member 670. It is desirable that the driven side of the supported member 640 can be prevented from jumping upward from the state in which the rotating member 620 is disposed at the lower end of the displacement, in view of being integrally viewed (see FIG. 28).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 is configured as described above to make the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side uniform, the rotating member 620 is Excessive displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side in a state where the supported member 640 is arranged at the displacement lower end can be prevented in advance, and the supported member 640 can be prevented from jumping back.

  In addition to the uniform displacement speed, the center positions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (for example, the cylindrical portion 643). Are configured to be closest to a support fastening portion 615 as a rotation axis of the rotating member 620. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid that the rotating distal end of the rotating member 620 becomes unsteady due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 supported on the rotating distal side of the rotating member 620. The rotational displacement can be stabilized.

  In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b moves in a direction (upper left direction) that rebounds around the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 on the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end of displacement of the rotating member 620. Is preferably configured to hinder the displacement of In other words, the lower half of the curved portion 616b is inclined in the upper left direction in the short direction, and the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side in this direction can be suppressed. The rebound of the member 640 can be prevented.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side, and when the driven side of the supported member 640 stops at the displacement end. Is different from the displacement direction of the supported member 640 on the driven side.

  The former is supposed to be displaced downward and left along the displacement direction of the supported member 640 on the driving side (the rotational direction of the rotating member 620) if there is no guidance, but in the present embodiment, the guide elongated hole By being guided by the guide 616, it is slightly swung in the left-right direction as a direction along the guide slot 616, and is displaced downward.

  On the other hand, the latter is a circular trajectory centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, and thus has a displacement direction not along the guide long hole 616 but along the short direction of the guide long hole 616. Thus, displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side can be suppressed, and the supported member 640 can be prevented from jumping back.

  The feature of the rising direction displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described. In the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the extended state to the effect standby state, the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

  The load required for raising and displacing the rotating member 620 (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) mainly depends on the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decoration provided on the supported member 640. It is used for raising and displacing the rotation member 650 and the second decoration rotation member 660, and for rotating the second decoration rotation member 660.

  That is, as the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is smaller, the load required for raising and displacing the rotation member 620 can be reduced.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in the present embodiment, at the time when the rotating member 620 starts rotating and displacing from the extended state of the first operation unit 600, it is proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660. The angle θ is designed to be the lowest. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the load required when raising and displacing the rotating member 620.

  At the end of the rising displacement of the rising direction displacement of the rotating member 620, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 about the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640 is positioned along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 ( (Vertical orientation).

  Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as the inertial force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 is reduced. The moving member 620 can be generated as a load that is twisted about the longitudinal direction, and the rotating member 620 can endure the load with a slight elastic displacement locally by dispersing the load in the longitudinal direction.

  Therefore, as compared with the case where the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rotation member 620 in a front view, it is easier to avoid a situation in which the rotation member 620 is broken and broken. . In addition, an excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front cover member 612, and the load that cannot be received by the rotating member 620 is endured by elastic deformation of the front cover member 612. Therefore, the rotation member 620 can be prevented from being damaged.

  The displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b will be described. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is a member that is rotationally displaced about the axis O1, and the rotation angle thereof corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even when the change in the arrangement of the supported member 640 on the driven side is small, such as a change from the effect standby state to the overhang state, if the angle θ changes, the overhang decorative portion 652b rotates. .

  The change of the angle θ from the effect standby state to the overhang state is about 135 degrees, and the overhang decorative portion 652b rotates at about 45 degrees. Here, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise from the effect standby state, it feels as if it collides with another operation unit 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). In the present embodiment, since the supported member 640 itself, which is a reference for the rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, changes its posture in a clockwise rotation manner, the other operating unit 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members) changes its posture. Collisions can be avoided.

  In other words, since the overhanging decorative portion 652b is configured to be displaceable with respect to the supported member 640, the space required for displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

  For example, in the case where the overhanging decorative portion 652b is a portion that is fixedly arranged with respect to the supported member 640 in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the supported member 640 is changed from the overhanging state arrangement to the effect standby state. , The overhanging decorative portion 652b extends to the upper left side of the supported member 640 and collides with another operation unit 800 or partially hides the overhanging display on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. May have an adverse effect on the production.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the projecting decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the driven member 640 on the driven side of the supported member 640 as a reference. When 640 projects to the third symbol display device 81 side, it extends in conjunction with it, and when the supported member 640 is displaced away from the third symbol display device 81, it retreats in conjunction with it. Therefore, the arrangement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the retracted state can be formed on the side away from the third symbol display device 81.

  The rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 in the player's eyes can be obtained from the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640. That is, the difference is about 135 degrees, which is the change width of the angle θ, and about 90 degrees, which is the posture change angle of the supported member 640, which is 45 degrees.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be equal regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into angles a1 and a2 below the horizontal line and angles b1 and b2 above the horizontal line, the angle θ and the posture of the supported member 640 are obtained. The difference between the change and ((a1 + b1)-(a2 + b2))-(b1-b2) = (a1-a2) is equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620.

  Accordingly, the rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 becomes equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620. Although the displacement speed of the support member 640 is not constant, the angular velocity of rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the attitude of the supported member 640 is constant.

  Therefore, it is as if the overhanging decorative portion 652b provided on the supported member 640 is being driven at a constant angular velocity by the driving means different from the driving motor 631 for driving the rotating member 620 to the player. Can be visually recognized.

  With such a configuration, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 is such that, in the player's eyes, there is a section where the movement is slid or a section where the rotation is performed. It can be shown, and the displacement mode of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode as if it were not a machine.

  This operation is realized by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 into a section in which the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction and a section in which the posture change is small with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction. be able to. That is, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates with respect to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is the displacement of the supported member 640 from the player's point of view. Affected by the dominant side.

  Therefore, in the section where the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction, the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as being rotationally displaced. The appearance decoration portion 652b can be visually recognized as being slid.

  As described above, the description has been given of the case where the rotating member 620 is rotatable and displaceable so as to constitute the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the extended state, and is displaced from one displacement end to the other displacement end. However, the driving direction may be switched so as to be displaced in the opposite direction at a position halfway in the displacement range.

  For example, after rotating the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state, the driving direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed to control to return to the effect standby state. In this case, since it is necessary to stop the rotating member 620 in the middle of descending, it may be necessary to set the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 to a lower speed in order to make the stop position accurate.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) changes in an increasing tendency near the intermediate effect state as compared to the effect standby state. The magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above.

  Therefore, in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state in which the rotation amount of the second decoration rotation member 660 increases, the portion of the driving force that is distributed to the second decoration rotation member 660 increases, so that the rotation member 620 relatively moves. The amount of the rotation displacement can be reduced, and the rotation displacement of the rotation member 620 can be automatically suppressed.

  In other words, as the rotation amount of the second decorative rotation member 660 increases, the rotation speed of the rotation member 620 can be reduced, so that the rotation speed of the rotation member 620 is set to a low value in advance. Even if it is not performed, the rotation member 620 can be easily stopped near the intermediate effect state.

  Next, the second operation unit 700 will be described. The second operation unit 700 is an operation unit fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and is a field of view of a player who looks at the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 28). An effect standby state (see FIG. 28) retracting below the opening 511a in order to secure the position, and an overhanging state (see FIG. 30) arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 to attract attention. The state is mainly switched between the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 35) as the state (1).

  FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700. In FIGS. 50 and 51, mainly the members around the elevating / reversing effect device 770 are shown in an exploded state, and the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is shown in a non-exploded state.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second operation unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 fastened and fixed to a lower right corner of the rear case 510, and a right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510. A rotating arm member 720 arranged and rotatable around the cylindrical projecting portion 511b of the rear case 510, a drive transmitting device 730 configured to transmit a driving force to the rotating arm member 720, An elevating plate member 740 in which a distal end portion of the rotating arm member 720 is connected so as to be able to be guided and is capable of elevating and lowering, and a rear left side fastened and fixed to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the back side of the elevating plate member 740 A plate member 750, a set of left and right front plate members 710 and a pair of front support members 760 fastened and fixed to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750, and a back on the front side of the metal bar 702. A blind decoration member 768 fastened and fixed to the case 510, and a lifting / reversing effect device 770 configured to be capable of being displaced by the lifting / lowering plate member 740 and the front support member 760 in a mode that combines vertical movement and vertical displacement. .

  The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support portion 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, a gap formation portion 712 that is recessed from the rear side at the left edge and forms a gap between the rear case 510, A plurality (three in this embodiment) of detection sensors 713 provided to detect the arrangement of the detected portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730, and the front side of the left side of the drive transmission device 730 is directed to the front side toward the upper side. A front upper inclined portion 714 which is formed to be able to guide the rotary cylinder portion 774 e of the vertically inverted reversing effect device 770 and a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 is screwed are formed. And a plurality of fastened portions 718.

  The detection sensor 713 is provided with a plurality of photocoupler sensors at intervals so that the detection groove is disposed at a position where the detected portion 735 can enter. Each of the detection sensors 713 includes a position of the detected portion 735 in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, a position of the detected portion 735 in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700, and an overhang of the second operation unit 700, respectively. It is arranged so as to match the position of the detected part 735 in the state.

  That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch the output depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, or the extended state, and the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 4) can be grasped the state of the second operation unit 700.

  The rotating arm member 720 is pivotally supported by a cylindrical projection 511b projecting from the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 to the front side in a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a long plate shape in a U-shape as viewed from the front. A main body 721 to be formed, and a support cylinder 722 having a cylindrical shape projecting rearward at a bent portion of the main body 721 and having an inner peripheral side formed to have a size capable of being inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 511b. A long hole 723 formed in the right end of the main body 721 in a long hole shape along the long direction, and a front end (the projecting direction of the cylindrical protrusion 711a) at the left end of the main body 721. (In a direction parallel to) and a cylindrically fastened portion 724 in which a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side in a cylindrical shape, and rearward at an intermediate position between the cylindrically fastened portion 724 and the support tubular portion 722. Cylindrical fastening with a protruding cylindrical shape and a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side It includes a 725, and a torsion spring SP2 to provide a biasing force of the rise in the main body 721 (direction of lifting the left side) with the rear case 510 is wrapped around the supporting tube portion 722.

  The left side of the main body 721 is formed with a step so as to be displaced on the front side as compared with the base end side of the support cylinder 722, and a support plate is formed in a gap formed on the back side by the step. 701 is provided.

  The support plate 701 is a plate-shaped portion that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and includes an arc-shaped long hole portion 701a that is bored so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastened portion 725. When the fastening screw inserted into the long hole portion 701a with the ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 725, the rotating arm member 720 is supported by the support plate via the cylindrical fastened portion 725. 701 is supported undetachably.

  Since the support plate 701 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, the left side of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from being displaced away from the rear case 510 toward the front. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the left side of the rotating arm member 720 from causing a displacement in which the rotating arm member 720 is tilted to the front side, so that the displacement of the rotating arm member 720 is stably supported. be able to.

  The right side portion of the main body 721 is disposed in a gap between the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712. That is, the displacement of the right side of the main body 721 in the front-rear direction is limited by the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

  The long hole portion 723 is formed in a shape in which a straight line extending in the longitudinal direction passing through the center of the width passes through the center of the support cylindrical portion 722. Therefore, when the load applied to the long hole 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the long hole 723, the rotation direction component of the rotation arm member 720 of the load becomes zero.

  The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits a driving force through the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side, and the drive motor 731 , A transmission gear 733 meshed with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshed with the transmission gear 733.

  The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by a plurality of cylindrical projections 711a that project in a cylindrical shape on the rear side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 711a, and a fastening screw inserted into a shaft hole of the transmission gear 733 or the gear cam member 734 can be screwed therein. When these fastening screws are screwed and fixed, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 711a so as not to fall off.

  The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-described cylindrical projecting portion 711a and an arc-shaped hole 711b formed in an arc around the cylindrical projecting portion 711a that supports the gear cam member 734.

  The gear cam member 734 is extended in such a manner as to have a longer diameter than the gear portion, and a detected portion 735 which is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation shaft portion toward the front side and is formed so as to be inserted into the arc-shaped hole 711b. And a cylindrical protruding portion 736a that protrudes cylindrically from the distal end of the extending portion 736 to the rear side.

  The detected part 735 is formed so as to be able to be disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and changes the attitude of the gear cam member 734 by the output from the detection sensor 713 (see FIG. 4). Is configured as a part for enabling detection.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 736a is formed so as to be inserted into the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the long hole portion 723. Is done.

  A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a, and a fastening screw inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed therein. When the fastening screw is screwed and fixed, the rotating arm member 720 is irremovably connected to the cylindrical projection 736a.

  The elevating plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down with the rotation of the rotating arm member 720, and is disposed at the left end side and guided by the up and down direction, and is provided at the lower end side of the guided member 741. A left and right long horizontally long member 742 to be fastened and fixed.

  The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal bar 702 fixed to the rear case 510 in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is aligned in the vertical direction can be inserted, and the vertical direction displacement along the metal bar 702 is possible. Since the tips of the ridges projecting from both left and right sides of the guided member 741 to the rear side abut on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, the rotation of the guided member 741 is restricted. The posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized.

  As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontally long member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is stabilized.

  The horizontally long member 742 has an elongated hole 743 formed in an elongated oval shape on the left and right with a vertical width in which the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 can be inserted, and an upper side of the elongated hole 743. And a pair of guide portions 745 disposed below the bottom at positions equidistant left and right with respect to the cylindrical portion 744 as a reference. Prepare.

  When the fastening screw inserted into the long hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 724, the elevating plate member 740 is rotated through the cylindrical fastened portion 724. It is supported by the member 720 so as not to fall off.

  The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion through which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is inserted, and which supports the elevating / reversing effect device 770 in a state where it can be displaced back and forth. In other words, the elevation reversal effect device 770 is not fixed to the elevating plate member 740, but is disposed on the front side of the elevating plate member 740 in such a manner that it can be displaced back and forth with respect to the elevating plate member 740.

  A coil spring CS2 is provided so as to wind around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion cylindrical portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction in which the lifting plate member 740 and the lifting reversal effect device 770 are separated from each other.

  The guide part 745 is constituted by a pair of left and right parts, and a rotating cylinder rotatably supported by a pair of front and rear shaft parts protruding from the plate part 745a to the left and right outside from a long plate part 745a forward and backward. 745b.

  The rotating cylinder portion 745b rotates when the above-described up-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction, and functions as a portion for guiding the displacement in the front-rear direction. The details will be described later.

  The left rear plate member 750, like the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side toward the upper side on the right front side, and is a rotating cylindrical portion 774e of the elevation reversal effect device 770. And a plurality of fastened portions 752 in which female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed are formed.

  The blind decoration member 768 includes a three-dimensional decoration part 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate on which LEDs are fixed to the front side is disposed on the back side of the three-dimensional decoration part 768a. The three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated by light emitted from the LED.

  Each of the front support members 760 has a fixing plate portion 761 configured to have an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and the right and left inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761 are disposed adjacent to each other, and the plate back faces upward. And a receiving inclined portion 762 which is formed to be inclined toward the front side.

  The fixing plate portion 761 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole from the front side into a corresponding female screw portion. Plate.

  In this fixed position, the receiving inclined portion 762 is disposed in front of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751. That is, a guide route is formed by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751, and the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is guided on the guide route, whereby the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is moved in the front-rear direction. It is configured to be displaced vertically while being displaced. Hereinafter, this vertical displacement will be described.

  FIG. 52A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 52B is a second operation unit 700 taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. FIGS. 52A and 52B show the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700. FIG.

  FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 53B is a second operation unit 700 taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. 53 (a) and 53 (b) show an intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700.

  FIG. 54A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIVa-LIVA in FIG. 30. FIG. 54B is a second operation unit 700 taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. FIGS. 54A and 54B show the extended state of the second operation unit 700.

  The vertical displacement of the vertical reversing effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 is caused by the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 being transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The transmission of the driving force at the time of vertical displacement of the vertical reversing effect device 770 will be described. In this description, FIG. 28, FIG. 30, and FIG.

  At the time of starting the transmission of the driving force from the effect standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical projection 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is determined by the long hole 723 of the rotary arm member 720. Since the gear cam member 734 is designed to be parallel to the direction, the displacement resistance generated when the gear cam member 734 starts rotating can be suppressed. The same is true in the overhang state.

  On the other hand, in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 30), since the direction of displacement of the cylindrical projection 736a is orthogonal to the length of the elongated hole 723, the gear cam member 734 receives the rotation from the rotating arm member 720 in the rotational direction. By maximizing the displacement resistance, the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734 can be easily stopped.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the vertical reversing effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 is disposed on the rear side below the center frame 86, and is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86. Accordingly, it is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-rear direction.

  The displacement resistance of this displacement is based on the configuration in which the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the elevation reversing effect device 770 is guided by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the first horizontal plate 774b and the first horizontal plate 774b of the elevation reversing effect device 770. The configuration in which the two horizontal plates 774c are guided by the rotating cylinder portion 745b of the elevating plate member 740 reduces the number.

  56. That is, the pair of rotary cylinder portions 774e are provided with the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portion 714, 751 (the front upper inclined portion 751 is disposed on the left side not shown in FIG. 52, FIG. 56). ), And the rotary cylinder 774e rolls around the cylindrical portion 774d, thereby displacing along the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portion 714, 751. The displacement resistance of the main body member 771 can be reduced.

  Further, as the arrangement of the rotary cylinder portions 745b aligned in front and rear, the front rotary cylinder portion 745b is designed to be arranged slightly above, so that the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be suppressed, thereby enabling the rotation. This prevents the cylindrical portion 774e from applying an excessive load to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the design is such that the position of the center of gravity (position of the rotation axis) of the effect device 780 is located slightly forward of the front-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is always inclined forward by gravity. Biased in the direction. Due to the influence of the biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are likely to be displaced such that the front side is lowered and the rear side is raised.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front rotary cylinder portion 745b, which is disposed close when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b is lowered, is disposed slightly above, and is positioned close when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c is raised. The rear rotating cylinder portion 745b to be formed is disposed slightly below. Therefore, the forward tilt displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

  Further, according to this configuration, since the front rotating cylinder portion 745b has a gap with the second horizontal plate 774c, the rolling can be stably generated with the first horizontal plate 774b. Since the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b has a gap with the first horizontal plate 774b, the rolling can be stably generated with the second horizontal plate 774c. Thus, the rotation of the rotary cylinder portion 745b can be normally caused, and the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  The displacement of the elevation reversing effect device 770 to the front side is caused by the urging force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the above-described shape guide. For this reason, the displacement resistance of the longitudinal displacement can be reduced at the time of the upward displacement in which the elevation reversal effect device 770 is displaced to the front side, as compared with the downward displacement.

  The vertical displacement of the elevation reversal effect device 770 is performed by the driving force of the driving motor 731. The driving force is divided into vertical displacement and longitudinal displacement. In the vertical displacement, the burden of the displacement in the ascending direction becomes relatively large due to the necessity of opposing gravity, but the displacement in the front-rear direction in this case can be assisted by the urging force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving force required for raising and lowering the elevation reversal effect device 770 from becoming excessive.

  The length of the coil spring CS2 is set to be a natural length in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 53). That is, when the up-down reversal effect device 770 is disposed below the arrangement in the intermediate effect state, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 causes the longitudinal displacement of the up-down reversal effect device 770 due to the driving force of the drive motor 731. While acting in the assisting direction, when the up-down reversal effect device 770 is disposed above the arrangement in the intermediate effect state, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the longitudinal displacement of the up-down reversal effect device 770.

  Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the elevation reversal effect device 770 in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive of the drive motor 731 is controlled from the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the stop timing is slightly less than ideal. Even if it is earlier, the second operating unit 700 can be displaced toward the intermediate effect state by the urging force of the coil spring CS2.

  Further, for example, in the case where the stop control is performed in the same manner, even if the stop timing is slightly later than the ideal, the second operation unit 700 descends by its own weight, and the descending by its own weight is caused by the urging force of the coil spring CS2. By being suppressed, the arrangement can be maintained by moving the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate effect state side.

  In addition, for example, when the drive of the drive motor 731 is controlled from the overhung state of the second operation unit 700 and the stop of the drive motor 731 is stopped to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the elevation reversal effect device 770 is used. Because the urging force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance when the intermediate production state moves downward, it is possible to easily prevent a downward displacement larger than that in the intermediate production state. Then, even after the stop control of the drive motor 731, the second operating unit 700 can be moved to the intermediate effect state side by applying the urging force of the coil spring CS <b> 2.

  Here, the action of the vertical reversal effect device 770 displaced in the front-rear direction with the vertical displacement will be described. As a premise, there is known a movable role that can be switched between a state in which the center frame 86 is displaced in and out of the frame framed by the center frame 86 to attract the player's attention and a state in which the player escapes from the player's field of view.

  Most of such movable auditoriums are designed with an emphasis on appearance when they are arranged inside the center frame 86. In the state of retreating outside the center frame 86, attention is paid to the player. Often, they don't consider appearance, assuming they won't.

  However, recently, the front-rear distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 is configured to be long, and at the end of the field of view such that the display area of the third symbol display device 81 passes through the inside of the center frame 86 and is viewed. Since the line of sight reaches the rear outside position of the center frame 86 (the position behind the game area), the appearance of the movable role retracted to the rear outside position of the center frame 86 is poor, There is a possibility that the interest will be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, not only the front side (the first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also the back side (the second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and the upper and lower surfaces (FIG. 52). After the decorative surfaces are formed on the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2), the displacement direction of the elevation reversal effect device 770 is set such that the displacement direction of the device 770 becomes closer to the rear side with the player side (front side) as the base end. (Declining toward the rear), that is, a displacement direction along the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of view so that each decorative surface can easily fit in the player's field of view. Make up.

  Thus, each decorative surface of the covering member 787 can be easily put in the field of view of the player. The details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the front side surface (the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, which is visible to the player in the extended state (see FIG. 54), FIG. 54, a first main decorative surface 787a1) and an upper side surface (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2, which can be visually recognized by the player in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52); The decoration (a figure, a pattern, a character, a picture, or the like) formed on the decoration surface 787a2) is formed as a decoration related to each other.

  In other words, the first main decoration surface 787a1 and the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 are formed as first decorations related to each other, and the second main decoration surface 787b1 and the second decoration surface 787b2 are related to each other. , And the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as different decorations from each other.

  The decoration formed on the upper side surface is arranged in the front-rear gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 26) arranged on the back side in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700. Therefore, a state where attention is paid to a ball flowing down the game area formed outside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and a state where attention is paid to a display effect developed by the third symbol display device 81 are switched. It is easy for the player to enter the field of view when moving his / her eyes.

  Therefore, the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, “chance” and “big hit”) that can be visually recognized by the player through the covering member 787 in the overhang state are displayed on the covering member 787 even in the production standby state. The player can be made visible through the side surface.

  Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 is displaced to the effect standby state so that the third symbol display device 81 can be easily visually recognized, and the cover member 787 arranged inconspicuously can continuously attract the player's attention.

  In addition, as described later, since the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatable and displaceable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player, the contents of the decorative surface that the player can visually recognize in the extended state are different. A case can arise.

  For example, if the vertical reversing effect device 770 is placed in the effect standby state before the player confirms the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (when overlooked or when the operation speed is excessively fast), In the configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped only from the side surface, most of the front side surface is hidden by the game board 13 in the effect standby state, so that the player is unfolded on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The attention must be paid to the effect of the liquid crystal, and the attention to the covering member 787 is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped also from the upper side surface as in the present embodiment, the player visually recognizes the up-down reversal effect device 770 in the effect standby state, so that the player can cover in the overhang state. Through the setting member 787, it is possible to grasp the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, "chance", "big hit", etc.) which were visually recognizable by the player.

  This allows the player who has overlooked the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state to be notified of the content notified by the state of the covering member 787 on the decorative surface that is visible on the covering member 787 even in the effect standby state. It can be reported continuously. Accordingly, the attention power of the covering member 787 can be kept high regardless of each state such as the effect standby state or the extended state.

  In the present embodiment, the displacement in the front-rear direction of the up-down reversal effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 enters forward from the rear end face of the game area from the rear side of the rear end face of the game area. A description will be given of such a displacement.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, the front surface of the covering member 787 and the plate rear surface of the center frame 86 are disposed to face each other, and the center frame 86 is located on the covering member 787 side. And a flow path forming portion 86a protrudingly formed at the bottom.

  The flow path forming portion 86a is configured such that the sphere jumping from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 reaches the lower edge of the center frame 86, and then moves to the center thereof The rear side of the guide flow path for once swinging the ball flowing down the lower rolling surface of the frame 86 backward, flowing forward again, and guiding toward the first winning opening 64 arranged in the game area. (See FIG. 9). That is, the rear end surface BE1 of the game area is arranged behind the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) by the flow path forming portion 86a.

  Since the ball that has flowed down the flow path forming portion 86a enters the first winning opening 64 with a high probability, the attention to the flow path forming portion 86a is high, especially when the ball jumps inside the center frame 86. Therefore, the line of sight of the player is easily gathered in the flow path forming portion 86a. In the effect standby state (see FIG. 52), since the effect device 780 is disposed immediately behind the flow path forming portion 86a, it is easy to configure a state in which the effect device 780 in the effect standby state enters the field of view of the player. Can be.

  In the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, the covering member 787 is disposed on the back side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52A). The front surface portion is disposed on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53A), and when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state, the front surface portion of the covering member 787 is disposed on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

  That is, the covering member 787 is displaced toward the front side so as to enter the front-rear position same as the front-rear position of the game area at the same time as being displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86. Therefore, it can be seen to the player that the covering member 787 is riding on the center frame 86 and moving to the front side (approaching the player side).

  In the second operation unit 700, where the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-back direction with the vertical displacement, the front-rear position of the front end face is the second decoration in the extended state of the first operation unit 600 in the extended state. It is configured to match (coincide with) the front-back position of the second presentation surface 661b of the rotating member 660.

  Thus, the front and rear positions of the second effect surface 661b (see FIG. 29) of the first operation unit 600 and the effect device 780 (FIG. 30) of the second operation unit 700, which are arranged close to each other in front view in the extended state. Are matched, and these can be easily made to be visually recognized integrally.

  On the other hand, the arrangement of the rendering device 780 in the front-rear direction is lower in the intermediate rendering state and the rendering standby state than in the extended state, so that the box-shaped member of the first operation unit 600 is compared with the extended state. 661 and the rendering device 780 can be separated (independently) to facilitate visual recognition.

  The elevation reversal effect device 770 includes a main body member 771 connected and supported by the elevating plate member 740, and an effect device 780 configured to be displaceable with respect to the main body member 771. Next, the details of the elevation reversal effect device 770 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevation reversal effect device 770, and FIG. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevation reversal effect device 770. In the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to.

  The main body member 771 includes a lower elongated portion 772 formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, and an insertion cylindrical portion 773 projecting in a cylindrical shape from the left-right central position of the lower elongated portion 772 to the back side. A pair of guide extending portions 774 extending rearward from both left and right ends of the lower elongated portion 772 and a vertically extending connecting portion are formed integrally with the left and right central positions of the lower elongated portion 772. An upper elongate portion 775 formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, and a linear motion plate member 784 of the rendering device 780 disposed on the back side from both left and right sides of the upper elongate portion 775 so as to be able to be guided in the left-right direction. A plurality of guide portions 776, a transmission device holding plate 777 which is fixed to the left and right centers of the upper elongated portion 775 from the rear side and is capable of supporting the drive transmission device, a lower elongated portion 772, and an upper elongated portion. A light emitting effect means 778 fastened and fixed to the front side of the portion 775, Provided.

  The insertion cylindrical portion 773 is a portion that is inserted into the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a dimensional relationship slidable on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 744. The member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction. That is, since the insertion cylindrical portion 773 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 744, the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the elevating plate member 740 can be suppressed.

  The guide extension 774 includes a vertical plate 774a having a width in the vertical direction, a first horizontal plate 774b connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a, and having a horizontal direction in the width direction, and a first horizontal plate 774b. A second horizontal plate 774c, which is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side and whose width direction is in the horizontal direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), and protrudes from the left and right outer surfaces of the vertical plate 774a to the left and right sides. It comprises a pair of upper and lower tubular portions 774d provided, and a rotating tubular portion 774e rotatably supported by the tubular portion 774d.

  The width of the second horizontal plate 774c is longer than the width of the first horizontal plate 774b. The expanded portion in the width direction is vertically opposed to the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the assembled state, and abuts each other to suppress the tilting displacement in which the guide extending portion 774 falls forward. That is, the second horizontal plate 774c has a width enough to be vertically opposed to the lower bottom of the elevating plate member 740, so that the main body member 771 is tilted forward with respect to the elevating plate member 740. Can be suppressed.

  The tubular portions 774d are not arranged in a pair in the vertical direction, but the upper tubular portion 774d is arranged to be shifted to the front side compared to the lower tubular portion 774d. This displacement is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the direction of a straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d are parallel (see FIG. 52A). That is, by disposing a pair of cylindrical portions 774d in parallel with the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751, the pair of upper and lower rotary cylinder portions 774e can be simultaneously applied to the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762. Can be in contact. Thus, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylinder portions 774e can be stably rolled, and it is easy to avoid occurrence of a local load.

  The guide portion 776 is fastened and fixed so as to connect a pair of left and right tubular portions 776a with a plurality of tubular portions 776a which are disposed on both left and right sides in such a manner that a pair of left and right sides are vertically arranged and a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side. A plurality of falling-off prevention plate portions 776b to be formed.

  The falling-off prevention plate portion 776b includes an insertion hole formed at a position corresponding to the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a, and a fastening screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole is screwed into the cylindrical portion 776a. And functions as a portion for preventing the linear motion plate member 784 from falling off, which will be described later in detail.

  The transmission device holding plate 777 has a motor support plate 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b formed in the motor support plate 777a at a position where the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, and A cylindrical projecting portion 777c is provided on the lower side of the insertion hole 777b to protrude in a cylindrical shape on the front side, a pair of insertion holes 777d formed at upper and lower ends so as to allow fastening screws to be inserted, and a fastening on the rear side. And a fixed wiring fastening member 777e.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 777c has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and the fastening screw is screwed in a state of being inserted into the transmission gear 781b, thereby pivotally supporting the vertically reversing member 781 so as not to fall off. Part.

  The insertion hole 777d is configured such that a fastening screw screwed into a female screw portion 775a formed in a corresponding portion of the upper elongated portion 775 can be inserted, and the transmission device holding plate 777 causes the upper elongated portion 775 to be inserted by the fastening screw. Is fixed.

  The wiring retaining member 777e is a portion for retaining and retaining the electric wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in a gap between the transmission device holding plate 777 and a shape along the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777. In this case, the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777 can be improved.

  The light-emitting effecting means 778 includes a left and right long plate-shaped two upper and lower electric decoration substrates 778a on which light-emitting members such as LEDs are disposed on the front side, and light transmission disposed on the front side of the electric decoration substrates 778a. A light diffusion member 778b, which is a plate member formed of a conductive resin material and formed by light diffusion processing.

  The upper illumination board 778a includes a pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d on the back side. The detection sensor 778d is a photo-coupler type detection device, and is configured to be able to detect the orientation of the upside down member 781 of the rendering device 780 by disposing an arc-shaped protruding portion 781d in the detection groove. Will be described later.

  The lower light diffusing member 778b has a plurality of fastened portions formed on the back side, and is inserted from the back side into the through-holes formed in the lower elongated portion 772 at corresponding positions in the fastened portions. The fastening screw is screwed into and fastened and fixed, so that the fastening screw is inconspicuous.

  On the other hand, the upper light diffusing member 778b is formed with insertion holes 778c for inserting fastening screws on both the left and right sides, and the fastening screws inserted from the front side into the insertion holes 778c are female screws of the upper elongated portion 775. By being screwed into the portion 775b, the upper light diffusion member 778b is fastened and fixed.

  In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side and may be conspicuous without any countermeasure. However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the covering member 787 is always connected to the front side of the insertion hole 778c. , The head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

  Therefore, even when the head of the fastening screw is designed to face the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw stands out and adversely affects the performance. In other words, by designing the covering member 787 to be arranged so as to hide the fastening screw, the degree of freedom in designing the fastening screw in the insertion direction can be increased.

  The rendering device 780 is a device in which an outer portion is arranged around the upper long portion 775 and is configured to be displaceable, and the upside-down reversing member 781 supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 777 c of the transmission device holding plate 777. A drive motor 782 in which a drive gear 782a for transmitting a driving force to a transmission gear 781b of the upside down member 781 is fixed to a drive shaft; and one end of each of both longitudinal ends of the upside down member 781 And a pair of linear motion plate members 784, the other ends of which are pivotally supported, and the guide portions 776 guide the displacement in the left-right direction. A pair of shaft rotating members 785 disposed between the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and rotatable (reversed) with a rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction; Joint support with member 784 A pair of shaft support members 786, a pair of end plate members 785 d which are fixed to the left and right outer end portions of the shaft rotation member 785 in a state where the phases are fixed so as not to fall off, and before and after the end plate members 785 d And a covering member 787 formed to have a left and right length covering the left and right sides of the upper elongated portion 775.

  The upside down member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b protruding in a gear shape on the back side of the center of the main body plate portion 781a, and a main body plate portion 781a. A pair of cylindrical protruding portions 781c that protrude cylindrically from both ends in the length direction to the rear side, and protrude from the front side of the main body plate portion 781a in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b. And an arc-shaped projecting portion 781d.

  The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-rear direction at the center. The cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into the circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the distal end side. The vertically reversing member 781 is pivotally supported by the transmission device holding plate 777 so as not to fall off via the transmission gear 781b.

  The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with the rotation, so that the upside down member 781 rotates. That is, the upside down member 781 can be driven to rotate by energizing the drive motor 782.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end where the one-side support hole 783a of the intermediate arm member 783 is formed is displaced following the cylindrical projecting portion 781c which is displaced as the vertically reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced.

  The arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is formed so as to be able to be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emission effecting means 778. That is, the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d can be arranged on one of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

  Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the vertically reversing member 781 can be changed to two postures in which the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a posture (a pair of detection sensors 778d (The posture in which the arc-shaped protruding portions 781d are not arranged in both of the detection grooves (1) and (2)).

  The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long rod shape (narrow plate shape), and has a one-side support hole 783a that is bored at one end and is pivotally supported by a cylindrical protrusion 781c. A cylindrical other cylindrical portion 783b having an inner peripheral side formed at the other end opposite to the support hole 783a, and an umbrella-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other cylindrical portion 783b. ) Formed as bevel teeth 783c.

  A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c, and a fastening screw inserted into the one-side support hole 783a from the rear side is screwed into the female screw. As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the vertically reversing member 781 so as not to fall off.

  The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and has a cylindrical projecting portion 784a that projects in a cylindrical shape that is inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783; An arc-shaped plate portion 784b protruding in an arc shape about the central axis of the cylindrical protruding portion 784a, and an oblong shape extending in the left-right direction on both upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protruding portion 784a. A pair of long hole portions 784c, a pair of upper and lower support plate portions 784d arranged in parallel at a position between the long hole portions 784c, and a pair of support plate portions 784d projecting rearward, and an intermediate portion between the support plate portions 784d. A pair of ridges 784e, which are formed on the sides facing each other and are formed as ridges extending in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical shape which is disposed at an end of the support plate 784d and is opened on the back side and has an inner peripheral side And a pair of fastened portions 784f in which female threads are formed A ring holding member having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between an arrangement hole 784g formed between the cylindrical projecting portion 784a and the support plate portion 784d and a shaft support member 786. A half 784h and a magnet holding half 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so as to be able to hold the magnet Mg between the shaft support member 786 are provided.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, and is slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side. That is, the fastening screw inserted from the back side into the other cylindrical portion 783b is screwed into the female screw of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 cannot fall into the cylindrical projecting portion 784a. It is supported by.

  The arc-shaped plate portion 784b is formed in an arc shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b. Accordingly, the arcuate plate portion 784b is disposed close to the other cylindrical portion 783b in the assembled state so as to radially oppose the other cylindrical portion 783b, thereby limiting the tilt displacement of the other cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis. Thus, the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 around the other cylindrical portion 783b can be stabilized.

  The long hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and is fastened through a female screw formed in the cylindrical portion 776a from the rear side through the insertion hole of the drop-prevention plate portion 776b. When the screw is screwed in, the linear motion plate member 784 is supported by the main body member 771 so as not to fall off.

  In the supporting state (assembled state), the linear motion plate member 784 is slidable along the direction in which the long hole portion 784c is formed. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

  The support plate portion 784d is a plate-like portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotating member 785 so as to suppress the vertical displacement, and the protruding ridge portion 784e defines the horizontal arrangement of the metal rod 785a. , But will be described later in detail.

  The arrangement hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference of the shaft rotation member 785 with the beveled tooth member 785c, but details thereof will be described later.

  The shaft rotation member 785 is a member disposed in a pair on the left and right sides and supported by the linear motion plate member 784. The shaft rotation member 785 includes a metal rod 785 a formed in a substantially cylindrical shape from a metal material, and a length of the metal rod 785 a. A concave groove portion 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position in the direction, a member provided at the left and right inner ends of the metal bar 785a and fixed to the metal bar 785a, and a bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783; A bevel tooth member 785c having a bevel gear (bevel gear) meshing therewith; an end plate member 785d disposed at the left and right outer ends of the metal bar 785a and fixed to the metal bar 785a; and an end plate member 785d. A ring-shaped metal member 785e arranged around the metal bar 785a in a manner to be raised from the end plate member 785d, and a female screw formed inside the left and right inner portions of the end plate member 785d. Metal part Di is and a rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that is screwed into the fixed.

  The metal bar 785a is arranged between the pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear motion plate member 784, and the protruding ridge portion 784e is arranged in the concave groove portion 785b. Here, the concave groove portion 785b has a dimensional relationship with the ridge portion 784e so as to be slidable, and has a dimensional relationship with which the lateral displacement with respect to the ridge portion 784e is regulated.

  That is, the groove width of the concave groove portion 785b is set slightly longer than the left and right width of the ridge portion 784e, the diameter of the groove deep portion of the concave groove portion 785b is set shorter than the gap length between the ridge portions 784e. The diameter of the portion where the groove 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the length of the gap between the ridges 784e.

  Thus, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the back side of the linear motion plate member 784 in a manner that the shaft can rotate and the displacement in the left and right direction is suppressed.

  The bevel tooth member 785c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. In a state where the umbrella member 785c partially enters the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 engages the umbrella portion 785c with the umbrella member 785c from the opposite side (rear side) of the linear motion plate member 784. Assembled in

  In this assembled state, although the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the arrangement hole 784g, it cannot be dropped to the front side because the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear motion plate member 784. The displacement to the rear side is regulated by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the beveled tooth member 785c is undetachably supported by the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783.

  The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed in an inner peripheral shape corresponding to a non-circular shape (for example, a D-shaped cross section) as a tip of the metal rod 785a, and the inner peripheral shape and the metal rod 785a are formed. Are formed and fixed in a dimensional relationship of interference fit.

  The method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, a method of fixing using an adhesive or the like may be used, or a female screw may be formed at the tip of the metal rod 785a and a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d may be screwed into the female screw. A method of fastening and fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a may be used, or another method may be used.

  The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half 784h of the linear motion plate member 784. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held, and the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d supporting the metal rod 785a is slidably contacted on the inner peripheral side of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, so that the rotation center of the end plate member 785d Can easily match the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel tooth member 785c, and the load generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

  The rotation position stabilizing portion 785f functions as a portion where the metal screw provided is attracted to the magnet Mg.

  The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and has an insertion hole 786a formed so as to be able to insert a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 784f, and a ring holding member for the linear motion plate member 784. The magnet Mg can be held between the ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e with the half 784h and the magnet holding half 784i of the linear motion plate member 784. And a magnet holding half 786c formed in a rectangular box shape.

  When the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 786a from the back side is screwed into the fastened portion 784f to assemble the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft support member 786, the plate portion of the shaft support member 786 has the back side of the metal rod 785a. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding half portions 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding half portions 784i and 786c.

  The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed in a box shape with left and right inner sides opened in a pair in the front and rear directions, and is fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the shaft rotating member 785, and different on the opposite surface. A decoration consisting of a figure, pattern, character, picture, etc. that can be read in a meaning is formed.

  That is, the covering member 787 includes a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface that is visually recognized by a player in the extended state (see FIG. 54), a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface thereof, When the first main decoration surface 787a1 is arranged on the front side and enters the effect standby state (see FIG. 52), the first sub decoration surface 787a2 formed on the side visible to the player and the back surface thereof And a second sub-decoration surface 787b2 to be formed. The second sub-decoration surface 787b2 is formed on a side where the player can visually recognize the second sub-decoration surface 787b1 in a state where the second main decoration surface 787b1 is arranged on the front side and enters an effect standby state (see FIG. 52).

  The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed of two front and rear members fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d and formed in a substantially box shape with left and right inner sides opened in an assembled state (see FIG. 26). A plurality of extending portions 787c extending toward the left and right members, and a recessed portion 787d recessed so as to retract to the left and right outside at a portion between the extending portions 787c. .

  The extending portion 787c is formed such that its ends are in contact with or close to each other when the covering member 787 is in the close arrangement state (see FIG. 26). Thereby, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized integrally.

  The recessed portion 787d is a circular portion arranged at the center of the light diffusing member 778b of the light emitting effecting means 778 or a left and right center upper portion of the upper elongate portion 775 when the covering member 787 is in the close arrangement state (see FIG. 26). This is a portion for opening the arc plate portion or the like so as to be visible, and is formed in a concave shape so as to at least avoid interference with these portions.

  The covering member 787 has a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 is directed to the front side and the first sub-decorated surface 787a2 is directed to the upper side in accordance with the operation of the rendering device 780 (see FIGS. 29 and 52). The state in which the decorative surface 787b1 faces the front and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see FIG. 30) can be switched. First, a mechanism that constitutes a displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

  FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the direct acting plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785. FIG. 57 (a) shows a vertical arrangement state (also referred to as an upright vertical arrangement state) of an upside-down reversing member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and FIG. ) Shows a state in which the upside-down reversing member 781 has been rotated approximately 24 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57A around the cylindrical projection 777c in a front view. 57 (a) and 57 (b), the illustration of the end plate member 785d of the left shaft rotating member 785 and the right shaft rotating member 785 is omitted for easy understanding.

  In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is arranged so as to enter the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). Further, in the inverted vertical arrangement state in which the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotated by 180 degrees from the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is arranged so as to enter the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d. You.

  That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to switch between the upright and downside orientation members 781 and the upside-down vertically arranged state. The device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of the rendering device 780.

  As shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, when the vertically reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this posture change corresponds (proportionally) to the rotation angle of the shaft rotating member 785, and the lateral displacement of the other cylindrical portion 785b is the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. Corresponding to

  Here, the order in which the rotational displacement and the lateral displacement (linear motion displacement) occur will be described. These displacements do not occur at the same time at the same time, and there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is larger and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is larger.

  First, a brief description will be given. The configurations of the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 are a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the upside down reversing member 781 rotates about the cylindrical projecting portion 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 781c of the upside down reversing member 781 moves forward. The displacement direction of the linear motion plate member 784 connected to the other-side cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so as to move in parallel along the movement axis HL1 passing through the center of the cylindrical projecting portion 777c when viewed. The pair of right and left linear motion plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in the left and right opposite directions along the movement axis HL1.

  As shown in FIG. 57B, the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by the length L1 in the left-right direction by about 24 degrees from the vertical arrangement state shown in FIG. 57A. The length L1 is half the width of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 (the length between the left-right center and the left-right width end). It is illustrated as

  Also, due to the state change from FIG. 57 (a) to FIG. 57 (b), the posture change centered on the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise in front view, The angle is set to be equal to or less than half of 15 degrees, which is the angle between the adjacent teeth of the beveled tooth portion 783c.

  Since the umbrella tooth member 785c is arranged on the near side of the intermediate arm member 783, the transmission of the load (engaging transmission) between the umbrella tooth portion 783c and the umbrella tooth member 785c is opposed to each other in the front-rear direction, that is, Occurs on the movement axis HL1 in front view.

  FIG. 58A is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the direct acting plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 58B is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the direct acting plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 58B, the beveled tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the beveled tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 (in FIG. To be displaced). In FIG. 58B, in order to facilitate understanding, the beveled tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the beveled tooth member 785c are illustrated as being overlapped, and the overlapping width is set to beveled tooth portion 783c. It is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

  The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the driving force is transmitted, whereby the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced. While the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced 180 degrees counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 57A, the right shaft rotating member 785 rotates backward and the left shaft rotating member 785 moves forward. Rotate in the turning direction.

  In addition, while the upside down member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees about the other cylindrical portion 783b, and accordingly, the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 becomes Rotate 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the beveled tooth member 785c rotates about the metal bar 785a is twice as large as the angle of rotation about the other cylindrical portion 783b of the beveled tooth portion 783c.

  Here, the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that can be caused by the pressing due to the displacement from the state of FIG. 58 (a) to the state of FIG. 58 (b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear teeth, and This is less than the amount that can reliably rotate the 785c gear teeth. That is, the displacement amount until the contacting representative tooth rotates to the position of the adjacent tooth (the displacement required for the rotation of an angle of 30 degrees according to the fact that the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are arranged at equal intervals of 12) Volume).

  The gear teeth of the beveled tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the beveled tooth member 785c. However, in this embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c are formed from a resin material, the pressing is not performed. Since the accompanying displacement is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c, the attitude of the shaft rotating member 785 in the rotational direction of the beveled tooth member 785c is changed from the state of FIG. ) Is maintained.

  The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c is based on the driving force transmitted to the intermediate arm member 783 via the upside-down reversing member 781 from the magnet Mg to the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f of the shaft rotating member 785 ( 54 (see FIG. 54).

  That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts so as to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilizing portion 785f so as to limit the right shaft rotating member 785 from rotating and displacing in the backward direction. The shaft rotating member 785 on the right side receives the urging force in the forward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785.

  Also, with respect to the shaft rotating member 785 on the left side, the arrangement of the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f is on the front side of the end plate member 785d as in the right side, while the arrangement of the magnet Mg is on the upper side opposite to the right side. (See FIG. 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts so as to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotating member 785 receives the urging force in the backward direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left shaft rotating member 785.

  In the present embodiment, the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c from the state shown in FIG. 57A until the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by the length L1 in the left-right direction from the state shown in FIG. It is designed to be able to generate a load exceeding.

  As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c undergo elastic deformation so as to absorb the displacement of the beveled tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58B. When the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57 (b), the beveled tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attractive force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f are rotated. When the arrangement is separated, the magnetic force is extremely reduced, and the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c released from the attraction force of the magnet Mg are rotationally displaced while elastically recovering.

  Therefore, at the start of rotation, the amount of elastic recovery increases the momentum in the rotation direction of the shaft rotation member 785, so that the rotation speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This improvement in rotational speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785.

  Thereby, the operation of the covering member 787 can be adjusted without changing the driving speed of the driving motor 782, and the effect of the covering member 787 can be reduced while reducing the load of the control design of the driving motor 782. The effect can be improved.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the rotational rotation of the shaft rotation member 785 occurs due to the attraction force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the beveled tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts rotating. .

  The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that receives the attracting force of the magnet Mg is configured as a pair of upper and lower parts, and when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, one of the rotational position stabilizing portions 785f. 52 (b) is placed close to the magnet Mg and receives the attracting force (see FIG. 52 (b)). When the direction is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, the other (FIG. 52 (b)). ), The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f on the upper side) is arranged close to the magnet Mg and receives the attracting force.

  That is, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see FIGS. 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg causes the rotation of the shaft rotating member. It works effectively for the purpose of limiting the rotational displacement of the 785. Therefore, in the displacement from the close arrangement state, an effect that the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is delayed by the magnetic force can be generated regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

  That is, from the state shown in FIG. 58 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 58 (b), the degree of the linear motion displacement in the left-right direction is larger than the degree of the rotational displacement. When the vertically reversing member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in front view beyond FIG. 57B, the degree of the linear motion displacement in the left-right direction is settled, and a rotational displacement occurs.

  According to the present embodiment, a similar effect occurs because the slider crank mechanism is employed as described above. That is, in the vicinity of the vertical arrangement state, the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction. Therefore, the displacement in the left-right direction of the translation plate member 784 is large, and the rotation displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is small.

  On the other hand, since the displacement of the cylindrical projection 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and increases in the up-down direction as the longitudinal direction of the upside-down reversing member 781 falls closer to the left-right direction, the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 becomes smaller. The rotation amount is small and the rotation amount is large. Therefore, the horizontal displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is large.

  Therefore, in the rotation operation of the upside-down reversing member 781 starting from the vertical arrangement state and ending in the vertical arrangement state, first, the degree of the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 increases, and then the degree of the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 decreases. The degree of displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 in the left-right direction increases again.

  When the linear displacement and the rotational displacement are generated in such an order, the extending portion 787c of the covering member 787 is provided at the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772. Collisions can be avoided. Next, a change in the appearance of the covering member 787 will be described.

  59 (a) to 59 (c) are front views of the rendering device 780. FIG. 59 (a) to 59 (c), the reversing operation of the elevating reversal effect device 770 is illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 59 (a) shows the rendering device 780 with the upside down member 781 in the upright vertical arrangement state, and FIG. 59 (b) shows the rendering device when the upside down member 781 is rotated 90 degrees from the vertical arrangement state. 780 is illustrated, and in FIG. 59 (c), the rendering device 780 in an upside-down vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781 is illustrated.

  The upside down member 781 is turned 180 degrees counterclockwise in front view from the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A), thereby changing the state to the inverted vertical arrangement state. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the covering member 787 is inverted by 180 degrees with respect to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59A). Thus, the decorative surface that can be visually recognized by the player is switched (see FIG. 59 (c)).

  When the vertically reversing member 781 is displaced 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) as viewed from the front in the inverted vertical arrangement state, it returns to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A). Therefore, every time when the driving motor 782 (see FIG. 56) is driven by reversing the direction so that the upside down reversing member 781 is rotated and displaced by 180 degrees, the state shown in FIG. ) Can be repeatedly switched between the states.

  As described above, while the upside-down inversion member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57 (a), the shaft rotation member 785 engages with the beveled tooth portion 783c to rotate the shaft rotation member 785 by 180 degrees. I do. Here, from the rotation direction of the beveled tooth portion 783c, the right shaft rotating member 785 rotates backward, and the left shaft rotating member 785 rotates forward. That is, the pair of shaft rotation members 785 and the cover member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d arranged in the left and right directions rotate in opposite directions.

  Therefore, at an intermediate position, the right covering member 787 faces the second sub-decoration surface 787b2 toward the front side, and the left covering member 787 faces the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 toward the front side (see FIG. 59B). ).

  Accordingly, during the rotational displacement of the covering member 787, the first sub-decorating surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorating surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first sub-decorating surface 787a2 ( Or, it can be avoided that the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) is visually recognized together.

  Therefore, the decoration surface of the covering member 787 during the rotational displacement can be intentionally left and right shifted in content, and the content of the decorative surface can be configured to be difficult for the player to recognize. The amount of information provided by the covering member 787 to the player can be reduced.

  Thereby, the player's attention to the covering member 787 during the rotational displacement can be reduced. Further, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotation displacement is stopped, the game is performed until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops. The effect that the line of sight of the user is easily maintained by the covering member 787 can also be achieved.

  The rotational displacement is performed in the extended state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 54), but this rotational displacement stops, and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are changed to the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787a1). In the state where the two main decoration surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the effect device 780 has been raised to near the upper and lower center of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state, the first sub decoration surface 787a2. (Or the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) is unlikely to attract attention.

  In particular, especially when the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operation unit 700, the field of view on the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) is changed to the third operation. It will be blocked by the unit 800.

  On the other hand, when the second operation unit 700 is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52) and the effect device 780 is disposed below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the first sub decorative surface 787a2 (or). The second sub-decoration surface 787b2) can easily enter the player's field of view.

  As described above, in the second operation unit 700, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is prevented from being visually recognized during the rotational displacement in the extended state, or the player side. For example, in the effect standby state, it is formed as a side surface that can be noticed by the player.

  Thus, the appearance of the second operation unit 700 can be changed according to the arrangement, so that the production performance with respect to the cost of arranging the second operation unit 700 (occupation of a place, burden of concealing it well) becomes excessively low. The occurrence of a state can be easily avoided.

  After the rotation of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787, the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54B), thereby stabilizing the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787. Can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, since the metal member that is attracted to the magnet Mg is formed of a metal screw, the cost of the member can be reduced and the maintainability can be improved as compared with a case where a dedicated metal member is designed. .

  As described above, since the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by a linear motion displacement in the left-right direction, the arrangement of the rendering device 780 capable of performing the rotational displacement is limited. That is, in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member arranged on the left and right are performed by performing rotational displacement. 750 and the front support member 760, and decorative members such as the three-dimensional decorative portion 768 a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof will collide with the covering member 787.

  On the other hand, in the extended state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 30), the space is secured in the left-right direction, so that the rotation of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 can be performed.

  Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is determined from the output of the detection sensor 713 that the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state. It is controlled to be executable on the assumption of. Thus, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 can be normally caused.

  The extending portions 787c are arranged close to each other in the vertically arranged state of the upside-down reversing member 781, and in this state, they are opposed to the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772 at the front and rear. Therefore, when the cover member 787 is rotationally displaced from this arrangement by the rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction, the extension portion 787c collides with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, Failure occurs.

  On the other hand, the configuration in which the extending portion 787c is arranged close to the other is to produce an effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized integrally, and is a configuration necessary for production, Preferably, it can be maintained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced by the length L1 in the left-right direction before the rotational displacement (see FIG. 57). By the linear motion displacement of the length L1, the extending portion 787c can be retracted from a position before and after the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772, and the extending portion 787c and the upper elongated portion 775 can be retracted. It is possible to avoid a problem in which the connecting portion of the lower elongate portion 772 collides with the connecting portion.

  Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this manner, the rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) at the length L1 while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and the rotational displacement occurs at the remaining length L2. Therefore, the amount of displacement in the left-right direction during rotation of the covering member 787 can be reduced.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the arrangement of the covering member 787 changes greatly during rotation, the attention force of the covering member 787 can be suppressed low, and the rotational displacement can be made inconspicuous. As the design of the surfaces 787a1 to 787b2, it is possible to perform the design while ignoring the appearance during the rotational displacement, so that the degree of design freedom can be improved.

  The timing at which the covering member 787 starts rotating can be arbitrarily set by designing the attraction force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, for example, even if a design change is made to increase the left and right width of the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771, the magnet Mg Is changed to a magnet having a large attraction force, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the collision between the connecting portion and the extending portion 787c.

  As shown by imaginary lines in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is arranged so as to be always hidden by the covering member 787. This can prevent the player from visually recognizing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c, and can prevent the effect from being reduced by the fastening screw.

  In this embodiment, the decorations (graphics, patterns, patterns, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same for the left and right covering members 787. The arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right asymmetric in accordance with the right and left decorations.

  That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion into which the fastening screw is inserted, it becomes impossible to arrange the LED on the electric decoration board 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). Further, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, the fastening screw is likely to be dark and visible at the time of emitting light.

  Therefore, in the left and right decorations, it is desirable to dispose the insertion holes 778c so as to avoid a brightly lit and conspicuous portion. As a result, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right asymmetric.

  Note that the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right symmetric. In particular, when the decoration of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 is the same on the left and right covering members 787, there is no disadvantage caused by arranging the insertion holes 778c symmetrically, and the illuminated substrate 778a can be easily designed.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the present embodiment, the covering member 787 is linearly displaced left and right during the reversing operation of the elevating / reversing effect device 770, and the vicinity of the central portion of the light diffusing member 778b is the extended portion 787c. Even when not surrounded by, the mechanical parts such as the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 are hidden so as not to be visually recognized.

  That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit into the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b disposed on the front side, and the vertical width of the linear motion plate member 784 is Are designed to fit in the upper and lower widths of the left and right long portions of the upper long portion 775. The upside down member 781 is designed to have a shape that fits in the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper long portion 775 disposed on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that the displacement trajectory fits in the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b. Designed.

  As a result, the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the rendering device 780 can be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and can be made invisible, so that the rendering effect due to the appearance of the rendering device 780 during the reversing operation is reduced. Can be avoided.

  Returning to FIG. The third operation unit 800 is arranged above the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the effect standby state, and is supported by the distal ends of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the rear case 510. The unit is configured to be able to be displaced up and down as the elevating arm member 801 is driven in the vertical direction.

  FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. In FIGS. 60 and 61, a portion constituting the displacement of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated, and the illustration of the decorative members 870 and 880 as decorative portions disposed outside is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the third operation unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by the elevating arm member 801 and a fixed cylinder to which the cylindrical portion 821 is fastened and fixed to the center of the held member 810. The member 820, an inner rotating member 830 supported by the cylindrical portion 821 with the cylindrical portion 821 inserted through the inner peripheral side, and a main body portion 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted through the inner peripheral side. The rotatable outer rotating member 840, a plurality (five in this embodiment) of intermediate arm members 850 rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and the held member 810 And a drive transmitting device 860 for transmitting a driving force for displacing the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

  The held member 810 includes a disk-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated lid member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

  The main body member 811 has a cylindrical fixing portion 812 which is concavely formed at a center portion to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and has an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw for fixing and a through hole for inserting electric wiring. A detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler-type sensor and is fixed with its detection groove facing the side capable of receiving the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840, a motor holding portion 814 holding the drive motor 861, A plurality of cylindrical protrusions 815 projecting forward from the front as cylindrical portions that support the transmission gear 863 so that they cannot fall off, and a double cylindrical portion that supports the load response gear 865 so that they can not fall off. And a plurality of double cylindrical protrusions 816 that are protruded.

  The perforated lid member 817 has a circular hole 818 formed in the center in the front-rear direction. The circular hole 818 is designed to have such a size that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 project inward from the inner peripheral edge thereof when viewed in the opening direction.

  The fixed cylindrical member 820 includes the above-described cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, and a light emitting unit such as an LED on the front side which is fastened and fixed to the circular plate portion 822. A disc-shaped illuminated substrate 823 to be provided, and a light-transmitting resin material formed of an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) light-transmitting resin material capable of covering the illuminated substrate 823 from the front side A decorative member 824 and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 821 on the circular plate portion 822 side and configured to be slidable with the cylindrical portion 821.

  The cylindrical portion 821 has a female screw formed at the front end portion on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the cylindrical fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female screw, thereby fixing the cylindrical member. The member 820 is non-rotatably fastened and fixed to the held member 810.

  The cylindrical portion 821 is formed so as to penetrate in the axial direction on the inner peripheral side, and the electric wiring inserted through the through hole of the cylindrical fixing portion 812 is creeped to the front side through this penetrating portion, and is disposed behind the electric decoration board 823. Connected to the connector.

  The illuminated substrate 823 includes, as LEDs, pentagonal vertices and an inner light emitting portion 823a arranged at a center position equidistant from the vertices, and an outer light emitting portion 823b arranged at 15 locations on the circumference at equal intervals. And. The inner light emitting unit 823a is configured by an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (front), and the outer light emitting unit 823b is configured by an LED whose optical axis is directed radially outward (diametrically).

  The outer light emitting portion 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As will be described later, the light emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b is applied to the plating portion 871a of the first decorative member 870 arranged closely and at equal intervals on the circumference. The member 870 is irradiated with light from the three LEDs.

  The outer light emitting portion 823b is fixedly arranged on the electric decoration board 823, and the first decoration member 870 is configured to be rotationally displaced around the center of the circle, but the outer light emitting portion 823b and the first decoration member 870 are coaxial. Are arranged at regular intervals on the circle of the first decorative member 870, regardless of the rotation direction of the first decorative member 870, the light from the same number (three in this embodiment) of LEDs is always applied to each first decorative member 870. Can be irradiated.

  Thus, it is possible to suppress a change in the light amount of the light LD1 applied to the first decoration member 870 during the rotation operation.

  The sliding member 825 is configured such that the inner diameter side portion is slidable on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, while the outer diameter side portion is slidable on the circular flange portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830. Formed.

  The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side, and has a cylindrical portion projecting rearward from the inner diameter side end of the flange-shaped portion. The diameter is formed to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange portion 831a, so that the inner portion is slidably fitted to the inner rotating member 830.

  The interposition of the sliding member 825 prevents direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 rotatable therearound. Further, the sliding member 825 is disposed on the side of the circular plate portion 822 of the cylindrical portion 821 and also on the side of the main body portion 831 on the side of the circular flange-like portion 831a which is advantageous in terms of strength. The possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 or the inner rotating member 830 is damaged or deformed by a load generated at the time of poor sliding (when the displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive) can be reduced.

  The inner rotating member 830 has a cylindrical main body 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end and a radially elongated direction at a position obtained by dividing the periphery of the main body 831 into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. A plurality of metal rods 832 fastened and fixed to the circular flange-shaped portion 831 a in a posture along the plurality of metal rods 832, and a plurality of metal rods 832 formed so as to be inserted therethrough and configured to be linearly displaceable by being guided by the metal rods 832. And a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported at a radially outer portion of the linear moving member 833.

  The main body portion 831 includes a plurality of sliding protrusions extending rearward in a ridge shape with the circular flange-shaped portion 831a as a base end at an intermediate angular position (five places) between the above-described circular flange-shaped portion 831a and the adjacent metal bar 832. It has a ridge portion 831b and a plurality of recessed portions 831c which are recessed and formed at circumferentially spaced intervals at the end opposite to the circular flange portion 831a.

  The sliding ridge 831b is a portion configured to be slidable on the inner peripheral side curved surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and to reduce a contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and reduce contact friction. The protruding tip is formed in a semicircular cross section.

  The arrangement of the sliding ridges 831b is set at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent metal rods 832 as described above. In other words, the sliding ridges 831b are located on the opposite side of the metal rod 832 with respect to the center axis of the outer rotating member 840. Position (a position shifted by 180 degrees).

  Thus, in the switching rotation operation described later, the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832, and the load is applied so that the outer rotary member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally displaced radially. Even if the outer rotating member 840 is displaced, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be received by the sliding ridge 831b. Can be kept low.

  The recessed portion 831c is a portion where the transmission protrusion 864a of the central annular gear 864 enters and is disposed. By disposing the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, relative rotation of each other is disabled. The rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830 can be matched.

  The linear motion member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protruding portions 833a and 833b that are arranged at intervals so as to be arranged in the linear motion displacement direction and protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape, and the cylindrical protruding portions 833a. , 833b as a reference, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c formed on a side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 and inserted through the rotating member 834, and a distal end portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c along the circumferential direction. And a recessed groove 833d to be recessed.

  The recessed groove 833d is arranged on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and the overhanging portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 slide. By being fitted to the outside as much as possible, it functions as a displacement regulating groove for preventing the rotating member 834 from dropping in a radially outward direction, which will be described later in detail.

  The rotating member 834 includes a bevel gear 834a formed in a bevel gear shape, and a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 834b protruding in a cylindrical shape in parallel with the linear motion direction. The beveled tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over 3/4 circumference (about 270 degrees) necessary for operation.

  A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and the decorative members 870, 880 are formed by screwing fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880. It functions so as to be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, but details will be described later.

  The outer rotating member 840 has a cylindrical body 841 and a plurality (five in this embodiment) extending radially outward at a position obtained by dividing the circumference of the body 841 into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. Of the main body 841, a gear tooth 843 formed on the outer peripheral side along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841, and a diameter of the main body 841 which can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. And a detected portion 844 extending outward.

  The extension arm portion 842 includes a cylindrical portion 842 a extending parallel to the central axis of the main body portion 841, a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842 a, and the base end of the intermediate arm member 850. By screwing a fastening screw into the female screw in a state where the cylindrical portion 842a is inserted into the side bar portion 851, the intermediate arm member 850 is supported by the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off.

  The gear teeth 843 are provided so as to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, thereby functioning as a portion that switches the presence or absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, which will be described later in detail.

  The intermediate arm member 850 is a member that is formed in a long shape, and includes a base rod 851 whose one end is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 842 a of the outer rotation member 840, and another part of the base rod 851. A thickened portion 852 which is thickened toward the front side at the end side, and a distal end side rod portion 853 which extends from the front end portion of the thickened portion 852 in parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base side rod portion 851. And a rotation transmitting portion 854 formed with gear teeth at the end of the tip side rod portion 853.

  The rotation transmitting portion 854 is a portion that interlocks with the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834, and has a supported hole 854a that is formed in a dimensional relationship that can rotate relative to each other with the cylindrical projecting portion 833a inserted. A guide hole 854b, which is a long hole formed in an arc centered on the supported hole 854a and guides the cylindrical projected portion 833b while being inserted therethrough, and a bevel gear having the supported hole 854a as a central axis. And a bevel gear 854c that meshes with the bevel gear 834a of the rotating member 834 to form a bevel gear.

  The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 fastened and fixed to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 861, and a drive supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 815 so as not to fall off. A plurality of transmission gears 863 meshed so as to be able to transmit the driving force via the gear 862, a central annular gear 864 meshed with the transmission gear 863, and a front side of the arrangement of the central annular gear 864. A pair of load response gears 865 which are displaced and are pivotally supported by the double cylindrical protrusion 816 so as not to fall off, and are supported by the double cylinder of the double cylindrical protrusion 816 on the back side of the load response gear 865. A torque limiter 866 whose resistance according to the load in the rotation direction applied to the load response gear 865 is variable.

  The central annular gear 864 is formed in an annular shape, and is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted into the inner peripheral side thereof, and is recessed so as to be able to enter the concave portion 831 c of the inner rotating member 830. A transmission projection 864a projecting from the bottom plate portion to the front side in an arrangement and a shape corresponding to the setting portion 831c, and a coaxial double annular bottom plate disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission projection 864a. And a support annular portion 864b protruding from the portion to the front side.

  In the assembled state, the rear end of the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 has an intermediate fit in the gap between the support annular portions 864b in a state where the transmission protrusion 864a enters the recessed portion 831c. Alternatively, they are fitted in a dimensional relationship of interference fit. Thereby, the central annular gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be integrally rotated.

  The arrangement of the recess 831c and the transmission protrusion 864a is not limited at all. For example, they may be arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, or may be arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction.

  If the intervals are equal, it is possible to assemble the transmission projection 864a and the recessed portion 831c by adjusting the arrangement of the transmission projection 864a and the recessed portion 831c without considering the attitude of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864. It is possible to do. As in the present embodiment, when the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (the same at 72-degree intervals), the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are set. It is considered that there is little influence due to misalignment at the time of assembling, so that equal intervals are effective.

  If the intervals are unequal, during the assembling operation, the number of steps for assembling the center annular gear 864 with respect to the inner rotating member 830 and then assembling is increased by one, but the transmission protrusion 864a to the recessed portion 831c is increased. By utilizing the arrangement, the posture of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 can be adjusted.

  The load response gear 865 is provided so as to mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840. Since the torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, the load response gear 865 is caused by the magnitude of the rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 and the outer rotating member 840. The state in which the rotation of the 865 is permitted and the state in which the rotation is restricted (restricted) are switched.

  That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied, and release transmission of the driving force. In the present embodiment, a device (one-way torque limiter) for transmitting a driving force in one direction is constituted by a set in which the transmission direction is reversed, and switching of drive transmission by the torque limiter 866 can be performed in two directions with good responsiveness. It is configured as follows.

  FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. 62 and 63, the decorative portion of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated, and a portion for configuring the displacement is not illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the third operation unit 800 is configured such that one of the inner rotating member 830 and one of the cylindrical projecting portions 834 b fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834 b of the inner rotating member 830. A first decorative member 870 that covers the side surface, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b and covers the cylindrical projecting portion 834b from the side opposite to the first decorative member 870. .

  The first decorative member 870 includes a first skeleton portion 871 formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 formed to cover one side of the first skeleton portion 871. , Is provided.

  The first skeleton portion 871 is entirely plated so as to easily reflect light.

  The first covering portion 875 has a frame formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material on the inside of the frame, and has a figure, a pattern, and a picture of a character (hereinafter, also referred to as “picture etc.”) drawn on its surface. When the front surface faces the front side, the pattern or the like is visually recognized by the player.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of (five) first covering portions 875 each have an independent pattern or the like. Therefore, by changing the first covering portion 875 that emits light intensely by the light emission control by the electric decoration board 823 or changing the arrangement of the first covering portion 875, the pattern or the like that attracts the player's attention is different. Can be made.

  For example, at the player's point of view, the third symbol display device 81 executes a display effect that causes the third symbol display device 81 to pay attention to which of the first covering portions 875 is stopped, and at the same time, the inner rotating member 830. Is controlled so as to rotate, the first covering portion 875 on the third symbol display device 81 side can be continuously changed with the rotation, so that the player can be changed over until the rotation stops. Can be gathered in the first covering portion 875.

  The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton 881 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a second covering portion 885 formed to cover the other side of the second skeleton 881. , Is provided.

  The second skeleton portion 881 includes a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 accommodated in the second covering portion 885 so as not to fall off.

  A metal screw is screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 at a position (adjacent position) where the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second covering portion 885 acts. The magnet Mg2 is attracted to the screw to ensure the integrity of the second covering portion 885 in the united state (particularly, one united state, see FIG. 32).

  The second covering portion 885 has a figure, a pattern, and a pattern of a character (hereinafter, also referred to as a "pattern") drawn on the surface, and when the surface faces the front side, the pattern or the like is played. Is visually recognized.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of (at least two, at most five) second covering portions 885 form a pattern drawn on a plurality (five in the present embodiment) of second covering portions 885. Each of the second covering portions 885 is formed in a circle so that the five second covering portions 885 are visually recognized as a “circular body” when viewed from the front when the five second covering portions 885 are combined. Decorated to form part of the body.

  The pattern or the like drawn on the second covering portion 885 is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the content grasped from the second covering portion 885 in the union state is the rotation direction of the second decorative member 880. It is designed as a picture that does not make a big difference even if the arrangement of is different. That is, the design does not have a clear upper, lower, left and right pattern, and the design is such that a change in the outer shape is not conspicuous even when rotated (in the present embodiment, a circular shape).

  Therefore, the direction in which the plurality of second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other can improve the performance when the second covering portion 885 is visually recognized by a player. In this regard, in the present embodiment, in the united state, the second covering unit 885 side is firmly integrated by the attraction force of the magnet Mg2, so that the uniting when the second covering unit 885 is disposed on the front side. The effect performance in the state can be improved.

  In each of the second covering portions 885, a magnet Mg2 is provided on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the other side. When the direction of the second covering portion 885 is reversed by the switching rotation operation described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in a front view is also reversed.

  Also in this case, the metal screws that each magnet Mg2 attracts are replaced only by the metal screws that are screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 adjacent on the opposite side. Since the portions 885 are arranged in an annular shape, there is no change in the degree of adsorption when they are integrated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not contain a magnet. As a result, the strength of integration on the side of the first covering portion 875 is slightly weakened, but this prevents the performance performance from being reduced.

  In other words, since the first covering portion 875 has an independent pattern or the like, the degree of integration in the united state is weak, and even if the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is slightly shifted, There is no possibility that a pattern or the like to be visually recognized by a person cannot be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance performance of the performance using the pattern drawn on the first covering portion 875 from being reduced.

  Further, since the strength of the integration on the first covering portion 875 side is weakened, the vibration caused by the vertical displacement (stop from) and the rotational displacement as integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation (stop from). ), The arrangement of the combined first covering portions 875 can be shifted. Thus, the first covering portion 875 can be displaced in a displacing mode that cannot be realized by a conventional machine in which the first covering portion 875 is not a divided body but is constituted by a single circular member. The production effect of the production by the covering portion 875 can be improved.

  From the above situation, in the united state in which the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged close to each other, a state in which the first decorative member 870 faces the front side is also referred to as an individual united state (see FIG. 31), and the second decorative member 880 is the front side. Is also referred to as one union state (see FIG. 32). Next, an operation for switching between the individual united state and the united state will be described.

  FIGS. 64 (a), 64 (b), 65 (a) and 65 (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) ), FIG. 67 (a) and FIG. 67 (b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

  64 to 67, the driving force of the driving motor 861 (see FIG. 60) is transmitted, and the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850, which is displaced by the relative rotation of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840, is performed. Are illustrated in chronological order.

  That is, it is illustrated in chronological order in the rear view and the front view, and illustrates a state in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates by 45 degrees from the individual united state (FIGS. 64A and 66A). .

  64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is described as a virtual position line 832F, and the change in the angle of the arrangement of the virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. The rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830 from the individual united state (FIGS. 64A and 66A) is illustrated by an angle θ31.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise from the individual united state in a front view (see FIG. 66) (this rotating operation is hereinafter also referred to as “switching rotating operation”). Since the rotation of the arm member 850 is allowed, the relative rotation of the inner rotating member 830 with respect to the outer rotating member 840 is allowed. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

  Therefore, in FIGS. 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

  From the configuration between the above-described members, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and the cylindrical projection 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a. The change in the arrangement of the supported hole 854a corresponds to the change in the arrangement of the linear member 833.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the rotation transmitting unit 854 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830 and simultaneously displaced in the circumferential direction. Similarly, the member 834 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830, and is simultaneously displaced in the circumferential direction. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction with displacement in the radial direction.

  Since the switching rotation operation includes the circumferential displacement, even in the radial end position, the arrangement of the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed thereto is not fixed, Since the displacement can be maintained, the effect of the effect during the switching rotation operation can be reduced as compared with the case where the displacement is completed only by the direct translational displacement in the radial direction (for example, the reversing operation described above in the second operation unit 700). Can be kept high.

  On the other hand, in the reversing operation described above in the second operation unit 700, a high-acceleration rotation operation using the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58) is caused. This is intended to weaken the impression that the arrangement of the covering member 787 at the end of the displacement in the linear motion direction outer side (see FIG. 59B) is fixed.

  That is, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is improved, and the change width of the left and right positions is small at the end of the laterally outward displacement ( Even in a situation where the period near the dead center of the slider crank continues, the effect of the operation of the covering member 787 is maintained at a high level by increasing the rotation speed of the covering member 787.

  Since the switching rotation operation includes a radial displacement, a radial load is likely to be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, and there is a possibility that the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 is shifted. In the embodiment, since the loads in the radial direction of the intermediate arm member 850 are similarly generated at equal intervals (72-degree intervals) about the rotation axis, the loads cancel each other. Accordingly, the displacement of the rotation axis of the outer rotation member 840 can be suppressed, and the switching rotation operation can be easily performed normally.

  As described above, the radial displacement (enlargement / reduction displacement) in the rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 occurs while rotating in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in order to avoid a collision with the surrounding decoration member, the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 is performed by detecting that the posture of the elevating arm member 801 is determined when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state. It is controlled to be executable in the state determined by the output of the sensor.

  In addition, with the above-described displacement of the rotation transmitting unit 854, the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 fastened and fixed to the rotation member 834 also similarly have a radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830. Displaced and, at the same time, displaced circumferentially.

  When the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced, the beveled tooth portion 854c (see FIGS. 66 and 67) meshes with the beveled tooth portion 834a (see FIG. 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the rotating member are rotated. The decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the member 834 are rotationally displaced around the metal rod 832.

  The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotational angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with reference to the virtual position line 832F. In addition, the rotation direction is increased so that the angle θ32 is separated from the virtual position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the rotation member 834 is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60). ), Are set in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the radially outer side of the virtual position line 832F.

  Since the rotating member 834 is in a posture in which either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side in the integrally rotating state, the maximum angle θ31E as the maximum value of the angle θ31 (in the present embodiment, 180 ° When the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 becomes the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in the present embodiment) as a result of the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the beveled tooth portion 834a of the rotation member 834 rotates half a turn (180 degrees rotation). ).

  That is, the angle at which the rotation member 834 rotates about the metal rod 832 is configured to be twice the rotation angle about the supported hole 854a of the beveled tooth portion 854c.

  Here, unlike what was described as the action of the magnet Mg of the second operation unit 700 described above, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) indicates the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 about the metal rod 832. It does not cause an effect of delaying rotation.

  That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force between the adjacent second decoration member 880 and the decoration member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 with the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850. Accordingly, a gap is generated between the adjacent second decorative members 880, so that the attraction force may be lost.

  Therefore, before the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 is started, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and the rotation is performed with respect to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 about the metal rod 832. There is no delay effect.

  Therefore, the driving force required to rotationally displace the decoration members 870 and 880 can be reduced. That is, since the driving force required for the drive motor 861 can be reduced, the size of the drive motor 861 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be started quickly and terminated early, the player's attention to the rotational displacement centered on the metal bar 832 can be reduced.

  The quickness at the start of the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870, 880 with respect to the rotational angle of the inner rotational member 830 to be not constant.

  For example, in the process of rotating the intermediate arm member 850, the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F (the rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830) from the state where the diameter of the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced and the integrated rotation operation is possible is 45 degrees. , The angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66 (b)), and the angle θ32 when the virtual position line 832F is rotated at an angle of 45 degrees is 27 degrees (FIG. 67 (a)). reference).

  That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller on the rotation start side of the inner rotation member 830 from the state where the integral rotation operation is possible, as compared with the rotation in the middle. Thus, the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 at the time of starting rotation of the inner rotating member 830 can be suppressed.

  The driving force of the drive motor 861 is used for the rotation of the inner rotation member 830, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, and the rotation of the decoration members 870 and 880. Since the driving force required to rotate the decoration members 870 and 880 when the rotation of the inner rotation member 830 starts from a possible state can be reduced, the load applied to the drive motor 861 when the rotation of the inner rotation member 830 starts is excessively increased. It can be prevented from becoming large.

  In addition, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 about the metal rod 832 occurs while being displaced in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, the visibility of the decorative members 870 and 880 during the rotational displacement can be suppressed low. it can. Thereby, the possibility that the side surfaces of the decorative members 870 and 880 (for example, the connecting surface between the first covering portion 875 and the second covering portion 885) can be reduced, and the decorative members 870 and 880 can be reduced. The degree of freedom in the design of the side surface portion can be improved.

  At the time of the switching rotation operation, the arrangement of the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps with the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in a front view. In addition, the arrangement also overlaps with the extension arm 842 provided adjacent to the extension arm 842 on which the cylindrical portion 842a on which the cylinder is supported is disposed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 collides with a peripheral part without taking measures.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a collision is avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. In other words, the distal rod 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 are disposed rearward of the proximal rod 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, so that the proximal rod 851 and the distal rod 851 are disposed on the rear side. The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be made to overlap in front and back, and it is possible to avoid collision during the switching rotation operation.

  In addition, the base rod 851 is disposed on the front side of the extending arm 842, and the distal rod 853 and the rotation transmitting section 854 are disposed on the rear of the extending arm 842, so that the switching rotation operation is performed. In this case, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged before and after the extended arm portion 842, and collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

  In FIGS. 64 to 67, the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 with respect to the outer rotation member 840 is the direction in which the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is allowed (counterclockwise direction in front view in the individual united state; see FIG. 66). ). In this case, the gear teeth 843 are meshed with the load response gear 865 that generates the resistance via the torque limiter 866, so that the resistance is received, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotation member 840 is limited.

  On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 is the above-described reverse direction (clockwise direction in front view in the individual united state), or in a direction that allows the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise in front view in the individual united state). If rotation in the same direction is continued after rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state where rotation is restricted by the rotation in the (circumferential direction) (for example, from the individual union state to the union state), the outer side A load exceeding the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 for restricting the rotation of the rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, and the maintenance of the attitude of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are released. And rotate synchronously.

  In other words, regardless of the rotation direction, in a state where the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is regulated, when the inner rotation member 830 is driven to rotate in the direction in which the regulation of the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is continued. The inner rotation member 830 and the outer rotation member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decoration member 870, and the second decoration member 880 rotate integrally while maintaining the united state (this rotation operation is hereinafter referred to as " Integrated rotation operation ").

  The integral rotation operation occurs in a state in which the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted. In the present embodiment, the integral rotation operation occurs in a united state in which the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 are arranged close to each other.

  Therefore, unlike the switching rotation operation in which the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 are displaced in the radial direction, it is not necessary to consider the collision with the surrounding decoration members. In the state, the integral rotation operation can be performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the integral rotation operation is controlled to be executable regardless of the arrangement of the third operation unit 800.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, by the driving force of the single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60), the switching rotation operation involving the radial displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880, The first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be integrally rotated without any radial displacement, and any of the operations can be performed in both driving directions. Therefore, it is not always possible to execute an arbitrary operation in an arbitrary rotation direction.

  For example, from the state shown in FIG. 64A and FIG. 66A, the switching rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotation member 830 counterclockwise in front view, and if the rotation is continued as it is, the switching rotation operation can be performed. The rotation operation can be performed, and the integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotation member 830 clockwise in front view. However, the integral rotation operation is immediately performed by counterclockwise rotation in front view. Can not be performed.

  Also, for example, from the state shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a), the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view, and after the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state where the rotation is regulated. When the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation is performed again, and immediately, the integrated rotation operation is performed clockwise when viewed from the front. Can not.

  As described above, the operation mode of the third operation unit 800 according to the present embodiment depends on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or allowed with respect to the rotation direction of the drive motor 861. The relative displacement between the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 changes.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) determines, for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861, whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted. It is possible to control the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction based on the determination result. Hereinafter, an example of drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described.

  FIG. 68 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the driving mode of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in chronological order. As shown in FIG. 68, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled so as to alternately repeat the normal effect and the reverse effect as the effect control of the third operation unit 800.

  At the time of the reversal effect, an operation including the switching rotation operation is executed, and at the time of the normal effect, an operation not including the switching rotation operation is executed. This is to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from colliding with surrounding decorative members in the switching rotation operation.

  For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power failure, or when the power is turned on in the morning, the third operation unit 800 is set in the extended state, and then the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed. After the state of the movable part is grasped from the output of the detection sensor 813, the control is performed so as to execute the control in the normal effect. Accordingly, even when the state of the movable part cannot be grasped from the output result of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870 and 880 and the surrounding decorative members accidentally collide. .

  The driving direction of the driving motor 861 is described as a forward rotation and a reverse rotation. The forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a driving mode in which the inner rotation member 830 is rotated clockwise in front view (a driving mode in which the integral rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual united state (see FIG. 66A)). The reverse rotation at 68 corresponds to a driving mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view (a driving mode in which the switching rotation operation is immediately executed in the individual united state).

  First, a description will be given of drive control during a normal effect before the time of the reverse effect. At the time of this normal effect, the third operation unit 800 is in the individual united state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only the forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is always an integral rotation operation.

  Since the switching rotation operation does not occur, the collision with the surrounding decoration member cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the effect standby state or the extended state at any timing. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is displaced up and down by the up and down movement of the up and down arm member 801, the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 are simultaneously rotated together with the up and down displacement. It is controlled so that an action can be caused.

  Of course, the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 may be caused to rotate integrally with each other while the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 may be integrally rotated. The raising / lowering operation of the raising / lowering arm member 801 may be performed in a state where the integral rotation operation is stopped.

  Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only forward rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched every time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and it is determined that this output is switched. The voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 as an initial position, and by setting a plurality of types of driving times from this initial position, the outer rotating member 840 can be arbitrarily set. It can be controlled to stop at the posture of.

  Next, the drive control during the reversal effect will be described. First, at the time of the reversal effect, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operation unit 800 is set in the extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled so as to continue to rotate forward until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

  When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching of the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. In the third operation unit 800, the switching rotation operation is performed by the reverse rotation drive. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so that the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. You.

  When the drive of the drive motor 861 is continued in the same rotation direction, the united state is reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are integrally rotated. After the start of the integral rotation operation, the outer rotation member 840 also starts rotating in conjunction with the inner rotation member 830, so that the detected portion 844 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integrated rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 has been started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813.

  After the start of the integral rotation operation, the drive motor 861 is stopped, or only the reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is always an integral rotation operation. Since the switching rotation operation does not occur, the collision with the surrounding decoration member cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the effect standby state or the extended state at any timing.

  Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only reverse rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches every time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840.

  When switching from the reverse effect to the normal effect, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced in advance, and the third operation unit 800 is set in the extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue reverse rotation until the detection target 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

  When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven to rotate forward. In the third operation unit 800, the switching rotation operation is performed by the forward rotation drive. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so that the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. You.

  Next, the integrally rotating operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is performed. After the start of the integral rotation operation, when the outer rotation member 840 starts rotating, the detected portion 844 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integrated rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 has been started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813.

  After the unitary rotation operation is started, the process returns to the normal performance again. The restrictions on the drive control during the normal effect are the same as the restrictions on the drive control described during the normal effect, which are arranged before the reverse effect.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 determines whether to switch the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and determines the rotation angle of the outer rotation member 840. It can be shared with the determination of the reference. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced as compared with the case where individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

  As described above, the switching rotation operation can be performed by switching the driving direction of the driving motor 861 from the state where the integral rotation operation is continued or the state where the rotation is stopped to the opposite direction. That is, regardless of the attitude of the first decoration member 870 in the individual united state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the one united state.

  Therefore, in the motion effect, when controlling to switch to the union state at the timing of the jackpot notification, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting the presence or absence of the jackpot notification from the attitude of the first decorative member 870.

  Further, as described above, the decoration in the union state is designed so that the content recognized by the player does not largely differ depending on the arrangement of the second decoration member 880 in the rotation direction. That is, even when the arrangement of the decoration members 870 and 880 in the rotation direction at the start of the switching rotation operation is different, the contents recognized by the player as one union state at the end of the switching rotation operation are the same. can do.

  Therefore, unlike the case where the patterns in the one united state differ in the arrangement in the rotation direction, the integral rotation operation for adjusting the posture after reaching the one united state can be omitted, and thus the first decorative member in the individual united state Regardless of the position of 870, the drive control up to the jackpot notification can be the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation can be realized by both the forward rotation and the reverse rotation as the driving direction of the drive motor 861. Therefore, as compared with the case where the operation mode is fixed between the forward rotation and the reverse rotation, it is possible to realize various effect modes with the single drive motor 861.

  FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit 800 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end of the held member 810 where the cylindrical fixing portion 812 is arranged to the front end where the electric decoration substrate 823 is arranged. The electric wiring is guided from the rear end to the front end through this opening, and the terminal is connected to a connector provided on the electric decoration board 823. Electricity is conducted through the electric wiring, and the LEDs arranged on the electric decoration board 823 can be controlled to emit light.

  The light LH <b> 1 emitted from the inner light emitting portion 823 a of the electric decoration substrate 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824 a bulging to the front side at the center of the translucent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion that can be visually recognized by a player at the center of a circle where the first decoration member 870 or the second decoration member 880 is arranged on the circumference when the decoration members 870 and 880 are united. I do.

  The light LD1 emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b of the electric decoration substrate 823 is irradiated inside decoration members 870, 880 (first decoration member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged on the front side, and the decoration members 870, 880 Works to illuminate from inside.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual united state in which the decorative member 870 is arranged on the front side (see FIG. 69) and a single united state in which the decorative member 880 is arranged on the front side (see FIG. 32). Therefore, the case where the decoration member 870 is illuminated by the light LD1 and the case where the decoration member 880 is illuminated can be switched.

  In the individual united state (see FIG. 69), the direction of the light LD1 is switched to the front side by being reflected to the front side by the plated portion 871a of the first skeleton portion 871 which has been plated. Thereby, most of the light LD1 can be irradiated so as to be directed to the first covering portion 875, and the brightness of the first covering portion 875 at the time of irradiation with the light LD1 can be favorably increased.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the illumination substrate 823 is fixedly disposed, and the decoration members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around the illumination substrate 823. Therefore, the irradiation direction of the light LD1 and the decoration members 870 and 880 are controlled. The relationship with the arrangement can be changed by the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880. For example, if the light LD1 is irradiated to the center of the plating unit 871a during rotation, the light LD1 irradiated from the same LED may be irradiated to a position shifted from the center of the plating unit 871a. obtain. Therefore, without measures, the degree of the brightness of the first covering portion 875 by the light LD1 is easily changed by the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880, and the decorative members 870, 880 are integrally rotated while emitting light at a constant brightness. There is a possibility that it will be difficult to perform the effect of causing.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the plating portion 871a configured to reflect the light LD1 has a concave shape, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illuminated substrate 823. It is designed such that its center is located near the center of the first covering portion 875 in a front view.

  Since the light LD1 is arranged so as to direct the optical axis in the outer diameter direction of the circle on which the outer light-emitting portion 823b is arranged, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plating portion 871a, so that the center of the radius of curvature is obtained. The first decorative member 870 illuminates the vicinity of the center of each first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870.

  Therefore, the plurality of light LDs 1 can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering portion 875 regardless of the arrangement of the plating portion 871a with reference to the outer light emitting portion 823b. Accordingly, light can be stably radiated to the vicinity of the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875, so that the first covering portion 875 is visually recognized with uniform brightness even during the integral rotation operation. be able to.

  Further, the first skeleton portion 871 is a portion where the plating process is performed in the same manner as the plating process on the plating portion 871a, and includes an outer plating portion 871b arranged outside the first covering portion 875 in a front view. Prepare. The light LD1 is also reflected by the outer plating portion 871b in the same manner as the plating portion 871a. However, since the outer plating portion 871b is disposed rearward as compared with the arrangement of the plating portion 871a, the outer plating portion 871b Light intensity can be reduced.

  This avoids a situation in which the intensity of light visually recognized outside the first covering portion 875 is too strong, and the player feels dazzling, and the visibility inside the frame of the first covering portion 875 is reduced. be able to.

  Although the electric decoration board 823 is sandwiched between the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 from the front and rear, it is not completely closed at the joint, so that all of the light from the outer light emitting unit 823b is inside. It is not what is irradiated.

  First, between the member edge portion 875a of the first covering portion 875 and the member edge portion 885a of the second covering portion 885 disposed to face the member edge portion 875a, the internal structure is visible in FIG. The gap VA1 of a certain degree is formed. Since the outer plating portion 871b projects outside the frame of the first covering portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

  In addition, between the member outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875 facing the metal bar 832 and the member outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885, member interference with the metal bar 832 occurs. A large gap VA2 exceeding a region required to avoid the above is formed.

  First, the gap VA2 avoids collision between the metal bar 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, so that the length of the metal bar 832 can be sufficiently secured. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring the function of guiding the linear displacement of the member 834.

  The gap VA2 is, secondly, a fastening screw inserted into the skeleton portions 871 and 881, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are screwed into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b of the rotating member 834 so that the decorative members 870 and 880 are connected to the rotating member 834. It is formed for the purpose of securing an assembling path of a fastening screw for fastening and fixing.

  Thirdly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of securing a light passage for allowing light that has passed through the transparent portions of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 to travel. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, light traveling outward through the gap VA passes at equal intervals on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle. It is visually perceived as a light that is

  Therefore, by executing the integrally rotating operation of the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can be similarly rotated. Accordingly, it is unnecessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting unit 823b (for example, while the entire lighting is continued), and the light radially emitted from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 in the radial direction. A light emission effect visually recognized in the rotating light emission mode can be executed.

  In the united state (see FIG. 32), since the entire second skeleton 881 is formed of a translucent resin material, the reflection of the light LD1 by the second skeleton 881 is suppressed.

  Accordingly, the light (weak light) away from the optical axis of the light LD1 can be irradiated into the frame of the second covering portion 885. Can be reduced. On the other hand, since the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of the light radially emitted from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 in the radial direction can be improved.

  In the frame of the second covering portion 885, a color (in this embodiment, set as an arbitrary color as the color of the circular body) is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and light diffusion processing is formed inside. The light diffusion decorative portion 885c to be provided is disposed in the circumferential direction. Therefore, of the light LD1, the light incident on the light diffusion decoration part 885c is refracted and acts so that the entire light diffusion decoration part 885c emits surface light.

  By this surface light emission, it is possible to equalize the light visually recognized through the light diffusion decoration portion 885c arranged in the circumferential direction, and each light diffusion decoration portion of the five second decoration members 880 can be achieved. 885c can be made to be visually recognized by the player as one.

  Here, it is as described above that the direction in which the plurality of second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated can improve the performance when the second covering portion 885 is visually recognized by the player. This integration can be performed by visually recognizing that the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance in the united state when the second covering portion 885 is arranged on the front side.

  The member outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832, and the end surface 885b1 of the first covering portion 875 that comes close to (contacts) the member outer end 875b is , Protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 with reference to the plane on which the metal bar 832 is provided.

  Thereby, when the third operation unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the union state (see FIG. 32), the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged on the back side is in the player's view. The degree of entry can be reduced, and the effect on the performance can be reduced.

  Thus, when the frame portion of the first covering portion 875 and the frame portion of the second covering portion 885 are colored with different colors, the second covering portion 885 is disposed on the front side. At times, it is possible to easily prevent the color of the first covering portion 875 from entering the field of view.

  In particular, when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state by itself in one union state (see FIG. 32), it is compared with the case where the other operation units 600 and 700 are both in the extended state (FIG. 32). 33, F9), there are many gaps around the third operation unit 800, and the line of sight when observing the third operation unit 800 from an oblique direction is easy to pass. Therefore, without any countermeasures, the side effect of the third operation unit 800 is visually recognized, and the effect of the effect is easily reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in one union state, the end face 885b1 of the second covering portion 885 is disposed closer to the rear than the center of the front-rear width of the side surface, so that the third operation in the oblique direction is performed. Even if the side surface of the unit 800 is visually recognized, most of the side surface can be visually recognized as the second covering portion 885, and the degree of visibility of the first covering portion 875 can be reduced. Thereby, in the one union state, the second covering portion 885 can be more easily seen than the first covering portion 875, and the effect can be improved.

  In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual united state and the united state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830 to rotate the inner rotating member 830, while the outer rotating member 840 operates as a torque limiter. Rotation is stopped by the load from 866.

  Although the contact area is reduced by the sliding ridge 831b, when the rotation resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 increases, and the torque limiter 866 is increased. Therefore, it is necessary to increase the allowable value of the load transmission, and it is easy to hinder downsizing of the torque limiter 866.

  Therefore, it is preferable that the rotation resistance of the inner rotation member 830 can be suppressed. For this purpose, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the support points between the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation of the inner rotation member 830 are only the front end that comes into contact with the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central annular gear 864. In other parts, a gap is provided. Thus, the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, so that the displacement resistance can be easily reduced.

  For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened and fixed to the central annular gear 864, a stopper for suppressing displacement to the front side with respect to the central annular gear 864 is considered necessary. The sliding member 825 performs the function of this stopper. That is, the sliding member 825 can receive a load in the direction of pushing forward from the inner rotating member 830, but the sliding member 825 has a front surface thereof contacting the front and rear with the short-diameter annular portion 822 a of the circular plate portion 822. Touch

  The short-diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back side of the circular plate portion 822 as an annular protrusion having an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and has a semicircular cross section at its outermost diameter portion. A ridge 822b protruding from the side is formed in an annular shape.

  Since the protrusion 822b abuts on the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, the contact area can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire back surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. Can be. Thereby, the displacement resistance in the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 can be reduced.

  In addition, since the fastening screw is not used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that is assumed when the weight of the fastening screw increases is reduced accordingly. Can be.

  The fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be described. In the description of the fixing, FIGS. 62 and 63 are appropriately referred to.

  The fixing of the first decorative member 870 to the rotating member 834 is performed by connecting a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton portion 871 to a female screw of the fastened portion 876 formed at the rear of the frame of the first covering portion 875. After the first cover portion 875 is fastened and fixed to the first skeleton portion 871 by being screwed into the first skeleton portion 871, the overhang portion 873 projecting from the end of the semicircular concave portion of the first skeleton portion 871 is formed. This can be performed by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted to the outside), and screwing the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical projection 834b.

  The fixing of the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 is performed by connecting a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeleton portion 881 to a female screw of the fastened portion 886 formed at the frame rear portion of the second covering portion 885. After the second covering portion 885 is fastened and fixed to the second skeleton portion 881 by being screwed into the second skeleton portion 881, the overhang portion 883 projecting from the end of the semicircular concave portion of the second skeleton portion 881 is formed. This can be performed by allowing the screw to enter the recessed groove 833d (to be slidably fitted to the outside) and screw the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical projection 834b.

  In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 870 are associated with the linear or rotational displacement of the rotating member 834. The member 880 can be configured to perform a linear displacement or a rotational displacement.

  In the fixing process, the overhanging portions 873 and 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the linear motion member 833, thereby disposing the skeleton portions 871 and 881 on the linear motion member 833 (the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction). ) Is defined, and it is possible to prevent the skeleton portions 871 and 881 from falling off the linear motion member 833.

  Since the skeleton portions 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the translation member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832) is similarly defined, and The member 834 can be prevented from dropping from the linear member 833.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in assembling the rotating member 834 to the linear member 833, the skeletal portions 871 and 881 in which the portions defining the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear member 833 are fixed to the rotating member 834. Therefore, unlike the case where the portion defining the arrangement on the linear motion member 833 is formed on the rotating member 834 itself, the number of assembling and disassembling steps can be reduced.

  That is, for example, at the time of disassembly, by removing the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the skeleton portions 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834, the regulation of the arrangement of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 on the linear motion member 833 can be released only. In addition, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the translation member 833 can be released. Thereby, work efficiency can be improved.

  With reference to FIG. 70 and FIG. 71, a description will be given of the combination operation of the operation units 600 to 800. FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (d) and FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (d) schematically show an example of a combination operation of the operation units 600 to 800 in a time series. FIG. In the description of FIGS. 70 and 71, FIGS. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

  70 and 71, each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operation unit 600, the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operation unit 700, and the covering portions 875, 885 of the third operation unit 800. Are schematically illustrated so that they can be identified by characters or the like.

  That is, the characters “normal” are written vertically on the first production surface 661a, the characters “execute” are written horizontally on the second production surface 661b, and the characters “triggered” are written on the third production surface 661c in the longitudinal direction. The symbols “!” Are shown along the respective lines.

  In addition, the first main decorative surface 787a1 has a character of "start of war", the first sub decorative surface 787a2 has a character of "pinch is a chance", and the second main decorative surface 787b1 has an "attack". And the character "Patience !?" is shown on the second sub-decoration surface 787b2.

  Also, different alphanumeric characters (“I” to “V”) corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covering portion 875, and five integral “○” are provided in the second covering portion 885. Symbol is shown.

  In FIG. 70 (a), each of the operation units 600 to 800 is arranged in an effect standby state (see FIG. 28). Above the second operation unit 700, a first sub-decoration surface 787a2 as a surface that cannot be seen in front view but is visible from the player's eyes is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  In FIG. 70B, the first operation unit 600 is in the intermediate effect state, the second operation unit 700 is in the intermediate effect state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state.

  By executing the integral rotation operation of the third operation unit 800, the first covering portions 875 of the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operation unit 700 can be sequentially replaced. Also, during the continuation of the integral rotation operation or after the stop, the first operation unit 600 is set to the intermediate effect state, so that the third effect surface 661c protrudes inside the frame of the center frame 86, and the operation units 600 to 800 Movement can be lively.

  For example, when the third effect surface 661c is visible, by controlling the effect so that the jackpot expectation of the lottery is increased, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who has visually recognized the operation of the first operation unit 600. it can.

  When the one-piece rotating operation is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decoration surface 787a1 of the second operation unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decoration member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700. Can be visually recognized integrally.

  Thereby, the attention to the first decoration member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 can be improved, and the display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decoration member 870 can be displayed on the third symbol display device. By returning the third operation unit 800 to the effect standby state while starting at 81, it is possible to smoothly guide the player's line of sight to the third symbol display device 81.

  The first decorative member 870 to be noticed is not limited to the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting portion 823b (see FIG. 60) disposed so as to be able to irradiate the first decorative member 870, an LED for irradiating the light LD1 to the first decorative member 870 to be noticed. By turning on the LED and turning off the other LEDs, it is possible to pay attention to an arbitrary first decorative member 870.

  At this time, the lighting pattern of the LED may be switched in a state where the integral rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 is stopped, or the lighting pattern of the LED may be switched according to the integral rotation operation of the first decoration member 870. .

  When the lighting pattern of the LED is switched in accordance with the integral rotation operation of the first decoration member 870, the LEDs to be turned on are sequentially switched in the rotation direction, so that the light and the first decoration member 870 are rotationally displaced along the coaxial circle. You may make a player visually recognize it as it is. In addition, the LED to be lit is fixed, and the first decoration member 870 that is illuminated with light utilizes the fact that the first decoration members 870 sequentially reach the position where the light is illuminated from the LED by the integrally rotating operation. The member 870 may be switched.

  In the state shown in FIG. 70A, the second decorative rotation member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operation unit 600 both have decorations that are formed in a vertically long shape, and can be visually recognized integrally. In particular, since the front side surface of the decoration fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction, similarly to the first effect surface 661a in the effect standby state, the effect of being integrally viewed is enhanced.

  On the other hand, when the state shown in FIG. 71A is reached, the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 during the course shown in FIG. Since the second decoration rotating member 660 of the unit 600 is a decoration formed in a horizontally long shape, the sense of unity with the decoration fixing member 670 is reduced. Can be visually recognized integrally with the covering member 787.

  In FIG. 35, the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 is shown. However, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), if the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state, the covering member 787 and the second The vertical spacing between the second decorative rotating member 660 and the second decorative rotating member 660 is further reduced, and the effect of being visually recognized integrally can be enhanced.

  At this time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is overhanging at a visible position and the right edge of the third symbol display device 81 is visually recognized as expanding to the right from the region right end RE1. Even if the arrangement of the two production surfaces 661b is close to the right edge, it is possible to prevent a cramped impression from being given to the player.

  In addition, as a result, similarly to the second main decoration surface 787b1, the second effect surface 661b can be visually recognized by the player as if it is arranged on the center side of the third symbol display device 81, and the second main decoration surface The effect that the surface 787b1 and the second effect surface 661b are visually recognized integrally can be enhanced.

  In this case, the decoration of the overhang decoration portion 652b is formed with the contents related to the decoration of the second effect surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decoration surface 787b1 (first main decoration surface 787a1). The effect that the main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second effect surface 661b, and the overhang decorative portion 652b can be integrally viewed can be enhanced.

  In FIG. 70 (c) and FIG. 70 (d), the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state. FIG. 70D illustrates the reversing operation of the second operation unit 700. When the first operation unit 600 is in the extended state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned on the left and right sides of the covering member 787 of the second operation unit 700. , The reversing operation of the covering member 787 (see FIG. 59) can be performed even when the first operation unit 600 is in the extended state.

  In the reversing operation of the covering member 787, since the sub-decoration surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 whose right and left sides are different are directed to the front side, it has been described above that a state having no discriminating power can be achieved, as shown in FIG. 70 (d). Alternatively, different sub-decoration surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 may be combined so that the player can identify the contents.

  According to FIG. 70 (d), the player can identify the content “Pinch !?”, and in this state, stop driving the second operation unit 700 to pay attention to the subsequent movement of the second operation unit 700. Therefore, the line of sight of the player can be collected in the second operation unit 700.

  For example, when notifying that the lottery has been missed, control is performed so that the state of FIG. 70 (d) is returned to FIG. 70 (c). In such a case, by performing control such that the inversion is continued from the state of FIG. 70 (d) and the state shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 71A, the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the extended state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the effect standby state. Above the second operation unit 700, a second sub-decoration surface 787b2 as a surface which is not visible in a front view but can be visually recognized by a player's eyes is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  In the state shown in FIG. 71 (a), the second presentation surface 661b and the second main decoration surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters described in each of them are horizontally written, so that they can be visually recognized integrally by the player. Easy to do. In addition, since the contents have a series of meanings of “attack activation”, it is even easier to visually recognize the contents.

  In the effect standby state (see FIG. 70A), the first operation unit 600 has the first effect surface 661a and the decorative fixing member 670 arranged close to each other, and the characters described in each of them are written vertically. Because of this, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the whole. In addition, since the contents have a series of meanings of "normal time", it is even easier to visually recognize them.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, each of the effect surfaces 661a and 661b of the first operation unit 600 is viewed integrally with the side surface of a different member (for example, the front surface of the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the decorative fixing member 670). Make up. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  In FIG. 71 (b) to FIG. 71 (d), the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the effect standby state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state. The arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is different between the state illustrated in FIG. 71B and the state illustrated in FIG. 71C because the third operation unit 800 performs the integral rotation operation. On the other hand, regardless of the state in which the switching rotation operation is performed, the player can be visually recognized as the same union state (see FIG. 71 (d)).

  That is, in a state where the second decoration member 880 faces the front side, the configuration is such that the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decoration member 870. Thereby, as the operation control of the third operation unit 800, it is set to notify the success or failure of the jackpot by executing the switching rotation operation at the end of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the symbol change. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting the presence or absence of the notification of the jackpot from the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

  In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the end of the display effect (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71 (b) or the state shown in FIG. 71 (c)), the game of winning or not winning a jackpot Person's expectation can be similarly maintained. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operation unit 800 can be kept high.

  As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can form a case where the decoration is visually recognized independently and a case where the decoration is integrally viewed in combination. Therefore, the decoration formed in each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not completed only by each of the operation units 600 to 800, but is designed as a decoration related to each other in each of the operation units 600 to 800.

  The drive control of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is affected by the arrangement of the drive units. That is, if the driving of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is performed at an inappropriate timing, there is a possibility that the member operations will collide and cause a failure. Therefore, the drive control is performed after determining the arrangement of the members of the other units. Is controlled as follows.

  For example, the change of the first operation unit 600 to the overhang state may be arbitrary in the state of the second operation unit 700, and the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the effect standby state. You.

  The change of the first operation unit 600 to the intermediate effect state may be arbitrary in the state of the second operation unit 700, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 may be arbitrary, and the rotation operation is performed when the switching rotation operation does not occur. It is controlled to be executed when it is determined.

  The state of the first operation unit 600 may be arbitrarily changed to the overhang state of the second operation unit 700, and the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the effect standby state.

  The state of the first operation unit 600 may be arbitrarily changed, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 may be arbitrarily changed, and the rotation operation is performed when the switching rotation operation does not occur. It is controlled to be executed when it is determined.

  In the control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the extended state and the rotation is not executed or only the integral rotation operation is performed, the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 This is executed when it is determined that the state is an intermediate effect state or an effect standby state.

  The control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the extended state and the switching rotation operation occurs is executed when the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the effect standby state and the second operation unit 700 is determined to be in the effect standby state. Is done.

  As described above, the drive control of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not enabled at an arbitrary timing, but is controlled to be executed after determining the arrangement of the members of the other units.

  Next, a center frame C86 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the center frame 86 is formed of one component has been described. However, the center frame C86 in the second embodiment is formed of two members, an upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 72 is a front view of the game board C13 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 72, the center frame C86 is a member that is formed in a shape that can be fitted into the window portion 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60 and that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 with a tapping screw or the like. An upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b are provided.

  The upper frame C86a is disposed along the upper (upper in FIG. 72) and left and right (left and right in FIG. 72) inner edges of the window 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60. The lower frame C86b is It is arranged along the inner edge on the lower side (lower side in FIG. 72) of the window portion 60a of 60. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an area surrounded by the upper frame C86a and the lower frame C86b.

  The upper frame C86a is a part of the center frame 86 in the first embodiment (a portion disposed along the lower (lower side in FIG. 72) inner edge of the window 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60). That is, a portion where the lower frame C86b is disposed) is omitted, and other portions except the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in the first embodiment.

  Next, the lower frame C86b will be described. FIG. 73 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and FIG. 74 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. 73 and 74, only a part of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and tapping screws for fastening and fixing the lower frame C86b to the base plate 60 are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, in the lower frame C86b, a receiving port COPin formed as an opening capable of receiving a sphere, a first passage CRt1 communicating with the receiving port COPin, and a first passage thereof A second passage CRt2 through which a ball guided through CRt1 flows down, and a third passage through which a ball guided through the second passage CRt2 (a ball reciprocated along the second passage CRt2 along its longitudinal direction). CRt3, the fourth passage CRt4 and the fifth passage CRt5 in which the ball guided in the third passage CRt3 is distributed by the distribution member C170, and the fourth passage CRt5 in which the ball guided in the fourth passage CRt4 flows. The sixth passage CRt6 and the outlet COPout formed as an opening for the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt5 to flow out to the game area are formed (see FIGS. 81 and 82). .

  Note that an upper frame passage CRt0 (see FIG. 72) is formed in the upper frame C86a. The upper frame passage CRt0 guides a ball that has flowed (entered) from an area on the left side (front side in FIG. 72) of the game area (the area between the center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and the rail 61) in the game area. The receiving port COPin of the lower frame C86b communicates with the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0.

  That is, the ball that has flowed (entered) from the game area into the upper frame passage CRt0 flows (enters) from the upper frame passage CRt0 into the first passage CRt1 of the lower frame C86b via the reception port COPin.

  The lower frame C86b is provided with a distribution member C170 that operates according to the weight of the sphere (see FIGS. 81 and 82), and when the connected sphere is guided through the third passage CRt3. The preceding ball is assigned to the fourth passage CRt4, while the following ball is assigned to the fifth passage CRt5. When the continuous interval of the balls is larger than the predetermined amount, both the preceding ball and the following ball are distributed to the fourth passage CRt4.

  Here, the outlet COPout, which is the outlet of the fifth passage CRt5 (the opening through which the ball flows out to the game area), is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 72). . Therefore, the ball distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 is likely to win the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 is high).

  On the other hand, in the sixth passage CRt6, as a concave surface formed to be inclined downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) in order to cause the ball guided through the sixth passage CRt6 to flow into the game area, the first prize. Not only is a central outflow surface C181 formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the mouth 64, but also a position in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in FIG. 72) from vertically above the first winning hole 64. Side outflow surfaces C182 are formed (arranged) at two different locations. In the sixth passage CRt6, an undulation is formed, a lateral outflow surface C182 is formed at the bottom of the undulation, and a central outflow surface C181 is formed at the top of the undulation.

  Therefore, the ball distributed to the fourth passage CRt4 has a higher probability of flowing out of the side outflow surface C182 to the game area than the probability of flowing out of the central outflow surface C181 to the game area in the sixth passage CRt6. It is difficult to win the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning in the first winning opening 64 is lower than that of the ball distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 described above).

  As described above, in the lower frame C86b according to the present embodiment, when the continuous balls flow into the third passage CRt3, the preceding balls are distributed to the normal passage (the fourth passage CRt4), while the rear balls are rearward. The ball that runs is distributed to a passage that easily wins the first winning opening 64 (a passage (the fifth passage CRt5) that almost certainly wins the ball in the first winning opening 64 in the present embodiment). Therefore, in order to increase the probability that the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (make sure the winning), the player is expected to form a state in which the balls are connected, and the interest of the game can be increased.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the lower frame C86b will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 87 in addition to FIGS. 73 to 74.

  FIG. 75 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and FIG. 76 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. FIG. 77 is a top view of the lower frame C86b, FIG. 78 is a front view of the lower frame C86b, and FIG. 79 is a rear view of the lower frame C86b. FIG. 80 (a) is a side view of the lower frame C86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXa in FIG. 78, and FIG. 80 (b) is a side view of the lower frame C86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXb in FIG.

  81 and 82 are cross-sectional views of the lower frame C86b taken along the line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77, and FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b taken along the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. FIG. 84 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b in the LXXXIVa part of FIG. 81, and FIG. 84 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b along the line LXXXIVb-LXXXIVb of FIG. is there. Note that FIG. 81 illustrates a state where the distribution member C170 is disposed at the first position, and FIG. 82 illustrates a state where the distribution member C170 is disposed at the second position.

  As shown in FIGS. 73 to 84, the lower frame C86b includes a front member C110, a plate member C120 disposed on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) of the front member C110, and a front member C110. A back member C130 disposed opposite to a back surface (a surface in the direction of arrow B) at a predetermined interval, a first intermediate member C140 disposed in front of the back member C130 (a surface in the direction of arrow F), A second intermediate member C150 that is opposed to the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the back member C130 at a predetermined interval, and a first intermediate member that is interposed between the opposing back member C130 and the second intermediate member C150. A second interposed member C180 interposed between the front member C110 and the first and second intermediate members C140 and C150, and a rear surface of the rear member C130. Provided that the decorative member C190 and bypass member C200, a.

  In addition, the lower frame C86b is configured such that each member is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw, and the distributing member C170 and the decorative member C190 are rotatably supported by the back member C130, thereby forming one (single unit). ) (See FIG. 73).

  In the lower frame C86b, the other members except the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 are made of a light-transmissive (that is, transparent material that can see through the rear-side member or the sphere) resin material. C170 and decorative member C190 are made of a colored resin material. Therefore, while allowing the player to visually recognize the ball passing from the first passage CRt1 to the sixth passage CRt6, the player can visually recognize the distribution operation by the distribution member C170 and the displacement of the decoration member C190 accompanying the operation. Enhance the interest of the game.

  In this case, the lower frame C86b only needs to have at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 made of a light-transmitting resin material. At least one or both of the connected state of the balls in the third passage CRt3 (whether the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball is smaller than a predetermined amount) and the distribution operation by the distribution member C170 are provided to the player. On the other hand, if it can be visually recognized that the following ball has been sorted to the fifth passage CRt5 by the sorting member C170, the ball can be viewed from the outlet COPout to the first winning port 64 with a high probability (in the present embodiment). This is because it is sufficient that the player does not visually recognize the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt5 because almost the entire ball enters).

  The distributing member C170 and the decorative member C190 may be made of a light-transmitting (or colored) resin material, and may have a front surface painted or a seal attached.

  On the other hand, at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 are made of a colored resin material, or at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150. It may be painted or attached with a seal. That is, the configuration may be such that the ball or the distribution member C170 passing through the third passage CRt3 is invisible to the player from the front side.

  The front member C110 includes a plate-shaped front part C111 that forms the front, a plate-shaped bottom part C112 that stands upright from the back of the front part C111, and one longitudinal direction of the front part C111 and the bottom part C112 ( (In the direction of the arrow L).

  A plurality of insertion holes C111a are formed in the front part C111 in the thickness direction along the outer edge on the lower side (in the direction of arrow D) of the front part C111. The lower frame C86b is fitted into the window 60a from the front of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (unitized state), and the tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole C111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (arranged) to the base plate 60.

  An outlet COPout is formed in the front part C111 at a position vertically above the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 72) (drilled in the thickness direction). As described above, the outlet COPout is an opening serving as an outlet when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt5 flows out to the game area.

  The bottom surface portion C112 has a bottom surface of the second interposition member C180 opposed to the upper surface thereof, and a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the bottom surface portion C112 and the second interposition member C180 (recess C183). You. Therefore, for example, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be suppressed as compared with a case where a through hole formed through the second interposition member C180 is formed as a part of the fifth passage CRt5.

  The bottom surface portion C112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal direction of the front surface portion C111, and the standing end (in the direction of the arrow B) of the bottom surface portion C112 contacts the front surfaces of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150. Touched. Thereby, invasion of foreign matter such as wire is suppressed.

  The connection part C113 is formed with an opening (perforated in the thickness direction) of the receiving port COPin. As described above, the receiving port COPin is an opening that receives a ball from the upper frame passage CRt0 of the upper frame C86a. In a state where the center frame C86 is mounted (disposed) on the base plate 60, the back surface of the upper frame C86a is overlapped with the front surfaces of the front portion C111 and the connecting portion C113, and both are fastened and fixed by tapping screws. Thus, the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0 communicates with the receiving port COPin.

  The dish member C120 includes an upper bottom surface portion C121 and a lower bottom surface portion C122 forming the bottom surface of the passage, and an upper side wall portion C123 and a lower side wall portion C124 forming the side wall of the passage.

  The upper bottom surface portion C121 extends along the left-right direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage as viewed from above, and is inclined downward in a direction away from the receiving port COPin (arrow R direction). Formed. Note that the upper bottom surface portion C121 is located vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the reception port COPin, and a vertical step is formed between the upper bottom surface portion C121 and the upper frame passage CRt0. That is, the plate member C120 is configured to allow the ball to freely fall from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion C121.

  The upper bottom surface portion C121 is provided with a concave groove C121a having a U-shaped cross section at the center in the width direction (the direction of the arrows LR) (see FIG. 84). The concave groove C121a extends linearly along the front-back direction (the direction of arrow FB). The groove width of the concave groove C121 (dimension in the direction of arrow LR) is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the groove depth of the concave groove C121a (dimension in the direction of arrow UD) is the bottom of the concave groove C121a. Is set to a depth that does not allow the ball to touch.

  Thus, the sphere on the upper bottom surface portion C121 can be supported at two places (a pair of ridge lines where the upper bottom surface portion C121 and the concave groove C121a intersect). Therefore, the contact area between the ball and the passage can be increased as compared with the case where the concave groove C121a is not formed (that is, the case where the ball is supported at only one location). Therefore, the impact of the ball dropped from the upper frame passage CRt0 can be buffered (accepted) and the resistance when the ball rolls can be increased.

  As described above, the ball is dropped from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion C121, and the ball on the upper bottom surface portion C121 is supported at two places. When the ball flows (falls) from the upper frame passage CRt0 into the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1), the upstream ball bottom portion C121 (first passage CRt1) delays the flow of the preceding ball, and follows the ball. It can make it easier for a running ball to catch up with a preceding ball. Therefore, the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball can be reduced.

  The upper side wall portion C123 partitions the upstream and downstream ends of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) and the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1). The width of the passage should be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that a plurality of balls can be guided only in a serial state.

  A cutout portion C123a is formed in the upper side wall portion C123 at a downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1), and the upper bottom surface portion C121 (the first passage portion CR123) is formed through the cutout portion C123a. The sphere can flow down from the passage CRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the second passage CRt2).

  The lower bottom surface portion C122 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage as viewed from above, and extends in the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow direction). The cross-sectional shape in a plane including the UD direction is formed to be curved in an arc shape that protrudes downward in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow D) (see FIG. 84B).

  The lower side wall C124 includes one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction (the direction of guiding the sphere) of the lower bottom surface C122 (second passage CRt2), and the lower bottom surface C122 (second passage CRt2). ) Is defined. The width of the passage should be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that a plurality of balls can be guided only in a serial state.

  The lower bottom surface portion C122 is arranged in parallel with the upper bottom surface portion C121 in a top view, and the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow B) of the upper bottom surface portion C121 and one end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122. (The end on the side of the arrow B) is disposed at a position adjacent to the end.

  At a position corresponding to the notch portion C123a in the upper side wall portion C123, the lower side wall portion C124 is not formed, and as described above, from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (the first passage CRt1) via the notch portion C123a. The ball can flow down to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the second passage CRt2).

  A cutout portion C124a is formed in the lower side wall portion C124 at a position corresponding to the bottom portion (the lowest vertical position in the vertical direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C122 curved in an arc shape. The ball can flow down from the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) via the portion C124a.

  As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is formed to be curved in an arc shape, and the upper bottom surface portion C121 (the first passage CRt1) is provided on the rising inclined side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122). Since the ball flows down, the ball that has flowed down is reciprocated between one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), and then the cutout portion C124a is formed. Can flow down from the bottom to the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3).

  Accordingly, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) at a predetermined distance, the lower bottom surface portion C122 ( Utilizing the reciprocating motion in the second passage CRt2), the following ball can catch up with the following ball, and the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball can be reduced (the balls are connected). .

  The outflow surface C122a is formed in the lower bottom surface portion C122 at a position corresponding to the notch portion C124a (ie, a position where the height position in the vertical direction is the lowest). The outflow surface C122a is a portion for allowing a sphere guided on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3), and the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). It is formed as a concave surface inclined downward toward.

  Therefore, after reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C122, the sphere whose rolling speed has decreased can flow smoothly (downflow) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) by using the outflow surface C122a. it can. That is, by utilizing the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the second passage CRt2), the sphere in which the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere is reduced (the continuous sphere) is connected to the continuous sphere. , And can flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3).

  The outflow surface C122a has a notch C124a having a width of a concave surface thereof (a dimension in a direction along a rolling direction of a sphere reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C122, a dimension in an arrow FB direction) in a top view. The closer to the side, the larger the shape is formed (see FIG. 77).

  Further, in a state in which the ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion C124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the cutout portion C124a in top view, the ball rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, the ball that rolls (reciprocates) on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the second passage CRt2) causes the topmost portion of the ball to contact the lower side wall portion C124 at the position farthest from the notch portion C124a. Even in the state where the ball rolls (position), the outflow surface C122a is formed to a range overlapping with the center of the ball when viewed from above, which is the locus of the top below the ball when the ball rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C122. The rolling line crosses the outflow surface C122a).

  On the other hand, when the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface portion C122, the sphere that has flowed down to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) is applied to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage portion). Without reciprocating the CRt2) once, or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times, there is a risk that the inclined surface of the outflow surface C122a will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (the third passage CRt3). . That is, without decreasing the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball, the two balls may flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (the third passage CRt3) while keeping the distance.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the notch portion C124a (the direction of the arrow L) (see FIG. 84). Thereby, while the ball is pressed against the lower side wall portion C124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the cutout portion C124a by the action of the inclination of the lower bottom surface portion C122, the sphere is moved to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the Rolling (reciprocating) can be performed in the two passages CRt2).

  Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (the third passage CRt3) due to the effect of the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low. That is, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, it is easy to get over (easily cross) the outflow surface C122a, and sufficiently reciprocate the ball along the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2). It can be made easier. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the preceding ball catches the following ball and that the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball is reduced (the balls are connected).

  In addition, it is a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction)). 84 (b)), the radius of the arc shape at one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction is that of the one end side and the other end side. The radius is smaller than the radius of the circular arc shape in the area between them (the area including the outflow surface C122a). That is, the radius of the arc shape in the region including the outflow surface C122a is increased.

  Thereby, in the initial stage (stage in which the ball reciprocates to or near one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction), it is easy to reciprocate the ball and to catch up the following ball with the preceding ball. The stage at which the rolling speed of the reciprocating ball is reduced (the ball does not reach the one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction or its vicinity, and reciprocates in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a) In step), it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the preceding ball and the following ball are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining a state in which both balls are connected.

  The plate member C120 is disposed in such a manner that the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the second passage CRt2) extends along the front-back direction (the direction of the arrow FB). The space in the front-rear direction formed by the window 60a can be effectively utilized. Therefore, the overall length of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the second passage CRt2) can be secured, and the balls can be easily connected.

  The back member C130 includes a main body portion C131 formed in a plate shape, and a lower stopper portion C132, an upper stopper portion C133, and a shaft support portion C134 that are erected from the front of the main body portion C131.

  An opening C131a, which is an opening for communicating a passage (fifth passage CRt5) formed on the front side and the back side of the main body C131, is formed in the main body C131. Below the opening C131a, a concave portion C131b in which the outer edge of the main body portion C131 is depressed is formed. The concave portion C131b forms a part of the fifth passage CRt5 between facing the detour member C200.

  When the distribution member C170 is displaced downward, the lower stopper portion C132 is formed so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the distribution member C170, and defines a second position of the distribution member C170 (see FIG. 82). . On the other hand, when the distribution member C170 is displaced upward, the upper stopper portion C133 is formed so as to be in contact with the upper surface of the distribution member C170, and defines a first position (predetermined position) of the distribution member C170. (See FIG. 81).

  The shaft support seat C134 is formed as a shaft support (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C192. Note that the shaft C192 is fixed to the decoration member C190, and the distribution member C170 is non-rotatably connected to the shaft C192 inserted from the back surface of the main body portion C131, so that the distribution member C170 and the decoration member C190 are connected. It is rotatably supported by the main body part C131 (shaft support part C134) integrally. The shaft C192 is supported by the shaft support C134 in a posture along the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow FB).

  The first intermediate member C140 includes a plate-shaped main body portion C141, a bottom surface portion C142 erected from the back surface of the main body portion C141 (the surface on the arrow B direction side), a top surface portion C143, and a passage portion C144. The member C130 is disposed on the left side in a front view.

  In a state where the first intermediate member C140 is disposed on the back member C130, the standing ends (in the direction of the arrow B) of the bottom surface portion C142, the top surface portion C143, and the passage portion C144 abut on the front surface of the back member C130. Thereby, the third passage CRt3 is formed by the space defined by the back member C130 and the first intermediate member C140 (the main body portion C141, the bottom surface portion C142, and the top surface portion C143), and the back member C130 and the first intermediate member are formed. A fourth passage CRt4 is formed by a space defined by C140 (passage portion C144) and the distribution member C170 at the second position (see FIG. 82).

  The bottom surface portion C142 is inclined downward from the dish member C120 side to the distribution member C170 side. The passage portion C144 includes an opposing portion C144a formed at a position opposing the distribution member C170 at the second position, and a bottom surface portion C144b forming a rolling surface of a ball. It is formed to be inclined downward from the distribution member C170 side at the two positions to the facing portion C144a side and to be inclined downward from the back member C130 side to the front member C110 side. Therefore, the ball can be received into the fourth passage CRt4 from the distribution member C170 displaced to the second position, and the ball can flow out (roll) into the sixth passage CRt6.

  Here, the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) of the plate member C120 rolls the ball in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow FB), and from the plate member C120 to the bottom portion C142 in the left-right direction ( The sphere flows down (to the right in the present embodiment) along the arrow LR direction, and the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) moves the sphere flowing down from the plate member C120 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). ) (To the right in this embodiment).

  In this case, the distance between the preceding ball CB1 and the following ball CB2 (see FIG. 85) is determined by the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2). It flows down from the side bottom portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) in the left-right direction, and flows down (rolls) down the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) in the left-right direction. ), The distance between the two balls CB1 and CB2 can be confirmed from a front view, so that the player can easily recognize the distance. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

  The second intermediate member C150 includes a plate-shaped main body portion C151 and a bottom surface portion C152 erected from the back surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow B) of the main body portion C151, and is disposed on the right side in front view of the back member C130. Is established. In a state where the second intermediate member C150 is disposed on the back member C130, the standing end (the arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C152 is in contact with the front surface of the back member C130.

  A concave portion C151a having an outer edge depressed is formed in the main body portion C151. In the bottom surface portion C152, a detour member C200 (gutter portion C203) is disposed on the lower surface thereof so as to oppose it. Is done. Therefore, for example, as compared with a case where the bypass member C200 is formed in a tubular shape to be a part of the fifth passage CRt5, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be suppressed.

  The first interposed member C160 is a member that forms a rolling surface of a sphere in a part of the fifth passage CRt5, and is interposed between the back member C130 and the second intermediate member C150 facing each other. That is, a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed by the space defined by the back member C130, the second intermediate member C150 (the main body C151), and the first interposed member C160.

  The cross-sectional shape of the first interposing member C160 on a plane including the extending direction (the direction of the arrow LR) and the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD) is directed downward in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow D). It is formed to be curved in a convex arc shape (see FIG. 82). Thus, the ball distributed to the first interposed member C160 (the fifth passage CRt5) by the distribution member C170 can be reciprocated on the first interposed member C160, and then can flow out to the opening C131a.

  Thus, for example, compared to a configuration in which the balls distributed by the distribution member C170 flow directly to the opening C131a, the time required for the balls to flow to the opening C131a can be lengthened. In other words, it is easy for a player who expects to form a state in which a ball is likely to enter (win) in the first winning opening 64 to be noticed that such a state has been formed, and to secure time for enjoying the state. be able to. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

  Note that the first interposed member C160 flows out to a position corresponding to the opening C131a of the back member C130 (that is, a position at which the vertical height of the rolling surface of the first interposed member C160 is the lowest). Surface C160a is recessed. The outflow surface C160a is a portion for allowing the sphere guided by the first interposed member C160 to flow out to the opening C131a, and is formed as a concave surface that is inclined downward toward the opening C131a.

  The distributing member C170 includes a main body portion C171 having a fitting hole C171a formed on one side, and a receiving portion C172 formed on the other side of the main body portion C171 opposite to the side on which the fitting hole C171a is formed. And a rolling portion C173 formed on the upper surface side of the main body portion C171, and is rotatable about a shaft C192 (shaft support portion C134) fitted in the fitting hole C171a.

  The fitting hole C171a is formed as a hole having a D-shaped cross section, and the shaft C192 having a cross-sectional shape corresponding to the cross-sectional shape is fitted, so that the shaft C192 is non-rotatably fixed to the main body C171. The shaft C192 is also fixed to the decorative member C190 without rotation, so that the main body portion C171 (distributing member C170) and the decorative member C190 are integrated (formed as one unit) via the shaft C192. You.

  In this case, the unit including the distributing member C170 and the decorative member C190 has its center of gravity positioned on one side (the opposite side of the distributing member C170 across the axis C192, the right side in FIG. 81) with respect to the rotation center (the axis C192). Be eccentric. Therefore, in the no-load state, the distribution member C170 has its receiving portion C172 side raised (rotated clockwise around the axis C192 in front view) and its rotation is regulated by the upper stopper portion C133 (first position). (Placed at a predetermined position) (see FIG. 81).

  On the other hand, in a state where the ball is received by the receiving portion C172 of the distribution member C170, the position of the center of gravity as a whole is shifted with respect to the rotation center (the axis C192) on the other side (with respect to the axis C192) due to the weight of the ball. 81 is eccentric to the side where the dividing member C170 is disposed (the left side in FIG. 81). Therefore, in a state where the ball is received in the receiving portion C172, the sorting member C170 is lowered on the receiving portion C172 side (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 in front view), and the rotation is restricted by the lower stopper portion C132. (See FIG. 82).

  At least a part of the main body portion C191 of the decorative member C190 is made visible to the player, and the decorative member C190 (main body) is displaced (rotated) between the first position and the second position of the distribution member C170. The part C191) is also rotated, and the position (form) visually recognized by the player is changed. Therefore, based on the position (form) of the decorative member C190, the player can recognize the state of the sorting member C170 (that is, the direction in which the ball is sorted). The decorative member C190 can also serve as a weight for displacing the distributing member C170 and as a part for recognizing the distributing direction of the sphere, thereby reducing the product cost.

  When the ball is discharged (outflow) from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 after the distributing member C170 is disposed at the second position, the distributing member C170 becomes a distributing member C170. Due to the effect of the weight of the unit including the decorative member C190 (eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis C192), the unit is returned to the first position (predetermined position).

  As described above, since the displacing member C170 is displaced (returned) to the first position by the weight of the unit including the distributing member C170 and the decorative member C190, for example, an urging spring is provided. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the distribution member C170 is biased toward the first position by the biasing spring.

  In addition, since the displacement (return operation) of the distribution member C170 to the first position can be made slower than in the case of using the urging spring, the following ball CB2 can easily reach the rolling portion C173. it can. That is, after the distributing member C170 starts displacement (rotation) from the second position to the first position, the following ball CB2 is displaced (rotated) to a position where it cannot flow into the rolling portion C173. Can increase the time required for Further, it is possible to provide a possibility that a third ball, which is further subsequent to the following ball CB2, can also reach the rolling part C173 (see FIGS. 85 to 87).

  The receiving portion C172 supports the ball received at the first position and the ball facing the passage portion C144 at the second position, and a facing portion C172a formed at a position facing the third passage CRt3 at the first position. And a bottom surface portion C172b that forms a rolling surface for moving.

  In the receiving portion C172, when the distribution member C170 is located at the first position, the facing portion C172a is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140, and the bottom portion C172b is located at the facing portion. It is formed so as to be inclined upward from C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (see FIG. 81).

  Here, in a state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the facing portion C172a is inclined with respect to a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (the rotation of the facing portion C172a). If the moving part C173 is inclined more in the direction away from the third passage CRt3 than the bottom part C172b, the ball that has collided with the facing part C172a may jump upward and flow back into the third passage CRt3. There is.

  On the other hand, the facing portion C172a is substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 in a state where the distribution member C170 is located at the first position. The ball received from the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) can be received by the facing portion C172a and can be prevented from flowing back to the third passage CRt3.

  In a state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the bottom surface portion C172b is formed to be inclined downward from the facing portion C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 (passage portion C144) of the first intermediate member C140. In this case, the ball received by the receiving portion C172 flows out to the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 at an early stage, and the weight of the ball cannot be used, so that the distribution member C170 reaches the second position. There is a possibility that it cannot be done.

  On the other hand, the bottom surface portion C172b is formed so as to be inclined upward from the facing portion C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 when the distribution member C170 is located at the first position. The sphere can be held on the bottom surface portion C172b at least until the distribution member C170 rotates from the first position by a predetermined amount. Thereby, the time until the ball received by the receiving part C172 flows out to the passage part C144 of the first intermediate member C140 can be delayed. As a result, the distribution member C170 can reliably reach the second position by effectively utilizing the weight of the sphere.

  For the reason described above (prevention of backflow into the third passage CRt3), the facing portion C172a may be inclined in a direction in which the rolling portion C173 is closer to the third passage CRt3 than the bottom portion C172b.

  The receiving portion C172 is formed such that the bottom surface portion C172b is inclined downward from the facing portion C172a toward the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 when the distribution member C170 is disposed at the second position ( See FIG. 82). This allows the ball received by the receiving portion C172 to reliably flow out to the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140.

  Further, while the ball is rolling on the bottom portion C172b, the weight of the ball is applied to the distribution member C170, and the distribution member C170 is moved to the second position (that is, the following ball is moved to the rolling portion C173 (the 5 can be easily maintained in a state that can be guided to the 5th passage CRt5).

  The rolling portion C173 is a portion for guiding (distributing) a sphere rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 (the third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 to the second interposition member C160 (the fifth passage CRt5). In a state where the distribution member C170 is located at the second position, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 and the downstream end of the second interposition member C160 (fifth passage CRt5) are provided. It is located (erected) between the upstream end.

  The upstream end (the end in the direction of the arrow L) of the rolling portion C173 protrudes from the facing portion C172a of the receiving portion C172. That is, the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C173 protrudes from the facing portion C172a toward the upstream side (the first intermediate member C140 (the third passage CRt3) side, the arrow L direction). A plate-shaped portion is formed. By inserting this plate-shaped part between the ball CB1 and the ball CB2, both balls (balls CB1, CB2) can be separated.

  In a state where the distribution member C170 is disposed at the second position, the first intermediate member C140 rolls with respect to the height position at the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface). The height position at the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the portion C173 (rolling surface) is located vertically below (the direction of arrow D). That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173, and the distribution member C170 disposed at the second position moves toward the first position by a predetermined amount (predetermined rotation angle). ), The downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 are arranged at the same height position.

  Here, when a ball rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 flows into the receiving portion C172, the distribution member C170 is displaced downward from the first position by the weight of the ball. (Rotating), and the lower surface of the distribution member C170 is brought into contact with the lower stopper portion C132, whereby the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position.

  In this case, there is a possibility that the distribution member C170 may jump upward (in the direction of the arrow U) due to an impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C132, and the distribution member C170 may jump upward due to the first intermediate member. The height position at the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) is located vertically above (in the direction of the arrow U) the height position at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) of C140. Then, there is a possibility that the ball cannot flow (roll) from the bottom surface portion C142 (the third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 to the rolling portion C173.

  In particular, when the ball collides with the distributing member C170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173) that has been flipped upward, and the distribution member C170 is further jumped upward by the impact of the collision of the ball (ball). When the distributing member C170 is further pushed upward by (), the ball flows into the receiving portion C172, although the ball should originally flow (roll) into the rolling portion C173 (see FIG. 4). May be accepted).

  On the other hand, in a state where the distribution member C170 is disposed at the second position, as described above, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 (the rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (the rolling surface). Since a step is formed between them, even if the distribution member C170 is flipped up by an impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 is more than the downstream end of the bottom portion C142 by the step between the two. It can be restrained from being located vertically upward (direction of arrow U). In other words, the distributing member C170 can be allowed to jump upward by the difference between the two steps. Therefore, the ball to be flown (rolled) into the rolling portion C173 (the following ball CB2 having an interval between the preceding ball CB1 and the predetermined amount or less) is moved to the bottom portion C142 (the third passage CRt3). Can easily flow into the rolling portion C173 (rolling).

  Further, the distribution member C170 is configured such that the upstream end surface (the surface on the side facing the first intermediate member C140, the surface on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C173 extends from the rolling portion C173 to the first intermediate member C140 ( It is formed to be inclined downward toward the bottom surface portion C142). That is, the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C173 has a first intermediate member C140 that is closer to the receiving portion C172 (opposed portion C172a) than to the rolling surface of the rolling portion C173. It is formed in a shape to be brought close.

  Thereby, when the ball collides with the distribution member C170 (the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C173) that has been flipped up, the distribution member C170 (the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C173) is moved from the ball. ) Can be the force in the direction of pushing the distribution member C170 downward. As a result, the ball to be flown (rolled) into the rolling portion C173 (the following ball CB2 having an interval between the preceding ball CB1 and the predetermined amount or less) is transferred to the bottom portion C142 (the third passage CRt3). ) To the rolling portion C173 (rolling).

  The receiving portion C172 and the rolling portion C173 are disposed on the same side (the side in which the direction of rotating the distribution member C170 is the same due to the weight of the ball) with respect to C192. Therefore, even after the distribution member C170 is disposed at the second position by the weight of the ball received by the receiving portion C172, even if the ball is discharged from the receiving portion C172, the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling portion C173 is reduced. By utilizing, the distribution member C170 can be maintained at the second position. That is, when there is a ball to be guided to the fifth passage CRt5, the posture of the distribution member C170 can be maintained at a posture for guiding the ball to the fifth passage CRt5 by using the weight of the ball. .

  Therefore, it is not necessary to maintain the distribution member C170 at the second position by utilizing the weight of the ball (the ball rolling on the bottom portion C172b) received by the receiving portion C172, and the extension length of the bottom portion C172b is not required. Can be shortened, and the distribution member C170 can be downsized accordingly. As a result, the degree of freedom in disposing the distribution member C170 can be increased.

  Here, the sorting member C170 includes a direction in which the ball rolls from the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) to the receiving portion C172 (a direction in which the receiving portion C172 receives the ball, the direction of the arrow R), and a receiving portion C172. The direction in which the ball rolls from the direction to the passage portion C144 (the direction in which the received ball rolls, the direction of the arrow L) is the opposite direction. That is, in the receiving portion C172, the flowing (rolling) direction of the ball is reversed (changed direction).

  This allows the ball to be displaced by the time required for the reversal as compared with the case where the direction in which the receiving portion C172 receives the ball and the direction in which the ball rolls from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144 are the same. The time for staying at the member C170 (the receiving portion C172) can be secured, and the weight of the ball staying at the receiving portion C172 can be used to easily maintain the distribution member C170 at the second position. As a result, the ball can be stably rolled in the rolling portion C173.

  In addition, since the residence time can be secured by using the reversal of the ball, the length of the bottom surface portion C172b in the receiving portion C172 can be shortened accordingly, and the distribution member C170 can be downsized. As a result, the degree of freedom in disposing the distribution member C170 can be increased.

  The second interposition member C180 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the sphere in the sixth passage CRt6, and is interposed between the front member C111 and the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150. That is, the sixth passage CRt6 is formed by the space defined by the front member C110 and the first intermediate member C140, and the second intermediate member C150 and the second intermediate member C180.

  As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposition member C180 has a front side (arrow) to allow the ball guided through the second interposition member C180 (sixth passage CRt6) to flow into the game area. A concave surface (central outflow surface C181 and side outflow surface C182) formed to be inclined downward toward F direction is formed. In addition, undulations are formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt6, and a lateral outflow surface C182 is arranged at the bottom of the undulation, while a central outflow surface C181 is arranged at the top of the undulation.

  The upper edge (the edge in the direction of the arrow U) of the front portion C111 of the front member C110 has an upper surface (rolling edge) of the second interposition member C180 except for a region where the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182 are formed. (In the direction of arrow U). That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposition member C180 flows out (flows down) only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182 into the game area.

  A concave portion C183 is formed in the bottom surface of the second interposition member C180, and a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the concave portion C183 and the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C110 as described above. .

  The decorative member C190 includes a plate-shaped main body C191 and a shaft C192 fixed to the main body C191. As described above, the decorative member C190 is connected (integrated) to the distribution member C170 via the shaft C192. ) Is done. In addition, a pattern such as a character is displayed on the front of the main body C191 by printing or attaching a seal, and based on the movement (displacement) of the character, the operation of the distribution member C170 can be visually recognized by a player. .

  Note that the axis C192 is arranged in a posture orthogonal to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 72). Therefore, the size of the lower frame C86b in the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow FB) can be reduced.

  The detour member C200 further extends a plate-shaped main body portion C201, a wall surface portion C202 erected from the front surface (the surface on the side of the arrow F) of the main body portion C201, and a part of the wall surface portion C202 toward the front side. And a gutter portion C203 formed and provided, and is disposed on the back side of the back member C130 at a position facing the opening C131a.

  In a state where the detour member C200 is disposed on the back member C130, the standing end (in the direction of the arrow F) of the wall portion C202 is in contact with the back surface of the back member C130 (main body portion C131), and The upright end (in the direction of arrow F) is in contact with the back surface of the second intermediate member C150 (main body portion C151), and the edge of the gutter portion C203 is in contact with the bottom surface of the second intermediate member C150 (bottom portion C152). Touched.

  Thus, the space defined by the back member C130 (main body portion C131) and the detour member C200 (main body portion C201 and wall portion C202), and the second intermediate member C150 (bottom portion C152) and the detour member C200 (gutter portion) C203), a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed (see FIG. 83).

  The gutter portion C203 is inclined downward from the back member C130 toward the second intermediate member C150. Therefore, the ball that has flowed into the detour member C200 from the opening C131a of the back member C130 is rolled on the gutter portion C203, and between the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C110 and the second interposed member C180 (recess C183). Into the fifth passage CRt5.

  Next, the operation of distributing the balls by the distributing member C170 will be described. 85 to 87 are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C86b showing the transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member C170, and correspond to a cross section taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG.

  FIGS. 85A and 85B show a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, and correspond to FIG. FIGS. 86B and 87 show a state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, and correspond to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 85A, in a state where the distribution member C170 is located at the first position, the receiving portion C172 can receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (ball CB1 can flow in).

  That is, in the receiving portion C172, the facing portion C172a is arranged at a position intersecting with the extension line extending the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface), and is vertically lower than the extension line extending the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface). The bottom surface portion C172b is arranged at a position (in the direction of arrow D).

  In a state where the distribution member C170 is located at the first position, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C142 (the rolling surface) and the bottom surface (the rolling surface of the rolling portion C173). The distance between the opposite surface and the upstream end (the end in the direction of arrow L) at the surface on the side of arrow D is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere (the dimension through which the sphere can pass). .

  On the other hand, in a state where the distribution member C170 is located at the first position, the rolling portion C173 cannot receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (the ball CB1 cannot flow). Placed in

  That is, in the rolling portion C173, the bottom surface portion C172b is arranged at a position (one step higher) vertically above (in the direction of the arrow U) an extension of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface). Note that the vertical interval (height of the step) between the rolling portion C173 and an extension of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the ball from climbing over the step and flowing into the rolling portion C173 of the distribution member C170 at the first position.

  In a state where the distribution member C170 is located at the first position, the downstream end (the end in the direction of the arrow R) of the top surface portion C143 of the first intermediate member C140 and the upstream end (the arrow L of the rolling portion C173). Is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the sphere (dimension through which the sphere cannot pass). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the ball from climbing over the step and flowing into the rolling portion C173 of the distribution member C170 at the first position. However, such an interval may be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

  When the ball CB1 (the preceding ball) and the ball CB2 (the following ball at a predetermined interval from the preceding ball) roll on the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140, FIG. ), The ball CB1 flows into (receives) the receiving portion C172 of the distribution member C170, and the ball CB1 abuts (receives) on the facing portion C172a and is held by the receiving portion C172.

  When the distance between the balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, the ball CB2 catches up with the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 comes into contact with the ball CB1. As described above, when the distribution member C170 is located at the first position, the distance between the downstream end of the top surface portion C143 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere ( Since the ball CB2 is set to a size that cannot pass the ball, the ball CB2 can be prevented from getting over the ball CB1 and flowing into the rolling part C173. That is, the ball CB2 can be made to stand by (upstream) behind the ball CB1.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (b), when the ball CB1 is received by the receiving portion C172, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the distribution member C170 moves from the first position to the second position due to the weight of the ball CB1. Displaced (rotated). When the ball CB2 is catching up with the ball CB1, the weight of the ball CB2 also acts on the distribution member C170.

  Here, the receiving portion C172 has a region on the side connected to the bottom portion C172b of the facing portion C172a and a region on the side connected to the facing portion C172a of the bottom portion C172b, that is, the facing portion C172a and the bottom portion C172b. Is convex toward the axis C192 side and is formed into an arc shape having substantially the same shape (substantially the same diameter as the sphere) as the outer shape of the sphere, and the sphere is held by the arcuately curved portion. It is possible.

  The distance between the distribution member C170 (downstream end of the bottom surface portion C172b (the end on the arrow L direction side)) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connection portion between the bottom surface portion C142 and the facing portion C144a) is In a state where the distribution member C170 is located at the first position, the dimension is set smaller than the diameter of the sphere (dimension that the sphere cannot pass), and the distribution member C170 is displaced from the first position to the second position ( (Rotation), it is gradually enlarged.

  That is, when the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position between the first position and the second position (a position between FIG. 86A and FIG. 86B), the above-described operation is performed. The distance between the distribution member C170 (downstream end of the bottom portion C172b (the end on the arrow L direction side)) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connection portion between the bottom portion C142 and the facing portion C144a) is equal to the diameter of the sphere. When the distributing member C170 is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position to the second position when the distribution member C170 is enlarged to substantially the same size (dimension that allows the ball to pass), the above-described interval is further enlarged, and A maximum distance is formed at two positions.

  Therefore, while the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state where the ball CB1 is received by the receiving portion C172 is maintained. That is, the distributing member C170 is displaced (rotated) while the ball CB1 is received by the receiving portion C172 from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position. Thus, the state in which the ball CB2 is in contact with the ball CB1 can be maintained, and the state in which the ball CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 can be maintained.

  In this case, the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the bottom surface (surface opposite to the rolling surface, surface in the direction of arrow D) of the rolling portion C173. The distance between the end (the end in the direction of the arrow L) is gradually reduced by displacing (rotating) the distribution member C170 from the first position to the second position, and the distribution member C170 is removed. Before reaching the predetermined intermediate position, the dimension is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the sphere (dimension through which the sphere cannot pass). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C172.

  When the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the trajectory of the sphere CB1 held by the receiving portion C172 (the connecting portion between the facing portion C172a and the bottom surface portion C172b) is determined. The trajectory of the upstream end (the end in the direction of the arrow L) on the bottom surface (the surface opposite to the rolling surface, the surface in the direction of the arrow D) of the rolling portion C173 rather than the outer edge (the outer edge on the side opposite to the axis C192) Is configured to pass on the side closer to the axis C192.

  Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the ball CB2 is in contact with the ball CB1, the state in which the ball CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 can be maintained, and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (the end in the direction of the arrow L). Part), the ball CB2 can be pushed back (pushed back). That is, the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 can be inserted between the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 to separate both balls. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C172. Further, the ball CB2 can be gradually rolled to the rolling portion C173, and the subsequent rolling can be stabilized.

  When the distribution member C170 is further displaced (rotated) toward the second position from the state shown in FIG. 86A, the ball CB1 is rolled on the bottom surface portion C172b toward the passage portion C144, and the ball CB2 is moved. Flows down to the rolling portion C173 (accepted by the rolling portion C173).

  As shown in FIGS. 86 (b) and 87, when the distribution member C170 is located at the second position, the ball CB1 flows from the receiving portion C172 into the passage portion C144 (the fourth passage CRt4), and CB2 rolls on the rolling portion C173 and flows into the first interposed member C160 (the fifth passage CRt5).

  After the balls CB1 and CB2 flow into the fourth passage CRt4 and the fifth passage CRt5, the distribution member C170 is returned (displaced) from the second position to the first position by its own weight. In addition, even if the distribution member C170 is disposed at the second position, or even after the distribution member C170 starts displacement (rotation) from the second position to the first position, the third ball is not moved. Reaches the rolling part C173 and flows into the rolling surface of the rolling part C173, the third ball rolls on the rolling part C173 and flows (guides) into the fifth passage CRt5.

  As described above, the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C173 (the surface facing the first intermediate member C140, the surface in the direction of the arrow L) extends from the rolling portion C173 to the first intermediate member C140 (the bottom surface portion C142). ), So that even after the distributing member C170 starts displacing (rotating) from the second position to the first position, the upstream inclined surface of the rolling portion C173 ( Utilizing the end face), the third ball can easily flow into the rolling part C173.

  Note that the distribution member C170 is configured to be displaceable (rotatable) from the first position to the second position with only the weight of one ball. Therefore, when the distance between the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 is larger than the predetermined amount, both the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 are sequentially received by the receiving unit C172, and undergo the above-described sorting operation, and the fourth passage CRt4. It is distributed to.

  As described above, according to the lower frame C86b in the second embodiment, when the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 are continuous at an interval of a predetermined amount or less (including a case where the interval between both balls is 0). Can distribute (guide) the ball CB1 to the fourth passage CRt4 and distribute (guide) the ball CB2 to the fifth passage CRt5 by the distribution member C170 displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1. On the other hand, when the balls CB1 and CB2 are continuous with an interval exceeding a predetermined amount, both balls (balls CB1 and CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4. As described above, the path to be guided can be changed according to the state of the series of the balls CB1 and CB2 (whether or not the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball exceeds a predetermined amount), thereby improving the amusement. be able to.

  Next, a center frame C2086 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b in the third embodiment, and FIG. 89 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. 88 and 89, only a part of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and tapping screws for fastening and fixing the lower frame C2086b to the base plate 60 are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the lower frame C2086b has a receiving port COP2000in formed as an opening capable of receiving a ball, a first passage CRt2001 communicating with the receiving port COP2000in, and a first passage thereof. The second passage CRt2002 through which the ball guided through the CRt2001 (the ball reciprocating along the first passage CRt2001 along the longitudinal direction) flows, and the ball guided through the second passage CRt2002 are sorted by the sorting member C2170. The third passage CRt2003 and the fourth passage CRt2004 that are flowed down and the ball guided through the third passage CRt2003 and the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (the ball that has not reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004) flow down. Guided sixth passage CRt2006 and fourth passage CRt2004 A fifth passage CRt2005 through which a dropped ball (a ball reaching the end of the fourth passage CRt2004) flows down, and an outlet formed as an opening for the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 to flow out to the game area. COP2000out is formed (see FIGS. 96 and 97).

  The center frame in the third embodiment includes an upper frame (not shown) and a lower frame C2086b. The other configuration of the upper frame in the third embodiment is the same as that of the second embodiment except that the shape of the upper frame passage (not shown) is different from that of the upper frame passage CRt0 of the upper frame C86a in the second embodiment. Since the configuration is the same as that of the upper frame C86a, the description thereof is omitted.

  The upper frame passage is a ball that has flowed (entered) from a left-side area (the left side in FIG. 72) of the game area (an area between the center frame (upper frame) and the rail 61 (see FIG. 72)). The receiving port COP2000in of the lower frame C2086b communicates with the downstream end of the upper frame passage. That is, the ball that has flowed (entered) from the game area into the upper frame passage flows (enters) from the upper frame passage into the first passage CRt2001 of the lower frame C2086b via the receiving port COP2000in.

  The lower frame C2086b is provided with a distributing member C2170 that operates according to the weight of the sphere (see FIGS. 96 and 97). When the connected sphere is guided through the second passage CRt2002, The preceding ball is assigned to the third passage CRt2003, while the following ball is assigned to the fourth passage CRt2004. If the continuous interval of the balls is larger than the predetermined amount, both the preceding ball and the following ball are distributed to the third passage CRt2003.

  Here, when the ball that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt4 flows down to the fifth passage CRt5, the outlet COPout, which is the outlet of the fifth passage CRt2005 (the opening through which the ball flows out to the game area), is placed in the first passage CRt5. It is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the winning opening 64 (see FIG. 72). Therefore, the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 is likely to win the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 is high).

  On the other hand, in the sixth passage CRt2006, as a concave surface formed to be inclined downward toward the front side (the direction of arrow F) in order to cause the ball guided to the sixth passage CRt2006 to flow into the game area, the first prize. Not only is a central outflow surface C181 formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the mouth 64, but also a position in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in FIG. 72) from vertically above the first winning hole 64. Side outflow surfaces C182 are formed (arranged) at two different locations. The sixth passage CRt2006 has an undulation, a lateral outflow surface C182 formed at the bottom of the undulation, and a central outflow surface C181 formed at the top of the undulation.

  Therefore, the ball distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 has a higher probability of flowing out of the side outflow surface C182 to the game area than the probability of flowing out of the central outflow surface C181 to the game area in the sixth passage CRt2006. It is difficult to win the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning in the first winning opening 64 is lower than that of the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005).

  As described above, the lower frame C2086b in the present embodiment, as in the case of the second embodiment, when a ball in a continuous state flows into the second passage CRt2002, the preceding ball moves to the normal passage (the second passage CRt2002). While the ball is distributed to the three passages CRt2003), the trailing ball easily passes to the first winning opening 64 (in the present embodiment, the passage for almost surely winning the ball to the first winning opening 64 (the fifth passage CRt2005)). ) Is distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 for allowing the ball to flow down. Therefore, in order to increase the probability that the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (make sure the winning), the player is expected to form a state in which the balls are connected, and the interest of the game can be increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the ball guided in the fourth passage CRt2004 is formed so as to be able to drop to the sixth passage on the way, and only the ball that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 without falling is moved to the fifth passage CRt2005. Downflow (inflow) is possible. Therefore, in order to increase the probability that the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (make sure the winning), after the succeeding ball among the continuous balls is distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004, the following path is used. The player is expected to reach the end of the four passages CRt2004 without falling, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame C2086b will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 103 in addition to FIGS. 88 to 89.

  FIG. 90 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b, and FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. FIG. 92 is a top view of the lower frame C2086b, FIG. 93 is a front view of the lower frame C2086b, and FIG. 94 is a rear view of the lower frame C2086b. FIG. 95 (a) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVa in FIG. 93, and FIG. 95 (b) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVb in FIG.

  96 and 97 are cross-sectional views of the lower frame C2086b taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. FIG. 98 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame C2086b taken along the line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. 94, and FIG. 99 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame C2086b taken along the line XCIX-XCIX in FIG. Note that FIG. 96 illustrates a state where the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the first position, and FIG. 97 illustrates a state where the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the second position.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 to 99, the lower frame C2086b includes a front member C2110, a plate member C2120 disposed on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) of the front member C2110, and a A back member C2130 disposed opposite to the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) at a predetermined interval; a first intermediate member C2140 disposed in front of the back member C2130 (a surface in the direction of arrow F); 2 Intermediate member C2150, first interposed member C2160, magnetic part C2400, and receiving member C2500, distribution member C2170 interposed between opposing rear member C2130 and first intermediate member C2140, front member C2110 and rear member A second interposition member C2180 interposed between the opposed members of C2130, a detour member C2200 disposed on the back surface of the back member C2130, and It includes a stone C2300, a.

  In addition, the lower frame C2086b is fastened and fixed to each member with a tapping screw, and the distributing member C2170 is rotatably supported by the back member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140 so that one member (single unit) is formed. ) (See FIG. 88).

  In the lower frame C2086b, the other members except the distribution member C2170 are made of a light-transmissive resin material (that is, a transparent member that can see through the rear side member and the sphere), and the distribution member C2170 is colored. It is composed of a resin material. Therefore, the ball that passes from the first passage CRt2001 to the sixth passage CRt2006 can be visually recognized by the player, and the distribution operation by the distribution member C2170 can be visually recognized by the player, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In this case, the lower frame C2086b only needs to have at least the first intermediate member C2140 made of a light-transmissive resin material. The player can visually recognize the connected state of the balls in the second passage CRt2002 (whether the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball is smaller than a predetermined amount) and the distribution operation by the distribution member C2170, and If it can be visually recognized that the following ball has been sorted to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the sorting member C2170, such a ball is likely to flow from the outlet COPout to the first winning opening 64 (in the present embodiment, flows into the fifth passage CRt2005). If so, almost the entire ball is entered), so that the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 need not be visually recognized by the player.

  The distribution member C2170 may be made of a light-transmissive (or colored) resin material, and may have a front surface painted or a seal attached.

  On the other hand, the first intermediate member C2140 may be made of a colored resin material, or the first intermediate member C2140 may be painted or provided with a seal. That is, the configuration may be such that the ball or the distribution member C2170 passing through the third passage CRt2003 is invisible to the player from the front side.

  The front member C2110 includes a plate-shaped front portion C111 that forms the front, and a plate-shaped bottom portion C112 that stands upright from the back of the front portion C111.

  A plurality of insertion holes C111a are formed in the front part C111 in the thickness direction along the outer edge on the lower side (in the direction of arrow D) of the front part C111. The lower frame C2086b is fitted into the window 60a from the front of the base plate 60 in an assembled state (unitized state), and a tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole C111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (arranged) to the base plate 60.

  An outlet COPout is formed in the front part C111 at a position vertically above the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 72) (drilled in the thickness direction). As described above, the outlet COPout is an opening serving as an outlet when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 flows out to the game area.

  The bottom surface of the second interposition member C2180 is disposed on the upper surface of the bottom surface portion C112 so as to face the upper surface. Note that a cylindrical portion communicating with the outlet COPout is formed in the bottom surface portion C112, and this cylindrical portion is a part of the fifth passage CRt2005. Therefore, since the overlapping portion (seam) of the front member C2110 and the second interposition member C180 is not formed on the inner wall surface of the fifth passage CRt2005, when the player looks into the fifth passage CRt2005 from the outlet COPout. The appearance can be improved, and foreign matter such as wire can be prevented from entering from the overlapping portion (seam).

  The bottom surface portion C112 is formed continuously over the entire area in the longitudinal direction of the front surface portion C111, and the standing end (the arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C112 is located in front of the first intermediate member C2140 and the first interposition member C2160. Be abutted. Thereby, invasion of foreign matter such as wire is suppressed.

  The dish member C2120 includes an upper bottom surface portion C2121 and a lower bottom surface portion C2122 forming the bottom surface of the passage, and a side wall portion C2124 forming the side wall of the passage.

The upper bottom surface portion C2121 extends along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow LR) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and is inclined downward in the direction away from the receiving port COP2000in (the direction of the arrow). Formed.

  The lower bottom surface portion C2122 is extended along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage as viewed from above, and extends in the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow direction). The cross-sectional shape in a plane including the UD direction is formed to be curved in an arc shape that protrudes downward in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow D) (see FIG. 84B).

  The side wall portion C2124 has a passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C2121 (first passage CRt2001) and one end and the other end of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the sphere is guided). Part and the passage width of the lower bottom surface part C2122 (first passage CRt2001). The width of the passage should be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that a plurality of balls can be guided only in a serial state.

  The lower bottom surface portion C2122 intersects the upper bottom surface portion C2121 at substantially 90 degrees in a top view, and a downstream end (an end portion in the direction of arrow R) of the upper bottom surface portion C2121 and one end in a longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122. Side (the end in the direction of arrow F) is disposed at a position adjacent to the side.

  A cutout portion C124a is formed in the side wall portion C2124 at a position corresponding to the bottom of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 that is curved in an arc shape (the position where the height position in the vertical direction is the lowest), and the cutout portion C124a is formed. The ball can flow down from the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002).

  As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 is formed to be curved in an arc shape, and the sphere flows down from the upper bottom surface portion C2121 on its upward inclined side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122). The dropped sphere is reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001), and then is moved from the cutout portion C124a to the bottom surface portion C2142 (the first passage portion CRt2001). The sphere can flow down to the two passages CRt2002).

  Accordingly, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C2121 to the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the first passage CRt2001) at a predetermined interval, the two balls in the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the first passage CRt2001). By utilizing the reciprocating motion, the preceding ball can catch up with the following ball, and the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball can be reduced (the balls are connected).

  The outflow surface C122a is formed in the lower bottom surface portion C2122 at a position corresponding to the notch portion C124a (ie, a position where the height position in the vertical direction is the lowest). The outflow surface C122a is a portion for allowing a sphere guided on the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002), and the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002). It is formed as a concave surface inclined downward toward.

  Therefore, after reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the sphere whose rolling speed has decreased can flow out (down) smoothly to the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002) by using the outflow surface C122a. it can. That is, using the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the first passage CRt2001), the sphere in which the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere is reduced (the continuous sphere) is connected to the continuous sphere. , And can flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002).

  In addition, the outflow surface C122a has a notch C124a in the top view, in which the width of the concave surface (the size in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the size in the arrow FB direction) is notched. Is formed in a larger shape on the side closer to (see FIG. 92).

  Further, in a state where the ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion C2124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the cutout portion C124a in top view, the ball rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, the ball that rolls (reciprocates) on the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the first passage CRt2001) makes the topmost portion of the ball contact the lower side wall portion C2124 at the position farthest from the notch portion C124a. Even when the ball rolls (position), the outflow surface C122a is formed to a range overlapping with the center of the ball when viewed from above, which is the locus of the top below the ball when the ball rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C2122. The rolling line crosses the outflow surface C122a).

  On the other hand, when the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the sphere flowing down to the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the first passage CRt2001) is subjected to the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the first passage portion). Without reciprocating once, or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times, the outflow surface C122a may flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a. . That is, without decreasing the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball, both balls may flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002) while keeping the distance.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction away from the notch portion C124a (the direction of the arrow L) (see FIG. 96). Thus, while the ball is pressed against the side wall portion C2124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the cutout portion C124a by the action of the inclination of the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the sphere is moved to the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the first passage). CRt 2001).

  Thus, it is possible to suppress the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002) due to the effect of the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low. That is, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, the ball easily gets over (easily crosses) the outflow surface C122a, and reciprocates the ball sufficiently along the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the first passage CRt2001). It can be made easier. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the preceding ball catches the following ball and that the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball is reduced (the balls are connected).

  In addition, it is a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction)). 84 (b) and FIG. 95 (b)), the radii of the arcs at one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction are those at one end. The radius is smaller than the radius of the arc shape in the region between the side and the other end (the region including the outflow surface C122a). That is, the radius of the arc shape in the region including the outflow surface C122a is increased.

  Thereby, in the initial stage (stage in which the ball reciprocates to or near one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction), it is easy to reciprocate the ball and to catch up the following ball with the preceding ball. The stage at which the rolling speed of the reciprocating ball is reduced (the ball does not reach the one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction or its vicinity, and reciprocates in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a) In step), it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the preceding ball and the following ball are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002) while maintaining the state where the two balls are connected.

  The back member C2130 includes a main body C2131 formed in a plate shape, and a shaft support C2134 standing upright from the front of the main body C2131.

  The main body C2131 includes an opening C2131a, which is an opening for communicating a passage (fifth passage CRt2005) formed on the front side and the back side of the main body C2131, and a distribution member C2170 (weight C2175). An opening C2131c, which is an opening for avoiding interference, is formed. Below the opening C2131a, a concave portion C2131b formed by recessing the outer edge of the main body portion C2131 is formed. The concave portion C2131b forms a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 between facing the detour member C2200.

  The shaft support seat C2134 is formed as a shaft support (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C2174 of the distribution member C2170. Note that the shaft C2174 is supported by the shaft support portion C2134 and the shaft support portion C2141b of the first intermediate member C2140 in a posture along the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow FB).

  The first intermediate member C2140 includes a plate-shaped main body portion C2141 and a bottom surface portion C2142, a top surface portion C2143, a passage portion C2144, and a lower stopper portion C2145 that are erected from the back surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow B) of the main body portion C2141. And is disposed on the left side in front view of the back member C2130.

  An opening C2141a is formed in the main body portion C2141 as an opening for communicating passages (third passage CRt2003 and sixth passage CRt2006) formed on the front side and the back side of the main body portion C2141. A shaft support C2141b is provided upright from the back surface of the main body C2141. The shaft support seat C2141b is formed as a shaft support (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C2174 of the distribution member C2170.

  In a state where the first intermediate member C2140 is disposed on the back member C2130, the standing ends (in the direction of the arrow B) of the bottom surface portion C2142 and the top surface portion C2143 are in contact with the front surface of the back member C2130. Thereby, the second passage CRt2002 is formed by the space defined by the back member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140 (the main body portion C2141, the bottom portion C2142, and the top surface portion C2143), and the back member C2130 and the first intermediate member are formed. A third passage CRt2003 is formed by a space defined by C2140 (the bottom surface portion C2142 and the passage portion C2144) and the distribution member C2170 at the second position (see FIG. 97).

  The bottom surface portion C2142 is inclined downward from the dish member C2120 side to the distribution member C2170 side. The passage portion C2144 is located between the distributing member C2170 (bottom portion C2172b) at the second position and the opening C2141a, and the opening C2141a is located from the distributing member C2170 (bottom portion C2172b) at the second position. It is formed to be inclined downward toward the side. Therefore, when the passage portion C2144 receives a ball from the distribution member C2170 displaced to the second position, the ball can flow out (roll) into the sixth passage CRt2006 via the opening C2141a.

  In addition, when the distribution member C2170 (bottom portion C2172b) is displaced upward, the bottom surface portion C2142 is formed so as to be in contact with the upper surface of the distribution member C2170 (bottom portion C2172b). A first position is defined (see FIG. 96). On the other hand, the lower stopper portion C2145 is formed so as to be able to contact the lower surface of the distribution member C2170 (bottom portion C2172b) when the distribution member C2170 (bottom portion C2172b) is displaced downward. (See FIG. 97).

  When the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 is displaced upward (increased). That is, the bottom surface portion C2173 in a state where the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the second position is higher than the upper surface (the rolling surface) of the bottom surface portion C2173 in the state where the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the first position (arrow). U side).

  The second intermediate member C2150 includes a plate-shaped main body portion C2151, and a bottom surface portion C2152 and wall surface portions C2153 and C2154 erected from the back surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow B) of the main body portion C2151. It is arranged on the right side of the back member C2130 when viewed from the front, with a predetermined space between the back member C2140 and the member C2140.

  In the present embodiment, the opposing interval (the interval in the direction of the arrow LR) between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150 is set to the dimension in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR) of the receiving member C2500. The value is set to a value larger than the size obtained by adding at least twice the size of the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, spaces that allow the ball to pass are secured on both sides (both between the first intermediate member C2140 and between the second intermediate member C2150) in both longitudinal directions (the directions of the arrows LR) of the receiving member C2500. can do. Therefore, the types (variations) of the direction in which the ball flows can be increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In a state where the second intermediate member C2150 is disposed on the back member C2130, the bottom surface portion C2152 is arranged at a position where it can communicate with the opening C2131a of the back member C2130, and is inclined downward toward the opening 2131a. Therefore, when the bottom surface portion C2152 receives a sphere that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 (a sphere that has fallen from the end of the magnetic portion C2400), the sphere can flow (roll) into the opening C2131a. That is, a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed on the upper surface side of the bottom surface portion C2152.

  In a state where the second intermediate member C2150 is disposed on the back member C2130, the standing end (the direction of the arrow B) of the bottom surface portion C2152 and the wall surface portions C2153 and C2154 abuts on the front surface of the back member C2130. Further, the main body portion C2151 and the wall portions C2153 and C2154 project upward (in the direction of the arrow U) by a predetermined amount along the edge of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the bottom portion C2152.

  The wall surface portion C2153 located on the far side from the magnetic portion C2400 intersects with an extension of the moving direction of the sphere guided along the fourth passage CRt2004 (the direction along the lower edge of the magnetic portion C2400 (the edge portion that absorbs the sphere)). Form a surface to be formed. Thereby, the ball ejected from the fourth passage CRt2004 (dropped from the magnetic part C2400) is directly received by the wall part C2153, or received by the wall part C2153 after bouncing (bounced up) on the bottom part C2152, It can be dropped on the bottom part C2152. In the embodiment, the wall surface portion C2153 is formed to a position higher than a lower edge (an edge portion on which a ball is adsorbed) at the end (the end in the direction of the arrow R) of the magnetic portion C2400.

  On the other hand, the protrusion dimension of the bottom surface portion C2152 from the top surface is such that the protrusion size of the wall surface portion C2154 located closer to the magnetic portion C2400 and the protrusion size of the main body portion C2151 are closer to the magnetic portion C2400. It is made smaller (lower) than the protrusion size of C2153. This allows the ball to fall from the bottom surface portion 2152 (the fifth passage CRt2005) to the first interposed member C2160 or the second interposed member C2180 (sixth passage CRt2006), thereby enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, it is preferable that the protrusion dimensions of the wall surface portion C2154 and the main body portion C2151 are smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

  The receiving member C2500 includes a first bottom surface portion C2501 and a second bottom surface portion C2502 that form an upper surface (rolling surface). The receiving member C2500 is located between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member 2150 and faces the magnetic portion C2400. Is disposed below (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, the sphere dropped from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) can be received by the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 and flow down (roll) to the first interposition member C2160.

  The first bottom surface portion C2501 is formed to be inclined downward from the connection portion with the second bottom surface portion C2502 toward the first intermediate member C2140 (the direction of the arrow L), and the second bottom surface portion C2502 is formed by the first bottom surface portion C2501. From the connection portion with the second intermediate member C2150 (in the direction of arrow R). In addition, the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 are inclined downward from the front side of the receiving member C2500 toward the back side (the back member C2130 side) (see FIG. 99).

  As described above, spaces for at least one ball are formed between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150 on both sides in the longitudinal direction (the directions of arrows LR) of the receiving member C2500.

  Therefore, the sphere that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (the magnetic part C2400) is rolled in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR) of the first bottom surface part C2501 or the second bottom surface part C2502, and the first interposition member C2160 is formed. Can be flowed down. In this case, the direction in which the ball flows down can be changed according to the portion (the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502) that receives the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (the magnetic portion C2400).

  In addition, the sphere that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) is rolled in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR) of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502, and then the first bottom surface is rotated. It can flow down from the downstream end of the portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502 to the first interposed member C2160. Thereby, such a ball can be easily rolled along the longitudinal direction of the first interposed member C2160.

  In addition, at least one or both of the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 may be inclined upward from the front side of the receiving member C2500 toward the rear side (the back member C2130 side), or the receiving member may be inclined. It may be non-inclined (that is, horizontal) from the front side of C2500 to the back side (back member C2130 side).

  Further, the receiving member C2500 has a form in which a space through which a ball can pass is secured only on one side in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR) (that is, one of the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150). A space in which the sphere can flow down (pass) is formed only between the spheres, and the sphere cannot flow down (pass) between them. In this case, the length of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502 in the longitudinal direction can be secured, and the rolling time of the ball can be lengthened accordingly. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The first interposed member C2160 is a member that forms a rolling surface that causes the ball that has flowed down from the receiving member C2500 to flow down to the second interposed member C2180, and is formed by a first intermediate member C2140 and a second intermediate member C2150. It is interposed between the opposing sides.

  On the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member C2160, a concave surface (central outflow) formed to incline downward toward the front side (the direction of arrow F) in order to cause the ball to flow out to the second interposed member C2180. The surface C2161 and the side outflow surface C2162) are formed. The central outflow surface C2161 is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the central outflow surface C181 (that is, the first winning opening 64) of the second interposition member C2180, and the side outflow surface C2162 is a central outflow surface. It is formed (arranged) at two different positions from C2161 in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in FIG. 72). In addition, an undulation is formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposition member C2160, a lateral outflow surface C2162 is formed at the bottom of the undulation, and a central outflow surface C2161 is formed at the top of the undulation.

  Note that the side outflow surface C2162 is positioned outward (in the direction of arrow L or arrow R) in the width direction of the game board 13 (the left-right direction in FIG. 72) with respect to the side outflow surface C182 of the second interposition member C2180. Are formed (disposed). Therefore, the sphere flowing down from the side outflow surface C2162 is moved outside the side outflow surface C182 of the second interposition member C2180 (that is, the second interposition member C2180 that is inclined downward toward the side outflow surface C182). (The upper surface (rolling surface)). Therefore, such a ball can be easily rolled along the longitudinal direction of the second interposition member C2180. As a result, an opportunity to flow down from the central outflow surface C181 of the second interposition member C2180 (that is, to enter (win) the first winning opening 64) can be formed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The distributing member C2170 includes a main body portion C2171 on which the shaft C2174 is pivotally supported, a receiving portion C2172 formed on one side of the main body portion C2171, and a rolling portion C2173 formed on the upper surface side of the main body portion C2171. A brass weight C2175 provided (attached) to the main body portion C2171 at a position opposite to the receiving portion C2172 with the shaft C2174 interposed therebetween, with the shaft C2174 (the shaft support portions C2134 and C2141b) as the center. It can be rotated.

  The distribution member C2170 has its center of gravity positioned on the other side with respect to the rotation center (the axis C2174) (on the side where the weight C2175 is disposed, that is, on the side opposite to the receiving portion C21720 across the axis C2174, the right side in FIG. 96). Be eccentric. Therefore, in the no-load state, the distribution member C2170 has the receiving portion C2172 side raised (rotated clockwise around the axis C2174 in a front view) and the rotation is regulated by the bottom surface portion C2142 (in the first position). (See FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in a state where the ball is received in the receiving portion C2172 of the distribution member C2170, the position of the center of gravity as a whole is formed on one side (the receiving portion C2172) with respect to the rotation center (the axis C2174) due to the weight of the ball. 97, i.e., on the side opposite to the weight C2175 with respect to the axis C2174 (the left side in FIG. 97). Therefore, in a state where the ball is received in the receiving portion C2172, the distribution member C2170 is lowered on the receiving portion C2172 side (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C2174 in front view), and the rotation is restricted by the lower stopper portion C2145. (See FIG. 97).

  When the ball is discharged (outflow) from the receiving portion C2172 to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 after the distributing member C2170 is disposed at the second position, the distributing member C2170 becomes a distributing member C2170. Due to its own weight (eccentricity of the position of the center of gravity from the axis C2174) returns to the first position.

  As described above, since the displacing member C2170 is displaced (returned) to the first position by the own weight (weight) of the distributing member C2170, for example, an urging spring is provided, and the distributing member C2170 is distributed by the urging spring. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the member C2170 is biased toward the first position.

  Further, the displacement (return operation) of the distribution member C2170 to the first position can be made slower than in the case of using the urging spring, so that the following ball CB2 can easily reach the rolling portion C2173. it can. That is, after the distributing member C2170 starts displacement (rotation) from the second position to the first position, the following ball CB2 is displaced (rotated) to a position where it cannot flow into the rolling portion C2173. Can increase the time required for Further, it is possible to provide a possibility that a third ball, which is further subsequent to the following ball CB2, can also reach the rolling portion C2173 (see FIGS. 100 to 102).

  The receiving portion C2172 is provided with a facing portion C2172a formed at a position opposite to the second passage CRt2002 at the first position, and supports the ball received at the first position and rolls the ball toward the passage portion C2144 at the second position. And a bottom surface portion C2172b that forms a rolling surface for moving.

  In the receiving portion C2172, in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the facing portion C2172a is substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the bottom portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, and the bottom portion C2172b is facing the facing portion. The first intermediate member C2140 is formed so as to be inclined upward from C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (see FIG. 96).

  Here, in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the facing portion C2172a is inclined with respect to a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (the rotation of the facing portion C2172a). If the moving part C2173 side is inclined more in the direction away from the second passage CRt2002 than the bottom part C2172b side), the ball that has collided with the facing part C2172a may jump upward and flow back to the second passage CRt2002. There is.

  On the other hand, the facing portion C2172a is substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 in a state where the distribution member C2170 is located at the first position. The ball received from the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002) can be received by the facing portion C2172a and can be prevented from flowing back to the third passage CRt2003.

  In a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the bottom surface portion C2172b is formed to be inclined downward from the facing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 (the passage portion C2144) of the first intermediate member C2140. In this case, the ball received by the receiving portion C2172 flows out to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 at an early stage, and the weight of the ball cannot be used, so that the distribution member C2170 reaches the second position. There is a possibility that it cannot be done.

  On the other hand, the bottom surface portion C2172b is formed so as to be inclined upward from the facing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 when the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the first position. The sphere can be held on the bottom portion C2172b at least until the distribution member C2170 rotates from the first position by a predetermined amount. Thereby, the time until the ball received by the receiving portion C2172 flows out to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 can be delayed. As a result, the distribution member C2170 can reliably reach the second position by effectively utilizing the weight of the sphere.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the bottom surface portion C2172b is a region on the base end side (right side in FIG. 96, arrow R direction side) connected to the facing portion C2172a in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position. Is set to a larger angle than the rising inclination angle in a region on the tip end side (the left side in FIG. 96, arrow L direction side) opposite to the facing portion C2172a. In other words, in other words, when the distribution member C2170 is located at the first position, the angle of the downward inclination in the region on the distal end side (the left side in FIG. 96) opposite to the facing portion C2172a is opposite to that of the bottom surface portion C2172b. The angle is set to be larger than the angle of the downward slope in the region on the base end side (right side in FIG. 96) connected to the portion C2172a.

  Therefore, in the initial stage in which the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the receiving portion C2172 is utilized by using the rising inclination in the base end side (the right side in FIG. 96) of the bottom surface portion C2172b. In the latter stage, while ensuring the holding of the sphere in the (bottom portion C2172b), the lower portion of the bottom portion C2172b is used for the passage portion C2144 (the third passage CRt2003) by utilizing the descending slope in the region on the tip side (the left side in FIG. 96). The ball can be smoothly ejected.

  For the reason described above (prevention of backflow to the second passage CRt2002), the facing portion C2172a may be inclined in a direction in which the rolling portion C2173 side is closer to the second passage CRt2002 than the bottom portion C2172b side.

  The receiving portion C2172 is formed such that the bottom surface portion C2172b is inclined downward from the facing portion C2172a toward the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position ( See FIG. 97). This allows the ball received by the receiving portion C2172 to reliably flow out to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140.

  Further, while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface portion C2172b, the weight of the ball is applied to the distribution member C2170, and the distribution member C2170 is moved to the second position (that is, the following ball is moved to the rolling portion C2173 (the The state in which the vehicle can be guided to the four passages CRt4) can be easily maintained.

  The rolling portion C2173 is formed in a region on the opposite side of the receiving portion C2172 (bottom portion 2172b) with the axis C2174 therebetween. That is, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position due to the weight of the ball received by the receiving portion C2172, the region is moved upward (in the direction of the arrow U) with the rotation. Are formed at least in a region including That is, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the downstream side of the rolling portion C2173 is lifted upward, and the distance between the rolling portion C2173 and the magnetic portion C2400 is reduced. Therefore, the ball rolling the rolling part C2173 can be easily jumped (adsorbed) to the magnetic part C2400.

  In this case, in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, if the rolling portion C2173 is formed only on the opposite side in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow LR) with the axis C2174 therebetween, the bottom surface portion When a ball flows down from 2142 (the second passage CRt2002) to the rolling portion C2173, there is a possibility that the distribution member C2170 may be rotated toward the first position due to the weight of the ball and the force of the drop. Therefore, the height position (vertical position) of the rolling portion C2173 is lowered, and the distance between the rolling portion C2173 and the magnetic portion C2400 is increased, so that the ball rolling the rolling portion C2173 jumps to the magnetic portion C2400. (Adsorption) may not be possible.

  On the other hand, the rolling portion C2173 is formed over a range (region) that vertically overlaps the axis C2174 in a state where the distribution member C2170 is located at the second position (see FIG. 97). That is, the region on the upstream side (the second passage CRt2002 side) of the rolling portion C2173 is located on one side in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow L) with respect to the axis C2174, and the weight of the ball rolling on the upstream side is The distribution member C2170 can act as a force in a direction for maintaining the second position.

  Therefore, when a ball flows down from the bottom portion 2142 (the second passage CRt2002) to the rolling portion C2173, the inertia in the direction of maintaining the state at the second position by using the weight and the momentum of the ball is used. A force is applied to the distributing member C2170, and while the distributing member C2170 is about to be displaced (rotated) in a direction to maintain the state at the second position by the action of the inertial force, the ball is moved downstream of the rolling portion C2173. Can be rolled to the side area. As a result, the ball rolling the rolling portion C2173 can be easily jumped (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400.

  The extension length (length in the direction in which the ball is guided) of the bottom surface portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 is set to be larger than the extension length of the rolling portion C2173. Therefore, while the ball rolls on the rolling portion C2173, it is easy to form a state in which another ball rolls on the bottom surface portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 at the same time. That is, while the ball rolls on the rolling portion C2173, the weight of another ball can be applied to the distribution member C2170 on the bottom surface portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172.

  Accordingly, when the ball rolls on the rolling surface C2173, the distribution member C2170 is displaced from the second position to the first position by the weight of the ball (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 is displaced downward). ) Can be suppressed. As a result, the ball rolling the rolling portion C2173 can be easily jumped (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400.

  In particular, since the bottom surface portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 extends in a direction away from the axis C2174 (a direction orthogonal to the axis C2174), the point of action of the force (the point The distance between the position on which the weight acts) and the fulcrum (center of rotation) can be increased (increased). That is, as the ball rolls on the bottom surface portion C2172b, the distribution member C2170 can be easily maintained at the second position (the distribution member C2170 disposed at the second position is displaced (rotated) to the first position. The required force can be increased).

  Accordingly, when the ball rolls on the rolling surface C2173, the distribution member C2170 is displaced from the second position to the first position by the weight of the ball (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 is displaced downward). ) Can be suppressed. As a result, the ball rolling the rolling portion C2173 can be easily jumped (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400.

  Here, the distribution member C2170 includes a direction in which the ball rolls from the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002) to the receiving portion C2172 (a direction in which the receiving portion C2172 receives the ball, a direction of an arrow R), and a receiving portion C2172. The direction in which the ball rolls (the direction in which the received ball rolls, the direction of the arrow L) is the opposite direction. That is, in the receiving portion C2172, the flowing (rolling) direction of the ball is reversed (changed direction).

  Thereby, compared with the case where the direction in which the receiving portion C2172 receives the ball and the direction in which the ball rolls in the receiving portion C2172 are the same direction, the ball is moved by the distributing member C2170 (receiving (The part C2172) can be secured, and the weight of the ball staying in the receiving part C2172 can be used to easily maintain the distribution member C2170 at the second position. As a result, the ball can be stably rolled in the rolling portion C2173.

  The rolling portion C2173 is a portion for guiding (distributing) a ball rolling on the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the magnetic portion C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004). In a state where the dividing member C2170 is disposed at the second position, between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 and the upstream end of the magnetic portion C2400 (the fourth passage CRt2004). Positioned (erected).

  As described above, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) between the first position and the second position, the rolling portion C2173 moves the height position of the upper surface (rolling surface) thereof in the vertical direction. It is displaced (elevated) in the (arrow UD) direction. Thereby, the rolling part C2173 can be arranged at a position below the magnetic part C2400.

  As a result, the distributing member C2170 is arranged at the second position, and the rolling portion C2173 is displaced upward (increased), thereby approaching the magnetic portion C2400 and attracting the ball against the action of gravity. On the other hand, the distributing member C2170 is disposed at the first position and the rolling portion C2173 is displaced (elevated) downward, thereby separating the rolling portion C2173 from the magnetic portion C2400 and utilizing the action of gravity to remove the ball. It is possible to surely form a mode in which no adsorption is performed.

  The connecting portion between the upstream end (the end in the direction of the arrow L) of the rolling portion C2173 and the facing portion C2172a of the receiving portion C2172 is on the upstream side (the side of the first intermediate member C2140 (the second passage CRt2002), the direction of the arrow L). It is formed in the shape of a sharp projection protruding toward. By inserting the protruding portion between the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2, the two spheres (the spheres CB1 and CB2) can be separated.

  In a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, the first intermediate member C2140 rolls with respect to the height position at the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface). The height position at the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the portion C2173 (rolling surface) is located vertically downward (arrow D direction). That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173, and the distribution member C170 disposed at the second position moves toward the first position by a predetermined amount (predetermined rotation angle). ), The downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 are arranged at the same height position.

  Here, when a ball rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 flows into the receiving portion C2172, the distribution member C2170 is displaced downward from the first position by the weight of the ball. (Rotation), and the lower surface of the distribution member C2170 is brought into contact with the lower stopper portion C2145, whereby the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position.

  In this case, there is a possibility that the distribution member C2170 may jump upward (in the direction of the arrow U) due to an impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C2145, and the distribution member C2170 may jump upward due to the impact. The height position at the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (rolling surface) is located vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the height position at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) of C2140. Then, there is a possibility that the ball cannot flow (roll) from the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173.

  In particular, when the ball collides with the distributing member C2170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C2173) that has been flipped upward, and the distribution member C2170 is further jumped upward by the impact of the collision of the ball (ball) When the distributing member C2170 is pushed further upward due to), the ball flows into the receiving portion C2172, although it should originally flow (roll) into the rolling portion C2173 (see FIG. 4). May be accepted).

  On the other hand, in a state where the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the second position, as described above, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (the rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the rolling surface) are connected. Since a step is formed between them, even when the distribution member C2170 is flipped up by an impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 is more than the downstream end of the bottom portion C2142 by the step between the two. It can be restrained from being located vertically upward (direction of arrow U). In other words, the distributing member C2170 can be allowed to jump upward by an amount corresponding to the step between the two. Therefore, the ball to be flown (rolled) into the rolling portion C2173 (the following ball CB2 in which the distance between the preceding ball CB1 and the preceding ball CB1 is less than or equal to a predetermined amount) is transferred to the bottom portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002). Can easily flow into the rolling portion C2173 (rolling).

  As in the case of the second embodiment, the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C2173 (the surface facing the first intermediate member C2140, the surface in the direction of the arrow L) is moved from the rolling portion C2173 to the first side. You may make it incline down toward the intermediate member C2140 (bottom part C2142). That is, the edge on the receiving portion C2172 (opposite portion C2172a) side of the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C2173 is closer to the first intermediate member C2140 than the edge of the rolling portion C2173 on the rolling surface side. The cross-sectional shape may be close.

  Thereby, when the ball collides with the distribution member C2170 (upstream end surface of the rolling portion C2173) that has been flipped up, the distribution member C2170 (the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C2173) is scattered from the ball. ) Can be the force in the direction of pushing the distribution member C2170 downward. As a result, the ball to be flown (rolled) into the rolling portion C2173 (the following ball CB2 in which the distance between the preceding ball CB1 and the preceding ball CB1 is less than or equal to a predetermined amount) is moved to the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002). ) To the rolling portion C2173 (rolling).

  The magnetic portion C2400 is a long metal plate, and is capable of attracting a sphere by utilizing a magnetic force acting from a magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back member C2130. Note that a plurality of magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portion C2400.

  In a state where the distribution member C2170 is located at the second position, when a ball flows down from the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173, the upper surface of the rolling portion C2173 ( The ball rolling on the (rolling surface) jumps from the downstream end of the rolling part C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic part C2400. That is, the magnetic portion C2400 is attracted to a lower edge (a ridge formed by intersecting the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) and the lower surface (the surface in the direction of arrow D)) (see FIG. 103). The ball attracted to the magnetic portion C2400 is moved along the lower edge (longitudinal direction) of the magnetic portion C2400 by the force of the ball by jumping (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward inclination of the magnetic portion C2400.

  In this case, from the lower edge of the magnetic part C2400, depending on the state of the sphere (the speed and position of the sphere when the ball jumps from the rolling part C2173 of the distribution member C2170 to the magnetic part C2400, the state of rotation of the sphere, etc.). An unstable state with the possibility of the ball falling (the possibility that the ball cannot reach the end) can be formed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In particular, since the magnetic portion C2400 (the fourth passage CRt2004) forms a passage between the distribution member C2170 and the fifth passage CRt2005, the interest of the game can be enhanced. In other words, the ball distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the distribution member C2170 moves the second passage CRt2002 in a state where the distance to the preceding ball CB1 is smaller than a predetermined amount (that is, a state in which the ball is connected to the preceding ball CB1). Only the ball that flows down (rolls) (the following ball CB2) is relatively unlikely to be generated. Displacing the ball (the following ball B2) that has reached the distribution member C2170 via such a low possibility in an unstable state where there is a possibility of falling (the possibility of not being able to reach the fifth passage CRt2005). Thus, the player is expected to pass safely, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The thickness dimension of the magnetic portion C2400 is set to a value smaller than the diameter of the sphere (6% of the diameter of the sphere in the present embodiment). Therefore, in the sphere in which the outer surface point CP1 is adsorbed to the lower edge of the magnetic portion C2400, the outer surface point CP2 at a position lower than the position CP1 is in contact with the front of the main body portion C2131. In this case, the center of gravity of the sphere is located farther from the front of the main body portion C2131 than the outer surface point CP2. It acts as a force in the direction of pressing against the front of 2131 (that is, a force for rotating the sphere clockwise (clockwise) around the outer surface point CP1 in FIG. 103) (see FIG. 103).

  Accordingly, when the sphere is attracted to the magnetic portion C2400, the sphere can be supported at two points of the outer surface point CP1 and the outer surface point CP2. As a result, the lower portion (longitudinal direction) of the magnetic portion C2400 The movement of the sphere along can be stabilized. Further, the moving speed of the ball can be reduced (reduced) using the frictional resistance between the outer surface point CP2 and the front of the main body 2131. Accordingly, this also makes it possible to stabilize the movement of the ball, increase the time required for the ball to pass through the fourth passage CRt2004, and entertain the player who expects the ball to reach the fifth passage CRt2005 without falling. Can be improved.

  As described above, the magnet C2300 and the magnetic part C2400 are disposed with the main body part c2131 of the back member C2130 interposed therebetween, and the ball is moved (slid) along the magnetic part C2400, thereby adjusting the attraction force. In addition, the passage of the ball can be formed with a simple structure while facilitating the optimization of the frictional force.

  The second interposed member C2180 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage CRt2006, and is interposed between the front member C2110 and the first intermediate member C2140 and the first interposed member C2160. . That is, the sixth passage CRt2006 is formed by the space defined by the front member C2110 and the first intermediate member C2140, and the space defined by the first intermediate member C2160 and the second intermediate member C2180.

  As described above, the front side (arrow) is provided on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposition member C2180 to allow the ball guided through the second interposition member C2180 (sixth passage CRt2006) to flow into the game area. A concave surface (central outflow surface C181 and side outflow surface C182) formed to be inclined downward toward F direction is formed. An undulation is formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt2006, and a lateral outflow surface C182 is arranged at the bottom of the undulation, while a central outflow surface C181 is arranged at the top of the undulation.

  The upper edge (the edge in the direction of the arrow U) of the front portion C111 of the front member C2110 is located on the upper surface of the second interposition member C2180 (except for the region where the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182 are formed). (In the direction of arrow U). That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposition member C2180 flows out (flows down) only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182 to the game area.

  The concave portion C183 is formed in the bottom surface of the second interposition member C2180, and as described above, a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed between the concave portion C183 and the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C2110. .

  The detour member C2200 further extends a plate-shaped main body portion C2201, a wall surface portion C2202 erected from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the main body portion C2201, and a part of the wall surface portion C2202 to the front side. And a gutter portion C2203 that is formed and provided, and is disposed on the back side of the back member C2130 at a position facing the opening C2131a.

  In a state where the detour member C2200 is disposed on the back member C2130, the standing tip (in the direction of arrow F) of the wall portion C2202 is in contact with the back surface of the back member C2130 (main body portion C2131), and The standing tip (in the direction of arrow F) contacts the back surface of the second interposed member C2180, and the edge of the gutter C2203 contacts the bottom surface of the first interposed member C2160.

  Thus, the space defined by the back member C2130 (the main body portion C2131) and the detour member C2200 (the main body portion C2201 and the wall surface portion C2202), and the first interposed member C2160 and the detour member C2200 (the gutter portion C2203) are formed. A part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed by the partitioned space (see FIGS. 98 and 99).

  The gutter portion C2203 is inclined downward from the back member C2130 to the second interposed member C2180. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed into the detour member C2200 from the opening C2131a of the back member C2130 is rolled on the gutter portion C2203, and between the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C2110 and the second interposed member C2180 (recess C183). Can flow into the fifth passage CRt2005 formed in the second passage.

  Next, the operation of distributing the sphere by the distributing member C2170 will be described. FIGS. 100 to 102 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C2086b showing transitions of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member C2170, and correspond to a cross section taken along line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. FIG. 1036 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b taken along the line CIII-CIII of FIG. 102 (b).

  FIGS. 100A and 100B show a state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, and correspond to FIG. 96. FIGS. 102A and 102B show a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, and correspond to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (a), in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the receiving portion C2172 can receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (sphere). CB1 can flow in).

  That is, in the receiving portion C2172, the facing portion C2172a is disposed at a position intersecting with the extension line extending the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface), and is vertically lower than the extension line extending the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface). The bottom surface portion C2172b is arranged at a position (in the direction of arrow D).

  In a state where the distribution member C2170 is located at the first position, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (the rolling surface) and the upstream end (the arrow L direction) of the rolling portion C2173. The distance between the end on the side and the connecting portion between the rolling portion C2173 and the opposing portion C2172a) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere (dimension through which the sphere can pass).

  On the other hand, the rolling portion C2173 is in a position where the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 cannot be received (the ball CB1 cannot flow) when the distribution member C2170 is located at the first position. Placed in

  That is, in the rolling portion C2173, the bottom surface portion C2172b is disposed at a position (one step higher position) vertically above (in the direction of the arrow U) an extension of the bottom surface portion C2142 (the rolling surface). Note that the vertical interval (height of the step) between the rolling portion C2173 and an extension of the bottom surface portion C2142 (the rolling surface) is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the ball from climbing over the step and flowing into the rolling portion C2172b of the distribution member C2170 at the first position.

  In a state where the distribution member C2170 is located at the first position, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the top surface portion C2143 of the first intermediate member C2140 and the upstream end (the arrow L of the rolling portion C2173). Of the sphere is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere (dimension through which the sphere can pass). This allows the ball to climb over the step and flow into the rolling portion C2172b of the distribution member C2170 at the first position.

  In this case, when the distribution member C2170 is at the first position, the rolling portion C2173 is opposite to the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002) across the axis C2174 in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow LR). And is inclined downward in the direction away from the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002) (the direction of the arrow R).

  Therefore, even if the ball gets over the step and flows into the rolling portion C2172b of the distribution member C2170 located at the first position, the distribution member C2170 is rotated toward the second position by the ball (ie, The rolling part C2173 can be prevented from being lifted up), and the ball can be dropped to the second intermediate member 2150 side (sixth passage CRt2006) along the downward inclination of the rolling part C2173. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball that has climbed over the step from jumping (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400 and flowing down the fourth passage CRt2004 (reaching the fifth passage CRt2005).

  However, the magnetic part C2400 may be provided at a position where the ball that has climbed over the step can jump (adsorb) to the magnetic part C2400. That is, when the interval between the balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, the ball CB2 catches up with the ball CB1, and when the ball CB2 gets over the ball CB1, the ball CB2 is located at a position where it can jump (adsorb) to the magnetic portion C2400. C2400 may be provided. Since the ball CB2 is originally a ball to be sorted to the fourth passage CRt2004, the ball CB2 is prevented from dropping to the second intermediate member 2150 side (sixth passage CRt2006), and disadvantageously to the player. Can be suppressed.

  When the ball CB1 (the preceding ball) and the ball CB2 (the following ball with a predetermined interval between the preceding ball) and the ball CB2 roll on the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, FIG. As shown in ()), the ball CB1 flows into (receives) the receiving portion C2172 of the distribution member C2170, and the ball CB1 abuts (receives) on the facing portion C2172a and is held by the receiving portion C2172.

  When the distance between the balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, the ball CB2 catches up with the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 comes into contact with the ball CB1. Thereby, the ball CB2 can be made to wait behind (upstream side) the ball CB1.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (b), when the ball CB1 is received by the receiving portion C2172, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), the distribution member C2170 moves from the first position to the second position due to the weight of the ball CB1. Displaced (rotated). When the ball CB2 has caught up with the ball CB1, the weight of the ball CB2 is also applied to the distribution member C2170.

  Here, the receiving portion C2172 has a region on the side connected to the bottom portion C2172b of the facing portion C2172a and a region on the side connected to the facing portion C2172a of the bottom portion C2172b, that is, the facing portion C2172a and the bottom portion C2172b. Is convex toward the axis C2174, and is formed into an arc shape having substantially the same shape (substantially the same diameter as the sphere) as the outer shape of the sphere, and the sphere is held by the arcuately curved portion. It is possible.

  In addition, the distribution member C2170 (the area on the upstream side (the direction of the arrow R) in the rolling surface of the bottom surface C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the end on the downstream side (the direction of the arrow R) of the bottom surface C2142) and Is set smaller than the diameter of the sphere (dimension that the sphere cannot pass) when the distribution member C2170 is located at the first position, and the distribution member C2170 is moved from the first position to the first position. By being displaced (rotated) toward two positions, it is gradually enlarged.

  That is, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position between the first position and the second position (a position between FIG. 101A and FIG. 101B), the above-described operation is performed. Between the distribution member C2170 (the area on the upstream side (the direction of the arrow R) in the rolling surface of the bottom surface C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the end on the downstream side (the direction of the arrow R) of the bottom surface C2142). Is increased to a dimension substantially equal to the diameter of the sphere (a dimension through which the sphere can pass), and when the distribution member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position to the second position, the above-described interval is obtained. Is further enlarged to form a maximum spacing at the second position.

  Therefore, while the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state where the ball CB1 is received by the receiving portion C2172 is maintained. That is, the distributing member C2170 is displaced (rotated) while receiving the ball CB1 in the receiving portion C2172 from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position. Thus, the state in which the ball CB2 is in contact with the ball CB1 can be maintained, and the state in which the ball CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 can be maintained.

  In this case, the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the end in the direction of arrow L, a connecting portion with the facing portion C2172a). Is gradually reduced by displacing (rotating) the distributing member C2170 from the first position to the second position, and before the distributing member C2170 reaches the predetermined intermediate position, It is set to a size smaller than the diameter (a size that a sphere cannot pass). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C2172.

  When the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the trajectory of the sphere CB1 held by the receiving portion C2172 (the connection portion between the facing portion C2172a and the bottom surface portion C2172b) is determined. The trajectory of the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side, the connecting portion with the facing portion C2172a) of the rolling portion C2173 passes on the side closer to the axis C2174 than the outer edge (the outer edge opposite to the axis C2174). It is composed of

  Therefore, while maintaining the state where the ball CB2 is in contact with the ball CB1, the state where the ball CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 can be maintained, and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the end in the direction of the arrow L). The ball CB2 can be pushed back (pushed back) by the portion and the portion connected to the opposing portion C2172a). That is, by inserting the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 between the ball CB1 and the ball CB2, both balls can be separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C2172. Further, the ball CB2 can be gradually rolled to the rolling portion C2173, and the subsequent rolling can be stabilized.

  When the distribution member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) toward the second position from the state shown in FIG. 101 (a), the sphere CB1 moves toward the passage portion C2144 as shown in FIG. 101 (b). While rolling on C2172b, the ball CB2 flows down to the rolling portion C2173 (accepted by the rolling portion C2173).

  As shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 102 (b), when the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the second position, the ball CB1 flows from the receiving portion C2172 into the passage portion C2144 (the third passage CRt2003). At the same time, the ball CB2 rolling on the rolling portion C2173 jumps (adsorbs) to the magnetic portion C2400 and flows into the fourth passage CRt2004.

  After the balls CB1 and CB2 flow into the third passage CRt2003 and the fourth passage CRt2004, the distribution member C2170 is returned (displaced) from the second position to the first position by its own weight.

  In addition, even if the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the second position, or even after the distribution member C2170 starts displacement (rotation) from the second position to the first position, the third ball may be used. Reaches the rolling part C2173 and flows into the rolling surface of the rolling part C2173, the third ball rolls on the rolling part C2173. In this case, the second intermediate member 2150 side (sixth passage CRt2006) depends on whether the ball CB1 is on the receiving portion C2172 (bottom portion C2172b) or not, due to the rolling speed (vigor) of the third ball. , Or jumps (adsorbs) to the magnetic portion C2400 and flows into the fourth passage CRt2004. That is, two states can be formed.

  Note that the distribution member C2170 is configured to be displaceable (rotatable) from the first position to the second position with only the weight of one ball. Therefore, when the distance between the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 is larger than the predetermined amount, both the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 are sequentially received by the receiving portion C2172, and undergo the above-described sorting operation, and the third passage CRt2003. It is distributed to.

  As described above, according to the lower frame C2086b in the third embodiment, when the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 are continuous at a predetermined distance or less, the sphere CB1 is sorted (guided) to the third passage CRt2003. The ball CB2 can be lifted upward and distributed (guided) to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the distribution member C2170 displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1, while the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 are separated. When the balls are continuous with an interval exceeding a predetermined amount, both balls (ball CB1 and ball CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the third passage CRt2003. As described above, the path to be guided can be changed according to the state of the series of the balls CB1 and CB2 (whether or not the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball exceeds a predetermined amount), thereby improving the amusement. be able to.

  Next, a center frame C3086 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the distribution member C170 is rotated has been described. However, the distribution member C3170 in the third embodiment is slid. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 104 and 106 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C3086b in the fourth embodiment, and FIGS. 105 and 107 are rear views of the lower frame C3086b. Note that FIGS. 104 and 105 show a state where the distribution member C3170 is arranged at the first position, and FIGS. 106 and 107 show a state where the distribution member C3170 is arranged at the second position. . FIGS. 104 and 106 correspond to the cross section taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77.

  Here, the lower frame C3086b in the fourth embodiment is different from the lower frame C86b in the second embodiment in the structure for displacing the distribution member C3170 and the structure for interlocking the decoration member C3190 with the distribution member C3170. Except for this point, other configurations are the same.

  As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, two linear guide grooves C3131c are provided in the main body portion C131 of the back member C3130 so as to extend in the vertical direction in a posture parallel to each other. These two guide grooves C3131c are disposed so as to be inclined downward (in the direction of arrow D) in a direction approaching the first intermediate member C140.

  That is, the horizontal position (arrow LR direction) of the distribution member C3170 at the second position is closer to the intermediate member C140 (arrow L side) than the horizontal position of the distribution member C3170 at the first position. Be located.

  The distributing member C3170 has a total of four shafts C3171a, a pair of upper and lower members, protruding from the rear surface of the main body C3171. The shaft C3171a is a guided portion slidably inserted into the guide groove C3131c. When the shaft C3171a is slid along the guide groove C3131c, the distribution member C3170 moves to the first position and the second position. Is slid (translated).

  In the left and right guide grooves C3131c, a pair of shafts C3171a are provided. Therefore, the distributing member C3170 does not cause a change in posture due to rotation (that is, while keeping the inclination angles of the bottom surface portion C172b and the rolling portion C173 constant), so that the distributing member C3170 can move between the first position and the second position. It is possible to slide between them.

  A collar CW having a larger diameter than the groove width of the guide groove C3131c is provided at the tip of the shaft C3171a inserted into the guide groove C3131c, and the collar CW restricts the shaft C3171a from coming out of the guide groove C3131c. It is said to be a retaining.

  The distribution member C3170 is defined (arranged) at the first position by the shaft c3171a abutting on the upper end (the end in the direction of the arrow U) of the guide groove C3131c and the upward displacement is regulated (FIG. 104). And FIG. 105), the lower stopper portion C132 abuts against the lower surface of the distribution member C3170, and the downward displacement is regulated, thereby defining (disposing) the second position (see FIGS. 106 and 107). ).

  The decorative member C3190 is formed integrally with the main body portion C191 and includes an arm portion C3193 extending radially outward around the axis C192. The arm portion C3193 has a linear guide groove C3193a having the axis C192. It extends along the radial direction with the center. The shaft C3171a is slidably inserted into the guide groove C3193a.

  The decoration member C3190 has its center of gravity eccentric to one side (opposite to the distribution member C3170 across the axis C192, the left side in FIG. 105) with respect to the rotation center (axis C192). Therefore, in a no-load state, the decorative member C3190 is in a posture in which the arm portion C3193 is lifted upward (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 in rear view, see FIG. 105), and the distribution member C3170 is The shaft C3171a is pushed upward by the arm portion C3193, so that the shaft C3171a is placed at the first position (see FIGS. 104 and 105).

  On the other hand, in a state where the ball is received in the receiving portion C172 of the distribution member C3170, the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member C3170 and the decoration member C3190 as a whole is different from the rotation center (axis C192) by the weight of the ball. Side (the side where the distribution member C3170 is disposed with respect to the shaft C192, the right side in FIG. 107). That is, in a state where the ball is received in the receiving portion C172, the distribution member C3170 is lowered along the guide groove C3131c due to the weight of the ball, and is disposed at the second position. Further, the decorative member C3190 is in a state where the arm portion C3193 is pushed down by the shaft C3171a and is rotated clockwise around the shaft C192 in rear view (see FIG. 107).

  In the second position, when the ball is ejected from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144, the decorative member C3190 is rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 in rear view using the eccentricity of the center of gravity position, The posture is such that the arm portion C3193 is lifted upward. Along with this, the shaft C3171a is pushed upward by the arm portion C3193, so that the distribution member C3170 is arranged (returned) to the first position (see FIGS. 104 and 105).

  The distributing operation of the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 due to the displacing member C3170 being slid between the first position and the second position is the same as in the case of the above-described second embodiment. Omitted.

  As described above, according to the lower frame C3086b in the fourth embodiment, when the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 are continuous at an interval equal to or less than a predetermined amount (including a case where the interval at which both balls are closely contacted is 0). Can distribute (guide) the ball CB1 to the fourth passage CRt4 and distribute (guide) the ball CB2 to the fifth passage CRt5 by the distribution member C170 displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1. On the other hand, when the balls CB1 and CB2 are continuous with an interval exceeding a predetermined amount, both balls (balls CB1 and CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4. As described above, the path to be guided can be changed according to the state of the series of the balls CB1 and CB2 (whether or not the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball exceeds a predetermined amount), thereby improving the amusement. be able to.

  Here, as in the case of the second embodiment, in a structure in which the distribution member C170 is rotated about the axis C192, the displacement of the receiving portion C172 is secured (the position facing the third passage CRt3 and the fourth position). In order to make it possible to displace between the position facing the passage CRt4), it is necessary to increase the length (distance) between the shaft C192 and the receiving portion C172, and to increase the length (distance) between the shaft C192 and the receiving portion C172. (In the direction connecting), the size of the distribution member C170 is increased.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the distribution member C3170 is slid vertically, the displacement of the receiving portion C172 is secured (that is, the position facing the third passage CRt3 and the position facing the fourth passage CRt4). Is displaceable), and since there is no need to provide a portion for connecting the rotation center (axis C192) and the receiving portion C172, the size of the distribution member C3170 in the width direction can be reduced. That is, the dimension in the width direction of the distribution member C3170 can be set to the length dimension (dimension in the direction of the arrow LR) of the rolling surface of the rolling portion C173.

  Next, a dish member C4120 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 108 (a) is a top view of the dish member C4120 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 108 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member C4120 along the line CVIIIb-CVIIIb in FIG. 108 (a). (C) is sectional drawing of the plate member C4120 in the CVIIIc-CVIIIc line of FIG. 108 (a).

  The dish member C4120 includes an upper bottom surface portion C4121 and a lower bottom surface portion C4122 forming a bottom surface of the passage, and an upper side wall portion C4123 and a lower side wall portion C4124 forming the side wall of the passage.

  The upper bottom surface portion C4121 extends along the left-right direction (the direction of the arrow LR) as a substantially straight passage (first passage CRt4001) in a top view, and a direction (arrow) approaching the lower bottom surface portion C4122. (R direction).

  The upper side wall portion C4123 defines a passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001). The width of the passage should be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that a plurality of balls can be guided only in a serial state. However, the passage width may be a dimension (a dimension larger than twice as large as a sphere) that can guide a plurality of spheres in parallel.

  A cutout portion C4123a is formed in the upper side wall portion C4123 at a downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (the first passage CRt4001), and the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (the first cutout portion C4123a) is formed through the cutout portion c4123a. The sphere can flow down from the passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (the second passage CRt4002).

  The lower bottom surface portion C4122 extends in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow FB) in a top view, and has a substantially linear shape at one end and the other end in the extending direction. An arc portion C4122b that is curved in an arc shape in which the outflow surface C122a side is concave in a top view is formed between the pair of straight portions C4122a. Note that the arc portion C4122b has a shape that protrudes most toward the upstream side (the arrow L direction side) in the extending direction (the direction of the arrow LR) of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 at substantially the center in the front-rear direction.

  In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 in a plane including the extending direction (the direction of the arrow FB) and the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD) becomes closer to the arc portion C4122b in the pair of linear portions C4122a. It is formed as a plane that is inclined downward in the vertical direction (direction of arrow D), and is formed substantially horizontally in the circular arc portion C4122b. That is, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane orthogonal to the vertical direction.

  The lower side wall C4124 includes one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the sphere is guided) of the lower bottom surface C4122 (the second passage CRt4002), and the lower bottom surface C4122 (the second passage CRt4002). ) Is defined. The width of the passage should be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that a plurality of balls can be guided only in a serial state.

  The straight portion C4122a of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is disposed substantially orthogonal to the upper bottom surface portion C4121 in a top view, and the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow R) of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 and the lower bottom surface. One end of the portion C4122 in the longitudinal direction (the end in the direction of arrow B, the rising slope of the straight portion C4122a) is disposed adjacent to the portion C4122.

  At a position corresponding to the notch portion C4123a in the upper side wall portion C4123, the lower side wall portion C4124 is not formed, and as described above, from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (the first passage CRt4001) via the notch portion C4123a. The sphere can flow down to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002).

  The lower side wall portion C4124 on the inner diameter side of the circular arc portion C4122b (the center side of the circular arc in the top view, the direction of the arrow R) has a substantially central portion in the front-rear direction of the circular arc portion C4122b (the position where it protrudes most in the direction of the curved arrow L). ) Is formed with a notch portion C124a, and the ball flows down from the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 81) via the notch portion C124a. It is possible.

  As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is formed of the pair of straight portions C4122a and the arc portion C4122b, and is located on the upwardly inclined side of the straight portion C4122a (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122). Since the ball flows down from the (first passage CRt4001), the dropped ball is reciprocated between one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (the second passage CRt4002). Above, the sphere can flow down from the notch portion C124a to the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 81).

  Accordingly, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) at a predetermined interval, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 ( Utilizing the reciprocating motion in the second passage CRt4002), the following ball can catch up with the preceding ball, and the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball can be reduced (the balls are connected). .

  In the circular arc portion C4122b of the lower bottom surface portion C4122, the center of the circular arc portion C4122b in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow FB) corresponding to the cutout portion C124a (the direction most protruding in the curved arrow L direction). The outflow surface C122a is recessed at (position) The outflow surface C122a is a portion for allowing the sphere guided on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (the second passage CRt4002) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (the third passage CRt3). And is formed as a concave surface inclined downward toward the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) (see FIG. 81).

  Therefore, after reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C4122, the sphere whose rolling speed has been reduced can flow smoothly (downflow) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) using the outflow surface C122a. it can. That is, by using the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (the second passage CRt4002), the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball is reduced (the connected balls) are connected to each other. , And can flow out (flow down) to the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) (see FIG. 81).

  The outflow surface C122a has a notch C124a in a top view, in which the width of the concave surface (the size in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C4122, the size in the direction of arrow FB) is notched. The closer to the side, the larger the shape.

  In addition, in a state where the ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposite side, arrow L direction side) of the cutout portion C124a in top view, the ball rolls on the outflow surface C122a. Do (cross). That is, the ball that rolls (reciprocates) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (the second passage CRt4002) makes the position farthest from the notch portion C124a (the side top of the ball contacts the lower side wall portion C4124). The outflow surface C122a is formed to a range overlapping with the center of the sphere when viewed from above even when the sphere rolls (position), which is the locus of the top below the sphere when the sphere rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C4112. The rolling line crosses the outflow surface C122a).

  On the other hand, when the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface portion C4122, the sphere flowing down to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (the second passage CRt4002) is applied to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (the second passage portion). Without reciprocating the CRt 4002) once or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times, there is a risk that the inclination of the outflow surface C122a causes the outflow surface C122a to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (the third passage CRt3). . That is, without decreasing the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball, the two balls may flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (the third passage CRt3) while keeping the distance.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is formed to be curved in an arc shape, and the notch portion C124a is formed on the inner diameter side (the center side of the arc in the top view, the arrow R direction side) of the arc portion C4122b. Is formed. Therefore, a centrifugal force is applied to the ball rolling on the arc portion C4122b toward the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the notch portion C124a, and thereby, the ball is opposite to the notch portion C124a. While pressing the ball against the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the side (opposite side), the ball can be rolled (reciprocated) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002).

  Thereby, before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, it is possible to suppress the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (the third passage CRt3, see FIG. 81) due to the effect of the inclination of the outflow surface C122a. That is, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, the ball easily gets over (easily crosses) the outflow surface C122a, and sufficiently reciprocates the ball along the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (the second passage CRt4002). It can be made easier. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the preceding ball catches the following ball and that the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball is reduced (the balls are connected).

  Next, a lower frame C5086b in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 109A is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C5086b in the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to a cross section taken along line XCIX-XCIX in FIG. Note that FIG. 109 (a) shows only cross sections of the back member C2130, the magnet C2300, and the magnetic part C5400 of the lower frame C5086b.

  The magnetic portion C5400 is a long metal body, and a protrusion is provided vertically downward (arrow D direction) from an end opposite to the back member C2130 (arrow F direction side). Therefore, the magnetic portion C5400 has a substantially L-shaped cross section. Further, the protrusion of the magnetic part C5400 is arranged such that the end on the side of the back member C2130 is spaced from the front of the back member C2130 by a distance larger than the radius of the sphere, and the bottom surface of the magnetic part C5400 has a cross-sectional shape. Are formed linearly in the width direction (the direction of arrow FB).

  The magnetic portion C5400 can attract a sphere by using a magnetic force acting from a magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back member C2130. Note that a plurality of magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portion C5400.

  In a state where the distribution member C2170 is located at the second position, when a ball flows down from the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173, the upper surface of the rolling portion C2173 ( The ball rolling on the rolling surface jumps from the downstream end of the rolling portion C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic portion C5400 (see FIG. 102). That is, the magnetic portion C5400 is attracted to the bottom surface of the protrusion. The ball attracted to the magnetic portion C5400 moves to the downstream end of the magnetic portion C5400 along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portion C5400 due to the force of the ball by jumping (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward inclination of the magnetic portion C5400. Is done. This allows the ball that has flowed down along the magnetic portion C5400 to be guided to the fifth passage CRt2005 (see FIG. 97).

  As described above, the protrusion of the magnetic portion C5400 is disposed along the magnetic portion C5400 because the end on the back member C2130 side is disposed at a distance larger than the radius of the sphere from the front of the back member C2130. The contact between the flowing ball and the back member C2130 is suppressed. Therefore, the application of frictional force to the sphere can be suppressed, and the flow speed of the sphere can be increased. In addition, since the ball is not supported by the front surface of the back member C2130, it is possible to form a mode in which the ball swings when flowing down, and the ball may drop from the magnetic portion C5400 (the possibility that the ball cannot reach the fifth passage CRt2005). Can be higher. As a result, the behavior of the ball can be noticed by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Next, a lower frame C6086b in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 109B is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C6086b in the seventh embodiment, and corresponds to a cross section taken along line XCIX-XCIX in FIG. Note that FIG. 109 (b) shows only the cross section of the back member C2130, the magnet C2300, and the magnetic part C6400 of the lower frame C6086b.

  The magnetic portion C6400 in the seventh embodiment is different from the magnetic portion C5400 in the sixth embodiment in that the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic portion C6400 is closer to the inclined surface facing the back member C2130 (that is, closer to the back member C2130 as it goes vertically upward). The other configuration is the same as that of the magnetic portion C5400 in the sixth embodiment except that the magnetic portion C5400 is formed as a surface that performs the same operation.

  The sphere adsorbed on the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic portion C6400 comes into contact with the back member C2130 due to the effect of the inclination of the bottom surface and the magnetic force directly applied from the magnet portion C2300. Therefore, a frictional force can be applied to the ball, and the flowing speed of the ball flowing down along the magnetic portion C6400 can be reduced. Thereby, the moving time of the ball can be lengthened, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, the sphere can be sandwiched between the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 and the back member C2130, and the sphere can be prevented from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic part C6400.

  Next, a center frame D86 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the center frame 86 is formed of one component has been described. However, the center frame D86 in the eighth embodiment is formed of two members, an upper frame D86a and a lower frame D86b. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 110 is a front view of the game board D13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110, the center frame D86 is a member that is formed in a shape that can be fitted into the window 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60, and is fixed to the base plate 60 with a tapping screw or the like. An upper frame D86a and a lower frame D86b are provided.

  The upper frame D86a is disposed along the upper (FIG. 110 upper) and left and right (FIG. 110 left and right) inner edges of the window 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60. The lower frame D86b is It is arranged along the inner edge on the lower side (lower side in FIG. 110) of the window 60a of 60. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an area surrounded by the upper frame D86a and the lower frame D86b.

  The upper frame D86a is a part of the center frame 86 in the first embodiment (a portion disposed along the lower inner edge of FIG. 110 in the window 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 7)). That is, the configuration in which the lower frame D86b is disposed) is omitted, and other portions except for the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in the first embodiment.

  Next, the lower frame D86b will be described. FIG. 111 is a front perspective view of the lower frame D86b, and FIG. 112 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame D86b. 111 and 112, only a part of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and tapping screws for fastening and fixing the lower frame D86b to the base plate 60 are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, the lower frame D86b has a receiving port DOPin formed as an opening capable of receiving a ball, a first passage DRt1 communicating with the receiving port DOPin, and a first passage thereof. A second passage DRt2 through which the ball guided by DRt1 flows down, and a ball guided by the second passage DRt2 (a ball reciprocating in the second passage DRt2 along its longitudinal direction (the direction of arrow FB)). Flows through the third passage DRt3 and a ball guided along the third passage DRt3 (a ball that reciprocates along the third passage DRt3 along its longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR)). The fourth passage DRt4, the fifth passage DRt5, and the sixth passage DRt6 that are distributed according to the position where the ball flows down, and the seventh passage through which a ball guided through the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 flows. DRt7, an eighth passage DRt8 in which the ball guided in the sixth passage DRt6 flows down, and an outlet DOPout formed as an opening for the ball guided in the eighth passage DRt8 to flow into the game area are formed. (See FIGS. 119 to 121).

  The sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 are connected (connected) to the downstream end of the sixth passage DRt6 at the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8, and form one passage. That is, the passage is partially formed on the upstream side (first half) by the sixth passage DRt6 and on the downstream side (second half) by the eighth passage DRt8.

  An upper frame passage DRt0 (see FIG. 110) is formed in the upper frame D86a. The upper frame passage DRt0 guides a ball that has flowed (entered) from an area (a region between the center frame D86 (upper frame D86a) and the rail 61) on the left side in front view (the area between the center frame D86 (upper frame D86a) and the rail 61) in the game area. The receiving end DOPin of the lower frame D86b communicates with the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0.

  That is, the ball that has flowed (entered) from the game area into the upper frame path DRt0 flows (enters) from the upper frame path DRt0 into the first path DRt1 of the lower frame D86b via the reception port DOPin.

  The passage width of the third passage DRt3 is defined by the side walls (the side wall portion D142 of the intermediate member D140 and the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130) facing each other at a predetermined interval. The (side wall portion D132 of the back member D130) is partially cut (the side wall is not formed), and a flow-down port DOPfl through which a ball can flow is opened at a position adjacent to the cut region in a top view. You.

  The sphere guided along the third passage DRt3 (the sphere reciprocating along the third passage DRt3 along the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR)) is connected to the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage via the downflow opening DOPfl. It is possible to flow down (enter the ball) to either DRt5 or the sixth passage DRt6.

  The flow-down port DOPfl projects in a direction (arrow B direction) orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3, and is formed as a substantially rectangular space (opening) when viewed from above, extending along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3. You. In addition, the outlet DOPfl is partitioned by the main body part D131 of the back member D130 and the connecting part D133.

  The upstream ends (openings on the upstream side) of the fourth passage DRt4, the sixth passage DRt6, and the fifth passage DRt5 are sequentially arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3 at the downstream opening DOPfl. That is, the upstream end (upstream opening) of the sixth passage DRt6 is located at the center in the longitudinal direction of the downflow opening DOPfl, and the upstream ends (upstream opening) of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 are located at the sixth end. With the upstream end of the passage DRt6 interposed therebetween, it is located on one side in the longitudinal direction (the arrow L direction side) and the other side (the arrow R direction side) of the flow-down port DOPfl.

  Therefore, the sphere that reciprocates in the third passage DRt3 along its longitudinal direction and flows down to a region including the longitudinal center (the direction of the arrow LR) of the outlet DOPfl flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6. The sphere flowing down to a region including one longitudinal side (the direction of the arrow L) or the other side (the direction of the arrow R) of the downflow opening DOPfl flows into (enters) the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5. You. That is, whether the ball guided in the third passage DRt3 is distributed to the sixth passage DRt6 from the fourth passage DRt4 is determined according to the position (area) flowing down from the third passage DRt3.

  Here, when the ball guided in the sixth passage DRt6 flows down (flows) into the eighth passage DRt8, the outlet DOPout, which is the outlet of the eighth passage DRt8 (the opening through which the ball flows out to the game area), It is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 110). Therefore, the ball distributed to the sixth passage DRt6 is likely to win the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 is high).

  On the other hand, when the ball guided through the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 flows down (flows) into the seventh passage DRt7, the ball guided through the seventh passage DRt7 is played in the seventh passage DRt7. A central outflow surface D151 is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 as a concave surface formed to be inclined downward toward the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) so as to flow out to the region. In addition, lateral outflow surfaces D152 are formed (arranged) at two positions that are different from each other in the width direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 110) of the game board 13 from above the first winning opening 64 in the vertical direction. The seventh passage DRt7 has an undulation, a lateral outflow surface D152 formed at the bottom of the undulation, and a central outflow surface D151 formed at the top of the undulation.

  Therefore, the probability that the ball distributed to the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 flows out of the side outflow surface D162 to the game region in the seventh passage DRt7 rather than the flow out of the central outflow surface D161 to the game region. As a result, it is difficult to win the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning in the first winning opening 64 is lower than that of the ball distributed to the sixth passage DRt6 described above).

  As described above, in the lower frame D86b in the present embodiment, the sphere reciprocating along the third passage DRt3 along the longitudinal direction is distributed to the sixth passage DRt6, so that the first winning opening 64 can be easily won. (In the present embodiment, it is possible to almost certainly make the first winning opening 64 receive a ball). Therefore, when the ball reciprocates along the third passage DRt3 along its longitudinal direction, the ball is distributed to the sixth passage DRt6 in order to increase the probability that the ball will win in the first winning opening 64 (surely win). It is possible to make the player expect that the game will be performed and to enhance the interest of the game.

  Here, in the lower frame D86b in the present embodiment, a pair of displacement members D180 can be opened and closed (displaceable between the closed position and the open position) at the upstream end (opening on the upstream side) of the sixth passage DRt6. Will be arranged. The pair of displacement members D180 are rotatably supported on the base end side, and are disposed in such a posture that the tip end side opposite to the base end side is on the upper side (arrow U direction side), and the base end side is the rotation axis. By displacing (rotating) the distal ends in directions approaching or moving away from each other, the tip is displaced (rotated) between the closed position and the open position.

  The pair of displacement members D180 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR) of the downflow opening DOPfl, and the sphere that has flowed (entered) between the opposing faces of the pair of displacement members D180 is the sixth. The ball that has flowed (entered) into the passage DRt6 and has not flowed (entered) between the opposing faces of the pair of displacement members D180 flows into (enters) the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5.

  The opposing interval at the distal end side of the pair of displacement members D180 is made larger at the open position than at the closed position, and when the pair of displacement members D180 is displaced (rotated) to the open position, the closed position. As compared with the case described above, the area that can flow (enter the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6 is expanded, and the area that can flow (enter the ball) into the fourth and fifth passages DRt4 and DRt5 is reduced. That is, the ratio of the distance between the distal ends of the pair of displacement members D180 to the distance (dimension) in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR) of the flow-down port DOPfl is such that the ratio at the open position is larger than the ratio at the closed position. Be enlarged. Therefore, in a state where the pair of displacement members D180 are in the open position, a ball is more likely to flow into (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 than in a state where the pair of displacement members D180 is in the closed position.

  In this case, as described below, when a ball flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position using the weight (mass) of the ball. (Rotated). Specifically, a rolling member D170 is provided in the sixth passage DRt6, and while the ball is rolling on the rolling member D170, the pair of displacement members D180 is disposed at the open position (displacement). ), And while no ball is present on the rolling member D170, the pair of displacement members D180 are disposed (displaced) in the closed position.

  As described above, in the lower frame D86b in the present embodiment, when a ball flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 is displaced (rotated) to the open position (the sixth passage DRt6). This makes it easier for the ball to enter the ball), whereby the ball following the ball that has entered the sixth passage DRt6 (for example, a ball that reciprocates in the third passage DRt3 in the longitudinal direction, a ball following the ball). The ball can easily enter the sixth passage DRt6.

  Therefore, when the first ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the subsequent second ball enters the sixth passage DRt6 due to the displacement (rotation) of the pair of displacement members D180 to the open position. If the following second ball is entered into the sixth passage DRt6, the second ball can enter the sixth passage DRt6 due to the subsequent second ball entering the sixth passage DRt6 (the second ball). Of the displacement member D180 to the open position using the weight of the third ball (the third ball following the second ball), which is likely to enter the sixth passage DRt6. A state can be formed and these aspects can be repeated thereafter. Therefore, when the ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the player can expect the occurrence of a chain of entering balls into the sixth passage DRt6. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the closed position, the minimum value of the opposing interval is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (for example, 1.3 of the diameter of the sphere). In the state of being displaced (rotated) to the open position, the facing distance on the tip side is set to be about three times the diameter of the sphere.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame D86b will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 122 in addition to FIGS. 111 to 112.

  FIG. 113 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame D86b, and FIG. 114 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame D86b. FIG. 115 is a top view of the lower frame D86b, FIG. 116 is a front view of the lower frame D86b, and FIG. 117 is a rear view of the lower frame D86b.

  FIG. 118 (a) is a side view of the lower frame D86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXVIIIa in FIG. 116, and FIG. 118 (b) is a side view of the lower frame D86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXVIIIb in FIG.

  FIG. 119 (a), FIG. 120 (a) and FIG. 121 (a) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D86b, and correspond to a cross section taken along line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. FIGS. 119 (b), 120 (b) and 121 (b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D86b.

  In FIG. 119 (a) and FIG. 119 (b), the state where the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position is shown in FIGS. FIG. 121B illustrates a state where the rolling member D170 is disposed at the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed at the open position.

  In FIGS. 120A and 120B, the rolling member D170 is displaced from the initial position (first position) to the second position (or from the second position to the initial position (first position)). Rotation), and a state in the middle of the displacement when the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) from the closed position toward the open position (or from the open position to the closed position).

  Further, in FIGS. 120 (a) and 121 (a), the illustration of the sphere rolling on the rolling member D170 is omitted, and in FIGS. 119 (b), 120 (b) and 121 (b), The state where the detour member D200 is removed is illustrated.

  FIG. 122A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along the line CXXIIa-CXXIIa in FIG. 115, and FIG. 122B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along the line CXXIIb-CXXIIb in FIG. FIG. 122 (c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D86b along the line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in FIG. 119.

  As shown in FIGS. 111 to 122, the lower frame D86b includes a front member D110, a plate member D120 disposed on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) of the front member D110, and a front member D110. A back member D130, which is opposed to the back surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow B) at a predetermined interval, is interposed between the front member D110 and the back member D130, and the back surface of the front member D110 and the front surface of the back member D130. (A surface on the side of arrow F) at a predetermined interval, and an intermediate member D140, a first interposition member D150 interposed between the front member D110 and the intermediate member D140, and an intermediate member D140. A second interposed member D160 interposed between the opposing rear members D130, a rolling member D170 disposed between the interposed intermediate member D140 and the rear member D130, and A position member D180, a transmission member D190 and a detour member D200 disposed on the rear side of the rear member D130, and a displaceably disposed (rotatably supported) on the rear member D130, and one side (the arrow F direction side). ), And a shaft support member D210 whose other side (arrow B side) can contact the transmission member D190.

  The rolling member D170 and the displacement member D180 are disposed so as to be displaceable (rotatable) between the intermediate member D140 and the back member D130, and the transmission member D190 is displaceable (rotatable) on the back side of the back member D130. It is arranged in.

  In the lower frame D86b, each member is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw, and the rolling member D170, the displacement member D180, and the transmission member D190 are displaceably disposed on the back member D130 (to be rotatable). By being pivoted, it is configured as one (single) unit (see FIG. 111).

  Further, in the lower frame D86b, other members except the displacement member D180 and the transmission member D190 are made of a light-transmissive (that is, transparent material that can see through the rear-side member and the sphere) resin material. The transmission member D190 is made of a colored resin material. Therefore, the ball that passes from the first passage DRt1 to the eighth passage DRt8 can be visually recognized by the player, and the opening / closing operation (open / closed state) of the displacement member D180 can be visually recognized by the player, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

  In this case, it is sufficient for the lower frame D86b that at least one of the displacement member D180 and the rolling member D170 located on the front side (in the direction of the arrow F) is made of a light-transmissive resin material. Alternatively, a mode in which only a region located on the front side of at least a part of at least one of the displacement member D180 and the rolling member D170 may be formed of a light-transmissive resin material. If the displacement member D180 can be visually recognized, the player can grasp based on the open / closed state whether or not the ball is likely to flow down (enter) the sixth passage DRt6, and even if the displacement member D180 cannot be visually recognized. If the rolling member D170 can be visually recognized, the player can grasp the open / closed state of the displacement member D180 based on the rotation state of the rolling member D170 (the posture that changes depending on the presence or absence of a rolling ball), and thereby enjoy the interest of the game. This is because it can be increased.

  Therefore, it is preferable that the rolling member D170 be made of a colored resin material. This is because the rotation state of the rolling member D170 (the posture that changes depending on the presence or absence of the rolling ball) can be easily recognized by the player.

  The rolling member D170, the displacement member D180, and the transmitting member D190 are made of a light-transmissive (transparent or colored) resin material, and have a front surface painted or a seal attached. Is also good.

  On the other hand, in the lower frame D86b, a member located on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the displacement member D180 or the rolling member D170 is made of a light-impermeable resin material (or painted). Or a seal is attached), the displacement member D180 or the rolling member D170 may be configured to be invisible to the player from the front side.

  The front member D110 includes a plate-shaped front portion D111 forming a front surface, a plate-shaped bottom portion D112 erected from the back of the front portion D111, and one longitudinal direction of the front portion D111 and the bottom portion D112 ( (In the direction of the arrow L).

  In the front part D111, a plurality of insertion holes D111a are formed in the plate thickness direction along outer edges on the lower side (arrow D direction side) and side sides (arrow L direction side) of the front part D111. The lower frame D86b is fitted into the window 60a from the front of the base plate 60 in an assembled state (unitized state), and the tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole D111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (arranged) to the base plate 60.

  An outlet DOPout is formed in the front part D111 at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 110) (drilled in the thickness direction). As described above, the outlet DOPout is an opening serving as an outlet when the ball guided through the eighth passage DRt8 flows out to the game area.

  The bottom surface portion D112 has a bottom surface of the first interposed member D150 opposed to the upper surface thereof, and a part of the eighth passage DRt8 (the most downstream portion) between the opposed bottom surface portion D112 and the first interposed member D150 (recess D153). Is formed. Therefore, for example, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced as compared with a case where a through hole formed through the first interposition member D150 is formed as a part of the eighth passage DRt8.

  The bottom portion D112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal direction of the front portion D111, and the upright end (arrow B direction side) of the bottom portion D112 is set up at the upright end (arrow F direction) of the bottom portion D144 in the intermediate member D140. Side) over the entire area. Thus, intrusion of foreign matter such as wire from the bottom surface side of the lower frame D86b is suppressed.

  In the bottom portion D112, the vertical dimension of the portion defining the eighth passage DRt8 from the front portion D111 is made larger than the vertical size of the other portions of the bottom portion D112, and the eighth portion of the bottom portion D112 The portion defining the passage DRt8 has its standing tip abutted on the front surface of the main body portion D141 of the intermediate member D140.

  A dish member D120 is provided on the upper surface side (the arrow U direction side) of the connecting portion D113, and is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw.

  The dish member D120 includes a receiving port DOPin, an upper bottom surface portion D121 and a lower bottom surface portion D122 that form a bottom surface of a passage that guides a ball received from the receiving port DOPin, an upper side wall portion D123 that forms a side wall of the passage, and And a lower side wall portion D124.

  As described above, the receiving port DOPin is an opening that receives a ball from the upper frame passage DRt0 of the upper frame D86a (see FIG. 110). In a state where the center frame D86 is mounted (disposed) on the base plate 60, the back surface of the upper frame D86a is overlapped with the front surface of the front portion D111 and the front surface of the connecting portion D113, and both are fastened and fixed by tapping screws. As a result, the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0 communicates with the receiving port DOPin.

  The upper bottom surface portion D121 extends along the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow FB) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and is inclined downward in the direction away from the receiving port DOPin (the direction of the arrow B). Formed. Note that the upper bottom surface portion D121 is positioned vertically lower (the arrow D direction side) than the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0, and a vertical step is formed between the upper bottom surface portion D121 and the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0. . That is, the dish member D120 is configured to freely drop a ball from the upper frame passage DRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion D121.

  A concave groove D121a having a U-shaped cross section is formed in the center of the upper bottom surface portion D121 in the width direction (the direction of the arrow LR) (see FIG. 84). The concave groove D121a extends linearly along the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow FB). The groove width (dimension in the direction of arrow LR) of the concave groove D121a is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the groove depth (dimension in the direction of arrow UD) of the concave groove D121a is the bottom of the groove D121a. Is set to a depth that does not allow the ball to touch.

  Thus, the sphere on the upper bottom surface portion D121 can be supported at two places (a pair of ridge lines where the upper bottom surface portion D121 and the concave groove D121a intersect). Therefore, the contact area between the ball and the passage can be increased as compared with the case where the concave groove D121a is not formed (that is, the case where the ball is supported at only one location). Therefore, the impact of the ball dropped from the upper frame passage DRt0 can be buffered (accepted) and the resistance when the ball rolls can be increased.

  As described above, the ball is dropped from the upper frame passage DRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion D121, and the ball on the upper bottom surface portion D121 is supported at two places. When the ball flows (falls) from the upper frame passage DRt0 into the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1), the upstream ball bottom portion D121 (first passage DRt1) delays the flow of the preceding ball and delays the downstream movement. This makes it easier for a running ball to catch up with a preceding ball. Therefore, the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball can be reduced.

  The upper side wall portion D123 is a wall portion that separates an end on the downstream side (arrow B direction side) of the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) and a passage width of the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1). , And is formed as a plate-shaped body that stands upright in the vertical direction (the direction of arrow FB). The width of the passage should be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that a plurality of balls can be guided only in a serial state.

  A cutout portion D123a is formed in the upper side wall portion D123 at the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion D121 (the first passage DRt1), and the upper bottom surface portion D121 (the first bottom surface portion D121) is formed through the cutout portion D123a. The sphere can flow down from the passage DRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the second passage DRt2).

  The lower bottom surface portion D122 extends along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage in a top view, and extends in the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow direction). The cross-sectional shape in a plane including the U-D direction is formed to be curved in an arc shape that protrudes downward in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow D) (see FIG. 121).

  Note that the lower bottom surface portion D122 is located vertically below (the arrow D direction side) the downstream end (the portion where the cutout portion D123a is formed) of the upper bottom surface portion D121, and is a downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion D121. , A vertical step is formed. That is, the dish member D120 is configured to freely drop a ball from the upper bottom surface portion D121 to the lower bottom surface portion D122.

  The lower side wall portion D124 includes one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction of guiding the sphere, the direction of the arrow FB) of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2), and the lower bottom surface portion. D122 (the second passage DRt2). The width of the passage should be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that a plurality of balls can be guided only in a serial state.

  The lower bottom surface portion D122 is arranged in parallel with the upper bottom surface portion D121 in a top view, and the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow B) of the upper bottom surface portion D121 and one end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122. (The end on the side of the arrow B) is disposed at a position adjacent thereto.

  At a position corresponding to the notch portion D123a in the upper side wall portion D123, the lower side wall portion D124 is not formed, and as described above, from the upper bottom surface portion D121 (the first passage DRt1) via the notch portion D123a. The sphere can flow down (fall) to the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2).

  A cutout portion D124a is formed in the lower side wall portion D124 at a position corresponding to the bottom portion (the lowest vertical position in the vertical direction) of the lower bottom surface portion D122 curved in an arc shape. The ball can flow down from the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) to the first interposition member D150 (third passage DRt3) via the portion D124a.

  As described above, the lower bottom surface portion D122 is formed to be curved in an arc shape, and the upper bottom surface portion D121 (the first passage DRt1) is provided on one of the rising inclined sides (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122). ), The sphere flows down, and the sphere is reciprocated between one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2), and then the notch is cut out. The ball can flow down from the portion D124a to the first interposed member D150 (third passage DRt3).

  Thus, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion D121 (the first passage DRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the second passage DRt2) at a predetermined interval, the lower balls D122 ( Using the reciprocating motion in the second passage DRt2), the preceding ball can catch up with the following ball, and the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball can be reduced (the balls can be linked). .

  The outflow surface D122a is formed in the lower bottom surface portion D122 at a position corresponding to the cutout portion D124a (ie, a position where the height position in the vertical direction is the lowest). The outflow surface D122a is a portion for allowing a sphere guided on the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the second passage DRt2) to flow out to the first intervening member D150 (the third passage DRt3). It is formed as a concave surface inclined downward toward the (third passage DRt3).

  Therefore, after reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion D122, the sphere whose rolling speed is reduced smoothly flows out (flows down) to the first interposed member D150 (third passage DRt3) using the outflow surface D122a. Can be done. That is, using the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the second passage DRt2), the ball (the connected ball) in which the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball is reduced is connected to the connected ball. , And can flow out (flow down) to the first interposed member D150 (third passage DRt3).

  The outflow surface D122a has a notch D124a in a top view, in which the width of the concave surface (the size in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion D122, the size in the direction of the arrow FB) is notched. The closer to the side, the larger the shape is formed (see FIG. 115).

  In addition, in a state where the ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion D124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the cutout portion D124a in the top view, the ball rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface D122a. That is, the ball that rolls (reciprocates) on the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the second passage DRt2) causes the topmost portion of the ball to contact the lower side wall portion D124 at the position farthest from the notch portion D124a. The outflow surface D122a is formed up to a range overlapping with the center of the sphere when viewed from above even when the sphere rolls (position) (top view below the sphere when the sphere rolls on the lower bottom surface portion D122). The rolling line crosses the outflow surface D122a).

  In the present embodiment, the cross section of the lower bottom surface portion D122 in a plane perpendicular to the extending direction (the direction of the arrow FB) and parallel to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD) has a horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow F). −B direction). However, as in the case of the above-described embodiment (see FIG. 84), the lower bottom surface portion D122 may be inclined downward in the direction away from the notch portion D124a (the direction of the arrow L).

  The formation position of the outflow surface D122a is one end side (in the present embodiment, the upper side in the present embodiment) from the center of the lower bottom surface portion D122 in the longitudinal direction (the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion D122, the arrow FB direction). It is disposed at a position biased (closer) to the downstream end side of the bottom surface portion D121 (in the direction of arrow B) (see FIG. 121).

  In this case, the height position of the lower bottom surface portion D122 in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD) is one end in the longitudinal direction (the end in the direction of the arrow B) and the other end (the end in the direction of the arrow F). And a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction)). In the vertical downward direction (arc shape convex toward the arrow D direction), the curvature between one end side in the longitudinal direction (arrow B direction side) and the outflow surface D122a is the other end side in the longitudinal direction (arrow arrow). The curvature is larger than the curvature between the F direction side) and the outflow surface D122a. That is, the radius between one end in the longitudinal direction (arrow B direction) and the outflow surface D122a is smaller than the radius between the other longitudinal end (arrow F direction) and the outflow surface D122a.

  Thereby, in the region between the other end in the longitudinal direction (the side in the direction of arrow F) and the outflow surface D122a, it is easy to catch up the following ball with the preceding ball, and the collision at the time of catching up is moderated (ie, In addition, it is possible to easily form a state in which the preceding ball and the following ball are connected to each other by suppressing an increase in the distance between the two balls due to the impact when the following ball collides with the preceding ball. As a result, both balls can easily flow out (flow down) to the first interposed member D150 (third passage DRt3) in a connected state.

  The dish member D120 is disposed in such a manner that the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the second passage DRt2) extends along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow FB). The space in the front-rear direction formed by the window 60a can be effectively utilized. Therefore, it is possible to secure the entire length of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the second passage DRt2) and to easily connect the balls.

  The back member D130 is formed in a plate shape with a plate-shaped main body portion D131 and a front surface side (arrow F direction side) with respect to the main body portion D131 and arranged in a posture parallel to the main body portion D131. It includes a side wall portion D132, a connecting portion D133 connecting the main body portion D131 and the side wall portion D132, and a partition wall D134 erected from the back surface of the main body portion D131.

  A shaft support D131a that supports the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, a shaft support hole D131b that supports the shaft D211 of the shaft support D210, and a body D192 of the transmission member D190 are inserted into the main body D131. An insertion hole D131c, openings D131d and D131e that allow the ball to pass through, and a protrusion D131f that can contact the ball are formed.

  The shaft support portion D131a is formed as a bearing on the front surface (the surface on the arrow F side) of the main body portion D131, and a shaft support portion D141a is formed on the back surface of the intermediate member D140 at a position facing the shaft support portion D131a. In the rolling member D170, the ends of the shaft D171 protrude from the side surface on one side and the side surface on the other side in the width direction (front-rear direction, arrow FB direction). The shaft D171 is disposed in a posture along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow FB), and both ends of the shaft D171 are supported by the shaft support D131a of the back member D130 and the shaft support D141a of the intermediate member D140, respectively. . Thereby, the rolling member D170 is rotatably disposed between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140.

  The shaft support hole D131b is formed as a hole that penetrates the main body portion D131 in the plate thickness direction (the direction of the arrow FB). On the back surface of the intermediate member D140, a shaft support portion D141b is provided at a position facing the shaft support hole D131b. It is formed. The shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 is inserted into the shaft support hole D131b of the main body portion D131 and the shaft hole of the displacement member D180 sequentially in a posture along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow FB), and one side of the displacement member D180. One end of a shaft D211 protruding from the side surface of the (intermediate member D140 side) is supported by the shaft support D141b of the intermediate member D140. Accordingly, the displacement member D180 is rotatably disposed between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140.

  The insertion hole D131c is formed so as to penetrate the main body portion D131 in the plate thickness direction (the direction of the arrow FB), and is formed as an opening (hole) having a size that allows rotation of the trunk portion D192 of the transmission member D190. In the transmission member D190, the ends of the shaft D191 protrude from one end surface in the axial direction (front-back direction, arrow FB direction) of the body portion D192 and the other end surface, and both ends of the shaft D191 are intermediate members. The shaft is supported by the shaft support D141c of D140 and the shaft support D201 of the bypass member D200. As a result, the transmission member D190 is rotatably disposed between the intermediate member D140 and the bypass member D200 on the back side of the back member D130.

  The openings D131d and D131e are formed as openings (holes) having a size that allows a ball to pass through the main body D131 in the plate thickness direction (the direction of arrow FB). That is, the opening is formed as an opening for communicating the passages (the fifth passage DRt5 and the eighth passage DRt8) formed on the front side and the back side of the main body part D131. The openings D131d and D131e are set to have such a size that only one ball can pass (two balls cannot pass at the same time).

  Here, the sixth passage DRt6 is formed on the front side (between facing the intermediate member D140) of the back member D130 (main body portion D131), and the eighth passage DRt8 has an upstream side (first half) formed on the back member D130 (first half). It is formed on the back side (between the detour member D200) of the main body portion D131, and the downstream side (the latter half) is on the front side of the back member D130 (main body portion D131) (the inside of the intermediate member D140, the front member D110). And the first interposing member D150).

  Therefore, the downstream end of the sixth passage DRt6 and the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 are connected by the opening D131d, and the upstream side (first half) and the downstream side (second half) of the eighth passage DRt8 are connected by the opening D131e. You. That is, the sphere that has flowed down (guided) through the sixth passage DRt6 is moved from the front side to the back side of the back member D130 (main body portion D131) by passing through the opening D131d, and flows into the eighth passage DRt8. . Also, the sphere that has flowed down (guided) on the upstream side (first half) of the eighth passage DRt8 is moved from the back side of the back member D130 (main body portion D131) to the front side by passing through the opening D131e, The fluid flows into the downstream side (the latter half) of the eight passage DRt8.

  The protruding portion D131f protrudes from the front surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) of the main body portion D131 and extends linearly along the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD). (Protrusions), and at a plurality of positions (e.g., at regular intervals in the present embodiment) along the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170). (In the embodiment, five places) (see FIG. 122 (c)). The projecting dimension and cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion D131f are the same along the extending direction (vertical direction).

  The distance between the lower end (the end in the direction of arrow D) of the protrusion D131f and the upper surface of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 disposed at the second position is smaller than the radius of the sphere in a front view. The position is set (see FIG. 121). Therefore, even when the rolling member D170 is located at the second position, the ball and the projection D131f can be brought into contact.

  Further, the distance between the upper end (the end on the arrow U direction side) of the protrusion D131f and the upper surface of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 arranged at the initial position (first position) in a front view is spherical. Is set at a position that is larger than the diameter (see FIG. 119). Therefore, even if the ball jumps upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the upper surface of the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) disposed at the second position, the ball can contact the protrusion D131f. You.

  In the present embodiment, the arrangement intervals (intervals in the directions of the arrows LR) of the plurality of protrusions D131f are set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the sphere. Further, the plurality of protrusions D131f are arranged such that the plurality of protrusions D141g project from the back surface of the intermediate member D140 (main body D141) and the plurality of protrusions D141g project in the rolling direction of the sphere in the sixth passage DRt6 (the main body of the rolling member D170). D172 (longitudinal direction of D172). That is, the protrusion D131f of the back member D130 and the protrusion D141g of the intermediate member D140 are arranged in a staggered manner along the rolling direction of the sphere in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170). (See FIG. 122 (c)). Thereby, the rolling of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 can be delayed.

  That is, the protrusions D131f and D141g function as action means acting on the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6, and the action imparts resistance to the ball, thereby reducing the speed of the ball. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (the rolling member D170) can be lengthened, and the time required for the ball to act on the rolling member D170 (that is, when the displacement member D180 is at least in the closed position) And the ball can be easily maintained (in a state where the ball is easily entered).

  The protruding tip of the protruding portion D131f is formed to be curved in an arc-shaped cross section. However, the cross-sectional shape of the protrusion D131f may be substantially rectangular. Further, the protrusion D131f may have a linear shape extending in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD), and may have at least one curved shape curved and extended in an arc shape. The shape may be included in the part.

  When the protrusion D131f has a linear shape extending in the direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD), the rolling surface of the ball (the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170) is used. It is preferable that the upper side (in the direction of arrow U) be inclined in a direction located upstream (in the direction of arrow R) of the sixth passage DRt6. This is because when a ball that has jumped from the rolling surface collides with the protrusion D131f, a force component in a direction that pushes the ball back to the opposite side (upstream side) to the rolling direction acts on the ball, and the ball can be easily delayed. is there.

  The side wall portion D132 is disposed at a height position such that the upper edge thereof (in the direction of arrow U) is higher than the upper surface of the second interposing member D160 (in the direction of arrow U), and the side wall of the intermediate member D140. The width of the third passage DRt3 is defined together with the portion D142.

  The partition wall D134 partitions the eighth passage DRt8 together with the main body D131 and the bypass member D200. That is, the detour member D200 is disposed to face the main body portion D131, and a region defined by the partition wall D134 between the detour members D200 is the eighth passage DRt8. The area partitioned by the partition wall D134 is formed in a horizontally long and substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear (viewed in the direction of the arrow F), and an opening D131d is provided on one end in the longitudinal direction (on the direction of the arrow L) and on the other end in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of the arrow L). Openings D131e are provided on the side (in the direction of arrow R), respectively, and are inclined downward from one end in the longitudinal direction to the other end.

  The intermediate member D140 is formed in a plate shape, and is arranged in a posture parallel to the main body portion D141 while being positioned in front of the main body portion D141 (in the direction of the arrow F) with respect to the main body portion D141. A side wall portion D142, a connecting portion D143 connecting the main body portion D141 and the side wall portion D142, a bottom surface portion D144 erected from the front of the main body portion D141, and a partition wall erected from the back surface of the main body portion D141 (the (Fourth passage partition wall D145L, fifth passage partition wall D145R, sixth passage partition wall D146, and eighth passage partition wall D147).

  The main body D141 includes a shaft support D141a that supports the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, a shaft support D141b that supports the shaft D211 of the shaft support D210, and a shaft support that supports the shaft D191 of the transmission member D190. D141c, openings D141d, D141e, and D141f that allow the ball to pass therethrough, and a protrusion D141g that can contact the ball are formed.

  The shaft support portions D141a, D141b, and D141c are formed as bearings on the back surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow B) of the main body portion D141, and as described above, the shaft support portions D131a, the shaft support holes D131b, and the bypass member D200 of the back member D130. It is formed at a position facing the shaft support D201.

  That is, the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170 is provided on the shaft supporting portion D131a of the back member D130 and the shaft supporting portion D141a of the intermediate member D140, and the shaft supporting member D210 is provided on the shaft supporting hole D131b of the back member D130 and the shaft supporting portion D141b of the intermediate member D140. The shaft D191 of the transmission member D190 is supported by the shaft support D141c of the intermediate member D140 and the shaft support D201 of the bypass member D200, respectively. In addition, the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, the shaft D211 of the shaft supporting member D210, and the transmission member D190 are all disposed in such a posture that their axial directions are along the front-back direction (the direction of arrow FB).

  The openings D141d, D141e, and D141f are formed as openings (holes) having a size that allows a ball to pass through the main body D141 in the thickness direction (the direction of the arrow FB).

  The openings D141d and D141e are formed as outlets of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 (openings through which the sphere flows out to the seventh passage DRt7), respectively, and are formed from the upper surface (the rolling surface of the sphere) of the first interposing member D150. Are also formed above. That is, the sphere guided along the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 flows out (downflow) to the seventh passage DRt7 through the openings D141d and D141e.

  The opening D141f connects the downstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 located on the back side of the intermediate member D140 (main body D141) and the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 located on the front side of the intermediate member D140 (main body D141). It is formed as a communication port (opening) for communication. That is, the opening D141d is formed as a part of a passage (eighth passage DRt8) that passes through the main body portion D141 of the intermediate member D140.

  The protrusion D141g protrudes from the back surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow B) of the main body D141 and extends linearly along the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow U-D). (Protrusions), and at a plurality of positions (e.g., at regular intervals in the present embodiment) along the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170). It is arranged at six places in the embodiment (see FIG. 122 (c)). In addition, the protrusion dimension and cross-sectional shape of the protrusion D141g are the same along the extending direction (vertical direction).

  In the present embodiment, the arrangement intervals (intervals in the directions of arrows LR) of the plurality of protrusions D141g are set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the sphere. Further, the plurality of protrusions D141g are arranged so that the sphere rolling direction in the sixth passage DRt6 (the main body of the rolling member D170) corresponds to the plurality of protrusions D131f projecting from the front of the back member D130 (main body D131). D172 (longitudinal direction of D172). That is, the protrusion D131f of the back member D130 and the protrusion D141g of the intermediate member D140 are arranged in a staggered manner along the rolling direction of the sphere in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170). (See FIG. 122 (c)). Thereby, the rolling of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 can be delayed.

  That is, the protrusions D131f and D141g function as action means acting on the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6, and the action imparts resistance to the ball, thereby reducing the speed of the ball. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (the rolling member D170) can be lengthened, and the time required for the ball to act on the rolling member D170 (that is, when the displacement member D180 is at least in the closed position) (A state in which the ball is easily opened and the ball is easily entered) can be maintained easily (long).

  In the present embodiment, the facing distance (the distance in the direction of arrow FB) between the front of the main body D131 of the back member D130 and the rear of the main body D141 of the intermediate member D140 is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere. The facing space (space in the direction of arrow FB) between the virtual surface (plane) connecting the tips of the plurality of protrusions D131f and the virtual surface (plane) connecting the ends of the plurality of protrusions D141g is Are set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the sphere or slightly smaller than the diameter of the sphere. However, the facing distance between the two virtual surfaces may be set to a size larger than the diameter of the sphere.

  The protruding tip of the protruding portion D141g is formed to be curved in an arc-shaped cross section. However, the cross-sectional shape of the protrusion D141g may be substantially rectangular. Further, the protrusion D141g may have a linear shape extending in a direction inclined with respect to a vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD), and may have at least one curved shape that is curved and extended in an arc shape. The shape may be included in the part.

  When the protrusion D141g has a linear shape extending in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD), the rolling surface of the ball (the main body D172 of the rolling member D170) is used. It is preferable that the upper side (in the direction of arrow U) be inclined in a direction located upstream (in the direction of arrow R) of the sixth passage DRt6. This is because when a ball that has jumped from the rolling surface collides with the protrusion D141g, a force component in a direction that pushes the ball back to the opposite side (upstream side) to the rolling direction acts on the ball, and the ball can be easily delayed. is there.

  The side wall portion D142 is disposed at a height position where the upper edge thereof (in the direction of arrow U) is higher than the upper surface of the second interposition member D160 (in the direction of arrow U), and as described above, The width of the third passage DRt3 is defined together with the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130.

  The connecting portion D143 extends the lower edge (arrow D direction side) of the side wall portion D142 and the upper edge (arrow U direction side) of the main body portion D141 over the entire area in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction). They are continuously connected, and a second interposition member D160 is provided on the upper surface side (the arrow U direction side) of the connection portion D143.

  The connecting portion D143 faces the fourth passage partition wall D145L and the fifth passage partition wall D145R of the intermediate member D140 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD), and the fourth passage DRt4 is provided therebetween. And a fifth passage DRt5. That is, the connecting portion D143 forms the upper surface (upper inner surface) of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5.

  The bottom surface portion D144 is formed continuously along the edge of the main body portion D141 in a region other than the opening D141f, and the standing end (the arrow F direction side) of the bottom surface portion D144 is connected to the bottom surface portion D112 of the front member D110. (The direction of arrow B). That is, the bottom surface portion D144 is divided and formed in a region where the opening D141f is opened and a region in the vicinity thereof.

  As described above, in the region where the bottom surface portion D144 is divided (the region including the opening D141f), the standing end of the portion that defines the eighth passage DRt8 in the bottom surface portion D112 of the front member D110 is located below the opening D141f. The side (arrow D direction side) and the left and right side sides (arrow L direction side and arrow R direction side) are in contact with the front surface of the main body portion D141.

  The fourth passage partition wall D145L is a part that partitions the fourth passage DRt4 together with the main body part D141, the main body part D131 of the back member D130, and the connection part D133, and a part whose upper surface is a rolling surface of a sphere (a rolling part). ), And a portion (vertical wall portion) that receives the ball rolling the rolling portion (rolling surface) on the inner wall surface and defines the rolling end point of the ball.

  That is, in the fourth passage partition wall D145L, the rolling portion extends in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrow LR), and the rolling portion has one end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow R) as the downflow port DOPfl in top view. (A position at which a ball entering (falling) into the downflow port DOPfl can be received (received)), and is inclined downward toward the other end in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow L). The other end in the longitudinal direction extends to a position overlapping the lower edge of the opening D141d, and a vertical wall portion along the up-down direction (the direction of the arrow UD) is connected to the extended end (the other end in the longitudinal direction).

  In addition, the fourth passage partition wall D145L is inclined downward even if a part of the other end in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow L) (the area overlapping with the opening D141d) is directed toward the opening D141d, and the fourth passage partition wall D145L (rolling). The ball that has reached the other end in the longitudinal direction of the moving surface) can be rolled toward the opening D141d.

  Therefore, the sphere that has entered the fourth passage DRt4 from the downflow opening DOPfl is received (received) at one longitudinal end side (the direction of the arrow R) of the fourth passage partition wall D145L, and moves on the fourth passage partition wall D145L. It is rolled toward the other end in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow L). The sphere that has reached the other end in the longitudinal direction abuts (receives) on the vertical wall portion connected to the other end in the longitudinal direction, and after the rolling is restricted, the seventh passage DRt7 (the seventh passage) passes through the opening D141d. 1 interposed member D150).

  The fifth passage partition wall D145R is a portion that partitions the fifth passage DRt5 together with the main body portion D141 and the main body portion D131 and the connection portion D133 of the back member D130, and a portion whose upper surface is a rolling surface of a sphere (a rolling portion). ), And a portion (vertical wall portion) that receives the ball rolling the rolling portion (rolling surface) on the inner wall surface and defines the rolling end point of the ball.

  The fifth passage partition wall D145R is formed symmetrically with respect to the fourth passage partition wall D145L about the displacement member D180 in a front view, and the configuration and operation thereof are the same as those of the above-described fourth passage partition wall. Since the configuration and operation of D145L are substantially the same, description thereof will be omitted.

  The sixth passage partition wall D146 is a portion that partitions the sixth passage DRt6 together with the main body portion D141, the fourth passage partition wall D145L, the main body portion D131 of the back member D130, and the rolling member D170. (Rolling part), and a part (vertical wall part) that receives the ball rolling on the rolling part (rolling surface) on the inner wall surface and defines the rolling end point of the ball.

  That is, the sixth passage partition wall D146 is provided side by side on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling member D170 (in the direction of the arrow L, on an extended line in the rolling direction of the ball that rolls the rolling member D170), and the rolling thereof is performed. A rolling portion formed to receive the ball rolling the member D170, and connected to an end of the rolling surface (opposite to the rolling member D170) and along the vertical direction (the arrow UD direction). A vertical wall portion to be formed.

  In addition, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146 is inclined downward toward the opening D141f, and the ball received from the rolling member D170 can roll toward the opening D141f. .

  Therefore, the ball that has entered the sixth passage DRt6 from the downflow opening DOPfl and has rolled the rolling member D170 is received by the rolling portion (rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146, and the rolling portion has After being brought into contact with (received by) the vertical wall portion connected to the end and being restricted from rolling, it flows out (flows down) into the eighth passage DRt8 via the opening D141f.

  The eighth passage partition wall D147 is a part that partitions a part of the eighth passage DRt8 (a portion formed between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140), and has a substantially rectangular (frame-like) cross-section. The opening D141f is communicated with the opening D131e of the back member D130. That is, the sphere flowing out of the opening D131e of the back member D130 flows into a passage (space) defined by the eighth passage partition wall D147, flows down (rolls) through the passage (space), and then flows through the opening D141f. It is discharged and flows into the remaining portion of the eighth passage DRt8 (the portion formed between the front member D110 and the first interposed member D150).

  The first interposed member D150 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the sphere in the seventh passage DRt7, and is interposed between the front member D110 and the intermediate member D140 facing each other. That is, the seventh passage DRt7 is formed by the space defined by the front member D110, the intermediate member D140, and the first interposed member D150. The upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposition member D150 is formed to be curved in an arc shape that protrudes downward (in the direction of arrow D) in a front view, and is formed in the fourth passage DRt4 (opening D141d) or the fourth passage DRt4 (opening D141d). The sphere that has flowed down from the five passages DRt5 (the opening D141e) can reciprocate along the curve.

  As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member D150 has a front side (arrow) to allow the ball guided through the first interposed member D150 (seventh passage DRt7) to flow into the game area. A concave surface (central outflow surface D151 and side outflow surface D152) is formed that is inclined downward toward the F direction side. An undulation is formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the seventh passage DRt7, and a lateral outflow surface D152 is arranged at the bottom of the undulation, while a central outflow surface D151 is arranged at the top of the undulation.

  The upper edge (the edge in the direction of arrow U) of the front portion D111 of the front member D110 has an upper surface (rolling edge) of the first interposing member D150 except for a region where the central outflow surface D151 and the side outflow surface D152 are formed. (In the direction of arrow U). That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposition member D150 flows out (flows down) only from the central outflow surface D151 or the side outflow surface D152 to the game area.

  A concave portion D153 is formed in the bottom surface of the first interposed member D150, and a part of the eighth passage DRt8 is formed between the concave portion D153 and the bottom surface portion D112 of the front member D110 as described above. .

  The second interposing member D160 is a member that forms a rolling surface of a sphere in the third passage DRt3, and is interposed between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140. That is, the third passage DRt3 is formed by the space defined by the back member D130, the intermediate member D140, and the second interposed member D160. The upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposition member D160 is formed to be curved in an arc shape that protrudes downward (in the direction of arrow D) in a front view, and a sphere flowing down from the second passage DRt2 is formed. It is reciprocable along the curve.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposition member D160 is located at a position corresponding to the center (the space facing the pair of displacement members D180) in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrows LR) of the flow-down port DOPfl. Is formed to be the lowest, and the height position becomes higher toward one end side or the other end side (arrow L direction side or arrow R direction side) of the second interposing member D160 (third passage DRt3) in the longitudinal direction. You.

  That is, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposition member D160 moves from a position corresponding to the space between the pair of displacement members D180 to one end side or the other end side (arrow L direction or arrow R direction) in the longitudinal direction. It is formed so as to rise upward. Therefore, the ball can reciprocate along the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrows LR) of the third passage DRt3.

  On the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member D160, the ball is directed to the rear side (the direction of the arrow B) in order to cause the ball to flow out of the second interposed member D160 (third passage DRt3) to the downflow opening DOPfl. Concave surfaces (central outflow surface D161 and side outflow surface D162) that are formed with a downward inclination are formed (concave).

  The center outflow surface D161 is provided (formed) at a position corresponding to the center (the space facing the pair of displacement members D180) in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrows LR) of the flow-down port DOPfl. On the other hand, when the displacement member D180 is located at the closed position, the lateral outflow surface D162 is located at one end or the other end of the second interposition member D160 (the third passage DRt3) in the longitudinal direction of the space facing the displacement member D180. Side (in the direction of the arrow L or in the direction of the arrow R), and in a state where the displacement member D180 is located at the open position, corresponds to the opposing space of the displacement member D180. ) Position.

  Therefore, in the state where the displacement member D180 is located at the closed position, the sphere flowing down from the central outflow surface D161 to the downflow opening DOPfl can enter the space between the opposing pair of the displacement members D180 (that is, the sixth passage DRt6). The ball flowing down from the side outflow surface D162 to the downflow port DOPfl can enter the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5.

  On the other hand, in a state where the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position, both the sphere flowing down from the central outflow surface D161 to the downflow opening DOPfl and the sphere flowing down from the side outflow surface D162 to the downflow opening DOPfl form a pair of displacements. The ball can enter the space between the members D180 (ie, the sixth passage DRt6).

  In the present embodiment, the dimension of the flow-down opening DOPfl in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR) is such that the ball flows down (enters) into the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 in a state where the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position. Sphere) Set to the possible dimensions.

  That is, a gap (interval) larger than the diameter of the sphere is formed between the tip of the displacement member D180 disposed at the open position and the connecting portion D133 of the rear member D130 in the longitudinal direction (arrow) of the flow-down port DOPfl in a top view. (LR direction). Thereby, even if the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position, it is possible to allow the ball to flow down (enter the ball) not only to the sixth passage DRt6 but also to the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  However, in the state where the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position, the ball flows down (enters) into at least one of the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR) of the outlet DOPfl. (Sphere) It may be set to an impossible size.

  That is, the gap (interval) between the distal end of the displacement member D180 disposed at the open position and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere in the top view (dimension that the sphere cannot pass). It is good. Thereby, when the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position, it is possible to allow the ball to flow down (enter the ball) only to the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The central outflow surface D161 has, when viewed from the top, the extension length of the concave surface thereof (the dimension in the direction orthogonal to the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 (the direction of arrow FB)). The length is set larger than the extension length of the surface D162 (concave surface). In addition, the width of the concave surface (the dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 (the direction of the arrow LR)) of the central outflow surface D161 in the top view is the side outflow surface D162. (Concave surface).

  Therefore, even if the number of formed central outflow surfaces D161 (one location) is smaller than the number of formed lateral outflow surfaces D162 (two locations), the sphere reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 has a central outflow surface D161. , It is possible to secure the probability of flowing down (entering the ball) to the downflow opening DOPfl (sixth passage DRt6).

  In addition, the extension length and width of the concave surface may be set to be the same in the central outflow surface D161 and the side outflow surface D162. Further, contrary to the present embodiment, the extension length of the central outflow surface D161 (concave surface) may be smaller than the extension length of the side outflow surface D162 (concave surface). In these cases, in a state where the displacement member D180 is located at the closed position, it is difficult for the ball that reciprocates in the third passage DRt3 to flow down (enter) into the downflow opening DOPfl (sixth passage DRt6). Therefore, the advantage when the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position can be remarkable.

  In addition, formation of at least one or both of the central outflow surface D161 and the side outflow surface D162 (recession in the upper surface of the second interposed member D160) may be omitted. The position where the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 flows down to the downflow opening DOPfl is made uniform along the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR) of the downflow opening DOPfl, and the fourth passage DRt4, the fifth passage DRt5, or the sixth passage. The randomness as to which of the passages DRt6 the ball flows down (enters) can be increased.

  The rolling member D170 includes a shaft D171, a long plate-shaped main body D172 in which the shaft D171 is disposed at one end in the longitudinal direction, and another longitudinal end (the shaft D171) of the main body D172. And a weight D174 disposed on the opposite side of the transmission D173 (main body D172) with the axis D171 interposed therebetween, and a back member D130 and an intermediate member. D140 and rotatable around an axis D171.

  As described above, the axis D171 is disposed in a posture along the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow FB). Therefore, when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D171, the main body D172 is displaced (elevated and lowered) in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD).

  The main body portion D172 is a portion whose upper surface forms a rolling surface of a sphere in the sixth passage DRt6, and has one longitudinal end side (the side where the shaft D171 is disposed, the arrow L direction side) of the intermediate member D140. The sixth passage partition wall D146 is arranged side by side with the rolling portion (the portion whose upper surface is a rolling surface) and the other end in the longitudinal direction (the side opposite to the side where the shaft D171 is disposed, the side in the direction of arrow R). Is disposed at a position overlapping the displacement member D180 in a top view (a position at which a ball that has entered (flowed down) between the pair of displacement members D180 can be received (received)).

  In any state (posture) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the main body portion D172 is located at one end in the longitudinal direction (the side where the shaft D171 is provided, the arrow L direction side). A height at which the upper surface is substantially the same height position as the upper surface of the rolling portion (the portion where the upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140 or slightly above (the direction of the arrow U). It is arranged in the position.

  The axis D171 is embedded in the main body D172, and the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is formed to a position beyond the axis D171. That is, the sphere rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 passes above the axis D171 (the direction of the arrow U), and then rolls (flows) into the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140. Is done.

  The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is formed such that the transmission portion D173 side is formed as a flat surface and the weight portion D174 side is centered on the axis D171 at a position above the axis D171 (arrow U direction side). It is formed as a curved surface. That is, the upper surface of the main body portion D172 has a shape cut along a plane orthogonal to the axis D171, and has a linear shape on the transmission portion D173 side and an arc shape concentric with the axis D171 on the weight portion D174 side (FIG. 119). reference).

  The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is formed such that the transmitting portion D173 side is formed as a flat surface with respect to the axis D171. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball rolling in that region from jumping upward (in the direction of the arrow U). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the body portion D172 from being displaced upward by the action of the weight portion D174 in accordance with the upward jump of the ball.

  Note that the upper surface of the main body portion D172 does not need to be a straight line in cross section, and it is sufficient if a step is not formed, and a smooth surface that smoothly continues along the rolling direction of the ball (the curves or the curve and the straight line are smoothly formed). It may be formed as a continuous cross-sectional shape, for example, a sine wave (sinusoidal curve) shape.

  Here, before reaching the axis D171, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is moved to the rolling portion (the upper surface is a rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140. (A part that moves). However, in such a configuration, the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow D) by the action of the weight of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 (the rolling member D170). In the state (before the main body D172 is returned to the initial position (first position)), the ball is ejected from the upper surface of the main body D172, so that the effect of the inertial force accompanying the ejection of the ball (the weight of the ball is (The effect of not being instantaneously applied), and the rolling member D170 flaps. When the rolling member D170 flaps, the open / close state of the displacement member D180 becomes unstable, and the interest of the game is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sphere rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 rolls beyond the position above the axis D171 (in the direction of the arrow U), and thus rolls on the upper surface of the main body D172. The effect of the weight of the rolling ball is suppressed, and the ball can be ejected from the upper surface of the main body D172 in a state where the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 is returned to the initial position (first position). Therefore, even if the ball is ejected by the inertia force (the weight of the ball is not instantaneously applied), the rolling member D170 can be prevented from fluttering. As a result, the open / close state of the displacement member D180 can be stabilized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, as described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is centered on the axis D171 on the side of the weight portion D174 from the position above the axis D171 (in the direction of the arrow U). It is formed as a curved surface. Therefore, after the sphere rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 passes above the axis D171 (in the direction of the arrow U), the weight of the sphere on the upper surface of the main body D172 is ineffective. That is, in the present embodiment, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is a region closer to the transmission portion D173 than the position above the shaft D171 (the side in the direction of the arrow U), and is above the shaft D171. The region closer to the weight portion D174 than the position does not function as a rolling surface.

  The transmission part D173 is a part for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the transmission member D190, and is directed from the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 to the side opposite to the axis D171 (the direction of the arrow R). It is extended. The extending distal end side (direction of the arrow R) of the transmitting portion D173 is disposed above (the direction of the arrow U) of the transmitted portion D193 of the transmitting member D190 (disposed at a position overlapping in the top view).

  Therefore, when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D171 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface, and the transmitting portion D173 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow D), the transmitting portion D173 is displaced. As a result, the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission member D190 is displaced downward (pressed down), whereby the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D191 (see FIGS. 119 to 121).

  The weight portion D174 is a portion for eccentricizing the position of the center of gravity of the rolling member D170, and extends from one longitudinal end of the main body portion D172 to the opposite side (the direction of the arrow L) from the extending direction of the main body portion D172. At the same time, a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight is buried inside.

  In a no-load state in which the weight of the ball is not applied to the rolling member D170 (the main body portion D172) (a state in which the ball does not roll on the main body portion D172), the position of the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D170 is the axis. It is positioned (eccentric) on the weight part D174 side of D171. As a result, the rolling member D170 uses the weight of the weight portion D174 (eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis D171) to maintain the posture arranged at the initial position (first position) in a no-load state. After being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is possible to return to the initial position by its own weight.

  That is, in a no-load state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not applied on the main body D172), the main body D172 and the transmission unit D173 are displaced (upward) in the upward direction (the direction of the arrow U) (in a front view). , Is rotated counterclockwise about the axis D171), is disposed at the initial position (first position), and is maintained at the initial position (first position). This eliminates the need for an actuator for driving the rolling member D170 and a sensor for controlling the actuator, thereby reducing product cost.

  On the other hand, when the ball rolls on the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the position of the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D170 is shifted toward the main body D172 (the weight D174 across the axis D171) due to the weight of the ball. On the opposite side). Accordingly, the rolling member D170 is displaced (downward) in the main body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around the axis D171 in front view), and moves to the second position. Be placed.

  Note that the first position (initial position) of the rolling member D170 is such that the end face at one longitudinal end (the direction of the arrow L) of the main body part D172 is the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140 (the vertical position of the rolling part). (End face opposite to the wall). In other words, the rolling member D170 is displaced upwardly of the main body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 (counterclockwise in front view about the axis D171) by the main body portion D172 abutting on the sixth passage partition wall D146. ) Is regulated and disposed at the first position (initial position) (see FIG. 119).

  On the other hand, the second position of the rolling member D170 is defined by the upper surface of the weight portion D174 abutting on the sixth passage partition wall D146 (the lower surface of the rolling portion) of the intermediate member D140. That is, the rolling member D170 is displaced downwardly of the main body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 (clockwise in front view around the axis D171) by the weight portion D174 abutting on the sixth passage partition wall D146. Rotation) is regulated, and it is arranged at the second position (see FIG. 121).

  When the rolling member D170 is arranged at the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is inclined downward from the other end in the longitudinal direction to one end in the longitudinal direction, and is arranged at the second position. Also in this state, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is inclined downward from the other end in the longitudinal direction to one end in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the ball on the rolling member D170 (the main body D172) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D141f (the eighth passage DRt8).

  As described above, the rolling member D170 uses the downward inclination of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 to roll the ball. The rolling member D170 is rotatable about the axis D171. The angle of the downward inclination of the upper surface of the main body portion D172 with respect to the horizontal plane is the angle of the downward inclination in a state where the ball is rolling (the state of receiving the weight of the ball), and the state in which the ball is not rolling ( The angle is set to be smaller than the angle of the descending slope in a no-load state where the ball does not receive the weight.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress the momentum from being applied to the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the upper surface of the main body portion D172 can be increased (increased). As a result, the time during which the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170 (the main body portion D172) is extended, and the state in which the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position (at least the distance between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other is closed. (A state wider than the facing distance in the state where the position is arranged) can be easily maintained (lengthened).

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the weight of one ball is applied to the center of the main body portion D172 in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR), the rolling member D170 is located on the side of the weight portion D174 around the axis D171. The weight and the weight of the main body portion D172 side are formed so as to be balanced (the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D170 is located on a vertical line passing through the axis D171).

  Therefore, when only one ball rolls on the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the ball is closer to the transmitting portion D173 (with respect to the axis D171) than the center of the main body portion D172 in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR). In the state located on the opposite side), the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D170 is positioned (eccentric) with respect to the main body D172 with respect to the axis D171, and the eccentricity of the center of gravity causes the main body D172 and the transmission part D173 to move downward. (In the direction of arrow D) (downward) (clockwise rotation about axis D171 in front view).

  On the other hand, in a state where the ball is located on the axis D171 side (the opposite side to the transmission part D173) from the center of the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR) of the main body part D172, the position of the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D170 is the axis D171. The body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 are displaced (elevated) upward (in the direction of arrow U) by the eccentricity of the position of the center of gravity (centering on the axis D171 in front view). As rotated counterclockwise).

  When two or more balls roll on the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 (when the weight of two or more balls acts on the main body portion D172), the rolling position of each of the balls (the main body portion) Regardless of the position of the rolling member D170 in the longitudinal direction), the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 is located (eccentric) with respect to the body D172 with respect to the axis D171. It is displaced (downward) downward (direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around axis D171 in front view).

  As described above, by providing the balancing position in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR) of the rolling surface (the main body portion D172) of the rolling member D170 (the center in the longitudinal direction in the present embodiment), the balancing position is set. After the ball has passed, the rolling member D170 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position. As a result, the displacement member D180 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the open position to the closed position.

  When the weight of one ball acts, the position where the weight on the weight portion D174 and the weight on the main body portion D172 are balanced with respect to the axis D171 in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion D172 (arrow LR). Direction) may be on the axis D171 side from the center, or may be on the transmission part D173 side from the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the main body part D172.

  The displacement member D180 is a member for guiding the ball that has flowed down (entered) from the third passage DRt3 to the downflow opening DOPfl toward the sixth passage DRt6. As described above, the displacement member D180 is supported by the shaft support member D210. And is displaced (rotated) between the closed position and the open position.

  The shaft support member D210 includes a shaft D211 fixed to the base end side of the displacement member D180, a projecting portion D212 projecting in a direction (radially outward) orthogonal to the axial direction of the shaft D211, and a projecting portion thereof. And a connection pin D213 protruding from D212 in a posture parallel to the axis D211 (posture along the direction of arrow FB) and connected to the transmission member D190.

  As described above, the shaft support member D210 has the shaft D211 supported by the shaft support portion D141b of the intermediate member D140 (main body portion D141) and the shaft support hole D131b of the rear member D130 (main body portion D131). The overhang portion D212 is provided on the back side of the back member D130 (main body portion D131), and the connecting pin D213 projects toward the back side (the direction of the arrow B) in a posture parallel to the axis D211.

  The shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 is fixed to the displacement member D180. Further, the position of the connecting pin D213 is changed in a direction (radial direction) orthogonal to the axial direction with respect to the axis D211 (disposed at a position eccentric with respect to the axis D211). Therefore, when the connecting pin D213 is displaced along with the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190, the displacement of the connecting pin D213 is converted into rotation of the shaft D211 and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) together with the shaft D211. .

  Note that the connection pin D213 is disposed outside the shaft D211 (on the side opposite to the space where the pair of displacement members D180 face each other). Accordingly, when the connecting pin D213 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow D) (pressed down), the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the open position, and the connecting pin D213 is displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). As a result, the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the closed position.

  The closed position and the open position of the displacement member D180 are defined by the outer surface on the proximal end side of the displacement member D180 contacting the side surfaces of the fourth passage partition wall D145L and the fifth passage partition wall D145R. In other words, the displacement member D180 has a base end side outer surface abutting against the side surfaces of the fourth passage partition wall D145L and the fifth passage partition wall D145R, thereby bringing the pair of displacement members D180 closer to each other (opposing direction). Displacement in the direction in which the interval becomes smaller or in the direction in which they are separated from each other (in the direction in which the opposing interval becomes larger) is regulated, and they are arranged at the closed position or the open position (see FIGS. 119 to 121).

  Further, the displacement member D180 and the shaft support member D210 are integrated (unitized) by the shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 being fixed to the base end side of the displacement member D180.

  A component in which the displacement member D180 and the shaft support member D210 are integrated (hereinafter, referred to as a “displacement member D180 unit”) has a center of gravity of the entire displacement member D180 unit that is at least in the closed position. It is positioned (eccentric) on the other displacement member D180 unit side than D211. That is, when viewed in the direction of the axis D211 (arrow FB), the center of gravity is positioned (eccentric) on the other displacement member D180 unit side with respect to the imaginary line passing through the axis D211.

  As a result, the displacement member D180 unit closes using the eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis D211 (that is, the eccentricity of the center of gravity position acts as a force to rotate the pair of displacement members D180 in the direction of approaching each other). It is possible to maintain the posture arranged at the position.

  The transmission member D190 is a member for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the displacement member D180 (the shaft supporting member D210), and the shaft D191 and the shaft D191 are located on one side in the axial direction (the side in the direction of arrow F). ) And a cylindrical body D192 protruding from the other end (in the direction of the arrow B), and a transmission extending radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the body D192 on one axial side. A portion D193, a main body portion D194 and a weight portion D195 extending radially outward from the outer peripheral surface on the other axial side of the body portion D192 are provided.

  The axis D191 is disposed in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB). As described above, one end of the axis D191 is inserted through the insertion hole D131c of the back member D130 so that the one end of the axis D191 is in the middle. The other end of the shaft D191 is supported by a shaft support D201 of the detour member D200.

  The transmitted portion D193 is a portion to which the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 is transmitted from the rolling member D170 (the transmitting portion D173), and is located on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the main body portion D131 on the back member D130. Will be arranged.

  As described above, the extended distal end side (the arrow L direction side) of the transmitted portion D193 is disposed below (the arrow D direction side) the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170 (located at a position overlapping in the top view). When the transmitting portion D173 is displaced (downward) downward (in the direction of the arrow D), the transmitted portion D193 of the transmitting member D190 is displaced downward (pressed down) by the transmitting portion D173, whereby the transmitting member D173 is displaced. D190 is displaced (rotated) about axis D191 (see FIGS. 119 to 121).

  Here, a predetermined gap is formed between the transmitted portion D193 of the transmitting member D190 and the transmitting portion D173 of the rolling member D170 in the up-down direction (the direction of the arrow UD) to receive the weight of the ball. When the rolling member D170 is displaced (downward) downward (in the direction of the arrow D), after filling the above-mentioned predetermined gap, the transmitting portion D173 of the rolling member D170 is transferred to the transmitted portion D193 of the transmitting member D190. Contact is possible. That is, the rolling member D170 cannot push down the transmitted portion D193 of the transmitting member D190 unless the rolling member D170 is displaced (downward) enough to fill the gap described above.

  Accordingly, when the displacement of the rolling member D170 is relatively small, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the rolling member D170 from being transmitted to the displacement member D180. Therefore, for example, it is difficult to succeed in displacing (falling) the rolling member D170 by hitting the gaming machine or displacing (falling) the rolling member D170 by a foreign substance such as a wire.

  The main body portion D194 is a portion for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190 to the connection pin D213 of the shaft support member D210, and is disposed on the back side of the main body portion D131 (in the direction of the arrow B) of the back surface member D130. Is done.

  Grooves D194L and D194R are formed in the main body portion D194, and the connection pins D213 of the shaft support member D210 are slidably inserted into the grooves D194L and D194R, respectively. Therefore, when the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 is transmitted and the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated), the connection pin D213 is displaced downward or upward by the inner wall surfaces of the insertion grooves D194L and D194R of the transmission member D190. (Depressed or pushed up). Thereby, the displacement member D180 unit is displaced (rotated), and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position or the closed position.

  The groove D194R has a width dimension (dimension in a direction orthogonal to a direction in which the connection pin D213 relatively slides and displaces) substantially equal to a diameter of the connection pin D213 when viewed in the axis D191 direction (arrow FB direction). The dimensions are set to be equal or slightly larger, and extend linearly along a direction intersecting an arc centered on the axis D191. Therefore, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R is displaced downward or upward by the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D194R while the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) (pushed down or pushed up). ).

  The groove D194L extends in a shape curved in an arc shape having a center on the axis D191 side when viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (the direction of arrow FB), and has a lower extending end (an end in the direction of arrow D). When the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position, the width dimension of the groove at the end on the side where the connection pin D213 is located) is D213 is set to a size substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the upper end (the end in the direction of arrow U, the rolling member D170 is located at the second position, and the displacement member D180 is located at the open position). In this state, the width dimension of the groove increases toward the connection pin D213).

  In detail, of the inner wall surfaces along the extending direction of the groove D194L, the inner wall surface farther from the axis D191 has a shape along an arc centered on the axis D191 (a circular shape centered on the axis D191 has a predetermined shape). The inner wall near the axis D191 extends from the lower extended end (the end in the direction of arrow D) to the upper extended end (in the direction of the arrow U). The shape is curved in an arc shape in which the distance from the axis D191 increases toward the end).

  Since the connecting pin D213 is eccentric with respect to the shaft D211, the distance between the connecting pin D213 and the shaft D191 of the transmission member D190 is different from the state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position. And is reduced as the displacement member D180 is displaced toward the open position. That is, the distance between the connection pin D213 and the axis D191 of the transmission member D190 decreases as the connection pin D213 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow D) (pressed down).

  Therefore, the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) from the state where the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position (that is, the state where the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pushed up) to the uppermost position (direction of arrow U), see FIG. 119). ), The connection pin D213 is not acted on (not contacted) by both of the inner wall surfaces along the extending direction of the groove D194R.

  On the other hand, the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) from a state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed at the open position (that is, a state in which the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pressed down) to the lowest position (arrow D direction), see FIG. 121). ), The connecting pin D213 receives an action (contacts) from the inner wall face near the axis D191 of the inner wall faces along the extending direction of the groove D194L, and gradually moves upward (by the action). It is displaced (pushed up) in the direction of arrow U).

  As described above, the connection pin D213 does not receive an action from the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D194L even when the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) when the displacement member D180 is disposed at the closed position. After being not displaced downward (not pushed down) and reaching the upper extended end (the end in the direction of the arrow U) of the groove D194L (see FIG. 120), It is displaced downward (pressed down) by the inner wall surface.

  Thereby, the operation mode (displacement mode) of the pair of displacement members D180 can be different from each other. That is, a state can be formed in which one of the pair of displacement members D180 is stopped while the other is displaced (rotated).

  That is, in the present embodiment, in a state where the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position, between the connecting pin D213 and the extended end on the upper side of the groove D194L (the end on the arrow U direction side, the inner wall surface). A predetermined interval is formed (see FIG. 119).

  When the rolling member D170 receives the weight of the ball and is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) and the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190 is started, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R becomes Is displaced downward by the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D194R, whereby the displacement (rotation) of the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the closed position is reduced. Be started.

  On the other hand, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194L is not displaced downward until it reaches the extended end on the upper side of the groove D194L (extended end in the direction of the arrow U, the inner wall surface). (Not pushed down), whereby the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) is maintained in the closed position.

  When the transmission member D190 is further displaced (rotated) along with the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the initial position (first position), the connection pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R is moved to the position of the groove D194R. The inner wall surface along the extending direction continues to be displaced downward (pressed down), whereby the displacement (rotation) of the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the closed position to the open position is reduced. To be continued.

  On the other hand, when the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194L reaches the extending end (the end in the direction of the arrow U, the inner wall surface) on the upper side of the groove D194L (see FIG. 120), the connecting pin D213 extends on the upper side. It is displaced downward (pressed down) by the installation end (inner wall surface), whereby the displacement of the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) from the closed position is started.

  Thereafter, any connecting pin D213 is displaced downward (pressed down), the pair of displacement members D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the open position, and when the rolling member D170 reaches the second position, the pair of displacement members D180 is displaced. Member D180 is located in the open position.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the pair of displacement members D180 starts displacing (rotating) from the closed position to the open position can be made different (the one is delayed with respect to the other). Thereby, a change in the open state can be formed for the player who expects the displacement of the displacement member D180 to the open position (that is, the inflow of the ball into the sixth passage DRt6 (entering the ball)), thereby increasing the interest of the game. be able to.

  The weight portion D195 is a portion for eccentricizing the position of the center of gravity of the transmission member D190. The weight portion D195 extends from one longitudinal end of the main body portion D194 to the opposite side (the direction of the arrow R) from the axis D191 and has an inner portion. A weight made of metal (made of brass in the present embodiment) is buried therein.

  Due to the weight of the weight D195, the position of the center of gravity of the transmission member D190 as a whole is positioned (eccentric) on the weight D195 side of the axis D191. As a result, the transmission member D190 is disposed at the initial position (the position where the displacement member D180 is the closed position, see FIG. 119) using the weight of the weight portion D195 (the eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis D191). The posture can be maintained, and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it can be returned to the initial position by its own weight (that is, returned to the closed position of the displacement member D180).

  That is, when the transmitted portion D193 is not displaced downward (direction of arrow D) by the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170 (not pushed down), the main body portion D194 of the transmission member D190 is upward (direction of arrow U). (In a counter-clockwise direction around the axis D191 in rear view), and is disposed at the initial position (displacement member D180 is disposed at the closed position) and is maintained at the initial position. This eliminates the need for an actuator for driving the transmission member D190 and a sensor for controlling the actuator, thereby reducing product cost.

  The detour member D200 is formed in a plate shape having an outer shape that is larger in a rear view than the area defined by the partition wall D134 of the back member D130, and is disposed on the standing front end surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the partition wall D134. This partitions the eighth passage DRt8 together with the partition wall D134. Further, the detour member D200 is formed with a shaft support D201 in a region that is outward in a rear view from a region defined by the partition wall D134.

  Next, the opening and closing operation of the displacement member D180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121 and FIG. 122 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 119, in a state where the ball is not flowing (entering) from the downflow port DOPfl to the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180), the rolling member D170 is in the initial position (first position). ). Therefore, the transmission member D190 is not affected by the rolling member D170, and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position.

  In this state, when a sphere (not shown) flows (enters) from the flow-down port DOPfl into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180), the sphere becomes opposed to the pair of displacement members D180. After passing through (falling down) between the rolling members D170, the rolling member D170 is dropped on the upper surface (rolling surface) on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (opposite to the axis D171, in the direction of the arrow R) of the main body portion D172, and then the main body portion D172. Is rolled toward one longitudinal end (the axis D171 side, the arrow L direction side).

  As shown in FIG. 120, in a state where the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball causes the rolling member D170 to move toward the second position. When the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) and further displaced (rotated) to reach the second position as shown in FIG. 121, the pair of displacement members D180 is disposed at the open position, and the pair of displacement members D180 face each other. The spacing is maximized.

  A sphere (not shown) that rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 is moved from one longitudinal end (the axis D171 side, the arrow L side) of the main body portion D172 to the intermediate member D140. It is rolled (flows) into the rolling portion (the portion whose upper surface is a rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146, and is rolled (flows) into the eighth passage DRt8 via the opening D131d.

  Thereafter, when the ball no longer exists on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 returns to the initial position (first position) by its own weight, and accordingly, the transmission member By returning D190 to the initial position by its own weight, the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position (see FIG. 119).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) is rotatably supported around the axis D171, and flows into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180). ) Is rolled on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 toward the axis D171 (the direction of the arrow L).

  As described above, the rolling member D170 is positioned such that the other end in the longitudinal direction (the side opposite to the side where the shaft D171 is provided, the direction of the arrow R) overlaps with the displacement member D180 when viewed from above (a pair of displacement members). The ball is placed at a position where it can receive (receive) a ball that has entered (flowed down) between facing D180.

  Therefore, the ball that has flowed (entered) in the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180) can be dropped on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170.

  Here, for example, in a structure in which the rolling direction of a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is set to a direction away from the axis D171, the ball is a rolling member D170 (main body D172). In the initial stage of rolling, since the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (the point of force) and the axis D171 (the fulcrum) is short, the ball rolls a predetermined distance and the distance from the axis D171 (the point of the force and the fulcrum). Until the distance between them is secured, the weight of the weight D174 cannot be countered, and the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) by the weight of the ball. Can not.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body portion D172, in the initial stage, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (force point) and the axis D171 (fulcrum) is determined. As a result, the influence of the weight portion D174 can be reduced, so that the rolling member D170 can be easily displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) by the weight of the ball.

  That is, immediately after the ball has flowed into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180), the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position). The displacement of the member D180 toward the open position (and the arrangement at the open position) can be promptly performed.

  In particular, the ball that has flowed into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180) can be directly dropped on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, so that the weight of the ball can be reduced. The rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) can be displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) by utilizing not only the action (1) but also the momentum (kinetic energy) at which the ball falls. Also in this regard, the displacement of the displacement member D180 toward the open position (and the arrangement at the open position) can be promptly performed.

  Therefore, the player who sees the ball flowing down (entering the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180) can immediately start displacing the displacement member D180 to the open position. It is possible to perform a good tempo production.

  Further, when a plurality of balls roll on the third passage DRt3, the first ball that has entered the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180) and the first ball after the first ball When the distance between the following second ball (another ball that has not entered the sixth passage DRt6 and a subsequent ball) is relatively small, the following second ball is moved to the sixth passage DRt6 ( (Between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other).

  Since the direction in which the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D170 is set to the direction approaching the axis D171, as the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, The influence of the weight portion D174 can be increased by gradually shortening the distance between the position where the weight of the sphere acts (the point of force) and the axis D171 (the fulcrum). Therefore, the rolling member D170 can be gradually returned from the second position toward the initial position (first position).

  That is, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the displacement member D180 disposed at the open position can be gradually displaced (rotated) toward the closed position. Accordingly, for example, when another ball is reciprocating on the third passage DRt3, the inflow (incident ball) of the other ball into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180). It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the displacement member D180 is in an advantageous state in which the displacement member D180 is opened (at least a state in which the displacement amount is larger than the state in which the displacement member D180 is arranged in the closed position), thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

  Further, when the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180) falls on the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 rolls the dropped ball. The moving member D170 can be received on the side where the amount of displacement in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD) is large (the side separated from the axis D171).

  Therefore, the kinetic energy of the dropped sphere can be absorbed (consumed) as the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170, that is, the energy for lifting the weight D174 upward. As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball that has fallen on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 from jumping upward. As a result, the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170 stably, and the state of the displacement member D180 is stabilized (for example, the displacement member D180 is prevented from being temporarily displaced (rotated) toward the closed position). )it can.

  Further, the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180) is separated from the rolling member D170 by a member (a fixed non-displacement member such as the back member D130 or the like). When the ball is dropped on the intermediate member D140), the other member is likely to be damaged. However, as described above, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball is absorbed (consumed) by the displacement of the rolling member D170. ) It is possible to suppress the damage of the rolling member D170 and the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140 that support the rolling member D170 due to the collision of the ball. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased by the amount that the ball can be allowed to fall (the upper limit of the ball drop height can be relaxed).

  Protrusions D131f and D141g (action means) are protruded from the main body portion D131 of the back member D130 and the main body portion D141 of the intermediate member D140 that form the side wall (inner side surface) of the sixth passage DRt6. It is formed so that it can act on a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172.

  That is, the protrusions D131f and D141g are provided to project into the sixth passage DRt6 from the body portions D131 and D141 opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and extend straight in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD). And a plurality of them are arranged at predetermined intervals along the rolling direction of the sphere in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170).

  Therefore, when the ball passes through the sixth passage DRt6, not only does the ball roll on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, but also the upper surface of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 ( Even when moving in a state of floating from the rolling surface), the speed of the ball can be reduced by contacting the protrusions D131f and D141g with the ball and imparting resistance.

  As a result, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (the rolling member D170) can be increased, and the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 (that is, at least the displacement member D180 is The ball is more open than the closed position, and it is easy to maintain (lengthen) the ball easily entering the ball.

  In this case, the protrusions D131f and D141g are formed on both sides of the sixth passage DRt6 (the main body D172 of the rolling member D170), and the rolling direction of the sphere in the sixth passage DRt6 (the main body of the rolling member D170). (Longitudinal direction of D172), the balls can alternately contact the protruding portions D131f and D141g when the balls pass through the sixth passage DRt6.

  As a result, in addition to imparting resistance to the ball, a velocity component in the lateral direction (a direction orthogonal to the rolling direction) can be added to the velocity component of the ball (the path of the ball can be zigzag rather than straight ahead). it can). Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 can be lengthened. Accordingly, also from this point, it is easy to maintain the time during which the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170 (that is, the displacement member D180 is at least opened from the closed position and the ball is easily entered) (long). )it can.

  On the other hand, since the protrusions D131f and D141g extend in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD), resistance can be hardly applied to the sphere moving in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the ball jumps upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172), the ball can be quickly dropped downward (rolling surface). it can. Therefore, even when the body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 is displaced upward by the action of the weight portion D174 as the ball jumps upward, the weight of the ball is quickly added to the body portion D172 of the rolling member D170. And the main body D172 can be quickly returned to the original state.

  As a result, while the ball passes through the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball is applied to the main body portion D172, the displacement member D180 is opened at least from the closed position, and the ball is easily inserted. Can be easily maintained.

  In the rolling member D170, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is formed as a flat surface. That is, the upper surface of the main body portion D172 is formed as a smooth surface that continues smoothly along the rolling direction of the ball, and no step is formed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 from jumping upward (in the direction of the arrow U). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the body portion D172 from being displaced upward by the action of the weight portion D174 in accordance with the upward jump of the ball.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member D180 is formed so as to be displaceable (rotatable), and the displacement (rotation) reduces the likelihood that the ball flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6. In the changing structure, when the ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the displacement member D180 is displaced to the side (open position) at which the ball easily enters the sixth passage DRt6. When one ball enters the DRt6, a ball following the ball (for example, a ball that reciprocates in the third passage DRt3 in the longitudinal direction, a subsequent ball) is likely to enter the sixth passage DRt6. it can.

  That is, if the first ball enters (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the displacement member D180 is displaced by the entry of the first ball into the sixth passage DRt6, and the second ball that follows (A second ball following the first ball) can easily enter the sixth passage DRt6, and if the second ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the second ball can be formed. The displacement member D180 is displaced by the ball entering the sixth passage DRt6, so that the following third ball (the third ball following the second ball) is likely to enter the sixth passage DRt6. These aspects can be repeated for the third sphere and beyond.

  Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that a chain of balls entering the sixth passage DRt6 will be caused by the inflow (entering) of one ball into the sixth passage DRt6. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this case, the displacement of the displacement member D180 to the side (open position) where the ball easily enters is performed by using the weight of the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, an actuator for driving the displacement member D180 and a sensor for controlling the actuator can be omitted, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 is formed by the rolling member D170, and the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) by the action of the weight of the rolling ball. In this way, the time for using the weight of the ball can be secured. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the ball is likely to flow into (enter) the sixth passage DRt6.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the displacement member D180 can be forcibly opened from the outside, but the displacement member D180 of the ninth embodiment can be restricted from being forcibly opened from the outside. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 123A and 123B are cross-sectional views of the lower frame D2086b in the ninth embodiment, and correspond to the cross section taken along line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 115. In FIG. 123 (a), the rolling member D170 is located at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is located at the closed position. In FIG. 123 (b), the rolling member D170 is located at the closed position. The state where the displacement member D180 is disposed at the second position and the displacing member D180 is disposed at the open position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member D2190 includes an engagement portion D2196. The transmission member D2190 differs from the transmission member D190 in the eighth embodiment only in that it further includes an engaging portion D2196, and the other configuration is the same.

  The engaging portion D2196 allows displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the initial position (first position) to the second position, and the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial value (first position). In the state, it is a part for restricting the displacement member D180 at the closed position from being displaced (rotated) toward the open position, and is erected from the upper surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow U) of the transmitted portion D193. The outer surface (the surface on the side opposite to the axis D191) is disposed at the extending end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the transmitting portion D173 of the rolling member D170.

  The outer surface of the engaging portion D2196 (the surface on the opposite side to the axis D191) is the displacement of the extending tip (the end in the direction of arrow R) of the transmitting portion D173 when the rolling member D170 is rotated about the axis D171. It is formed in a shape that does not intersect with the trajectory (a shape in contact with the displacement trajectory or a shape having a gap between the trajectory and the displacement trajectory). Therefore, the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the initial position (first position) to the second position is allowed (see FIG. 123 (b)).

  Therefore, when a ball flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 and the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball is used to make use of the rolling member D170. Can be displaced to the second position. As a result, the transmitted portion D193 of the transmitting member D2190 can be displaced downward (pushed down) by the transmitting portion D173 of the rolling member D170, and the displacing member D180 can be displaced (rotated) to the open position.

  In addition, the outer surface of the engaging portion D2196 (the surface on the opposite side to the axis D191) has a transmitting member in a state where the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position. D2190 is formed in a shape capable of restricting rotation in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front (FIG. 123 (a) counterclockwise, that is, a direction in which the displacement member D180 disposed at the open position is displaced toward the open position).

  Specifically, the transmission member D2190 is rotated counterclockwise (see FIG. 123 (a) counterclockwise) as viewed from the front, and the outer surface of the engagement portion D2196 (the surface opposite to the axis D191) is transmitted by the rolling member D170. When abutting against the extended tip (the end in the direction of the arrow R) of the portion D173 and pressing the same, the extended tip of the transmitting portion D173 is pushed in the direction toward the axis D171 (the extended tip of the transmitting portion D173). The axis D171 is positioned on an extension of the force applied from the engaging portion D2196 to the shaft D171).

  Accordingly, a force component for displacing (rotating) the rolling member D170 is not formed, and the rolling member D170 is maintained at the initial position (first position) (cannot be rotated), thereby transmitting the transmission member D2190. 123 (a) is restricted (see FIG. 123 (a)). That is, the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member D180 from the closed position to the open position is restricted.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, in a state where the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) (that is, a state where the weight of the ball is not applied), the displacement member D180 is moved from the closed position to the closed position. The displacement (rotation) toward the open position can be regulated. That is, for example, illegal insertion of a foreign object such as a wire to forcibly displace the displacement member D180 in the closed position toward the open position (an illegal operation in which a ball easily flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6). ) Can be suppressed.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, by using the rolling member D170 (engaging the engaging portion D2196 of the transmitting member D2190 with the transmitting portion D173 of the rolling member D170), the displacement member D180 is moved from the closed position to the open position. The displacement (rotation) toward is regulated. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a component for restricting the displacement member D180 from being forcibly displaced (rotated), and the transmission member D190 can be diverted. A structure for suppressing improper displacement can be simplified.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the rolling direction of the ball rolling the rolling member D170 is set to the direction approaching the axis D171. However, in the rolling member D3170 of the tenth embodiment, the rolling direction of the ball is shifted from the axis D3171. The direction is set to be away (separated). The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 124A and 124B are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D3086b in the tenth embodiment, and correspond to a cross section taken along line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 115. In FIG. 124 (a), the rolling member D170 is located at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is located at the closed position. In FIG. 124 (b), the rolling member D170 is located at the closed position. The state where the displacement member D180 is disposed at the second position and the displacing member D180 is disposed at the open position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the rolling member D3170 has a shaft D3171, an elongated plate-shaped body portion D3172 provided with the shaft D3171 on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrow R), and a body portion thereof. A weight portion D3174 provided on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of D3172 (the side on which the shaft D3171 is provided), and a transmission portion D3173 provided on the opposite side of the main body portion D3172 with the weight portion D3174 interposed therebetween. It is provided between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140 so as to be rotatable about an axis D3171.

  The functions of the respective parts D3171 to D3174 of the rolling member D3170 are substantially the same as those of the respective parts D171 to D174 of the rolling member D170 in the eighth embodiment, and only the arrangement is different. The transmitting member D3190 is different from the transmitting member D3190 in the eighth embodiment only in the direction (extending direction) of the transmitted portion D3193, and the other configuration is the same.

  The shaft D3171 is disposed in a posture along the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow FB), and is supported by a shaft support (not shown) formed on the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140. Therefore, when the rolling member D3170 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D3171, the main body D3172 is displaced (elevated and lowered) in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD).

  The main body portion D3172 is a portion whose upper surface forms a rolling surface of a sphere in the sixth passage DRt6, and has one end in the longitudinal direction (the side opposite to the side where the axis D3171 is provided, the side in the arrow L direction) intermediate. Along with the rolling portion (the portion whose upper surface is a rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the member D140, the other end in the longitudinal direction (the side on which the axis D3171 is disposed, the arrow R direction side) Is disposed at a position overlapping the displacement member D180 in a top view (a position at which a ball that has entered (flowed down) between the pair of displacement members D180 can be received (received)).

  In a state (posture) in which the main body portion D3172 is arranged at the second position, the upper surface at one longitudinal end side (the side opposite to the side where the axis D3171 is disposed, the side in the arrow L direction) is the upper surface of the intermediate member D140. It is disposed at the same height position as the upper surface of the rolling part (the part whose upper surface is the rolling surface) of the six-passage partition wall D146, or at a height position slightly above (in the direction of the arrow U).

  The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is formed as a flat surface. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rolling ball from jumping upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the body portion D3172 from being displaced upward by the action of the weight portion D3174 in accordance with the upward jump of the ball.

  Note that the upper surface of the main body portion D3172 does not need to be a flat surface (a cross section cut along a plane perpendicular to the axis D3171 is a straight line in cross section), and it is sufficient if no step is formed, and the top surface is smooth along the rolling direction of the ball. May be formed as a smooth surface (a cross-sectional shape where curves or straight lines are smoothly connected to each other, for example, a sine wave (sine curve) shape).

  The weight portion D3174 is a portion for eccentricizing the position of the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170, and is opposite to the extending direction of the main body portion D3172 from the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion D3172 (the side where the axis D3171 is provided). Side (in the direction of arrow R), and a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight is embedded therein.

  The transmission part D3173 is a part for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D3170 to the transmission member D3190, and is opposite to the axis D3171 from the end in the extending direction of the weight D3174 (the end on the arrow R direction side). Side (the direction of the arrow R). The extending distal end side (direction of the arrow R) of the transmission portion D3173 is provided below the transmission portion D3193 (direction of the arrow D) of the transmission member D3190 (positioned at a position overlapping in the top view).

  Therefore, when the rolling member D3170 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D3171 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface, and the transmitting portion D3173 is displaced upward (in the direction of the arrow U), the transmitting portion D3173. As a result, the transmitted portion D3193 of the transmission member D3190 is displaced upward (pushed up), whereby the transmission member D3190 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D3191. As a result, the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position.

  In the present embodiment, a projection is provided (standing) from the transmitting portion D3173 to the transmitted portion D3193. However, a projection may be provided (standing) from the transmitted portion D3193 to the transmitting portion D3173. That is, it is sufficient that the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D3170 can be transmitted to the transmitting member D3190 via the transmitting portion D3173 and the transmitted portion D3193.

  In a no-load state where the weight of the ball is not applied to the rolling member D3170 (the main body portion D3172) (a state where the ball does not roll on the main body portion D3172), the position of the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D3170 is set to the axis. It is positioned (eccentric) on the weight part D3174 (and the transmission part D3173) side of D3171. As a result, the rolling member D3170 is disposed at the initial position (first position) in the no-load state by using the weight of the weight portion D3174 (and the eccentricity of the transmission portion D3173) from the axis D3171. The maintained posture is possible, and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is possible to return to the initial position by its own weight (see FIG. 124 (a)).

  That is, when the rolling member D3170 is in a no-load state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not exerted on the main body D3172), the main body D3172 is displaced (upward) in the direction of the arrow U (in the front view, the axis D3171 is viewed). Is rotated clockwise around the center), is arranged at the initial position (first position), and is maintained at the initial position (first position). This eliminates the need for an actuator for driving the rolling member D3170 and a sensor for controlling the actuator, thereby reducing the product cost.

  On the other hand, when the ball rolls on the main body portion D3172 of the rolling member D3170, the position of the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D3170 is shifted toward the main body portion D3172 (the weight portion D3174 across the axis D3171) due to the weight of the ball. On the opposite side). Accordingly, the rolling member D3170 is displaced (downward) in the main body portion D3172 (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated counterclockwise around the axis D3171 in front view), and is disposed at the second position. .

  Note that the first position (initial position) of the rolling member D3170 is such that the lower surface (the surface in the direction of arrow D) of one end in the longitudinal direction (the direction of arrow L) of the main body D3172 projects from the intermediate member D140. It is stipulated by contacting the part. That is, when the main body portion D3172 abuts on the stopper portion, the downward movement of the main body portion D3172 (counterclockwise rotation about the axis D3171 in front view) of the rolling member D3170 is regulated, and It is arranged at one position (initial position) (see FIG. 124 (a)).

  On the other hand, the second position of the rolling member D3170 is defined by the lower surface (the surface on the arrow D side) of the weight portion D3174 abutting on a stopper projecting from the intermediate member D140. That is, when the weight portion D3174 comes into contact with the stopper portion, the upward displacement of the main body portion D3172 (counterclockwise rotation centered on the axis D3171 in front view) of the rolling member D3170 is restricted. They are arranged at two positions (see FIG. 124 (b)).

  When the rolling member D3170 is arranged at the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is inclined downward from the other end in the longitudinal direction to one end in the longitudinal direction, and is arranged at the second position. Also in this state, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is inclined downward from the other end in the longitudinal direction to one end in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the ball on the rolling member D3170 (the main body D3172) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D131d (the eighth passage DRt8).

  As described above, the rolling member D3170 uses the downward inclination of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D3172 to roll the ball. The rolling member D3170 is rotatable about the axis D3171. In the present embodiment, the angle of the downward inclination of the upper surface of the main body portion D3172 with respect to the horizontal plane is such that the angle of the downward inclination in the state where the ball is rolling (the state of receiving the weight of the ball) is non- The angle is set to be larger than the angle of the descending inclination in the rolling state (no-load state where the weight of the ball is not received).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the sphere that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 is dropped to a position near the axis D3171 on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172, and The upper surface is rolled in a direction away from the axis D3171 (direction moving away).

  Accordingly, in the initial stage in which the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D3172 of the rolling member D3170, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (force point) and the axis D3171 (fulcrum) is reduced. The weight of the weight portion D3174 is set to be dominant, and as the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body portion D3172, the distance from the axis D191 (the distance between the fulcrum and the fulcrum) is gradually increased (increased). The weight of the part D174 can be countered. As a result, the rolling member D3170 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position.

  That is, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the displacement member D180 is gradually displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position, and the amount of opening (the interval between the pair of displacement members D180) can be gradually increased. . Thus, for example, when the second ball reciprocates in the third passage DRt3, it is expected that the second ball flows (enters) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180). It can be gradually increased, and the interest of the game can be increased.

  In addition, a first ball that has entered the sixth passage DRt6 and a second ball that follows the first ball (other balls that have not entered the sixth passage DRt6, and subsequent balls) Even if the interval between the two is relatively large, the following second ball can easily flow into (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180).

  On the other hand, the direction in which the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D3170 is set to the direction away from (separating from) the axis D171, so that at least the ball is at the end (one end in the longitudinal direction) of the main body portion D3172. Side, the end on the side of the arrow L), the rolling member D3170 is placed in the second position.

  That is, in a state immediately before the ball is rolled (flowed) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D3172 to the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140, the distance from the axis D191 (the point of force and (The distance from the fulcrum) was maximized, and the weight of the ball was exerted on the main body D3172 to the maximum, and the ball rolled from the upper surface of the main body D3172 to the rolling portion of the sixth passage partitioning wall D146 ( When the ball is inflowed, the effect of the weight of the ball is instantaneously lost, and only the effect of the weight D3174 is obtained.

  Therefore, the rolling member D3170 can return from the second position to the initial position (the first position) at the maximum speed, and the displacement member D180 disposed at the open position can be immediately disposed at the closed position. Therefore, an effect with a good tempo can be performed. Also, does the inflow of the second ball into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180) oppose (enter the ball) while the displacement member D180 is gradually displaced (rotated) toward the open position? It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the game is interesting, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

  In addition, when the rolling member D3170 of this embodiment has one ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D3172, the ball is one end side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion D3172 (arrow). The rolling member D3170 is gradually displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position as it is rolled toward the end in the L direction), and the ball moves in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion D3172. When it reaches one end (the end in the direction of the arrow L) (at least before the ball rolls (flows) into the sixth passage partitioning wall D146 of the intermediate member D140), the rolling member D3170 moves to the second position. It is configured to be arranged in.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, only the rolling member D170 is provided in a path (a path formed by the sixth path DRt6 and the eighth path DRt8) from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outflow port DOPout. A rolling member D170 and a second rolling member D4220 are provided in a path (a path formed by the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8) from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout in the embodiment. You. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 125 (a) and 125 (b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D4086b in the eleventh embodiment, in which the partition wall D4134 and the second rolling member D4220 are cut along a plane perpendicular to the axis D4221. The state is illustrated.

  In FIG. 125 (a), the state where the second rolling member D4220 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position is shown in FIG. 125 (b). The state where the moving member D4220 is disposed at the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed at the open position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the back member D4130 includes a partition wall D4134 that stands from the back.

  The partition wall D4134, together with the main body portion D131, the bypass member D200, and the second rolling member D4220, partition the eighth passage DRt8. That is, the detour member D200 is disposed to face the main body portion D131, and a region defined by the partition wall D4134 and the second rolling member D4220 between the facing members is the eighth passage DRt8.

  The second rolling member D4220 includes an axis D4221, an elongated plate-shaped main body D4222 having the axis D4221 disposed at one end in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow L), and one end in the longitudinal direction of the main body D4222. (A side on which the shaft D4221 is provided), a weight portion D4224, and a transmission portion D4223 provided on the opposite side of the main body portion D4222 with the weight portion D4224 interposed therebetween. It is disposed so as to be rotatable about a shaft D4221 between the member D200.

  The functions of the parts D4221 to D4224 of the second rolling member D4220 are substantially the same as those of the parts D171 to D174 of the rolling member D170 in the eighth embodiment, and only the arrangement is different. In addition, the partition wall D4134 of the back member D4130 is different from the partition wall D134 in the eighth embodiment in that a part of the wall forming the rolling surface of the sphere is omitted (the main body D4222 of the second rolling member D4220). ) And the other configurations are the same.

  The shaft D4221 is disposed in a posture along the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow FB), and is supported by a shaft support (not shown) formed on the back member D4130 and the bypass member D200. Therefore, when the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D4221, the main body D4222 is displaced (elevated and lowered) in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD).

  The main body portion D4222 is a portion whose upper surface forms a rolling surface of a sphere in the eighth passage DRt8, and has one end in the longitudinal direction (the side on which the shaft D4221 is disposed, the side in the arrow L direction) connected to the opening D131e. And the other end in the longitudinal direction (the side opposite to the side where the axis D4221 is disposed, the side in the direction of the arrow R). Is disposed on the downstream side of the opening D131d (a position at which a ball flowing down from the opening D131d can be received (received)).

  In any state (posture) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the main body portion D4222 has one longitudinal end (the side where the shaft D4221 is disposed, the arrow L direction side). A height at which the upper surface is substantially the same as the upper surface of the rolling portion (the portion where the upper surface is a rolling surface) of the partition wall D4134 that rolls the sphere to the opening D131e or slightly above (the direction of the arrow U). It is arranged in the position.

  The axis D4221 is embedded in the main body D4222, and the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D4222 is formed to a position beyond the axis D4221. That is, the sphere that rolls on the upper surface of the main body D4222 passes above the axis D4221 (in the direction of the arrow U) and then rolls (flows) into the rolling portion of the partition wall D4134 that rolls the sphere to the opening D131e. ) Is done.

  The weight part D4224 is a part for decentering the position of the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220, and extends from one longitudinal end of the main body part D4222 (the side where the shaft D4221 is provided) to the extending direction of the main body part D4222. A metal weight (made of brass in the present embodiment) is buried inside while extending toward the opposite side (the arrow L direction side).

  The transmission portion D4223 is a portion for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the second rolling member D4220 to the transmission member D190, and extends from the end of the weight portion D4224 in the extending direction (the end on the arrow R direction side) to the transmission member. D190 (weight part D195) is extended. The extension tip side (direction of the arrow U) of the transmission portion D4223 is disposed below the weight portion D195 (direction of the arrow D) of the transmission member D190 (disposed at a position overlapping in the top view).

  Therefore, when the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D4221 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface, and the transmitting portion D4223 is displaced (upward) in the upward direction (arrow U direction), the transmission is performed. The weight D195 of the transmission member D190 is displaced upward (pushed up) by the portion D4223, whereby the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D191. As a result, the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position.

  In a no-load state in which the weight of the ball is not applied to the second rolling member D4220 (the main body portion D4222) (a state in which the ball does not roll on the main body portion D4222), the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220 as a whole. The position is located (eccentric) on the weight part D4224 (and the transmission part D4223) side of the axis D4221. As a result, the second rolling member D4220 uses the weight of the weight portion D4224 (and the transmission portion D4223) (eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis D4221), and in the no-load state, the initial position (the first position). Can be maintained, and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it can be returned to the initial position (first position) by its own weight (see FIG. 125 (a)). ).

  That is, in the second rolling member D4220, in a no-load state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not applied on the main body D4222), the main body D4222 is displaced (upward) in the direction of the arrow U (in a front view). (Rotated counterclockwise about the axis D4221), arranged at the initial position (first position), and maintained at the initial position (first position). This eliminates the need for an actuator for driving the second rolling member D4220 and a sensor for controlling the actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

  On the other hand, when the ball rolls on the main body portion D4222 of the second rolling member D4220, the position of the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220 as a whole is on the main body portion D4222 side (with the axis D4221 interposed therebetween) due to the weight of the ball. (The side opposite to the weight portion D4224). Accordingly, the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (downward) in the main body portion D4222 (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around the axis D4221 in a front view), and is disposed at the second position. You.

  In addition, the first position (initial position) of the second rolling member D4220 is such that the end face (the surface on the arrow L direction side) at one longitudinal end side (the arrow L direction side) of the main body D4222 is the second rolling member D4220. Is defined by the lower surface (the surface in the direction of arrow D) of the other end in the longitudinal direction (the direction of arrow R) of the main body D4222 abutting against the partition wall D4134.

  In the state where the second rolling member D4220 is disposed at the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D4222 is inclined downward from the other end in the longitudinal direction to one end in the longitudinal direction, and the second position. In this state, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D4222 is inclined downward from the other end in the longitudinal direction to one end in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the ball on the second rolling member D4220 (the main body D4222) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D131e.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the rolling member D170 is provided in the sixth passage DRt6, and the second rolling member D4220 is provided in the eighth passage DRt8 downstream of the sixth passage DRt6. Is done. Therefore, as compared with the eighth embodiment, the second rolling member D4220 is provided even if the length of the path (path, that is, the section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout) is the same. As a result, a section where the weight of the ball can be used can be secured (lengthened). As a result, it is possible to easily maintain (lengthen) the state in which the displacement member D180 is displaced to the open position (the state in which the displacement member D180 is opened at least from the closed position and the ball is easily entered).

  Here, the longitudinal dimension (length of the upper surface (rolling surface)) of one member (rolling member D170 (main body portion D172)) is extended to secure (lengthen) a section where the weight of the ball can be used. In the configuration, it becomes difficult to dispose the rolling member D170 whose longitudinal dimension is extended in the limited space (the dimension in the width direction (the direction of the arrow LR)) of the lower frame D86b. If the disposition position of the pair of displacement members D180 is deviated to one side in the width direction (direction of the arrow L) of the lower frame D86b, the longitudinal dimension of the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) is correspondingly increased. It is possible to extend the length of the moving surface), but there is a limit to the length that can be extended. Further, the third passage DRt3 cannot be formed into a shape in which the ball can reciprocate, and the interest of the game is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of members (in the present embodiment, the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220) are provided to secure (long) a section where the weight of the ball can be used. With this configuration, the limited space of the lower frame D4086b can be effectively utilized, and a section where the weight of the ball can be utilized can be sufficiently secured (long). In addition, the third passage DRt3 can be formed into a shape in which the ball can reciprocate, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  That is, the second rolling member D4220 is disposed on the back side (the direction of the arrow B) of the rolling member D170, and these are stacked in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow FB). By effectively utilizing the thickness of the dead space in the front-back direction, the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 can secure (lengthen) a section where the weight of the ball can be used.

  Further, as described above, the pair of displacement members D180 can be disposed at the center of the lower frame D4086b in the width direction (arrows LR) while securing (longening) a section in which the weight of the ball can be used. DRt3 can be made into a shape in which the ball can reciprocate (a shape inclined downward toward the center in the width direction), and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In a configuration in which only one member (rolling member D170) is provided on the path (path, that is, a section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout), displacement occurs while one ball passes through the path. The predetermined displacement of the member D180 (displacement mode in which the ball is moved from the closed position to the open position by the weight of the ball and returned to the closed position after the ball passes) is formed only once, but a plurality of members (rolling) If the member D170 and the second rolling member D4220) are arranged in a path (passage), the above-described predetermined displacement of the displacement member D180 may be performed a plurality of times (for one ball) while one ball passes through the path. In the embodiment, it can be formed twice. By repeatedly opening and closing the displacement member D180, the player who expects the ball to flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 receives the displacement state of the displacement member D180 and the other balls on the third passage DRt3. And the interest of the game can be improved.

  In a configuration in which only one member (rolling member D170) is provided on a path (path, that is, a section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outflow port DOPout), the path is divided into a plurality of (two or more) spheres. , The displacement member D180 has only one displacement mode (that is, a displacement mode in which the ball is placed from the closed position to the open position due to the weight of the ball, and is returned to the closed position after the ball passes). (The rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220) are arranged in a path (path), the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 that can be formed while a plurality of spheres pass the path. There can be multiple ways. That is, the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 can be diversified by the combination of the timing at which the weight of the ball acts on one and the other of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 (the timing at which the ball rolls). As a result, an unexpected production can be performed.

  The transmitting portion D173 of the rolling member D170 is located above the transmitted portion D193 (on the direction of the arrow U) of the transmitting member D190, and when the weight of the sphere acts on the main body portion D172, the transmitted portion D193 is moved. Displace downward (press down). The transmission portion D4223 of the second rolling member D4220 is located below the weight portion D195 of the transmission member D190 (in the direction of the arrow D), and when the weight of the ball acts on the main body portion D4222, the weight portion D195 is removed. Displace upward (push up).

  That is, when the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 operate by the action of the weight of the ball to displace (rotate) the transmission member D190, the displacement (rotation) direction of the transmission member D190 is set to the same direction, The operations of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 are not opposed. Similarly, when one of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 returns to the initial position (displacement (rotation) by the weight of the weights D174 and D4224 without the weight of the ball being applied), Regardless of the state of the other operation of D170 or the second rolling member D4220, one operation and the other operation are not opposed (both one operation and the other operation are allowed).

  In this way, the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 when the weight of the sphere is applied can be transmitted to the transmitting member D190 individually and independently. The displacement (rotation) when the action of the weight of the ball of the second rolling member D4220 is released can be performed individually and independently.

  Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass along a path (a passage, that is, a section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout), the rolling member D170 or the second member may be used in accordance with the rolling position of the balls. Displacing (rotating) the transmission member D190 only due to one or the other operation of the rolling member D4220 is also possible due to the operation of both one and the other of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220. The transmission member D190 can also be displaced (rotated), and the combination of these can diversify the manner in which the displacement member D180 is displaced.

  For example, if the weight of the ball is applied to one of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 while the displacement member D180 is being displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, the displacement is caused by one of the operations. The member D180 can be displaced toward the open position during the displacement toward the closed position.

  In addition, for example, the weight of the ball is applied to one of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220, and while the displacement member D180 is being displaced (rotated) toward the open position by one of the operations, the rolling is performed. When the weight of the ball is applied to the other of the moving member D170 and the second rolling member D4220, and the other is more affected by the weight of the ball (the force for displacing the displacement member D180 is stronger), the other operation is performed. Thereby, the displacement member D180 can be displaced to the open position at a faster displacement speed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, a member (transmission means) for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the displacement member D180 and the displacement (rotation) of the second rolling member D4220 to the displacement member D180. There is no need to separately provide a member for transmitting (transmission means), and the transmission member D190 can be shared as such a member (transmission means). Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the structure can be simplified. As a result, improvement in operation reliability and reduction in product cost can be achieved.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 126 is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame D5086b in the twelfth embodiment, and shows a state where the bypass member D200 is removed. FIG. 126 (a) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position.

  As shown in FIG. 126, grooves D5194L and D194R are formed in the main body portion D5194, and the connection pins D213 of the shaft support member D210 are slidably inserted into the grooves D5194L and D194R, respectively.

  The transmission member D5190 is different from the transmission member D190 in the eighth embodiment only in the shape of the groove D194L, and the other configuration is the same.

  The groove D5194L extends in a shape curved in an arc shape having a center on the axis D191 side when viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (the direction of arrow FB), and the width of the groove is larger than the diameter of the connection pin D213. Is set. The width dimension of the groove is constant along the extending direction of the groove D5194L.

  In detail, the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D5194L is such that both the inner wall surface farther from the axis D191 and the inner wall surface closer to the axis D191 are shaped along an arc centered on the axis D191 ( (A shape obtained by dividing a circular shape centered on the axis D191 at a predetermined central angle).

  Therefore, the connection pin D213 is not acted on (not contacted) by both of the inner wall surfaces along the extending direction of the groove D5194L, and the lower or upper extending end portion (the arrow D direction side or the lower side) of the groove D5194L. It is actuated only from the end (the end in the direction of the arrow U) (displaced upward or downward by the inner wall surface at the lower or upper extension end (pushed down or pushed down)).

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, not only when the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, but also when it is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the operation mode (displacement mode) of the pair of displacement members D180 ) Can be made different from each other (a state in which one of the pair of displacement members D180 is stopped while the other is displaced (rotated) can be formed).

  Specifically, when the displacement member D180 is located at the open position, a predetermined distance is established between the connecting pin D213 and the lower extending end of the groove D5194L (the end on the arrow D direction side, the inner wall surface). An interval is formed (see FIG. 121).

  When the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the second position to the initial position (first position) is started, and the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D5190 to the initial position is started, the groove D194R is formed. Is displaced upward (pushed up) by the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D194R, whereby the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) is moved. The displacement (rotation) from the open position is started.

  On the other hand, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D5194L is not displaced upward until reaching the lower extended end (extended end in the direction of arrow D, the inner wall surface) of the groove D5194L. (Not pushed up), whereby the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) is maintained at the open position.

  When the transmission member D5190 is further displaced (rotated) with the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member from the second position, the connecting pin D213 inserted in the groove D194R follows the extending direction of the groove D194R. The inner wall surface is continuously displaced upward (pushed up), whereby the displacement (rotation) of the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the open position to the closed position is continued.

  On the other hand, when the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D5194L reaches the lower extension end (the end in the direction of arrow D, the inner wall surface) of the groove D5194L, the lower extension end (inside). This causes the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) to start displacing from the open position.

  Thereafter, any of the connection pins D213 is displaced upward (pushed up), the pair of displacement members D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, and when the transmission member D190 reaches the initial position, the pair of displacement members D180 is displaced. Is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 119).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, not only the timing at which the pair of displacement members D180 start the displacement (rotation) from the closed position to the open position, but also the displacement (rotation) from the open position to the closed position. The timing can also be different (one is delayed for the other). Thereby, the player who expects the state in which the displacement member D180 is opened (that is, the state in which the ball is likely to flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6) is changed to the state in which the displacement member D180 is displaced to the closed position. It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

  Next, a lower frame D6086b in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described where all the balls that have flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 are guided to the eighth passage DRt8 (outflow port DOPout). Is connected to the ninth passage DRt9 on the way, and the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 is either the eighth passage DRt8 (outflow port DOPout) or the ninth passage DRt9 (outflow port DOP6out). You will be guided to one side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 127 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame D6086b in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 128 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame D6086b. FIG. 129 is a front view of the lower frame D6086b, and FIGS. 130A and 130B are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D6086b.

  130A corresponds to a cross section taken along the line CXIXa-CIXIXa in FIG. 115, and FIG. 130B corresponds to a cross section taken along the line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 127 to 130, the lower frame D6086b in the thirteenth embodiment includes a ninth passage DRt9 connected in the middle of the sixth passage DRt6 and a ball guided to the ninth passage DRt9 in the game area. An outlet DOP6out formed as an opening for flowing out to the outlet.

  That is, the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 and has reached the end of the sixth passage DRt6 has flowed (entered) into the eighth passage DRt8, flows down the eighth passage DRt8, and then flows out. The ball that has flowed out of the DOPout to the game area, has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6, and has flowed (entered) into the ninth passage DRt8 in the middle of the sixth passage DRt6, passes through the ninth passage DRt9. After flowing down, it flows out of the outlet DOP6out to the game area.

  Here, the outlet DOPout, which is the outlet of the eighth passage DRt8 (the opening through which the ball flows out to the game area), is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 110). . Therefore, the ball that has flowed down from the sixth passage DRt6 to the eighth passage DRt8 is likely to win the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 is high).

  On the other hand, the outflow port DOP6out, which is the outlet of the ninth passage DRt9 (the opening through which the ball flows out to the game area), is disposed at a position different from the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 110) to one side in the horizontal direction. (It is formed (arranged) at a position where the first winning opening 64 does not overlap vertically below). Therefore, the ball that has flowed down from the sixth passage DRt6 to the ninth passage DRt9 is less likely to win the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 than the ball that has flowed down to the eighth passage DRt8 described above). Is low).

  As described above, when the sphere reciprocating along the third passage DRt3 along the longitudinal direction is distributed to the sixth passage DRt6, the lower frame D6086b according to the present embodiment has a lower sphere flowing down the sixth passage DRt6. By not reaching the ninth passage DRt9 on the way and reaching the end of the sixth passage DRt6, it is easy to win the first winning opening 64 (in the present embodiment, the ball is almost certainly inserted into the first winning opening 64). Winning). Therefore, when the ball flows down the sixth passage DRt6, the ball does not flow down to the ninth passage DRt9 on the way to increase the probability of the ball winning in the first winning port 64 (certainly win). The player can be expected to reach the end of the passage DRt6, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, if the ball flows down to the end of the sixth passage DRt6, the time during which the weight (weight) of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170 is maximized, and the pair of displacement members D180 is displaced to the open position. It is possible to easily maintain the (rotated) state (the ball is more likely to enter the sixth passage DRt6). On the other hand, when the sphere flowing down the sixth passage DRt6 flows down the ninth passage DRt9 on the way, the weight (weight) of the sphere cannot be applied to the rolling member D170, and the pair of displacement members D180 is The ball is displaced (rotated) to the closed position (the ball hardly enters the sixth passage DRt6). Therefore, when the ball flows down the sixth passage DRt6, the ball is distributed from the third passage DRt3 to the sixth passage DRt6 while maintaining the state in which the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the open position. In order to facilitate the game, it is possible to expect the player to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6 without being flown down to the ninth passage DRt9 on the way, and also to enhance the interest of the game from this point.

  The front member D6110 includes an opening DOP6out formed in the front portion D111 and a plate-like bottom portion D6112 standing from the back of the front portion D111, and the intermediate member D6140 stands from the front of the main body D141. A bottom portion D144, and an opening D6148 formed in the main body portion D141.

  The bottom portion D6112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal direction of the front portion D111, and the bottom portion D6144 is formed continuously along the edge of the main body portion D141 in a region excluding the opening D141f. The upright end (arrow B direction side) and the upright end of the bottom surface portion D6144 (arrow F direction side) are in contact with each other over the entire area. Thereby, invasion of foreign matter such as wire from the bottom surface side of the lower frame D6086b is suppressed.

  Part of the bottom surfaces D6112 and D6144 (the portion located below the opening D6148 in the intermediate member D6140) forms the rolling surface of the ninth passage DRt9. The portion forming such a rolling surface is formed at a predetermined interval (interval larger than the diameter of the sphere) with the bottom surface of the first interposing member D150.

  Further, the portion forming the above-mentioned rolling surface in the bottom portions D6112 and D6144 is formed to be inclined downward substantially toward the center in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow LR), and the height position in the vertical direction is set. Outflow surfaces D6112a and D6144a are respectively recessed at the lowest part (the part which is substantially the center in the longitudinal direction).

  The outflow surfaces D6112a and D6144a are portions for allowing the sphere guided on the bottom surface portions D6112 and D6144 (portion forming the rolling surface) to flow out to the outflow port DOP6out, and a concave surface inclined downward toward the outflow port DOP6out. Are formed integrally. That is, the opening DOP6out is formed at a position corresponding to the outflow surfaces D6112a and D6144a (a position at which a ball can flow out).

  The opening D6148 of the intermediate member D6140 serves as an opening (hole) for receiving the sphere rolling on the rolling member D170 (the sixth passage DRt6) into the ninth passage DRt9, and the main body D141 in the plate thickness direction (the direction of arrow FB). Is formed to penetrate. That is, the opening 6148 is formed on one of the pair of side walls that define the sixth passage DRt6, and the upstream end of the ninth passage DRt9 is connected to the middle of the sixth passage DRt6 via the opening 6148. You.

  The dimension of the opening D6148 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling member D170 is set to a size that allows a plurality of spheres (three in this embodiment) to pass simultaneously. In addition, the lower edge of the opening D6148 is below (on the arrow U side) the upper surface of the rolling member D170 disposed at the second position (the position pressed down to the bottom) due to the weight (weight) of the ball. The upper edge of the opening D6148 is located at the initial position (the first position, the position returned to the uppermost position) without the effect of the weight (weight) of the sphere. It is formed at a position spaced apart from the upper surface of the moving member D170 by a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the ball can pass through the opening D6148 regardless of the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170.

  A side edge (hereinafter, referred to as an “upstream side edge”) of the opening D6148 located on the upstream side (the arrow R side, the right side in FIG. 130A) of the sixth passage DRt6 in the sixth passage DRt6 is the front edge of the rolling member D170. The sixth passage DRt6 is disposed downstream (on the arrow L side, on the left in FIG. 130 (a)) from the upstream edge (on the arrow R side, on the right in FIG. 130 (a)).

  In the present embodiment, the upstream side edge of the opening D6148 is disposed at a position that does not vertically overlap with the facing space at the base of the pair of displacement members D180 (a position on the downstream side). That is, the base of the displacement member D180 located on the downstream side (the arrow L direction side, the left side in FIG. 130A) of the pair of displacement members D180 in the sixth passage DRt6 faces the displacement member D180 located on the upstream side. It is located on the downstream side of the sixth passage DRt6 by a predetermined distance (substantially equal to the diameter of the sphere in the present embodiment) from the opposing surface).

  This prevents the ball that has flowed (entered) between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other and dropped into the sixth passage DRt6 from immediately flowing into (entering) the ninth passage DRt9 via the opening D6148. Then, a form in which the ball rolls on the rolling member D170 can be formed. Therefore, the weight (weight) of the ball can be applied to the rolling member D170 to displace (rotate) the pair of displacement members D180 to the open position, and whether the ball reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6. Can be focused on the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, the main body D141 is provided with a protrusion D141g at a position on the upstream side (the arrow R direction side, the right side in FIG. 130B) in the sixth passage DRt6 with respect to the upstream side edge of the opening D6148. You. Therefore, when the ball that has flowed (entered) between the pair of displacement members D180 and dropped into the sixth passage DRt6 rolls the rolling member D170 along its longitudinal direction, the action of the projection D141g is performed. (Abutment) delays the rolling of the ball (reduces the speed), makes it easier for the player to grasp the ball rolling the rolling member D170, and causes the ball to be grasped by the action (contact) of the protrusion D141g. By moving the ball to the side opposite to the opening D6148 (on the side of the main body D131), the player can be expected to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  A side edge (hereinafter, referred to as a “downstream side edge”) of the opening D6148 located on the downstream side (the arrow L side, the left side in FIG. 130A) of the sixth passage DRt6 in the sixth passage DRt6 is the front edge of the rolling member D170. The sixth passage DRt6 is arranged upstream (on the arrow R direction, right side in FIG. 130 (a)) of the downstream edge (axis D171) of the downstream side (direction of arrow L, left side of FIG. 130 (a)).

  In the present embodiment, the downstream side edge of the opening D6148 is disposed at a position (a position on the upstream side) that does not overlap with the opening D131d in a front view. That is, in the sixth passage DRt6, a predetermined distance (in the present embodiment, substantially equal to the diameter of the sphere) from the side edge of the opening D131d on the upstream side (the arrow R direction side, the right side in FIG. 130A) of the sixth passage DRt6. Located upstream.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the sphere from flowing into (entering) the ninth passage DRt9 via the opening D6148 even though the sphere has reached the end of the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, when the ball passes through the downstream side edge of the opening D6148, the player can feel a sense of security that the ball can surely flow into (enter) the eighth passage DRt8. As a result, the whereabouts of the ball can be watched by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  However, the downstream side edge of the opening D6148 may be disposed at a position overlapping the opening D131d in a front view (a position overlapping with or downstream of the downstream side edge of the opening D131d). In this case, even after the ball reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6, it is possible to determine whether the inflow (entrance) destination of the ball is the eighth passage DRt8 or the ninth passage DRt9. As a result, the whereabouts of the ball can be watched by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, as described above, the protruding portions D131f and D141g are arranged in a staggered manner, and the protruding portion D131f protrudes from the main body portion D131 on the upstream side of the upstream side edge of the opening D6148 in the sixth passage DRt6. . Therefore, when the ball that has fallen in the sixth passage DRt6 rolls on the rolling member D170, the ball is moved toward the opening D6148 (the main body D141 side) by the action (contact) of the protrusion D131f (the rolling direction). Can be changed). That is, the sphere affected by the protrusion D131f is located on the upstream side (the arrow R direction side, the right side in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b)) of the sixth passage DRt6 with respect to the upstream side edge of the opening 6148. To the player to determine whether the ball collides (contacts) with the main body portion D141 and rebounds from the opening D6148, or flows into (enters) the ninth passage DRt9 through the opening D6148. It allows you to watch closely and enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, between the upstream side edge and the downstream side edge of the opening D6148, a plurality of protrusions D131f of the main body part D131 are disposed at positions overlapping with each other in a front view (see FIG. 130 (a)). Thus, the projection D131f acts (contacts) on the ball that rolls the rolling member D170, and a change in the rolling direction of the ball (a component in the rolling direction toward the opening D6148) can be given. Thereby, by the contact with the protruding portion D131f, the possibility that a ball flows into (enters) the ninth passage DRt9 via the opening D6148 is formed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 is inclined at an angle of about 1 to 2 degrees with respect to the vertical direction (a posture in which a so-called “laying down” is provided, that is, the upper surface of the pachinko machine 10 is positioned on the back side ( (Position in the direction of arrow B). In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening D6148 is formed in the wall (the main body D141) located on the front side (the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the arrow F direction side) of the wall that partitions the sixth passage DRt6. An opening is formed.

  Therefore, when the ball rolls along the rolling member D170 along its longitudinal direction, the pachinko machine 10 can easily pass through the main body portion D131 by the amount of “laying down”, and as a result, the ball has the protrusion D131f. Can be easily applied. On the other hand, the rolling surface (upper surface) of the rolling member D170 is inclined upward from the main body D131 side toward the opening D6148 by the amount of the “padding” of the pachinko machine 10, so that it is affected by the protrusion D131f. The ball moved toward the opening D6148 can be moved toward the main body portion D131 by the downward inclination of the rolling surface (upper surface).

  Thereby, when the protrusion D131f is relatively strongly acted on (contacts with) the ball, the ball flows into (enters) the ninth passage DRt9 through the opening D6148, while the ball contacts the ball. When D131f is relatively weakly acted on (contacts), the ball heading toward the opening D6148 can be returned to the main body D131 side by the downward inclination of the rolling surface (upper surface). Therefore, the rolling mode of the ball can be changed according to the mode of action of the projection D131f on the ball (such as the speed of the ball at the time of contact or the angle of approach of the ball), and the interest of the game can be enhanced. .

  In addition, by using the “laying down” of the pachinko machine 10, the members of the lower frame D6086b can be configured to be orthogonal to each other. That is, the main body portion D131 and the main body portion D141 are arranged in parallel, and the rolling surface (upper surface) of the rolling member D170 is orthogonal to the main body portions D131 and D141 (that is, the axis D171 is connected to the main body portions D131 and D141). D141). Therefore, it is not necessary to adopt a posture in which only some of these members are inclined with respect to the other members, and it is not necessary to pivot the shaft D171 in the inclined posture, thereby simplifying the structure. Thus, the moldability and assemblability of each part can be improved. As a result, product cost can be reduced.

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 131 (a) to 131 (c) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D7086b in the fourteenth embodiment, in which the rolling member D170 moves between the initial position (first position) and the second position. The transition state when the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) and displaced (rotated) between the closed position and the open position is illustrated.

  131 (a) to 131 (c) show a state in which the detour member D200 has been removed. FIG. 126A shows a state in which the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position (see FIG. 119). This corresponds to a state where the rolling member D170 is arranged at the second position and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position (see FIG. 121). FIG. 131B shows that the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position (or from the second position to the initial position (first position)), and the displacing member D180 is moved. This corresponds to a state during displacement (rotation) from the closed position to the open position (or from the open position to the closed position) (see FIG. 120).

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a) to FIG. 131 (c), the transmission member D7190 in the fourteenth embodiment is disposed on the outer edge of the main body D194, and is orthogonal to the axial direction of the axis D191 from the outer edge of the main body D194. The display unit D7197 is provided to extend in the direction of movement. Specifically, the display portion D7197 extends upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the longitudinal end of the main body portion D194, which is the end opposite to the axis D191.

  Here, the upper edge (the edge in the direction of the arrow U) of the side wall D132 of the back member D130 and the upper edge (the edge in the direction of the arrow U) of the side wall D142 of the intermediate member D140 are in the up-down direction (the arrow). The position (height position) in the UD direction) is substantially the same.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), in a state where the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position (see FIG. 119), the displacement of the transmission member D7190 (see FIG. 119). With the rotation, the longitudinal end portion (the end portion opposite to the axis D191) of the main body portion D194 is disposed at the uppermost position (on the arrow U direction side). As a result, the extended distal end (part) of the display portion D7197 projects (arranges) above the upper edge (the edge in the direction of the arrow U) of the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130, and the projected portion is It is made visible to the player.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 131 (c), in a state where the rolling member D170 is disposed at the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed at the open position (see FIG. 121), the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D7190 is performed. Accordingly, the longitudinal end portion (the end portion opposite to the axis D191) of the main body portion D194 is disposed at the lowest position (on the arrow D direction side). As a result, the entire display portion D7197 is immersed (placed) below the upper edge (the edge in the direction of the arrow U) of the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130 (the entire display portion D7197 is the back surface of the side wall portion D132). Placed on the side). Therefore, it is impossible for the player to visually recognize the display unit D7197 directly. The display unit D7197 can be seen through the intermediate member D140 and the back member D130.

  As described above, the amount of protrusion (projection dimension) by which the extended distal end (part) of the display unit D7197 projects from the upper edge (the edge in the direction of the arrow U) of the back member D130 (side wall portion D132) is shown in FIG. As shown in (a), the displacement member D180 is maximized in a state where the displacement member D180 is disposed at the closed position (see FIG. 119). As shown in FIG. 131 (b), as the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170 and the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, the above-described protrusion amount (visible to the player) The size of the portion is gradually reduced, and is minimized (not projected and invisible to the player) in a state where the displacement member D180 is arranged in an open state (see FIG. 121).

  Therefore, the player visually recognizes whether or not the extended tip side (part) of the display unit D7197 projects above the upper edge (the edge in the direction of the arrow U) of the back member D130 (side wall portion D132). By doing so, the displacement state of the displacement member D180 (whether in the open position or the closed position) can be grasped. Further, by visually recognizing the amount of protrusion (projection dimension), it is possible to grasp the displacement state of the displacement member D180 (which position is between the open position and the closed position).

  Next, a lower frame D8086b in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the case has been described where the amount of protrusion (projection dimension) of the protrusion D131f toward the rolling member D170 is constant regardless of the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170. In the protrusion D131f of the fifteenth embodiment, the amount of protrusion (projection dimension) toward the rolling member D8170 changes (increases or decreases) in accordance with the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the lower frame D8086b in the fifteenth embodiment has another configuration (for example, except that the protrusion D131f includes the second protrusion D131fa and that the weight of the weight D8174 of the rolling member D8170 is different). , Shape and number of arrangements) are the same as those of the D6086b of the thirteenth embodiment. Therefore, description of the configuration other than the second protrusion D131fa and the rolling member D6087 is omitted.

  FIGS. 132 (a) and 132 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D8086b in the fifteenth embodiment, and correspond to a cross section taken along line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 115. In FIG. 132 (a), the rolling member D8170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position (see FIG. 119). A state in which the rolling member D8170 is disposed at the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed at the open position (see FIG. 121) is illustrated.

  FIG. 133 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D8086b along the line CXXXIIIa-CXXXIIIa in FIG. 132 (a), and FIG. 133 (b) is the lower side along the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 132 (b). It is a partial expanded sectional view of frame D8086b. FIG. 134 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D8086b, and corresponds to a cross section taken along line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 132 to 134, a plurality (five in this embodiment) of projections D131f disposed on the back member D8130 roll from predetermined (two in this embodiment) projections D131f. A second protrusion D131fa is protruded toward the member D8170. In the present embodiment, the (predetermined) projection D131f on which the second projection D131fa is provided is a downstream side (arrow) of the three projections D131f overlapping the opening D6148 of the intermediate member D140 in a front view. (L direction side).

  In the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D8170, a concave portion is formed on the side surface (edge) on the side facing the back member D8130 in the protruding direction of the protruding portion D131f (the direction in which the protruding portion D131f is received) when viewed from above. Is formed (see FIG. 134). The concave portions are provided at a plurality of positions (four in the present embodiment) at predetermined intervals (substantially equal intervals in the present embodiment) along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D8170. That is, the concave portions are formed (concave) at positions facing the protrusions D131f, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the shape of the concave portion as viewed from above is a shape curved in an arc shape. However, the shape may be rectangular. That is, when the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated), its shape is not limited as long as it does not interfere with the second protrusion D131fa.

  The second protrusion D131fa is projected from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F side) of the protrusion D131f toward the above-described recess of the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172), and the second protrusion D131fa is formed to project. When viewed from above (see FIG. 134), the distal end side (part) is received in the concave portion of the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172) (positioned in the internal space of the concave portion). That is, in a top view, a part of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172) is formed by the second protrusion D131fa.

  Note that the protruding tip of the second protrusion D131fa is formed to be curved in an arc-shaped cross section. However, the cross-sectional shape of the second protrusion D131fa may be substantially rectangular. The direction in which the second protrusion D131fa is provided is the same as the direction in which the protrusion D131f is provided. However, the direction in which the second protrusion D131fa is provided may be different from the direction in which the protrusion D131f is provided (inclination direction).

  The height position (the position in the direction of the arrow U-D) of the second protrusion D131fa is the upper surface (the direction of the arrow U) of the second protrusion D131fa when the rolling member D8170 is arranged at the initial position (the first position). Is substantially the same as or slightly lower than the upper surface (the rolling surface of the ball) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D8170 (see FIG. 133 (a)), and the rolling member D8170 is disposed at the second position. In this state, the upper surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow U) of the second protrusion D131fa is higher than the upper surface (the rolling surface of the ball) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D8170 (FIG. 133 (b)). See).

  That is, in a state where the rolling member D8170 is located at the initial position (first position), the side surface of the second protrusion D131fa (the surface facing the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6, FIGS. 132 (a) and 132 (b). ) Right side surface) is disposed at a position lower than the upper surface (the rolling surface of the ball) of the main body portion D172 (in the direction of arrow D) and passes through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolls on the upper surface of the main body portion D172). The side surface of the second projection D131fa can be prevented from contacting (not acting on) the ball.

  On the other hand, when the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) by a predetermined amount from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the side surface of the second protrusion D131fa (facing the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6). 132 (a) and 132 (b) are arranged at a position higher than the upper surface (the rolling surface of the sphere) of the main body portion D172 (in the direction of the arrow U), and the sixth surface. The side surface of the second protrusion D131fa can be brought into contact with (act on) a sphere that passes through the passage DRt6 (rolls on the upper surface of the main body D172).

  In a state where the rolling member D8170 is arranged at the second position, the side surface of the second protrusion D131fa arranged at a position higher than the upper surface (the rolling surface of the sphere) of the main body D172 (direction of the arrow U). Is the largest. Therefore, in this case, even when the ball rolls (moves along the sixth passage DRt6) while bounding the rolling surface, the side surface of the second protrusion D131fa is brought into contact with (acts on) the ball. Can be easier.

  The second protrusion D131fa is formed on the opposite side of the opening D6148 across the rolling member D8170 (main body D172). That is, the second protrusion D131fa protrudes toward the opening D6148. When a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 receives an action from the second protrusion D131fa (when it comes into contact with the second protrusion D131fa), the action (contact) of the ball causes a reaction. It is rolled to the opening D6148 (the ninth passage DRt9), and is likely to flow into (enter) the opening D6148 (the ninth passage DRt9). That is, it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6.

  In a no-load state in which the weight of the ball is not applied to the rolling member D8170 (the main body D172) (a state in which the ball does not roll on the main body D172), as described above, the entire rolling member D8170 The position of the center of gravity is positioned (eccentric) on the weight portion D8174 side of the axis D171, and the rolling member D8170 is maintained (or returned) at the initial position (first position). On the other hand, the ball rolls on the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D8170, and the position of the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including the ball is on the main body portion D172 side (the side opposite to the weight portion D8174 across the axis D171). In the position (eccentric) state, the main body D172 is displaced (downward) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (disposed at the second position).

  In this case, in the present embodiment, in a state where one ball is located at the position DP (see FIG. 132) of the main body portion D172 (a state where the weight of one ball acts on the position DP), the rolling including the ball is performed. The weight of the weight portion D8174 is set such that the position of the center of gravity of the entire moving member D8170 is located on the axis D171.

  That is, assuming that the ball is in a non-rolling static state, one ball is located upstream (opposite to the axis D171) from the position DP of the main body D172 (the weight of one ball). In the state in which the ball acts on the position DP, the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) in the direction toward the second position, and one ball is positioned on the position DP of the main body D172 (the weight of the ball acts). In the state, the rolling member D8170 is balanced about the axis D171 (that is, the force for displacing (rotating) the rolling member D8170 is not formed), and the rolling member D8170 is on the downstream side (the shaft D171 side) from the position DP of the main body D172. ), The rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) in a direction toward the first position in a state where one ball is located at (the weight of one ball acts on the position DP).

  According to the rolling member D8170 configured as described above, one ball from the third passage DRt3 is placed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172) at the initial position (first position). When the ball falls, the weight of the ball (and the force of the drop) displaces the main body portion D172 downward (in the direction of arrow D), and the rolling member D8170 is disposed at the second position.

  When such a sphere is rolled toward the downstream side (position DP) on the upper surface of the main body D172, the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including the sphere gradually approaches the axis D171, so that the main body D172 is moved. D172 is gradually displaced (rotated) upward (in the direction of the arrow U), and the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position.

  When the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 reaches the position DP, the ball moves in the direction toward the first position of the rolling member D8170 due to the effect of the inertial force associated with the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D8170. When the displacement (rotation) is continued and the ball exceeds the position DP, the position of the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including the ball is eccentric toward the weight portion D8174, so that the ball moves toward the first position of the rolling member D8170. The displacement (rotation) in the direction is accelerated.

  In the present embodiment, after the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 exceeds the position DP and before it reaches the second protrusion D131fa located on the upstream side (the direction of the arrow R), the rolling member D8170 is moved. It is arranged at a second position. That is, when only one ball flows down (enters) into the sixth passage DRt6, the second protrusion D131fa does not act (contact) with the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172.

  However, the speed (rolling speed) of the ball heading downstream is averaged due to factors such as the position of the ball flowing down from the third passage DRt3, the flowing direction, and collision with the displacement member D180 in the middle of the flow. If the speed is higher than the minimum speed, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 reaches the upstream (or downstream) second protrusion D131fa before the rolling member D8170 is disposed at the second position. Then, the ball may be affected by the second protrusion D131fa. That is, even when only one ball rolls, a case where the action of the second protrusion D131fa can be imparted to the ball can be formed, and the influence of the above-described elements can be focused on the player, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the distance between the second protrusion D131fa located on the upstream side (the side in the direction of arrow R) and the position DP is set to approximately twice the diameter of the sphere. However, such a distance can be set arbitrarily. When only one ball is rolled, the action of the second protrusion D131fa can be easily applied to the ball by shortening the above-described distance, while increasing the above-described distance to increase the second distance. The effect of the projection D131fa can be hardly imparted to the sphere.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in a state where two balls are located on the main body portion D172 (a state in which the weight of the two balls acts), regardless of the respective positions of the two balls (for example, Even when the two balls are located downstream of the position DP (between the axis D171 and the position DP), the position of the center of gravity of the rolling member D8170 as a whole including the balls is the main body D172 relative to the axis D171. The weight of the weight portion D8174 is set so as to be eccentric to the side.

  Therefore, for example, only one ball rolls on the main body D172, and the rolling position of the ball exceeds the position DP, so that the rolling member D8170 is arranged at the initial position (first position). Even in the state (that is, the state where the second protrusion D131fa does not act on (contact) the ball and the ball is expected to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6), the other ball may be in the third passage DRt3. (The two balls are positioned on the upper surface of the rolling member D8170 (the main body portion D172)) when the rolling member D8170 is placed in the sixth passage DRt6 (the ball enters the sixth passage DRt6). (Or at least displaced (rotated) toward the second position) in a state where the second protrusion D131fa can act (contact) on the ball (a state where the ball is likely to flow into (enter) the ninth passage DRt9) ) Can be formed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if only one ball (the ball rolling the rolling member D8170 (the main body portion D172)) has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6, the ball has the second protrusion. The portion D131fa is unlikely to act (contact), so that the ball can easily reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6 (it is possible to win the first winning opening 64), while the first ball is rolled. When the second ball further flows down (enters) into the sixth passage DRt6 in the state of being in the state, the second protrusion D131fa acts on (contacts) the first ball, and the second ball is placed at the end of the sixth passage DRt6. It is possible to make it difficult for one ball to reach.

  That is, the ball that has reached the end of the sixth passage DRt6 is awarded to the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 110) via the eighth passage DRt8, so that the player moves the ball onto the rolling member D8170. In a state where the ball does not exist, it is expected that a ball will flow (enter) from the third passage DRt3 to the sixth passage DRt6. On the other hand, after the first ball has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6, on the other hand, the next ball (to prevent the second protrusion D131fa from acting (abutting) on the first ball). It is expected that the second ball) will not further flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6. Thus, instead of always expecting the inflow (entering the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6, the expected situation is changed according to the number of balls entering the sixth passage DRt6, thereby improving the interest of the game. it can.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the first ball approaches the position DP, the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, and the displacement member D180 is moved to the open position. From the closed position to the closed position. When the first ball exceeds the position DP, the rolling member D8170 is located at the first position, and the displacement member D180 is located at the closed position.

  That is, as the first ball approaches the second protrusion D131fa, the displacement member D180 is gradually displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, and the second ball flows from the third passage DRt3 into the sixth passage DRt6 ( Ball entry) can be difficult. Therefore, the degree of expectation of the player that the first ball reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6 can be increased.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment. The same applies to the following modified examples (another embodiment). Part or all of the configuration of one modified example is combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration of another modified example. May be modified. The embodiments to which the following modifications are applied are arbitrary, and any modification (combination or replacement of the modifications) may be applied to any embodiment.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball once flows down to the near side by the distribution device 300 and then flows down backward has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time required for the ball to flow down may be secured by forming a plurality of path bends or forming a deceleration convex portion for decelerating the ball without forming a part that flows down to the near side.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 has a curved surface shape is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Any shape can be used as long as the shape can be used. For example, it may be configured in an inclined plane shape, or may be formed so as to protrude a large number of fine projections from the plane, so that an irregular load can be applied to the colliding sphere.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down the distribution device 300 and flows down the flow path components 334 to 336 in sequence has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Not something. For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed at the left and right central portions of the specific winning opening 65a, and a ball may be formed so as to be able to flow directly into the third flow path component 336 through this opening.

  For example, when the balls enter the ball one by one, the ball does not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of balls collectively enter the specific winning opening 65a, the ball can pass through the opening. Is also good. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the opening or not.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged immediately below the downstream end of the second flow path forming part 335. Further, in this case, the order of the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 335 may be reversed. That is, when entering the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, a branch to each of the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after the flow in the left-right direction, or immediately after the flow in the front-rear direction (flow toward the front side). May branch to each of the detection sensors SE11 and SE12.

  In the first embodiment, the flow direction and the inclination of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 have been described as features of the distribution device 300 alone, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed on an island, the direction of the flow path and the inclination may be designed in consideration of the daily “kick”.

  The term “lay” means that the pachinko machine 10 is not installed in a vertical posture, but installed in a state of being inclined in the front-rear direction. Normally, the pachinko machine is installed in a posture (nekase) that has fallen backward by about one degree (fifty-fourths). In consideration of the installation angle of about 1 degree in comparison with the above description of the distributing device 300 alone (in a state where there is no skein), the first flow path forming portion 334 and the second flow path having the front-back inclination are considered. The meaning of the inclination of the component 336 changes.

  That is, in the distributing apparatus 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path forming part 334 is inclined downward by 7 degrees from the horizontal to the front side, and the third flow path forming part 336 is lowered by 5 degrees from the horizontal to the rear side. Although it is designed to be inclined, when the installation angle is also examined, both the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 similarly form a flow path which is lowered and tilted by 6 degrees. . On the other hand, since the second flow path component 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, it is hardly affected by the installation angle, and can be regarded as having an inclination of about 5 degrees as described above.

  In this case, regarding the flow of the sphere in the distribution device 300, the acceleration of the sphere in the first flow path component 334 and the sphere in the third flow path component 336 is the same, and the acceleration is slightly increased in the second flow path component 335. Become smaller. Therefore, the falling speed of the ball in the left-right direction can be reduced, and the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 can be easily recognized by the player. In addition, since the first flow path component 334 is shorter than the third flow path component 336, the first flow path component 334 is shorter than the third flow path component 336. Can be passed between.

  As described above, the flow of the ball inside the distribution device 300 is affected by the slapping of the pachinko machine 10 due to the presence of the flow path in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the inclination angle of each of the flow path components 334 and 336 is smaller than the angle of the skewing (about 1 degree), the flow direction of the sphere in the flow path components 334 and 336 changes depending on the quality of the skewing (angle setting). Therefore, it is necessary to set the inclination angle to be larger than the angle of the skewing.

  Further, the flow of the sphere inside the distribution device 300 has a flow path in the front-rear direction, and in a configuration in which the flow path is visible, a slight difference in the flow velocity of the sphere flowing down the flow path causes There is a possibility that the degree of slack of the pachinko machine 10 may be grasped. If one wishes to grasp the degree of skein, a configuration may be adopted in which the flow path of the distribution device 300 is easily visible.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the fixed member 161 and the front design member around the front side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 so as not to grasp the degree of “skew” from a slight difference in the flow speed of the ball. 162 is arranged so as to surround it, the variable winning device 65 is arranged so as to cover it on the upper side, and the light diffusion processing surface 340 is configured to lower visibility on the lower side.

  In this way, the visibility of the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is made worse, except for the normal player's eyes (a range of 0 ° to about 30 ° in front view). Thereby, it is possible to avoid comprehending the degree of the “pause” of the pachinko machine 10 by comparing the flow speeds of the balls flowing down the respective flow path components 334 to 336.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the inclination of the first flow path component 334 is greater than the inclination of the third flow path component 336 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the relationship of the inclination may be reversed, or the inclination may be similar.

  In addition, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 has been described as forming a spiral flow path by bending a straight flow path, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a meandering channel shape or a channel shape bent stepwise may be used.

  In addition, the flow path is configured so that the flow path is bent at a right angle at the connection point of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or an obtuse angle at the connection point. Further, a clune may be used as each of the flow path components 334 to 336.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path component 336 is designed to be 0.3 seconds is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be designed so that the time required to pass through the third flow path component 336 is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). Thereby, even if the ball enters the distribution device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the upstream ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 is moved downstream of the ball. In this case, the third flow path component 336 can function as a blind for a ball flowing down.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the flow time of the sphere is secured by securing the path length of the flow path components 334 to 336 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, protruding ridges are formed from both inner walls of the path to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction intersecting with the flow-down direction of the game ball, and are provided alternately so as to collide with the game ball. Thus, the ball may be decelerated. As a result, it is possible to secure the time required for the ball to flow down without increasing the length of the path.

  The deceleration ridges may be arranged uniformly over the entire range of the path to the slide displacement member 370, or may be unevenly arranged. For example, the first flow path forming section 334 and the second flow path forming section 335 are not formed with a ridge, and the ridge is formed only in the third flow path forming section 336, so that the third flow path forming section 336 is formed. Up to this point, the sphere can be made to arrive quickly, while the sphere flows down the third flow path component 336 slowly.

  Also, the projecting direction of the ridge may be a direction in which the ridges are alternately projected from the left and right along the flow path of the ball toward the inside of the path, or may be projected upward from the lower side at a predetermined interval. It may be in such a direction.

  In the case of projecting from the left and right, the load applied to the ball from the ridge has a component in the left and right direction. Therefore, it is preferable to consider the arrangement so that the ball is not erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by this load. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, by projecting inward from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inner sides, the load from the ridge goes to the partition plate portion 338 side without going to the normal detection sensor SE12 side. By doing so, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In the case of projecting from the lower side to the upper side, since the ridge itself may function as a blind of the slide displacement member 370, it is preferable to design the formation height and the formation position in consideration of the line of sight of the player. .

  In addition, the protrusion may be formed to be movable. In this case, the falling of the ball may be dammed in the outgoing state, and the falling of the ball may be restarted in the case of the sunken state.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball is blinded by the ball flowing down on the front side of the slide displacement member 370 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable makeup member may be arranged in front of the distribution device 300, and the makeup member may blind the flow path components 334 to 336. This decorative member may be driven or may operate with the weight of a sphere.

  Further, when the ball is blindfolded, it is not limited to the case where the ball is arranged on the near side. For example, when a mirror is provided on the back side of the slide displacement member 370 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 is visually recognized using the reflection of the mirror, a ball is placed between the slide displacement member 370 and the mirror. Then, a blindfold function can be generated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the ball reaching the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning opening 64 may be disposed behind the game area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning opening 64 may be blindfolded, or the other general winning openings 63 may be blindfolded. It may be something.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case has been described where the flow path components 334 to 336 are formed of linear flow paths that can guide balls one by one. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a meandering flow path, may be formed as a flow path in which a plurality of branches occur, or may have a large or small flow path width so that spheres can easily stay there. It may be configured.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the effect of the blindfold is produced by the ball heading to the slide displacement member 370 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging the balls that have entered the other winning ports 63, 64, 65, and 140 is disposed on the front side of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, disposed so as to intersect on the near side), and The slide displacement member 370 may be blindfolded by a discharge path and a ball arranged in the discharge path.

  In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described where the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows exclusively through the first flow path component 334 to the second flow path component 335 side (front side). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism for distributing the balls is disposed downstream of the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution mechanism sorts the balls flowing to the second flow path component 335 side, so that some of the balls are sorted out. The sphere may be made to flow to the second flow path component 335 side.

  The distributing mechanism may be one that is displaced by its own weight of the ball, may be driven by a driving device so as to perform a constant operation from opening and closing of the opening and closing plate 65b, or may be driven in a fixed pattern when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. Control may be performed as follows.

  In the case of drive control, for example, when the type of entering ball changes, control may be performed so that the ball flows to the second flow path forming portion 335 side. For example, in a case where a ball (excessive winning) exceeding the counted number (10 / round) is found in a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, the ball is configured to flow to the second flow path forming unit 335 side. May be. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 side can be compared with the number of payouts of the extra prize balls, so that the player can grasp the additional profit obtained at an early stage. In this case, the configuration of the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream may be maintained or may be omitted.

  Also, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 flows down the distribution device 300, if the number of special symbols 1 to be held is four (full), then if there is an incoming ball, The sphere may be configured to flow to the second flow path forming section 335 side. In this case, by visually recognizing the ball flowing on the side of the second flow path forming portion 335, the player can be made aware that the reserved number of the special symbol 1 is full. In this case, the configuration of the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream may be maintained or may be omitted.

  When the ball is displaced by its own weight, the predetermined operation may be repeated each time the ball arrives, or a different operation may be performed depending on the number of balls that arrive. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, it does not flow to the second flow path forming portion 335 side, and when two or more balls collectively enter the specific winning opening 65a. The sphere may flow to the second flow path component 335 side. Alternatively, the reverse may be used.

  In addition, these operation modes may be the same downstream of the pair of detection sensors SE1 disposed on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, or may be different from each other.

  Here, if the ball flows from the specific winning opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370 for a long time, there is a possibility that the game is prolonged due to the long ball discharging time. Therefore, for example, by using the above-described distribution mechanism, up to the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a are caused to flow down to the second flow path forming unit 335 side, and the subsequent balls are set to the second You may comprise so that it may discharge | emit without passing through the flow-path formation part 335. This eliminates the need to wait for the ball of the counted number to flow down the flow path components 334 to 336, so that the length between rounds can be set short.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the sorting device 300 is arranged below the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is caused to flow toward the near side near the lower end of the game area, but is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the specific winning opening 65a is disposed above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path components 334 to 336 of the distribution device 300 are arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 or in front view. You may comprise so that it may be arrange | positioned at the near side of a display area.

  In this case, the line of sight for viewing the sphere flowing down the distribution device 300 can be the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, by associating the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player by the flow of the ball with the distribution device 300 with the content of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can confirm the display to determine whether the profit is large or small. It can be easily grasped whether or not it has been acquired.

  Further, the case where the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is visually recognized at a position shifted downward in front view with reference to the ball rolling on the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described, but this is not necessarily required. It is not limited. For example, the ball that rolls on the inner rail 61 is configured so that the ball that rolls on the third flow path forming part 336 does not displace vertically in front view and can be visually recognized in an overlapping manner. Is also good. In this case, not only the ball that has entered the distribution device 300 but also the ball that rolls on the inner rail 61 can function as a blindfold for the ball that flows down the third flow path component 336.

  In the first embodiment, as the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370, the case where the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position at a time when the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a cannot reach has been described. It is not limited to. For example, control may be performed such that the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position after 1.2 seconds have elapsed from the opening timing of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  In this case, the forward flow ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has elapsed can be made to enter the through hole of the positive change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that flows following the preceding ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds elapses enters the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

  Here, when the trailing ball has a positional relationship functioning as a blindfold for the leading ball, the player sets the timing at which the flow of the leading ball switches (downward) to the probability change detection sensor SE11 to the trailing ball. Being hidden makes it invisible. In addition, since the trailing ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, the player may assume that the ball has not entered the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so that the display effects of the time saving state and the probability change state are made similar to maintain the player's expectation. In a simple gaming machine, the effect of the display effect can be improved.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball that has collided with the left and right inner protruding portions 318 does not flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12 only with the load due to the collision has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner protruding portions 318 is configured so that the velocity and rotation of the ball until being guided by the left and right inner protruding portions 318 can be configured in a plurality of types (for example, a crow And increasing the width of the path to increase the degree of freedom of the ball in the downflow direction). Depending on the speed and rotation of the ball, only the load caused by the collision with the left and right inner protruding portions 318 can be used. It may be configured to be guided by the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the slide displacement member 370 and each of the projecting portions 317 to 319 are formed as a separate body has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may be formed integrally with the slide displacement member 370. That is, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may project from the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370.

  In the first embodiment described above, the operation pattern Y considering the possibility of being hidden by a sphere was described as the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control for causing the LED of the light emitting means 351 to emit light at a timing hidden by a sphere may be interwoven.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by the shape of the guide slot 616 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by forming the outer phase of the gap by changing the width of the guide slot 616, or the displacement resistance may be changed by utilizing the magnetic force or the urging force of the coil spring.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 is configured to be bent at an intermediate position, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be bent a plurality of times. In this case, a plurality of positions where the resistance of the vertical displacement of the axis O1 in the vertical direction increases can be formed.

  Further, the shape of the guide slot 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the magnitude of the change amount of the angle θ during the rotation of the rotating member 620. For example, the guide slot 616 may be formed in a shape that can guide the supported member 640 so that a range in which the magnitude of the angle θ can be maintained during the rotation of the rotating member 620 can be partially formed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the guide slot 616 is fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of guide slots 616 in which the axis O1 can move are formed, and the axis O1 is moved by a predetermined switching unit (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that switches by contacting the rotating member 620). The guide slot 616 to be guided may be configured to be switchable, or the guide slot 616 may be configured to be changeable in shape.

  In the first embodiment, the configuration in which the first effect surface 661a is directed obliquely to the front left in a state where the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but is not limited thereto. Not something. For example, the rendering surface may be directed obliquely forward and rightward in a state where it is arranged on the left side of the third symbol display device 81, or may be arranged below (upper side) the third symbol display device 81. The effect surface may be configured to face obliquely upward (downward) to the front.

  In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is configured to be arranged on the base end side of the displacement. However, the present invention is not limited to this. good. On the other hand, the use of the rotating member 620 instead of the direct-moving member suitably functions to ensure the rotation angles of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

  For example, when the member that slides horizontally is fixed to the driven side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is an angle above horizontal (such as the angle a1). Is limited to On the other hand, if the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below (such as the angle b1) can be used. Regardless of this preferred effect, a member that slides linearly may be connected to the driven side of the supported member 640.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the second decoration rotating member 660 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped and the decoration is applied to three side surfaces that intersect at right angles has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed in a pentagonal cross section, and may be configured to be stop-controllable in a posture in which each side faces the front side.

  In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch the display easily integrated with the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the rotation member 620 and the second decoration rotation member 660 can intersect at a right angle has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 may be configured with a component in the front-back direction as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the second operation unit 700 is configured to be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state from the setting of the urging force of the coil spring CS2 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet is provided in the vicinity of the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and this magnet generates an attraction force between the magnet and the magnet provided at the right front plate member 710. May easily occur in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700.

  Further, for example, the inclined portions 751 and 762 may be formed not in a straight line but in a bent shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape. Also, when the coil spring CS2 is used, the biasing force is not limited to being generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, but may be configured to generate the biasing force against the extension displacement of the coil spring CS2.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the attitude of the shaft rotating member 785 is maintained by elastically deforming the beveled tooth portion 783c and the beveled tooth member 785c until the attraction force of the magnet Mg is exceeded has been described. It is not limited to. For example, instead of the elastic deformation of the gear, an allowable value may be provided for sliding friction between a rotating shaft and a support cylinder supporting the shaft.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front side from the rear end of the game area, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mode in which it projects to the front side by a downward displacement may be used. In this case, a mode in which the upper edge of the center frame 86 is extended from below to the front, or a mode in which the center frame 86 projects forward from above the game area (for example, above the front frame 14) may be used.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rotation of the covering member 787 is in the opposite direction and the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not visually recognized in a uniform manner to reduce the discriminating power has been described. is not. For example, instead of rotating the sub-decoration surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 toward the front side, the embodiment may be configured to rotate while facing the left and right outer sides. In addition, even in the case of rotation in the same direction, the rotation angle may be shifted to rotate.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the shaft rotation member 785 and the rotation member are commonly used in the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 by using the rotation angle of the link mechanism (the intermediate arm member 783 and the intermediate arm member 850). The 834 is configured to be rotated (reversed), but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in a single stroke in a metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834, and a protrusion protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotating member depends on the design of the groove. 834 rotation timing can be defined.

  In the above-described first embodiment, a case will be described in which the detection sensor 813 is controlled to determine that the switching from the switching rotation operation to the integral rotation operation has been performed by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 from the state where the detection target portion 844 is disposed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after reversing the drive direction of the drive motor 861 in a state where the detection unit 844 is not disposed on the detection sensor 813, it is detected that the detection unit 844 has entered the detection sensor 813. It may be determined that the operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the configuration of the first decoration member 870 and the configuration of the second decoration member 880 are different from each other has been described. However, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be provided on both the decorative members 870 and 880, or the decorative members 870 and 880 may be plated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by disposing the torque limiter 866 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. In addition, in the case of the oil damper, since the resistance is always generated regardless of the switching of the operation mode, the torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotation direction after the operation mode is switched to the integral rotation operation. It is easy to realize high-speed rotation after switching to integral rotation operation.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plating unit 871a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During the integral rotation operation, the linear member 833 is disposed on the proximal end side (the inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear member 833. When the metal rod 833 is disposed on the distal end side (the outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, the light LD1 can be reflected by exposing the base end side (the inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832. It is.

  In the second to seventh embodiments, the balls roll in series on the bottom portions C142, C2142 of the first intermediate members C140, C2140, and the distribution members C170, C2170, C3170 (the receiving portions C172, C2172, C3172 or the rolling members). Although the case where only one ball flows into the moving portions C173, C2173, and C3173 at the same time has been described, two or more balls can be rolled in parallel on the bottom portions C142 and C2142 of the first intermediate members C140 and C2140, and distribution is performed. A configuration in which two or more balls flow into the members C170, C2170, and C3170 (the receiving parts C172, C2172, and C3172 or the rolling parts C173, C2173, and C3173) at the same time may be employed.

  In the second to seventh embodiments, the ball flowing down in the area (the area between the center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and the rail 61) on the left side in front view (the left side in FIG. 72) of the game area is lower. Although the case where the ball enters (enters) the side frames C86b, C2086b, and C3086b has been described, instead of or in addition to this, the area on the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 72) of the game area flows down. The configuration may be such that the ball to be played flows (enters) into the lower frames C86b, C2086b, C3086b.

In the second to seventh embodiments, the case where one upper frame passage CRt0 is communicated with the receiving ports COPin and COP2000in has been described. However, a plurality of upper frame passages CRt0 are formed in the upper frame C86b, and these are formed. It may be configured to communicate with the receiving ports COPin and COP2000in.
In the second to seventh embodiments, the case where the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 are returned to the first position by their own weight has been described. However, the urging means is provided, and the urging force of the urging means is changed. It may be applied as an auxiliary force when the dividing members C170, C2170, and C3170 return to the first position. Alternatively, it may be applied as an assisting force when the distribution members C170, C2170, C3170 are displaced to the second position. In addition, as the urging means, a coil spring, a torsion spring, a leaf spring, and the like are exemplified.

  In the second and third embodiments, the case where the distribution members C170 and C2170 are directly supported by the shafts C192 and C2174 has been described. However, the distribution members C170 and C2170 may be displaceable by a link mechanism. In this case, the link mechanism may be a parallel link mechanism or an unequal length link mechanism.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the passage (the fourth passage CRt2004) through which the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 of the distribution member C2170 passes is formed by the magnetic portion C2400 has been described. Alternatively, a fourth passage CRt2004 may be formed as a passage for rolling (passing down) the ball along the rolling surface.

  In the fourth embodiment, the case where the guide groove C3131c is formed in a straight line is described, but the guide groove C3131c may be formed in a curved shape. Further, the shape may be a combination of a straight line and a curve.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the circular arc portion C4122b of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is formed to have a uniform circular arc shape (the same curvature) as viewed from above is not limited to this. Arc shapes having different radii may be formed in combination. For example, the curvature of the arc at one end and the other end of the arc portion C4122b in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow FB) is the shape of the arc in the region between the one end and the other end (the region including the outflow surface C122a). The curvature may be greater than the curvature, that is, the curvature of the arc in the region including the outflow surface C122a may be reduced. In this case, in an initial stage (a stage in which the ball reciprocates to or near one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122), the ball facilitates reciprocating motion and a ball that follows the preceding ball. At which the rolling speed of the reciprocating ball is reduced while the ball is easily caught (the ball does not reach the one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or the vicinity thereof, and the outflow surface C122a (A stage in which the ball reciprocates in a relatively small area including), it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the preceding ball and the following ball are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining a state in which both balls are connected.

  In the fifth embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is substantially horizontal in the arc portion C4122b. That is, the case where the upper surface (rolling surface) of the arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane perpendicular to the vertical direction has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Direction). Alternatively, it may be formed as a downwardly inclined plane similar to the pair of linear portions C4122a, or may be formed as a downwardly inclined plane different from the pair of linear portions C4122a. Thus, in an initial stage (a stage in which the ball reciprocates to or near one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122), the ball facilitates reciprocation and a ball following the preceding ball. At which the rolling speed of the reciprocating ball is reduced while the ball is easily caught (the ball does not reach the one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or the vicinity thereof, and the outflow surface C122a (A stage in which the ball reciprocates in a relatively small area including), it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the preceding ball and the following ball are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining a state in which both balls are connected.

  In the fifth embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (the linear portion C4122a and the arc portion C4122b) may be formed to be inclined downward in the direction away from the cutout portion C124a (the direction of the arrow L). Thus, while pressing the ball against the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the cutout portion C124a, the ball is rolled (reciprocated) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). Can be done.

  In the second, third, and fifth embodiments, a protrusion may be provided around the outflow surface C122a in a vertically upward direction (the direction of the arrow U). This can prevent the ball from rolling from the outflow surface C122a to both ends in the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portions C122, C2122, and C4122, and can easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (the third passage CRt3). .

  In the sixth embodiment, the case has been described where the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the magnetic portion C5400 is formed linearly in the width direction (the direction of arrow FB). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the protrusion of C5400 may be formed to be curved in an arc shape. When the arc shape has a radius substantially the same as the radius of the sphere and becomes convex upward in the vertical direction (the direction of arrow U), the contact area between the sphere and the magnetic portion C5400 can be increased, and the sphere becomes Dropping before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic part C5400 can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the arc shape is convex downward in the vertical direction (the direction of arrow D), it is possible to form a mode in which the ball shakes when flowing down, and the ball may drop from the magnetic portion C5400 (the fifth passage). CRt 2005 cannot be reached). As a result, the behavior of the ball can be noticed by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case has been described where the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic portion C6400 is formed as an inclined surface facing the back member C2130 (that is, a surface closer to the back member C2130 as it goes upward in the vertical direction). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed as an inclined surface facing the opposite side to the back member C2130 (that is, a surface that is more distant from the back member C2130 in the vertical direction). Thereby, the ball adsorbed by the magnetic part C6400 and the back member C2130 can be disposed at a position separated from each other, and the contact between the ball flowing down along the magnetic part C6400 and the back member C2130 can be suppressed. .

  In the third and seventh embodiments, as the main body portion C2131 of the back member C2130 moves vertically downward (direction of arrow D), the inclined surface approaches the magnetic portions C2400 and C6400 (direction of arrow F) (that is, in the vertical direction). The lower part may be formed as a surface closer to the magnetic parts C2400 and C6400). Thereby, the sphere flowing down along the magnetic parts C2400, C6400 can be sandwiched between the magnetic parts C2400, C6400 and the back member C2130, and the sphere falls before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic parts C2400, C6400. Can be suppressed.

In the third, sixth and seventh embodiments, in addition to the magnet C2300 provided on the back surface of the back member C2130, the magnet C2300 may be additionally provided vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the magnet C2300. . When the added magnet C2300 is disposed vertically above the center of the sphere attracted to the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400 (in the direction of arrow U), the magnetic force acting on the sphere by the added magnet C2300 is reduced. Since the direction is the upper side in the vertical direction, it is possible to suppress the ball from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400. On the other hand, when the added magnet C2300 is disposed vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the center of the sphere attracted to the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400, the added magnet C2300 acts on the sphere. Because the direction of the magnetic force is vertically downward,
The possibility that the ball is dropped from the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400 (the possibility that the ball cannot reach the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased.

  In the third, sixth and seventh embodiments, the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back member C2130 may be formed to extend vertically downward (arrow D direction). Thereby, in addition to the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400, the ball can be attracted by the effect of the magnetic force directly exerted by the magnet C2300, and the ball falls before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400. Can be suppressed.

  In the third, sixth and seventh embodiments, the magnetic force of the plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400 may have a difference in strength. For example, when the magnetic force of the magnet C2300 disposed on the upstream side is stronger than the magnetic forces of the other magnets C2300, the sphere rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 is moved to the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400. To the fourth passage CRt2004. Further, for example, when the magnetic force of one magnet C2300 of the plurality of magnets C2300 is weaker than the magnetic force of the other magnet C2300, a sphere passing through the one magnet C2300 can be dropped from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400. (The possibility that the vehicle cannot reach the fifth passage CRt2005). Thereby, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the third, sixth, and seventh embodiments, the arrangement direction of the plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic units C2400, C5400, C6400 may be changed. For example, the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged on the downstream side is inclined downward in the vertical direction (the direction of arrow D) with respect to the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged on the upstream side. When arranged in a convex shape, the sphere flowing down along the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400 can be easily directed to the magnet C2300 arranged on the downstream side, and the sphere drops from the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, with respect to the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged on the upstream side, the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged on the downstream side is arranged to be inclined upward in the vertical direction (the direction of arrow U). When arranged in a concave shape, there is a possibility that the sphere may be dropped from the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400 at the boundary between the upstream side and the downstream side of the magnet C2300 (the possibility that the magnet C2300 cannot reach the fifth passage CRt2005). Can be higher. Further, the arrangement shape of the magnets C2300 may be formed linearly or in an arc shape. Further, instead of the magnet C2300, the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400 may be arranged in the above-described shape (convex or concave, and linear or arc).

  In the third, sixth, and seventh embodiments, adjacent magnets C2300 of the plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400 may be formed apart. In this case, a section where no magnetic force is applied to the sphere can be created in the extending direction of the magnetic sections C2400, C5400, and C6400, and the sphere may fall from the magnetic sections C2400, C5400, and C6400 in this section (the fifth passage). CRt 2005 cannot be reached).

  In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the case has been described where the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the open position when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170. The displacement member D180 may be formed so as to be displaced (rotated) to the closed position when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170. That is, when the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are arranged at the initial position (first position), the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position, and the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 are arranged at the second position. In this state, the displacement member D180 may be formed so as to be disposed at the closed position. In this case, when the ball flows down (enters) in the sixth passage DRt6, the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to a side where the ball hardly flows down (enters) in the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, the first ball flows down (enters) into the sixth passage DRt6, and the second ball flows down into the sixth passage DRt6 until the first ball reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6 ( Entering the ball can be made more difficult than when the first ball flows down (enters) in the sixth passage DRt6, and the interest of the game can be increased.

  Note that when the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the closed position when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 The case where the displacement (rotation) from the initial position (first position) to the second position is transmitted to the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 is described above (from the eighth embodiment to the fifteenth embodiment). In the case of). That is, when the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are displaced (rotated) from the initial position (the first position) to the second position, the transmitting members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 are in the opposite directions to those described above. In this case, the positional relationship between the transmitting portions D173 and D3173 and the transmitted portions D193 and D3193 may be set so that the rotation is performed.

  Specifically, in the case of the eighth embodiment, the transmitted portion D193 extends in the direction away from the rolling member D170 (the right side in FIG. 119 (a), the direction of arrow R), and the transmitted portion D193 is extended. When the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the transmitting portion D173 moves down the transmitted portion D193 (arrow D). (That is, rotate the transmission member D190 counterclockwise (clockwise in FIG. 119A)) in the direction of the eighth embodiment.

  In the tenth embodiment, the transmitted portion D3193 extends toward the rolling member D170 (to the left in FIG. 124 (a), the direction of the arrow L), and the transmitting portion D3173 extends below the transmitted portion D3193. When the rolling member D3170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the transmitting portion D3173 pushes the transmitted portion D3193 upward (in the direction of the arrow U) (ie, , The transmission member D3190 may be rotated in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 124A) to the configuration of the tenth embodiment.

  In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced by one transmission member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 (the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220). The case where the displacement is transmitted to the pair of displacement members D180 by one transmission member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 has been described. However, two transmission members are provided, and one of the pair of displacement members D180 is subjected to the first transmission. The other member is displaced by the second transmitting member (the rolling member D170, D3170 or the second rolling member D4220 is displaced by the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member). (To be transmitted to one and the other, respectively).

  In this case, for example, in the eleventh embodiment, the displacement of the rolling member D170 may be transmitted by the first transmitting member, and the displacement of the second rolling member D4220 may be transmitted by the second transmitting member. Thereby, the mode of displacement of the displacement member D180 can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, in the sixth passage DRt6, the facing distance between the front surface of the main body portion D131 of the back members D130, D4130, and D8130 and the back surface of the main body portion D141 of the intermediate members D140, D6140 (arrows). The interval in the FB direction) is constant along the up-down direction (the direction of the arrow UD), and a virtual surface (plane) connecting the tips of the plurality of protrusions D131f and the tips of the plurality of protrusions D141g. A case has been described in which the opposing interval (interval in the direction of arrow FB) between the virtual surface (planar surface) and the virtual surface (plane in the direction of arrow FB) is constant along the up-down direction (direction of arrow UD). May be changed along the vertical direction.

  For example, the facing distance may be narrowed upward (in the direction of the arrow U, away from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 (main body portions D172, D3172)). . Thus, the ball that has jumped from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 (the main body portions D172, D3172) is quickly lowered, and the weight of the ball can be easily applied. The same technical idea applies to the opposing interval in the eighth passage DRt8.

  In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the case where the projections D131f and D141g are respectively protruded from the front of the main body D131 of the back members D130, D4130 and D8130 and the rear of the main body D141 of the intermediate members D140 and D6140. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which recesses are respectively provided on the front surface of the main body portion D131 of the back members D130, D4130, and D8130 and the rear surface of the main body portion D141 of the intermediate members D140, D6140. The passage (rolling) of the sphere can also be delayed by the recess.

  In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the projections D131f and D141g are illustrated as an example of the delay unit that delays the passage of a ball, but other units may be employed. As another means, for example, a ball that passes (rolls) on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172, D3172, or D4222 of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 can abut. (For example, a windmill, an elastic spring made of metal (a plate spring or a coil spring), an elastic piece made of resin, a rubber sheet, and the like). That is, means for delaying the passage of a sphere by using energy (kinetic energy or viscous resistance) generated by contact with the sphere is exemplified.

  The eighth to fifteenth embodiments have described the case where the upper surfaces (rolling surfaces) of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the main body portions D172, D3172, D4222 of the second rolling members D4220 are flat surfaces. However, irregularities or steps may be provided on the upper surface (rolling surface). As a result, the ball is given resistance and its passage (rolling) can be delayed.

  In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, when the weight of the sphere acts on the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220, the sixth passage DRt6 (the opposing pair of displacement members D180). Although the case where the ball easily flows (enters) into (interval) has been described, the configuration may be reversed. That is, when the initial position of the displacement member D180 is set to the open position, and the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220, the displacement member D180 is arranged to the closed position. Thus, the ball may not easily flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180). In this case, the game state may be such that the inflow of the ball (entering the ball) into the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 is more advantageous than the inflow (entering the ball) of the ball into the sixth passage DRt6.

  In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 that transmit the displacement of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 to the displacement member D180 are provided. Although described, the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 may be omitted. That is, the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 is directly connected to the displacement member D180 (the displacement member D180 unit), and the displacement of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 is performed. May be directly transmitted to the displacement member D180.

  For example, in the rolling members D170, D3170, 8170 or the second rolling member D4220, grooves D194L, D194R of the transmission member D190 (main body portion D194) are provided, and the connecting pins D213 of the shaft supporting member D210 are connected to the grooves D194L, D194R. Connect (insert). Accordingly, since the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, and D5190 are omitted, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the eighth embodiment to the fifteenth embodiment, between the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission members D190 and D2190 and the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170 in the initial position (the state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed at the closed position). A vertical gap (direction of arrow UD) is formed between the transmitted portion D3193 of the transmission member D3190 and the transmission portion D3173 of the rolling member D3170, and the weight portion D195 of the transmission member D190. A case has been described in which a gap in the up-down direction (the direction of the arrow UD) is not formed between the transmission part D4223 of the second rolling member D4220 and the transmission part D4223, but these may be reversed.

  That is, in the initial position (the state where the displacement member D180 is located at the closed position), the vertical direction (arrow U-) is set between the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission members D190 and D2190 and the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170. No gap is formed in the direction D) between the transmitted portion D3193 of the transmitting member D3190 and the transmitting portion D3173 of the rolling member D3170, and between the weight portion D195 of the transmitting member D190 and the transmitting portion of the second rolling member D4220. A gap in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD) may be formed between D4223 and D4223.

  In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a case has been described in which the pair of displacement members D180 are rotatable, but at least one (or both) of the pair of displacement members D180 may be slidably displaceable. . Even with a configuration in which the ball is slid, the ease with which the ball enters the sixth passage DRt6 can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, examples of the form of the slide displacement include a form displaced along a straight line, a form displaced along a curve, and a form displaced along a shape combining a straight line and a curve.

  This displacement mode is the same for the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the second rolling member D4220, and the transmitting members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190, and at least one of them (or All) may be configured to be slidable.

  In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the second rolling member D4220, and the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 can return to their initial positions by their own weights. Although the description has been given of a case in which the urging force is applied in the direction of returning to the initial position, an urging means may be provided. If the return to the initial position can be promptly performed, the displacement member D180 can be promptly disposed at the closed position, and the interest of the game can be improved. The urging means is exemplified by a coil spring, a leaf spring, a torsion spring, a rubber-like elastic body, and the like.

  In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the case where the pair of displacement members D180 is provided has been described, but the number of the displacement members D180 provided may be one, three or more. good. That is, it suffices that the ease with which the ball enters (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by the displacement of the displacement member D180.

  In the eighth embodiment to the fifteenth embodiment, a case is described in which the distance between the pair of displacement members D180 is changed, so that the ease with which a ball flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 is changed. However, a configuration in which the facing distance between the pair of displacement members D180 is not changed is also possible. For example, a mode in which the displacement (rotation) direction of one and the other of the pair of displacement members D180 is the same direction (the position of the open portion on the distal end side of the displacement member D180 is left and right (arrow L- (D direction)). That is, it suffices that the ease with which the ball enters (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by the displacement of the displacement member D180.

  In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, one of the pair of displacement members D180 is always linked to the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190, and the other of the pair of displacement members D180 is the transmission members D190, D2190. , D3190, D5190, and D7190 are not interlocked for a predetermined period, but both the pair of displacement members D180 are always interlocked with the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which both of the pair of displacement members D180 do not interlock with the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 for a predetermined period.

  In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the case where the protrusions D131f and D141g are formed continuously along the extending direction (vertical direction) has been described, but the protrusions D131f and D141g are formed in the extending direction (vertical direction). (Discontinuously) along the direction. It is possible to easily provide resistance to the upward jump of the ball. In this case, the protrusions D131f and D141g may be arranged in a staggered manner along the extending direction (vertical direction). Resistance can be more easily imparted to the upward jump of the ball.

  Although the description is omitted in the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the main body of the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180). A restricting means may be provided for restricting the ball falling on the upper surface of D172, D3172 from moving in the opposite direction (the direction of arrow R) from the rolling direction in main body portions D172, D3172. The regulating means may be provided on any of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the back members D130, D4130, D8130, or the intermediate members D140, D6140. In addition, as the regulating means, any one of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the back members D130, D4130, D8130, or the intermediate members D140, D6140 is provided so as to be upright, and formed to be able to contact the ball. The site is exemplified.

  In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the balls that have flowed (entered) in the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180) oppose the main bodies D172, D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170. Has been described, but the sphere that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180) faces the rear member D130, D4130, D8130, or the intermediate member D140. , D6140 may be dropped on the upper surface of the portion (receiving portion) formed therein, and the ball may flow (roll) from the receiving portion into the main body portions D172, D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170. Since the main body portions D172 and D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 can receive the ball in a state where the impact of the fall is reduced (reduced), the displacement member D180 flaps at the initial stage where the weight of the ball acts ( Vibration).

  In the eighth embodiment to the fifteenth embodiment, the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) are arranged (arranged) in parallel when viewed from above (in the direction of arrow D). The case of being disposed at a different position in the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow FB) has been described. In this case, the size of the lower frames D86b to D8086b in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD) can be suppressed. However, the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) are arranged (arranged) in parallel when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B) (that is, in the up-down direction (directions of arrows UD)). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is arranged at a different position). In this case, it is preferable that the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) overlap when viewed from above (in the direction of arrow D). Accordingly, the size of the lower frames D86b to D8086b in the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow FB) can be suppressed.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case has been described where the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 are arranged (arranged) in parallel when viewed from above (when viewed in the direction of arrow D). The two rolling members D4220 may be arranged in series in a top view (viewed in the direction of arrow D) (arranged linearly along the longitudinal direction).

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the case where the display unit D7197 is provided in the main body unit D194 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The display unit D7197 may be provided in the weight unit D195. That is, the display portion D7197 may be provided at the outer edge of the weight portion D195, and may extend from the outer edge of the weight portion D195 in a direction orthogonal to the axial direction of the axis D191.

  In this case, the arrangement of the display unit D9197 is reverse to that described above. (In a state where the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position, the display unit D7197 is made invisible to the player, and the displacement member D180 is opened. In this state, the amount of protrusion of the display portion D7197 can be maximized). In addition, the weight of the metal portion embedded in the weight portion D195 can be reduced (or omitted) by utilizing the weight of the display portion D7197, and accordingly, the number of parts can be reduced and the material cost can be reduced. Can be planned.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the second protrusion D131fa is formed only in a part (two in the present embodiment) of the plurality (five in the present embodiment) of the protrusions D131f has been described. The number of the second protrusions D131fa is not limited to this, and may be any number, and may be one or three or more. The second protrusion D131fa may be formed on all of the plurality of protrusions D131f. Further, the second protrusion D131fa may be formed only on the protrusion D131f overlapping the opening D6148 of the intermediate member D140 in a front view, and the second protrusion D131f may be formed only on the protrusion D131f not overlapping the opening D6148 of the intermediate member D140 in a front view. The portion D131fa may be formed.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, when the rolling member D8170 is located at the first position, the dimension of the upper surface of the second protrusion D131fa projecting from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is determined on the upstream side (shaft). The case where the second protrusion D131fa located on the side farther from D171) has a larger size has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the second protrusion D131fa may have the same size. Alternatively, the second protrusion D131fa located on the downstream side (closer to the axis D171) may have a larger dimension.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Points where a sphere passing through the route construction means becomes a blindfold for the passed means>
A path configuration means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path configuration means to pass therethrough, wherein the path configuration means, when viewed in a predetermined direction, Displaceable means that can be arranged at a position on the upstream side of the passed means and in front of the first game ball flowing down the route forming means and at least partially overlapping the first game ball. Gaming machine A1.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a large winning part 300 that can configure a plurality of types of flow paths of a game ball toward the ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is hardly recognized by the decorative plate 302. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the ball detecting hole 431 is not always easily recognized by the decorative plate 302, it is confirmed that the ball has entered the ball detecting hole 431 to continue or stop the launch of the game ball. It was not possible to cope with the game mode of performing, and the player might feel dissatisfied. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in a portion related to the launch operation of the game ball.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the means for lowering the visibility of the first gaming ball in the route forming means is the predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to configure a state in which the first gaming ball is easily visible. Is done. Therefore, in a state in which the first game ball is easily visible, it is easy to determine whether to continue or stop the operation of launching the game ball by confirming the downward flow of the first game ball. Improvements can be made in relevant areas.

  It should be noted that the mode of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, another game ball may be used, or a decoration member configured to be displaceable between a flow path of the game ball and the glass unit may be used.

  It should be noted that the mode of the passed means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, an entrance (for example, a starting port) related to a lottery of a symbol, a prize ball that is related to a payout of a prize ball, or a game ball that can pass through. Means may be used.

  The gaming machine A2, wherein the displaceable means is a second gaming ball flowing down the upstream side of the first gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the visibility of the first gaming ball can be changed by using the gaming ball guided toward the passed-through means, so that the displaceable means is provided. As compared with the case where other decorative members are prepared, material costs and design costs can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A2, the path forming means includes a front-rear path formed with a front-rear width in which a second gaming ball can be arranged in front of the first gaming ball. .

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, the front-rear path is configured so that the second gaming ball can be arranged on the front side of the first gaming ball. Can cover at least a part of the first game ball.

  In the gaming machine A3, when the first game ball and the second game ball flow down the route forming means at a firing interval set in a firing device, the front-rear direction route is the second game ball. A gaming machine A4, wherein a gaming ball is configured to hide at least a portion of the first gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, when a plurality of gaming balls flow down the route forming means with the firing interval kept, it is difficult to recognize the first gaming ball by the second gaming ball. Can be achieved. As a result, a situation that is difficult to recognize can be generated from normal times.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the front-rear path is such that the front-side component is located closer to the center of the game area than the rear-side component.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the front-rear direction path can be configured as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player looking at the passed-through means. Is easily hidden by the second game ball. That is, the effect of blindfold can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A5, the front-side component is disposed on a line of sight of a player who looks at the passed-through means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5, a similar blindfold effect is produced irrespective of the length of the interval between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball arranged in the front-rear direction path. be able to.

  That is, normally, it is considered that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are, the more the blindfold effect can be improved. However, the first game ball and the second game ball appear on the line of sight. When the game balls are arranged, the effect of the length of the interval can be eliminated.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the path forming unit includes a front-rear path formed with a front-rear width that allows a second game ball to be disposed in front of the first game ball, and a front-rear direction thereof. A gaming machine A7 comprising: a left-right path formed with a left-right width that allows a game ball to flow in a left-right direction on an upstream side of the path.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the line of sight of the player can be blocked by the game ball flowing down the left-right direction path. On the other hand, the blinding effect can be produced not only in the case where the passing-through means is visually recognized with a line of sight that does not shift left and right, but also in the case of a line of sight with a horizontal shift. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner of entering the passed-through means regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (it is possible to produce a blindfold effect in all directions).

  This effect is remarkably produced by sealing the left and right sides of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction with the walls. In other words, in a configuration in which the left and right sides are sealed by the wall, the wall is blindfolded on the left and right sides, so that it is easy to configure a state in which the field of view to the passing-through means cannot pass.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the path forming means includes a first flow path in which a game ball passes through the passed means in a first mode, and a second flow path in which a game ball passes in a second mode. And the first game ball can be visually recognized by being covered at least in part by the predetermined displaceable means, regardless of which of the flow paths of the path constituting means flows down. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the flow-down state of the game ball flowing down the route forming means regardless of the presence or absence of the passed means. In addition, it is possible to improve the attention of the game ball flowing down the route forming means.

  Note that the first mode and the second mode are not limited at all. For example, the flow direction of the ball may be different, or the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a branching means for dividing a flowing direction of a game ball on an upstream side of the passed means is provided, and the branching means is provided with a switching means for switching a flowing direction of the received game ball, The game machine A9, wherein the path forming means is a game ball whose flow-down path is divided by the branching means, and wherein the game ball reaching the switching means flows down the same path in a predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, since the gaming ball that has reached the switching means flows down the same path in the predetermined section, the gaming ball that has reached the switching means immediately It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp the downflow of the game ball as compared with the case where the downflow mode corresponds to the downflow path. Thereby, the player's attention to the game ball can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A9, the route forming means includes a projecting portion projecting from a flowing game ball, and the projecting portion acts on a branch of the game ball in the branching means. Machine A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the projecting portion can act on the branch of the game ball. Can be improved in durability.

  In the gaming machine A10, the projecting portion includes a first projecting portion extending in a predetermined direction, and a second projecting portion extending in a direction different from the first projecting portion. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that the projecting amount of the second projecting portion is different from the projecting amount of the second projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A10, the effect of the first projecting portion on the game ball and the effect of the second projecting portion on the game ball in accordance with the flow-down mode of the game ball. Can be different. Thereby, while utilizing the fixed first projecting portion and the second projecting portion, an action of branching the game ball according to a predetermined rule according to the flow-down mode of the game ball can be generated.

<Points where the sphere passing through the route construction means appeals to the passing means>
A route configuration unit configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed unit configured to allow a game ball flowing down the route configuration unit to pass therethrough, wherein the route configuration unit is more than the passed unit. A gaming machine B1 comprising a predetermined portion constituting an upstream side, wherein the predetermined portion is arranged on a side more conspicuous than the passed means, and is configured to be able to guide a game ball to the passed means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a large winning prize part 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a game ball toward the ball detection hole 431 is provided, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is hardly recognized by the decorative plate 302. Depending on the difference in the state of the winning parts 300, there are gaming machines in which a game ball flows down from a position deviating from the decorative plate 302 or a game ball flows down as it is hidden behind the decorative plate 302 (for example, See Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game balls with good visibility that fall off the decorative board 302 are rather configured to flow off the ball detection holes 431 and are hidden behind the decorative board 302. Since a part of the flowing game ball is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the profit obtained by the player, and the player pays attention to the game ball. The player was likely to be dissatisfied because things were easily wasted. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in that the manner in which the game balls flow down after the attention has been made is significant.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the game balls flowing down the predetermined portion arranged on the conspicuous side are configured to be able to be guided to the passed means, the degree of improvement in the attention to the game balls, It can be associated with a game ball passing through the passed means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined portion passes through the passed-through means, and thus it is possible to improve the game ball after the attention has been paid.

  In addition, with this configuration, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight with the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion, and to reduce the possibility that the player misses that the game ball is going to the passed means. be able to.

  It should be noted that the mode of the passed means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, an entrance (for example, a starting port) related to a lottery of a symbol, a prize ball that is related to a payout of a prize ball, or a game ball that can pass through. Means may be used.

  In addition, the aspect on the conspicuous side is not limited at all. For example, it may be a display device side that is easy to catch the eyes of the player, a winning port side or a starting port side, a front side (front side) that is easy for the player to see, or a specific entrance port. The stage where the line-of-sight is likely to converge as a place where the probability of entering the ball becomes remarkably high (mainly at the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame where the game ball temporarily stays) or directly connected to the jackpot acquisition The V winning opening side, the ball lending device side as an operation target, the staging operation button side, the range where the game ball escaping from the entrance port flows down (the range where the player frustratedly follows the ball with eyes) and Alternatively, the light side may be switched between light and dark on the bright side or on the other side. Alternatively, the inconspicuous side may be intentionally formed so as to be relatively conspicuous.

  In the gaming machine B1, the route configuration unit includes a second predetermined unit that makes the game ball entering the route configuration unit less noticeable than when the ball is entered, and the predetermined unit is more than the second predetermined unit. A gaming machine B2 which is arranged on a prominent side.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, before the game ball entering the route forming means flows down the predetermined portion, the attention power is reduced in the second predetermined portion, so that the predetermined portion flows down. The attention power of the game ball at the time of playing can be emphasized.

  The gaming machine B3, wherein in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the predetermined portion includes a section in which a flowing speed of a game ball is different.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the effect of collecting the player's line of sight can be improved as compared with the case where there is no difference in the flowing speed of the gaming ball.

  In the gaming machine B3, the second falling speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is configured to be higher than the first flowing speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion. Gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B3, it is possible to shorten the period until the gaming ball that has entered the route forming means reaches the predetermined portion.

  The gaming machine B5 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, wherein the predetermined portion includes a section in which the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a predetermined direction is different.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the section in which the apparent displacement speed of the gaming ball in the predetermined direction is different regardless of the actual flowing speed of the gaming ball is different. Since it can be configured, by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball in a predetermined direction at any predetermined position, the player's line of sight can be easily collected at a predetermined position, and the eyes can be turned away from other parts .

  The manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is made different is not limited at all. For example, when displacing on a straight line arranged on a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction in front view, and when displacing on a straight line having a front-rear component, or when displacing on a straight line, It may be different from the case of displacing in a curved or meandering manner, or may be other differences.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the game machine may further include an introduction unit configured to be capable of introducing a game ball into the path configuration unit, and the predetermined unit may be disposed outside the introduction unit in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine B6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, visibility of the introduction means can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both the securing of the visibility of the introduction unit and the improvement of the attention of the game ball that is likely to pass through the passed unit.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, an avoiding means is provided which is configured so that a game ball on the front side of the route forming means flows down to avoid the line of sight toward the passed means or the predetermined portion. Gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the game sphere is configured to be able to flow on the front side of the path forming means, and the flowing path of the game sphere is directed toward the passed means. Since avoidance means is provided for avoiding the problem, it is possible to ensure both the securing of the size of the game area and the visibility of the game ball toward the passed means.

  In addition, the flow-down mode of the game ball affected by the avoiding means is not limited at all. For example, it may flow down avoiding the front position of the passed-through means, may flow down a straight line connecting the passed-through means and the position of the eyes of the player, or may play a game ball heading to the passed-through means. With reference to the last position that can be confirmed by the player, it may flow down avoiding the front position of that position, or may flow down the straight line connecting the last position and the eye position of the player. Good and others.

  In the gaming machine B7, the route forming unit includes an accepting state changing unit configured to be capable of changing a state between an accepting state capable of accepting a flowing game ball and an unacceptable non-accepting state, and the accepting state changing unit includes: A game machine B8 configured to be able to guide a game ball, which has reached the receiving state changing means in the receiving state, to the route forming means side in the state change from the receiving state to the non-receiving state. .

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B7, it is also possible to prevent a gaming ball flowing down so as to be bridged after arriving at the receiving state changing means to block the line of sight toward the passed means. Can be.

  In the gaming machine B7 or B8, the game machine B7 or B8 is provided above the passed means in a front view, and includes a partitioning means for partitioning a game area, and the partitioning means is configured so that a game ball can flow down the left and right outer sides. A gaming machine B9 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7 or B8, the situation in which the game ball flows down the front position of the passed-through means can be avoided by the partitioning means. It can be easily secured.

  It should be noted that the mode of the partition means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a plate-like portion that forms the lower surface of a game ball, or a ball-opening-portion-forming unit that allows a game ball to enter. The partitioning means may be a means for fixing the shape (appearance) or a means for changing the shape (appearance).

  In the gaming machine B9, the route forming means includes receiving state changing means configured to be capable of changing a state between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down can be received and a non-receiving state in which the ball cannot be received. A gaming machine B10 characterized in that a portion on the state changing means side is configured to easily guide a game ball to the receiving state changing means side.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a game ball being received by the receiving state changing means is received by the partitioning means by being pushed into the receiving state changing means. This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the game ball that has slid in the middle of being accepted is deviated from the acceptance state changing means and falls on the front side of the passed means.

  For example, a special winning device having an opening / closing plate that tilts and displaces in the horizontal direction is assumed as the receiving state changing means, and a first winning opening arranged above the special winning opening of the special winning device is assumed as the dividing means. . A game ball that has reached the special winning opening just before the closing of the opening / closing plate is often sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening / closing plate and the edge of the opening covered with the opening / closing plate, and the direction of forming the edge ( (Slides in the direction of the rotation axis of the open / close plate).

  Since the game ball after skidding can reach any position in the range of formation of the pivotal tip of the opening and closing plate, if at least a part of the opening and closing plate is arranged above the passed means, it slides. There is a possibility that the subsequent game ball may pass through the front position of the passed means after dropping to the front side, and the game ball after skidding should not be dropped to the front side.

  If it is not possible to avoid the falling of the game ball to the front side after skidding, it will be necessary to dispose the open / close plate so as to avoid the position of the passed means in front view, which reduces the design freedom of the open / close plate become.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, it is possible to easily prevent the gaming ball after the skidding from falling to the front side of the opening and closing plate, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the opening and closing plate.

  In any one of the gaming machines B7 to B10, a game ball flowing down the route forming means and a game ball flowing down the front side of the route forming means flow down in a similar manner. Gaming machine B11.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B7 to B10, a game ball which may flow down the route forming means and pass through the passed means, and flows down the front side of the route forming means. By making it difficult to distinguish game balls that do not pass through the passed means, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the number of game balls flowing down the route forming means.

  In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a case where the game ball easily enters the route forming unit and a case where the game ball does not easily enter from the game ball flowing down near the route forming unit.

  A gaming machine B12, comprising: any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, provided with a light emitting means for emitting light from the rear side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, it is possible to easily avoid that the front side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion is reflected by light and the ball becomes difficult to see.

<Points to save the route length to the V entrance with space saving>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a passed-through means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass therethrough, and a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the passed-through means. State switching means configured to be switchable between a first state and a second state different from the first state, wherein the path forming means includes a delay means for delaying the vertical displacement of the game ball, and the delay means A gaming machine C1 configured to allow a game ball to flow down to the passed means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or the like, an allocating unit 75 configured to be movable left and right in a flow path of the gaming ball entering the second big winning opening 12 is provided. There is a gaming machine configured to be able to change the flowing direction of the game machine (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is essential to operate the distribution unit 75 for a short period of time to prevent erroneous winning in the specific area 73 and biting of the ball by the distribution unit 75. In some cases, the player felt that the behavior of the division 75 was distrustful and could not continue the game with peace of mind.

  As an example of a means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the length of the flow path from the second big winning opening 12 to the distribution unit 75 is increased. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distribution unit 75 from a position directly below the second special winning opening 12 to a position near the center of the left and right of the game area (near the first special winning opening 10), the position from the second special winning opening 12 is changed. A long flow path length to the distribution unit 75 can be ensured. Thus, it is considered that the possibility of erroneous winning in the specific area 73 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when this means is executed, it is necessary to ensure the visibility of the flow path of the game ball over a wide range from the second special winning opening 12 to the first special winning opening 10, and in this range, the design of the game area can be freely performed. The degree is limited. That is, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the game area is restricted in a wide range in order to avoid erroneous winning in the specific area 73.

  In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the route forming unit includes the predetermined delay unit, even if the vertical length of the route forming unit in a front view is reduced to save space, the route forming unit enters the route forming unit. It is possible to secure a long time that elapses until the ball that has been hit passes through the passed means.

  Therefore, the timing at which it is necessary to operate the state switching means in order to switch whether or not a game ball can enter the passed-through means can be made a predetermined time after the game ball enters the route forming means, so that the route An erroneous winning can be avoided without operating the opening / closing device for switching whether or not to enter the constituent means for a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening / closing means is operating in a hurry. This makes it possible to avoid erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

  The mode of the delay unit is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which a convex portion for deceleration is formed in the flow-down path, or a mode in which a predetermined flow-down path through which a game ball flows down in a flow-down path having a longitudinal component, may be used.

  In the gaming machine C1, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are such that the flow path toward the front side is lower than the flow path toward the rear side, and the game balls flow down. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the acceleration of the game machine is increased.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, it is possible to secure a long period of time in which a player can visually recognize a game ball flowing down a predetermined flow path.

  The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the inclination of the predetermined flow path with respect to the horizontal plane may be large or small, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow path on the game ball side may be designed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow path is such that the flow path toward the front side is lower than the flow path that flows while maintaining the front-rear position. The gaming machine C3, wherein the acceleration of the flowing game balls is increased.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to secure a long period for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing on the near side. Thereby, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

  The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the inclination of the predetermined flow path with respect to the horizontal plane may be large or small, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow path on the game ball side may be designed.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and the predetermined flow-down path is such that a game ball is positioned in front of the passed means in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine C4 configured to pass through.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the gaming ball is arranged at the near position, the visibility near the passed means can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the range near the passed means.

  A gaming machine C5, wherein a plurality of the near positions can be configured in the gaming machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C5, at least a part of the game balls on the back side can be hidden by the game balls on the near side by arranging the game balls at a plurality of front positions. Since the passed-through means is disposed on the back side of the game balls on the back side, the field of view toward the passed-through means can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the passed-through means can be reduced. .

  In this case, when the pitch of the game balls entering the predetermined flow path is short, it is possible to configure a state in which the game balls are always arranged at any of the near positions, so that the passed means cannot be visually recognized. It becomes possible.

  The gaming machine C6, wherein in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the path forming means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a spiral manner in a top view.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the vertical width required for disposing the route forming means having the same length can be shortened.

  Further, compared with the case where the folded path is formed, it is not necessary to reduce the thickness of the path wall, so that the strength of the flow path can be improved, and compared with the folded path that is folded at 180 degrees, The possibility of clogging of the ball or the like can be reduced.

  The gaming machine C7 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, wherein the path forming unit includes a front-rear flow path portion extending in the front-rear direction.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, since the left and right widths of the route forming means can be suppressed, the pair of route forming means can be symmetrically configured with the suppressed left and right widths. Can be.

  The gaming machine C8 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the passed means is disposed obliquely downward and rearward with respect to a ball receiving portion of the route forming means.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, it is possible to make it easier to fit the passed-through means and the ball receiving portion of the route forming means in the field of view of the player visually recognized from the front side. .

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the route forming unit is configured to be a first receiving unit configured to receive a game ball, and to be a unit different from the first receiving unit and configured to receive a game ball. And a second receiving means to be performed, wherein a profit obtained by the player is changed depending on a mode of receiving the game ball by the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to always receive game balls, and further, the first receiving means and Since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the mode of receiving the game ball by the second receiving means, the attention to the game ball can be improved.

  It should be noted that the mode of receiving game balls is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which game balls are received only by the first receiving means, a mode in which game balls are received only by the second receiving means, or a mode in which a predetermined number of game balls are received by the first receiving means. A mode in which a predetermined number is accepted by the means may be adopted. Further, the mode of entering the ball with respect to each receiving means may be different, or the mode of entering the ball may be different.

  In the gaming machine C9, the change in the profit obtained by the player is limited to one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means and the game ball is received, or the first receiving means and the second receiving means are changed. A game machine C10, which is generated depending on whether or not a game ball is accepted by both.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, the player can easily launch the gaming ball in a predetermined firing mode by setting the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player. .

  It should be noted that the profit obtained by the player is not limited at all. For example, it may be easy to recognize the flowing game balls, or profits related to the game obtained by the flowing game balls (payout of prize balls, acquisition of jackpots, that the game state after the end of the jackpot becomes a stable state, The game state may be a normal state (falling down).

  In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the route forming unit is configured such that the portion from the first receiving unit and the second receiving unit to the passed unit is symmetrical.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9 or C10, the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage can be reduced even if the game ball is fired mainly on the left or right.

  In any one of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the route forming unit includes an accepting state changing unit configured to be capable of changing a state between an accepting state capable of accepting a flowing game ball and an unacceptable non-accepting state, The gaming machine C12, wherein the receiving mode changes according to the shape of the receiving state changing means or the mode of the status change.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the receiving state changes according to the shape of the receiving state changing means or the state of the state change. The effect of the skill level on the profits obtained for the player can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C12, the mode of the state change of the receiving state changing means is constituted by a plurality of types.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C12, even when the game ball is fired in a fixed firing mode, the mode of receiving the game ball to the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Can be changed. Thereby, the profit obtained by the player can be adjusted from the state of the state change of the receiving state changing means.

<Points regarding the opening / closing member that moves parallel to the downward flow of the ball>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a passed-through means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass therethrough, an introduction state capable of introducing a game ball to the path forming means, State switching means configured to be able to change state between a non-introduced state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path forming means, and the direction of the displacement generated in the state change is caused by the downflow of the game ball. A gaming machine XA1 characterized by being arranged along a direction.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a large winning part 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a gaming ball toward a ball detection hole 431 (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the flowing direction of the gaming ball and the opening / closing direction of the opening / closing plate of the special winning part 300 are substantially perpendicular to each other, and the opening / closing operation is completed without involving the opening / closing of the rolling of the gaming ball. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening / closing plate (state switching means).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to be along the downflow direction of the game ball, so that the state in which the game ball is close to or in contact with the state switching means. By generating the displacement of the switching means, it is possible to change the rolling mode of the game ball. Thereby, the role of the state switching means can be improved.

  For example, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the right while the game ball is on the top, so that the game ball moves in the forward direction of rolling rotation with respect to the game ball. Since a rotating load is applied, the game ball can be accelerated.

  Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the left while the game ball is on the top, so that the rolling rotation of the game ball is performed. Since a load for rotating in the opposite direction is applied, the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.

  Further, when the state switching means slides so as to graze the lower end of the rolling game ball, a load having not only the rolling direction of the game ball but also a component in a direction orthogonal to the rolling direction is applied to the game ball. Because of this, it is possible to cause a complicated and irregular change in the manner in which the game balls flow down.

  Due to these effects on the flow-down state of the game ball, the flow-down state of the ball riding on the state switching means at the time of the opening / closing operation of the state switching means can be changed in various ways, so that the player visually recognizing the game ball gets bored. Without having to concentrate on the game.

  Further, the positional relationship between the opening / closing operation of the state switching means and the game balls is not limited at all. For example, the positional relationship may be such that the ball rubs against the side surface of the game ball, or the ball may collide against the game ball in the downflow direction.

  In the state switching means that is displaced in a manner of colliding with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, the closing operation may be performed in the direction opposite to the flowing direction of the game ball, and the game ball may be configured to be able to bounce off, or the closing operation may be performed in the forward direction of the flowing direction of the game ball, and the subsequent introduction of the game ball. May be configured to be regulated with low resistance.

<Points for the opening / closing member that allows the ball to flow in the first direction when opened and in the second direction when closed>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a passed means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass therethrough, an introduction state capable of introducing a game ball to the passed means, State switching means configured to be changeable between a non-introduced state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the passed means, and the state switching means can guide the game ball in the first direction in the introduced state. The gaming machine XB1 is configured to be able to guide the gaming ball in the second direction in the non-introduced state.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a large winning part 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a gaming ball toward a ball detection hole 431 (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when protruding forward, but does not contact the game ball when retracted to the rear side and freely falls without contacting the game ball. No guidance is given. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, in the state of being retracted to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a portion (a frame portion or the like) for guiding the flow of the game ball other than the lower movable body 371, and for guiding the flow of the game ball. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of reducing the number of components (members).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XB1, since the state switching means is configured to guide the game ball in different directions between the introduced state and the non-introduced state, a special purpose for guiding the flow path of the game ball is provided. Since members can be eliminated, the number of necessary components (members) can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the flowing direction of the game ball in a limited space.

  Note that the relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set left and right with respect to a game ball flowing down in the front-back direction. In this case, in front view, while the game ball is slightly displaced before being guided by the state switching unit, the difference (difference) in the direction after the guidance by the state switching unit is started is maximized. Can be achieved.

  The arrangement of the guide section that causes the operation of the state switching means to be guided is not limited at all. For example, a guide portion may be provided on a movable member provided in the state switching means, or the guide portion may be provided on a non-movable portion around the state switching means, and the game ball may be provided on the guide portion by the operation of the movable member. You may comprise so that it can be switched to the state which is close or easy to contact.

  When the guide portion is provided on the movable member, the design is not limited to the guide after the completion of the state switching between the introductory state and the non-introduced state, but also takes into account the effect on the game ball during the operation of switching the state. Is preferred.

  For example, when the state switching unit includes a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposing the flowing direction of the game ball, a surface (plane, curved surface, or the like) inclined with respect to the flowing direction is provided, rather than providing a planar wall perpendicular to the flowing direction. Providing a wall having a shape can make it easier to avoid a situation in which the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction in which the game ball flows backward. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the backflow of the game ball.

<Separation, inversion, union, and rotation are a series of operations>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable so that a surface to be viewed is changed, the displacement means includes a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and in a displacement in a predetermined mode, the first displacement member is provided. A gaming machine D1 wherein a member and the second displacement member are configured to be relatively displaced.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a rotation base 214 provided at a distal end portion of a base arm 220 is configured to be rotatable a plurality of times (for example, see JP-A-2006-116782). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, although the rotation base 214 is rotationally displaced, there is a problem that it is difficult to maintain the attention to the displacement means because the surface seen by the player is the same.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the surface on which the displacement means is visually perceived can be changed in accordance with the displacement, so that attention to the displacement means can be maintained.

  In addition, since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are relatively displaced, the appearance of the displacement means can be changed, so that attention to the displacement means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the displacement in the predetermined mode includes a first displacement that approaches and separates from a gathering portion where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are gathered and arranged, and the first displacement member and the first displacement member. A gaming machine D2 comprising: at least a second displacement member and a second displacement that rotates with respect to the gathering portion.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily generated dynamically. That is, as the displacement based on the gathering portion, only the first displacement can easily reduce the displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member at the terminal end where the distance from the gathering portion is the shortest or the longest. Although the 1st displacement member and the 2nd displacement member seem to be stopped and there is a possibility that the production effect may be reduced, by mixing the second displacement, it is possible to generate a displacement in the rotation direction even at the end portion. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect.

  The gaming machine D3, wherein in the gaming machine D1 or D2, the displacement in the predetermined mode includes at least a third displacement in which a visible surface of the displacement means is reversed.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, by inverting the surface visually recognized by the third displacement, the decoration visually recognized by the player before and after the third displacement is significantly different. Can be made.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixable by suction or adhesion, and a load related to the fixation is the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A gaming machine D4 that operates in a direction that limits the displacement of a member.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load related to the fixation acts in the direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so the load related to the fixation. In consideration of the above, the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed.

  For example, in the case of transmitting a driving force to a gear, when a deformation is caused mechanically without considering deformation of a shape, when a load related to fixing is added, a change in elasticity of a member due to the load becomes apparent. This can cause a delay in the displacement timing of the member.

  Further, the degree of fixation may be configured to be different depending on the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

  In this case, the effect of the fixation differs according to the surface to be visually recognized, so that the degree of fixation on the side to be visually recognized by the player can be increased or decreased.

  Thus, for example, with respect to the inverted surface of the same displacement means, one surface is firmly united and easily visible together, and the other surface is loosely united and easily visible in a state where relative displacement is easy. Can be.

  Also, for example, by configuring the degree of suction of the first displacement member and the second displacement member to be different for each fixing position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is different. it can.

  It should be noted that the mode in which adsorption is enabled is not limited at all. For example, an adhesive tape may be used, or an attractive force between a magnet and a metal part may be used. Further, the first reversing member or the second reversing member may be designed so that, for example, a fixing screw, a screw, or the like is used as the metal part to be attracted to the magnet.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacing means is configured to be displaceable in forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, is displaced in the forward direction in the first displacement mode, and in the reverse direction, the first displacement is performed. The gaming machine D5 is configured to be displaced in a second displacement mode different from the displacement mode, and to be displaced in the first displacement mode after being displaced in a predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is provided before the first displacement mode. Since the predetermined mode is configured as a displacement mode, the amount of displacement required for the displacement unit when the displacement unit is retracted can be reduced. Thereby, the attention power to the displacement means at the time of evacuation can be reduced, so that the attention power of the displacement means displaced at the production position can be relatively improved.

  In the conventional machine, since the rotation mode is the same in the forward and reverse directions, after extending to the effecting position (the position on the front side of the liquid crystal display area) and effecting, before retreating to the retreat position (the position outside the liquid crystal display area). It was necessary to rotate again several times in the opposite direction. In this case, there is a possibility that the problem that the line of sight easily gathers on the member retracted from the effect position.

  Note that the displacement mode is not limited at all. For example, the displacement may be a rotational displacement or a linear displacement. The displacement may be on a plane, may be over a plurality of planes, or may be three-dimensional.

  The gaming machine D6, wherein the displacing means includes releasing means configured to release the load transmission when the operation resistance becomes larger than a predetermined amount.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D5, a change in the displacement mode of the displacement means can be caused by the magnitude of the operating resistance of the internal configuration of the displacement means.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, a light emitting unit that irradiates light to the displacement unit is provided, the displacement unit includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the The gaming machine D7, wherein the second displacement member is configured to be able to change the visual recognition mode of the light from the light emitting unit depending on whether the surface to be visually recognized is on one side or the other side.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means corresponds to the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Can be changed.

  For example, a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light individually, and a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light integrally. Can be changed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the game machine further includes a detection unit that detects an arrangement of the displacement unit, and the detection unit is configured to be capable of detecting whether or not the displacement of the displacement unit is in an allowable state. A gaming machine D8 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the state in which the displacement of the displacement means can be allowed can be detected by the detection means, so that the displacement means collides with the surrounding structure during the displacement. Can be avoided.

  In addition, since the displacement of the displacement means can be executed while detecting the section in which the displacement means can be displaced by the detection means, to a certain extent, the displacement mode including the enlargement / reduction after being displaced from the production position to the retreat position. By controlling so as to be displaced, it is possible to suppress an increase in attentional power to the displacement means when displacing from the production position to the retreat position in comparison with a case where displacement is performed in a displacement mode including enlargement / reduction from the start of displacement. .

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a detection unit for detecting a state of the displacement unit is provided, and the detection unit is configured to be able to detect two or more types of numerical values for the displacement of the displacement unit. Gaming machine D9.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D1 to D7, the number of detectors provided can be reduced. In addition, various modes are illustrated as the kind of numerical value about the displacement of the displacement means. For example, it may be a numerical value for the arrangement and posture of each of the different movable members, or a numerical value related to a change in the operation mode when the operation mode changes at a predetermined timing.

  Further, the arrangement of the detecting means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure for detecting the arrangement and posture of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip side of the displacement means.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have one surface facing the player side. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player, the first and second displacement members are configured so as to be able to perform a reversing operation. While the displacement member and the second displacement member can be distinguished from each other, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member Is a game machine D10.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the reversing operation is performed regardless of the state of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is directed to the player side. The player's expectation that the game will occur can be kept high.

<Points that change the easy-to-view surface by arranging the displacement means having a plurality of surfaces to be viewed>
Displacement means comprising a first viewable surface and a second viewable surface configured to be viewable, the displacement means depending on the arrangement, a first state in which the first viewable surface is easily viewable, A gaming machine E1 configured to be switchable between a second state in which the second viewable surface is easily visible.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a reversing operation unit 71 configured to be reversible and configured to be able to change the appearance visually recognized by a player by changing a surface to be viewed (for example, And JP-A-2006-153095). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the reversal of the reversing operation section 71 is performed in a state where the position is fixed, so that the line of sight of the player cannot be changed due to a change in the surface to be viewed. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the displacing means switches between a state in which the first visually recognizable surface is easily visible and a state in which the second visually recognizable surface is easily visible according to the arrangement. The line of sight of the player who wants to see the visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner along the path of the change in the arrangement of the displacement means.

  The gaming machine E2, wherein the gaming machine E1 is provided with an opening for opening the displacing means so as to be visible, and the displacing means is configured such that the opening side is easily visible.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the player who visually recognizes the back side through the opening can easily visually recognize the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement unit.

  In the gaming machine E2, the displacing means is disposed closer to the back side when the displacing means is disposed on the edge side of the opening than when it is disposed on the center side of the opening. .

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, when the displacing means is disposed at the center side of the opening, the displacing means can be largely visually recognized on the near side, while the displacing means is located on the edge of the opening. When placed, the movement of the line of sight when viewing the displacement means can be reduced. This makes it possible to achieve both the visibility of the displacement means and the suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his or her eyes.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement unit includes a plurality of sets of the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface, and one set of the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that it is difficult to visually recognize another set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface when the surface is visible.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, different characters and figures are applied to the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface for each set, so that the displacement means is provided. To allow a player who visually recognizes a different character or figure to be visually recognized, and that it is difficult to visually recognize a first visible surface and a second visible surface of a set not intended to be visually recognized. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the displacement means from being completely lost.

  For example, in the first set, a character or a graphic indicating that the lottery result is a big hit and a low expectation is displayed on the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface, and the second set includes the lottery result. Is displayed on the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface when a character or a graphic indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high is displayed through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. You can check the height. In this case, even after the displacement means has retreated from the front side of the display area of the display device, the display of the expectation of the jackpot by the displacement means can be maintained, so that the player who has taken his eyes off the liquid crystal display device can Also, it is possible to continue to display the display of the jackpot expectation.

  In addition, the aspect which is hard to visually recognize is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged on a surface (rear side surface, left and right outer surface, etc.) on the side different from the player side, or may be configured so as to reduce visibility by shielding with shielding means.

  In the gaming machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized is such that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are hardly recognized during the operation. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being constituted.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in the gaming machine E4, the first viewable surface displayed on the player side during the operation of switching the set of the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface to be viewed (before confirmation). In addition, it is possible to easily prevent the prediction of the set of the second visually recognizable surfaces. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention of the displacement means.

  Note that there is no limitation on the mode in which the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface are hardly recognized during the switching operation described above. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at a high speed to make it difficult to be recognized, or a part of the first viewable surface (the second viewable surface) and another part may be configured to be connectable and separable. The recognition may be made difficult by operating the part and the other parts in a separated state, or a part that is made relatively dark by setting the brightness of the light emitting means may be made difficult to be recognized.

  In this case, the state of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the above-described switching operation, only one of the first viewable surface (the second viewable surface) and the other portion is viewed, and the other side faces the rear side so as not to be viewed. Such a configuration may be employed, or a configuration may be employed in which a part thereof and the other part can be visually recognized at the same time, but the arrangement is shifted and visually recognized.

  In the gaming machine E5, an opening is provided to open the displacement means so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and the switching operation is performed in a state where the displacement means is arranged at the center side of the opening. Gaming machine E6.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E5, the switching operation can be easily made visible to the player, and the attention to the switching operation can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E5 or E6, during the switching operation, one of the part of the first viewable surface and the other part faces a front side, and the other faces a side different from the front side. Gaming machine E7.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5 or E6, a part of the first visually recognizable surface can be visually recognized during the operation, and the entire surface cannot be visually recognized. Possible surfaces can be made harder to recognize.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the game machine further includes a second displacement unit configured to shield at least a part of a line of sight to the second viewable surface, and the displacement unit together with the second displacement unit includes the second displacement unit. (1) A gaming machine E8 configured to be switchable to a third state for visually recognizing a viewable surface.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, at least a part of the second viewable surface is hardly visually recognized by the second displacement means, so that the effect position of the displacement means can be determined. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement unit is configured to change a surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface according to the displacement. A gaming machine E9.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the surface viewed in the predetermined direction changes between the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface. It is possible to arbitrarily change a surface that is easily visible without depending on the amount of change in the line of sight of the user.

  The gaming machine E10, wherein the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the posture of the displacement means. it can.

  In the gaming machine E9 or E10, an auxiliary means is provided so as to be able to be disposed close to the displacement means. In the first state, the displacement means is disposed close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means is disposed. Is a gaming machine E11 characterized by being located away from said auxiliary means.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9 or E10, the auxiliary means is disposed in the vicinity of the displacement means, and the state in which the auxiliary means and the displacement means are visually recognized separately and the state in which the auxiliary means and the displacement means are visually recognized separately. It is possible to configure a plurality of impressions given to the player by the displacement means.

  The mode of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement may be fixed or movable.

  In the gaming machine E11, the auxiliary means is configured to be switchable between a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized integrally with the displacement means and a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized separately from the displacement means. .

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E11, it is possible to switch whether the displacement means and the auxiliary means are visually recognized integrally or separately and visually recognized. Can be increased.

<Point where the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means and the displacement amount of the disposition means at the same point differs in the section>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable, disposition means having a first portion disposed on the displacement means, and support means for supporting a second portion of the disposition means, the support means being provided. Is a game machine F1 characterized in that the arrangement of the second part with respect to the first part during the displacement of the displacement means can be controlled.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a tiltable and displaceable base arm 220, a pivoting member 211 rotatably attached to a tip end side of the base arm 220, and the pivoting member 211 are rotated. And a driving motor 222 that generates a driving force for the rotation of the base arm 220, and is configured to be able to rotate the rotating role 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (for example, JP-A-2006-116782). Gazette). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the rotating role 211 is likely to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating role 211 is rotated during the tilting displacement of the base arm 220, a malfunction may occur in the mechanism. As a result, since the rotational displacement of the rotating role 211 is assumed to be performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, the degree of freedom of the displacement is low.

  That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the arranging means is supported by the displacement means and the support means at at least two points, and the two support points are configured to be relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the arrangement of the second portion with respect to the first portion can be controlled by the support means, the disposing means can be displaced during the displacement of the displacing means while the disposing means is stably supported. Can be. Thus, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the disposing means (the displaceable portion) can be increased.

  In addition, the aspect of the support means is not limited at all. For example, it may be supported by a guide groove formed in the fixed base means in a mode in which the displacement is limited, or may be supported by being connected to a displaceable second displacement means. Further, the control by the support means is not limited to the electronic control, but also includes mechanical control such as regulating (guiding) the displacement of the second portion by the wall.

  In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be capable of displacing a first section and a second section, and the support means is configured to displace the second section when the displacement means displaces the first section. And a second range for supporting the second portion when the displacement means displaces the second section, wherein the second portion is displaced in the first range. A gaming machine F2, wherein a direction is different from a direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F1, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the arranging means can be made different. Since it is configured to allow the change in the displacement direction of the portion, even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly, the displacement of the disposing means can be made smooth.

  The gaming machine F3, wherein in the gaming machine F1 or F2, the support means includes a limiter for limiting displacement of the second portion.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the displacement of the second portion can be limited at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range. When the part is displaced from the side where the displacement is large to the side where the displacement is small, the second part can be easily stopped at the boundary position (restriction part) between the first range and the second range.

  The form of the load required for the displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion is not limited at all. For example, the second portion may be pulled, or the second portion may be pushed.

  Note that the mode of the restriction unit is not limited at all. For example, a mode may be set in which the displacement resistance of the second portion is increased or decreased, or a mode in which the displacement direction of the second portion is switched.

  In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the first section is disposed closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the arrangement means based on the displacement means in the second section. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the relative displacement amount is smaller than the relative displacement amount of the arranging means based on the displacement means in the first section.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to configure a section where the relative displacement amount of the arranging means with respect to the displacing means is small at the position of the displacement means. Since it is possible, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacement means, it is possible to provide a position where the displacement means and the disposing means can be easily visually recognized integrally. Easy positions can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the gaming machine F5 is configured to be capable of changing (the ratio of) the displacement speed of the second portion based on the displacement speed of the first portion.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second portion of the arranging means on the support means side Can be changed, so that an operation effect in which the displacement speed of the arranging means is made variable by simple driving control (constant speed driving) of the driving means can be configured.

  The gaming machine F6 according to any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, wherein the support means is configured to reduce a displacement speed at a displacement end of the second portion.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from rebounding, and to easily stop the arrangement means at the end of displacement.

  Note that there is no limitation on the technique for preventing the second portion from jumping back. For example, a method of reducing the displacement speed of the second portion at the displacement end (for example, the displacement amount of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) may be used. A method may be used in which the displacement of the second portion is regulated by a geometrical measure such as raising a wall in the direction of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is stopped.

  Further, the invention is not limited to the method of reducing the displacement amount of the second portion, and the displacement resistance of the second portion may be increased. For example, a load may be applied by a magnetic force or the like at the end of displacement of the second portion to improve the displacement resistance of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be improved by the urging force of a coil spring or the like. good.

  In the gaming machine F6, the support unit may include a displacement trajectory of a displacement of the second portion accompanying a displacement of the first portion, and a displacement trajectory of the second portion when the first portion stops at a displacement end. A gaming machine F7, wherein the displacement trajectory of the displacement intersects.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F6, the support means having a function of guiding the displacement of the second portion accompanying the displacement of the first portion causes the third portion when the first portion stops. The return displacement (bound) of the portion 2 can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the game machine further includes a supported unit that is displaceably supported by the arrangement unit, and the supported unit has a relative displacement amount of the arrangement unit with respect to the displacement unit. A gaming machine F8 configured to be displaced by a corresponding displacement amount.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a complicated effect can be executed by the supported means that is displaced jointly with the arranging means.

  The mode of displacement of the supported means is not limited at all. For example, the disposition means may be displaced so as to run in parallel with the disposition means on a predetermined plane on which the disposition means is displaced. , A slide displacement mode (for example, a rotational displacement mode about a predetermined axis) may be used.

  It should be noted that the mode of displacement of the arranging means with respect to the amount of displacement of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, the posture may be changed, or the displacement may be performed while maintaining the posture.

  In the gaming machine F8, while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second portion is provided with a section capable of reciprocating displacement in a direction intersecting a displacement trajectory of the first portion. Gaming machine F9.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8, the relative displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion changes while the first portion is being displaced (for example, after the increase). Since the position of the second portion is maintained, the displacement amount of the supported means can be increased while maintaining the arrangement of the second portion.

  In the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement speed of the (relative) rotation of the supported means with respect to the arrangement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. F10.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement mode of the supported device can be made equivalent to the displacement device with the arrangement device interposed therebetween. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to the player as if the supported means is being displaced by the unique driving means.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the arranging means includes a posture changing means for changing a posture so as to switch a surface facing a player side between a first surface and a second surface according to its own displacement, The attitude changing means is configured such that the first surface or the second surface is oriented toward a player when the second portion is disposed at a displacement end. Machine F11.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the first surface or the second surface of the posture changing means is directed toward the player, so that the second portion is at the displacement end. Since the player can grasp the arrival, the end of the effect operation by the displacement means can be easily understood.
<About the concept of the invention in which the distribution members C170 to C3170 are examples>
In a gaming machine provided with a displacement member at least partially disposed in a passage path of a ball and formed to be displaceable by the weight of the ball, when a first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, The displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the first ball is guided to a first passage, and the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. In the state, the second ball following the first ball is guided to the second passage, and the displacement member is disposed at the predetermined position when the weight of the ball is not applied. A gaming machine CA1 characterized by the following.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a distribution member that operates by the weight of a game ball and distributes the game ball to a first passage and a second passage (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). . However, according to the above-described conventional technology, regardless of the state of the game ball that has arrived, it is only necessary to alternately distribute the ball to the first path and the second path in the order of arrival. There was a problem that the interest in the game was insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CA1, when the first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, and the first ball is moved to the first ball. In the state where the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the first ball, the second ball following the first ball is guided to the second passage, and the displacement member is moved by the weight of the ball. When the first ball is not connected to the first ball, the first ball is guided to the first passage when the second ball is connected to the first ball at an interval of a predetermined amount or less. In addition, the second ball can be guided to the second passage by the displacement member that is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, while the second ball is placed in the first ball by the predetermined amount. When the first ball is guided to the first passage, the displacement member is located before the second ball reaches the first ball. By being placed into position, it can be second sphere also guided to the first passage. In this way, the path to be guided can be changed according to the state of the series of balls (the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball), so that the player can pay attention to the state of the ball and improve the interest of the game. can do.

  In addition, the second sphere following the first sphere means a sphere that follows the first sphere at an interval smaller than a predetermined amount. Therefore, the second ball may roll or flow down in contact with the first ball.

  In the gaming machine CA1, the displacement of the displacement member to the predetermined position is performed by the weight of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine CA2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA1, the displacement of the displacement member to the predetermined position is performed by the weight of the displacement member. Can be simplified. Also, since the displacement to the displacement member can be made slower than in the case of using the biasing spring, it is necessary to dispose the displacement member at a predetermined position before guiding the second ball to the second passage. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, the possibility that the third ball following the second ball can be guided to the second passage can be provided.

  In the gaming machine CA2, the displacement member functions as a main body that guides the ball to the first passage or the second passage, and as a weight connected to the main body and displacing the main body to the predetermined position. A gaming machine CA3, comprising: a weight portion, wherein at least a part of the weight portion is made visible to a player.

  According to the gaming machine CA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA2, the main body guides the ball to the first passage or the second passage, and the weight connected to the main body and displaces the main body to a predetermined position. A weight portion that functions, and at least a part of the weight portion is made visible to the player, so that the player can recognize the direction in which the ball is guided based on the position (state) of the weight portion. it can. In addition, the weight part can serve both as a weight for displacing the main body part and as a part for recognizing the guiding direction of the ball, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machines CA1 to CA3, the displacement member includes a first surface on which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls.

  According to the gaming machine CA4, in any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA3, the displacement member has the first surface on which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls, so that the first ball is in the second position. While rolling on one surface, the weight of the ball can act on the displacement member. Therefore, the state where the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere (that is, the state where the second sphere can be guided to the second passage) can be easily maintained.

  In the gaming machine CA4, a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member are provided on the base member, and the displacement member rolls the second ball guided to the second passage. The gaming machine CA5, further comprising a second surface, the second surface being disposed at a position vertically overlapping the axis.

  According to the gaming machine CA5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA4, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the second surface is perpendicular to the axis. Since it is arranged at a position overlapping in the direction, the displacement of the displacement member toward the predetermined position due to the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface can be suppressed. Therefore, the second ball can be stably rolled. In addition, it is possible to ensure the possibility that the third ball following the second ball can be guided to the second passage.

  In the gaming machine CA4 or CA5, the displacement member includes a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface is longer than the second surface. A gaming machine CA6 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine CA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA4 or CA5, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface is the second surface. Since the length is made longer than the surface, it is possible to easily form a state in which the first ball rolls on the first surface while the second ball rolls on the second surface. That is, while the weight of the first ball acts on the displacement member while the second ball rolls on the second surface, the displacement member is moved by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Displacement toward a predetermined position can be suppressed. Therefore, the second ball can be stably rolled. In addition, it is possible to ensure the possibility that the third ball following the second ball can be guided to the second passage.

  In any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA6, a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member are provided on the base member, and the displacement member is guided by the second passage to the second passage. The gaming machine CA7, further comprising: a second surface on which the ball rolls, wherein the first surface extends in a direction away from the axis.

  According to the gaming machine CA7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines CA4 to CA6, the displacement member has a second surface on which a second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and a first surface. Is extended in a direction away from the shaft, so that as the first ball rolls toward the first passage, the weight of the first ball can be effectively applied to the displacement member. . Thus, the displacement of the displacement member toward the predetermined position due to the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface can be suppressed. Therefore, the second ball can be stably rolled. In addition, it is possible to ensure the possibility that the third ball following the second ball can be guided to the second passage.

  In any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA7, a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member are provided on the base member, and the displacement member is guided by the second passage to the second passage. The gaming machine CA8, further comprising a second surface on which the ball rolls, wherein at least a part of the first surface and the second surface is disposed with the axis interposed therebetween.

  According to the gaming machine CA8, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA7, the gaming machine CA8 includes a base member, and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member on the base member. A second surface on which the second ball guided to the passage rolls is provided, and the first surface and the second surface are arranged at least partially with the axis interposed therebetween. Can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA7, a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member are provided on the base member, and the displacement member is guided by the second passage to the second passage. The gaming machine CA9, further comprising a second surface on which the ball rolls, wherein the first surface and the second surface are at least partially disposed on the same side with respect to the axis.

  According to the gaming machine CA9, in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA7, the gaming machine CA9 includes a base member, and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member. A second surface on which a second ball guided to the passage rolls is provided, and the first surface and the second surface are at least partially disposed on the same side with respect to the axis. Even if it is ejected from the first surface, the posture of the displacement member can be set to the posture for guiding the second ball to the second passage by utilizing the weight of the second ball. As a result, the length of the first surface can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in disposing the displacement member can be increased accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines CA4 to CA9, the game machine includes an upstream surface on which the ball rolls toward the first surface, and the first surface includes a rolling direction of the first ball rolled from the upstream surface. Gaming machine CA10, characterized by reversing.

  According to the gaming machine CA10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA9, the gaming machine CA10 includes an upstream surface on which the first ball rolls toward the first surface, and the first surface rolls from the upstream surface. Since the rolling direction of the first ball is reversed, the time required for the first ball to stay on the first surface can be secured for the time required for the reversal. Therefore, while the weight of the first ball acts on the displacement member while the second ball rolls on the second surface, the displacement member is moved by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Displacement toward a predetermined position can be suppressed. Therefore, the second ball can be stably rolled. In addition, it is possible to ensure the possibility that the third ball following the second ball can be guided to the second passage. Further, the length of the first surface can be shortened, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the displacement member can be increased accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, a base member, a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member on the base member, and a ball rolling on the base member toward the first surface. A gaming machine CA11, comprising: an upstream surface, wherein the shaft is disposed in a posture orthogonal to a direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface and a vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine CA11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, the axis is disposed on the upstream surface in a posture orthogonal to the direction in which the ball rolls and the vertical direction, so that the base member The unit in which the displacement member is disposed can be downsized. In particular, by arranging the base member so that the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface is along the width direction of the gaming machine, the width direction of the gaming machine is effectively utilized, and a space for disposing the displacement member is secured. Easy to do.

  A gaming machine CA12, comprising a base member in any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, wherein the displacement member is slidably disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine CA12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, the displacement member is slidably disposed on the base member. For example, the displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member. As compared with the case where the displacement member is provided, the displacement member can be reduced in size, and a space for disposing other members in the base member can be secured accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA12, a base member, a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member on the base member, and a ball rolling on the base member toward the first surface. An upstream surface, wherein the displacement member rolls the second ball guided to the second passage in a state where the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. A second surface, wherein in a state where the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, the upstream end of the second surface is located vertically below the downstream end of the upstream surface. A gaming machine CA13 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, when the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the displacement member may jump due to an impact when the displacement member is displaced, and the displacement member jumps up from the downstream end of the upstream surface. Also, when the upstream end of the second surface is located above, there is a possibility that the second ball cannot be rolled from the upstream surface to the second surface. In particular, when the second ball collides with the upstream end (upstream end of the second surface) of the displaced displacement member, the displacement member is further jumped up by the impact (the displacement member is pushed up by the second ball), and the second ball is pushed up. There is a risk that the second ball will flow into the path (first surface) where one ball should roll.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CA13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA12, in the state where the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the downstream end of the upstream surface is Also, since the upstream end of the second surface is located vertically below, if the displacement member rebounds due to the impact when displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, the downstream end of the upstream surface is Also, it is possible to suppress the upstream end of the second surface from being positioned upward. Therefore, the second ball can be smoothly rolled from the upstream surface to the second surface.

  In the gaming machine CA13, the upstream end of the second surface is inclined downward toward the upstream surface.

  According to the gaming machine CA14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA13, the upstream end of the second surface is inclined downward toward the upstream surface, so that when the first surface is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. When the displacement member rebounds (bounces up) due to the impact and the second ball collides with the upstream end (upstream end of the second surface) of the displaced displacement member, the force acting on the displacement member from the second ball is It can act as a force in the direction of pushing down the displacement member. As a result, the second ball can be smoothly rolled from the upstream surface to the second surface.

  In any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA14, the game machine includes an upstream surface on which the ball rolls toward the first surface, and the displacement member rotates the first ball guided to the first passage. A first surface, wherein the first surface reverses a rolling direction of the first ball rolled from the upstream surface, and the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by a weight of the first ball. A position where the displacement trajectory of the displacement member on the upstream surface side is more distant from the upstream surface than the displacement trajectory of the first sphere at the position where the first surface is inverted, on the upstream surface side. Gaming machine CA15, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine CA15, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA14, when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the first surface is at the inverted position. Since the displacement trajectory on the upstream surface side of the displacement member is located at a position farther from the upstream surface than the displacement trajectory on the upstream surface side of the first sphere, the second sphere is erroneously flown into the first surface ( Acceptance). That is, the second ball is brought into contact with the first ball to keep the second ball away from the first surface, and the upstream surface of the displacement member that is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. The end can push the second ball away from the first surface.

  In the gaming machine CA15, the displacement member moves the first ball to a position where the rolling direction of the first surface is reversed until the displacement of the first surface is increased by a predetermined amount or more by the weight of the first ball. Gaming machine CA16, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine CA16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA15, the displacement member reverses the rolling direction of the first surface until the weight of the first ball is displaced by a predetermined amount or more from the predetermined position. Since the first ball is retained at the position, it is possible to more reliably suppress the second ball from being erroneously flown (accepted) into the first surface. That is, the second ball is brought into contact with the first ball to keep the second ball away from the first surface, and the upstream surface of the displacement member that is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. The operation of pushing the second ball away from the first surface at the end can be more reliably performed.

  Any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA16, comprising: an inflow portion; a reciprocating surface on which the ball introduced from the inflow portion rolls so as to be capable of reciprocating displacement; and an outflow portion for allowing the ball to flow out from the reciprocation surface. The gaming machine CA17, wherein the portion is located on the upstream side of the displacement member in the passing path.

  According to the gaming machine CA17, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA16, an inflow portion, a reciprocating surface on which the ball flowing from the inflow portion rolls so as to be reciprocally displaceable, and a ball from the reciprocating surface. And an outflow portion for flowing out the first ball and the second ball at an interval of a predetermined amount or less because the outflow portion is located upstream of the displacement member in the passage path. The ball and the second ball can easily reach the displacement member in a state of being connected at an interval of a predetermined amount or less. That is, even if the distance between the first ball and the second ball when flowing from the inflow portion is larger than a predetermined amount, the first ball and the second ball are reciprocally displaced on the reciprocating surface. The gap with the second sphere can be narrowed (the gap is set to a predetermined amount or less).

  In the gaming machine CA17, the width of the reciprocating surface is set to a width through which one ball can pass.

  According to the gaming machine CA18, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA17, since the width of the reciprocating surface is set to a width that allows one ball to pass, the inflow portion flows into the reciprocating surface and reciprocates on the reciprocating surface. The first sphere and the second sphere to be displaced can be prevented from passing each other. Therefore, when the first sphere and the second sphere are reciprocated on the reciprocating surface, the gap between the first sphere and the second sphere can be easily clogged (the gap can be easily reduced to a predetermined amount or less). .

  In the gaming machine CA18, the reciprocating surface is inclined upwardly toward one side and the other side, and the outflow portion is disposed at a lowermost position of the reciprocating surface.

  According to the gaming machine CA19, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA18, the reciprocating surface is inclined upwardly toward each of the one side and the other side, and the outflow portion is disposed at the lowest position of the reciprocating surface. The first ball and the second ball can flow out of the outflow portion in a state where the inertia reciprocated on the surface is weakened. That is, it is possible to maintain the state where the first ball and the second ball are connected at an interval equal to or less than a predetermined amount, and to easily flow the ball.

  In the gaming machine CA19, the reciprocating surface is formed to be linear in a top view.

  According to the gaming machine CA20, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA19, since the reciprocating surface is formed in a straight line when viewed from above, when the first ball and the second ball are reciprocally displaced on the reciprocating surface. In addition, the distance between the first sphere and the second sphere can be easily reduced (the distance can be easily reduced to a predetermined amount or less).

  A gaming machine CA21 comprising any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA20, further comprising an attracting member formed so that the attracting force of the magnet can act on the sphere and disposed at least in a posture in which the lower surface is inclined downward.

  According to the gaming machine CA21, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA20, the attraction member of the magnet is provided so as to be able to act on the ball, and the at least lower surface is provided with an attraction member disposed in a downwardly inclined posture. Therefore, a path through which the ball passes can be formed by the suction member, and the interest of the game can be improved. That is, when the ball is sucked to the lower inclined surface of the suction member, the ball can be slid by its own weight and displaced along the lower surface of the suction member. In this case, depending on the state of the ball (the relationship between the inertial force applied to the ball and the suction force), the ball may fall from the lower surface of the suction member (that is, the ball may reach the end of the passage path (the lower surface of the suction member)). Unreachable state). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine CA21, the attraction member includes a lower surface forming member formed in a plate shape from a magnetic material, and a magnet for applying a magnetic force to the lower surface forming member.

  According to the gaming machine CA22, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA21, the attraction member includes a lower surface forming member formed in a plate shape from a magnetic material and a magnet for applying a magnetic force to the lower surface forming member. The structure in which the sliding surface is formed by the lower surface of the lower surface forming member facilitates the adjustment of the attraction force and the optimization of the frictional force, and the ball passage path can be reliably formed with a simple structure.

  In the gaming machine CA21 or CA22, the suction member forms at least a part of the second passage.

  According to the gaming machine CA23, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CA21 or CA22, the attraction member forms at least a part of the second passage, so that the interest of the game can be improved. That is, the second ball can be guided by the displacement member to reach the second passage because the second ball reaches the displacement member in a state where the second ball is connected to the first ball at an interval of a predetermined amount or less. It is only the case and the probability is relatively low. Passing the second sphere, which has reached through such a low possibility, safely by displacing in an unstable state in which there is a possibility of falling (the possibility of not reaching the end of the lower surface of the suction member). Is expected from the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine CA23 includes a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member on the base member. The displacement member rotates the first ball guided to the first passage. And a second surface on which the second sphere guided to the second passage rolls, at least a part of the first surface and the second surface sandwich the shaft. A gaming machine CA24, wherein the gaming machine CA24 is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine CA24, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine CA23, the gaming machine CA23 includes a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is guided to the first passage. A first surface on which the first ball rolls, and a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, at least a part of the first surface and the second surface are provided. Since the displacement member is disposed with the shaft interposed therebetween, the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere (the position of the first surface is displaced downward), thereby displacing the position of the second surface upward. Can be done. Therefore, the second sphere rolling on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the attracting member.

  In the gaming machine CA24, the gaming machine CA25 is characterized in that the second surface is disposed at a position vertically overlapping the axis.

  According to the gaming machine CA25, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine CA24, the second surface is disposed at a position overlapping the axis in the vertical direction, so that the second surface is displaced by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Displacement of the member toward the predetermined position (position of the second surface is displaced downward) can be suppressed. Therefore, the second sphere rolling on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the attracting member.

  In the gaming machine CA24 or CA25, the first surface is longer than the second surface.

According to the gaming machine CA26, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA24 or CA25, the first surface is made longer than the second surface. Can easily form a state in which the sphere rolls on the first surface. That is, while the weight of the first ball acts on the displacement member while the second ball rolls on the second surface, the displacement member is moved by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Displacement toward the predetermined position (the position of the second surface is displaced downward) can be suppressed. Therefore, the second sphere rolling on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the attracting member.
<About the concept of the invention in which the plate members C120, C2120, and C4120 are examples>
In a gaming machine provided with a ball passage, the passage includes a first passage that allows the ball to reciprocate in the front-rear direction, and a second passage that communicates with the first passage and passes the ball along the left-right direction. A gaming machine CB1 comprising:

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a passage member (stage) that allows a ball to reciprocate is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-198607). However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the interest in the game is not sufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CB1, the passage has a first passage that allows the ball to reciprocate in the front-rear direction, and a second passage that communicates with the first passage and passes the ball along the left-right direction. And the aisle, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine CB1, when a first ball and a second ball following the first ball pass through the second path, the distance between the first ball and the second ball is increased. A gaming machine CB2, wherein a path to which the first ball and the second ball are guided is changed accordingly.

  According to the gaming machine CB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CB1, when the first ball and the second ball following the first ball pass through the second path, the first ball Since the path to which the first ball and the second ball are guided is changed according to the distance between the ball and the second ball, the ball is guided to a predetermined path (ie, the first ball). (The interval between the ball and the second ball becomes a predetermined interval), and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In this case, when the distance between the first ball and the second ball is determined by the reciprocating motion in the first passage, the first ball and the second ball allow the ball to pass along the left-right direction. Since it flows down from the first passage to the second passage, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the interval between the first ball and the second ball. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine CB2, when the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage is smaller than a predetermined amount, the path guided when the space exceeds the predetermined amount is At least the second ball is guided to an advantageous passage,
The first passage is formed so that the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be reduced by reciprocating the first ball and the second ball. Gaming machine CB3.

  According to the gaming machine CB3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CB2, if the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage is equal to or less than a predetermined amount, the space is equal to or smaller than the predetermined amount. At least the second ball is guided to a passage that is more advantageous than the passage that is guided when the first ball and the first ball are reciprocated by the first ball and the first ball. Since the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be reduced, the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage can be easily reduced to a predetermined amount or less. As a result, the player can be expected to be guided to an advantageous passage, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3, the gaming machine CB4 includes a gaming board having a central opening, and the second passage is disposed at an opening of the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine CB4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3, the gaming machine includes a gaming board with an open center, and the second passage is disposed at the opening of the gaming board. Therefore, the space in the front-rear direction can be effectively used. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure the entire length of the second passage.
<About the concept of the invention in which the magnetic parts C2400, c5400, and c6400 (passage part CRt2004) are an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a displacement member at least partially disposed in a passage path of a ball and formed to be displaceable by the weight of the ball, when a first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, In a state where the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere and the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, a second one that is a successor to the first sphere is provided. A gaming machine CC1 characterized in that the ball of the game machine CC1 is guided to a path different from that of the first ball through a portion lifted upward of the displacement member.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a distribution member that operates by the weight of a game ball and distributes the game ball to a first passage and a second passage (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). . However, in the above-described conventional technique, there is a problem that the interest in the game is insufficient because the ball only flows downward in the weight direction.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CC1, when the first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, and the displacement member is moved to the first ball. In the state displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the second ball following the first ball passes through a portion lifted upward from the displacement member and is guided to a path different from the first ball. , Can enhance the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine CC1, the passage through which the second ball is guided through a portion lifted above the displacement member is formed by a magnetic portion capable of attracting the ball by magnetic force. CC2.

  According to the gaming machine CC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CC1, the passage through which the second ball is guided through the portion lifted above the displacement member is formed by a magnetic portion capable of attracting the ball by magnetic force. Therefore, it is possible to form a mode in which a ball is dropped in the middle of such a passage. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine CC2, the magnetic unit is located above a portion of the displacement member that is lifted upward.

  According to the gaming machine CC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CC2, since the magnetic portion is located above the portion lifted upward of the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. If not, even if the second ball passes through a portion to be lifted upward, a mode in which the second ball is not attracted to the magnetic portion can be reliably formed.

  In the gaming machine CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is rotatably supported, and a portion where the weight of the first ball is applied and a portion which is lifted upward are located with the rotation axis interposed therebetween. A gaming machine CC4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine CC4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is rotatably supported, and the portion on which the weight of the first ball is applied is sandwiched between the rotating shaft and the upper portion. When the second ball passes through the portion to be lifted upward, the portion through which the second ball passes can be lifted upward by utilizing the weight of the first ball. Can be easily maintained.
<About the concept of the invention in which the lower frames D86b to D8086b are an example>
In a gaming machine having a passage in which a ball can enter, and a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable and changing the likelihood of the ball entering the passage, the displacement member includes a ball in the passage. A gaming machine DA1 which is displaced when it is hit and changes the ease with which the ball enters the passage.

  2. Description of the Related Art There has been known a gaming machine including a passage through which a ball can enter and a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable and changing the ease of entry of the ball into the passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-124169). The prior art discloses a technique for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening / closing claw 15a). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the interest in the game is insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DA1, the displacement member is displaced when a ball enters the passage, and changes the ease of entry of the ball into the passage, so that the first ball is When the ball is entered into the passage and the second ball is expected to be entered into the passage, or conversely, when the first ball is entered into the passage, the second ball is inserted into the passage. When it is expected that the second ball is not entered, whether or not the second ball is entered into the passage can be noticed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine DA1, the displacement member is displaced to a side where the ball easily enters the passage when the ball enters the passage.

  According to the gaming machine DA2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DA1, when the ball enters the passage, the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage. It is possible to make it easier for a ball following the ball that has hit the ball (another ball not entering the passage, a subsequent ball) to enter the passage. In other words, if one ball enters the passage, the following ball can easily enter the passage continuously, and if the following ball enters the passage, the following ball can enter the passage. Due to the entry of the ball into the passage, the following trailing ball can be easily entered into the passage. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to expect the occurrence of a chain of entering balls into the passage by entering the ball into the passage. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine DA1, the displacement member is displaced to a side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage when the ball enters the passage.

  According to the gaming machine DA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DA1, when the ball enters the passage, the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is unlikely to enter the passage. In a state where the ball has entered the passage, it is possible to make it difficult for the second ball to enter the passage when it is expected that the second ball will not enter the passage. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines DA1 to DA3, the displacement member uses the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to allow the ball to enter the passage easily or the ball enters the passage. A gaming machine DA4 characterized by being displaced to a side where it becomes difficult.

  According to the gaming machine DA4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DA1 to DA3, the displacement member uses the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to make it easier for the ball to enter the passage or Since the ball is displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage, an actuator for driving the displacement member and a sensor for controlling the actuator are not required, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine DA2 or DA3, a ball that has entered the passage is allowed to roll and the rolling member is displaced by the weight of the ball to be rolled, and the displacement of the rolling member is transferred to the displacement member. A transmission means for transmitting, the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the rolling ball, the rolling member is displaced, the displacement of the rolling member is transmitted by the transmission means, to the passage A gaming machine DA5 characterized in that the gaming machine DA5 is displaced to a side where the ball is likely to enter or a side where the ball is unlikely to enter the passage.

  According to the gaming machine DA5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DA2 or DA3, the ball that has entered the passage is allowed to roll, and a rolling member that is displaced by the weight of the ball to be rolled, Transmission means for transmitting the displacement of the rolling member to the displacement member, wherein the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the rolling ball, and the displacement of the rolling member is transmitted by the transmission means As a result, since the ball is displaced to the side where the ball easily enters the passage or to the side where the ball is difficult to enter the passage, the ball enters the passage while the ball is rolling on the rolling member. The displacing member can be displaced to the side where the ball easily enters or the side where the ball does not easily enter the passage. That is, it is possible to easily maintain (lengthen) a state where the ball easily enters the passage or a state where the ball is difficult to enter the passage.

  A gaming machine DA6, comprising a plurality of the rolling members.

  According to the gaming machine DA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DA5, since a plurality of rolling members are provided, a section where the ball rolls (rollable distance) is secured accordingly, and the ball enters the passage. The period during which the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is likely to enter or the side where the ball does not easily enter the passage can be lengthened. That is, it is possible to easily maintain (lengthen) a state where the ball easily enters the passage or a state where the ball is difficult to enter the passage.

  In the gaming machine DA5 or DA6, the ball that has entered the passage is rolled with the rolling member by the downward inclination of the rolling member, and the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the ball is rolled. The gaming machine DA7, wherein a downward inclination of the rolling member in a moving state is smaller than a downward inclination of the rolling member in a state where the ball is not rolling.

  According to the gaming machine DA7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DA5 or DA6, the ball that has entered the passage is rolled by the rolling member by the downward inclination of the rolling member, and the rolling member is rotatable. The rolling member is rolled because the descending inclination of the rolling member when the ball is rolling is smaller than the descending inclination of the rolling member when the ball is not rolling. It is possible to suppress the momentum from being imparted to the ball. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the rolling member can be lengthened. As a result, the state where the ball easily enters the passage or the state where the ball does not easily enter the passage can be easily maintained (lengthened).

  The gaming machine DA8 according to any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA7, wherein the rolling member returns to a state before being displaced by the weight of the ball by its own weight.

  According to the gaming machine DA8, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines DA5 to DA7, the rolling member is returned by its own weight to a state before being displaced by the weight of the ball, so that the rolling member is driven. Therefore, the need for an actuator for controlling the actuator and a sensor for controlling the actuator can be eliminated, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  A gaming machine DA9 comprising any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA8, wherein the gaming machine DA9 is provided with an action means for acting on a ball rolling the rolling member.

  According to the gaming machine DA9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA8, since there is provided an action means acting on the ball rolling the rolling member, it is possible to influence the rolling of the ball. That is, the action of the action means imparts resistance to the rolling of the ball, and the speed of the rolling can be reduced. This can increase the time required for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, the state where the ball easily enters the passage or the state where the ball does not easily enter the passage can be easily maintained (lengthened).

  In the gaming machine DA9, the action means is formed as a protrusion protruding from the inner side surface of the passage and extending along the vertical direction, and along the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling surface. A gaming machine DA10, wherein a plurality of gaming machines are arranged at predetermined intervals.

  According to the gaming machine DA10, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine DA9, the action means is formed as a projection projecting from the inner side surface of the passage and extending along the vertical direction, and rolls on the rolling surface. Since a plurality of balls are arranged at predetermined intervals along the rolling direction of the ball, when the ball rolls on the rolling surface, the protrusion (working means) is brought into contact with the ball, thereby By adding resistance to the rolling, the rolling speed can be reduced. This can increase the time required for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, the state where the ball easily enters the passage or the state where the ball does not easily enter the passage can be easily maintained (lengthened).

  On the other hand, since the protrusions (action means) extend in the vertical direction, resistance can be hardly applied to the sphere moving in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the ball jumps upward from the rolling surface of the rolling member, the ball can be quickly dropped downward (rolling surface). Therefore, even when the rolling member is displaced upward due to the upward jump of the ball, the rolling member can be promptly returned to a state in which the rolling member is displaced by the weight of the ball. As a result, the displacement member, which has been displaced by the weight of the ball to the side where the ball easily enters the passage, is moved to the initial position (the position before the ball enters the passage) by the jump of the ball from the rolling surface. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem of returning to the state.

  The gaming machine DA11 according to the gaming machine DA10, wherein the rolling member has a rolling surface on which the ball rolls is formed as a smooth surface that continues smoothly along the rolling direction of the ball.

  According to the gaming machine DA11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DA10, the rolling member is formed as a smooth surface in which the rolling surface on which the ball rolls smoothly continues along the rolling direction of the ball. It is possible to prevent the ball rolling on the moving surface from jumping upward (vertically). Therefore, the displacement member, which has been displaced by the weight of the ball to the side where the ball easily enters the passage, moves to the initial position (the position before the ball enters the passage) due to the jump of the ball from the rolling surface. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the trouble that is returned.

  The rolling surface need not be a flat surface, but may be a surface having undulations (a surface having a cross-sectional shape formed by smoothly connecting circular arcs). That is, the rolling surface only needs to have a step having a height of at least 1/10 or more of the diameter of the sphere.

  In the gaming machine DA10 or DA11, the protrusion is formed on the inner surface of the passage on both sides of the rolling surface, and the protrusion on one inner surface and the protrusion on the other inner surface are A gaming machine DA12, which is arranged in a staggered manner along a rolling surface of a rolling member.

  According to the gaming machine DA12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine DA10 or DA11, the protrusions are formed on the inner surface of the passage and on both sides of the rolling surface, and the protrusion on one inner surface and the other are formed. Since the protrusions on the inner surface are arranged in a staggered manner along the rolling surface of the rolling member, the balls can be easily brought into contact with the protrusions when the ball rolls on the rolling surface. This can increase the time required for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, the state where the ball easily enters the passage or the state where the ball does not easily enter the passage can be easily maintained (lengthened).

  In any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported by a shaft, and the ball that has entered the passage rolls the rolling member toward the shaft-supported portion. A gaming machine DA13, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine DA13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the ball that has entered the passage is directed toward the shaft-supported portion. Since the rolling member rolls, when the ball rolls the rolling member, the displacement of the rolling member can be maximized in the initial stage. That is, the displacement of the displacement member to the side where the ball easily enters the passage can be promptly performed when the ball enters the passage and reaches the rolling member. Therefore, when the distance between the ball entering the passage and the ball following the ball (another ball not entering the passage, a subsequent ball) is relatively small (for example, when both balls are In this case, the following ball can easily enter the passage or hardly enter the passage.

  Further, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the displacement of the rolling member can be gradually reduced. That is, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the displacement member on the side where the ball easily enters the passage is gradually displaced toward the initial position (the side where the ball is hard to enter the passage). it can. Thereby, the expectation that the ball will enter the passage can be changed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, when the ball that has entered the passage falls on the rolling member, the dropped ball is received at a position where the amount of displacement of the rolling member is large (a position distant from the pivotally supported portion). Can be. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball is absorbed (consumed) by the displacement of the rolling member, and it is possible to suppress the ball from jumping upward. As a result, the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member in a stable manner, and the state of the displacement member is stabilized (for example, the ball is displaced to the side where the ball is difficult to enter the passage or to the side where the ball is likely to enter the passage). Temporary displacement of the member can be suppressed).

  In the gaming machine DA13, the ball that has entered the passage is dropped on the rolling member.

  According to the gaming machine DA14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DA13, the ball that has entered the passage is dropped on the rolling member, so that the kinetic energy of the dropped ball is used to reduce the rolling member. It can be displaced quickly. As a result, the displacement member can be promptly displaced to the side where the ball easily enters the passage or to the side where the ball is unlikely to enter the passage. Therefore, when the distance between the ball entering the passage and the ball following the ball (another ball not entering the passage, a subsequent ball) is relatively small (for example, when both balls are Even when the ball is successively dropped down), the following ball can easily enter the passage or hardly enter the passage.

  Further, when the ball that has entered the passage member is dropped on a member (a fixed, non-displaced member) different from the rolling member, breakage of another member is likely to occur. For example, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball is absorbed (consumed) by the displacement of the rolling member, and breakage can be suppressed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the passage can be increased by allowing the ball to fall.

  In the gaming machine DA13, the ball rolling on the rolling member is rolled at least to the pivotally supported portion of the rolling member.

  According to the gaming machine DA14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DA13, the ball that rolls the rolling member is rolled at least to a portion (rotation axis) of the rolling member that is supported by the rolling member. In comparison with the case where the ball is ejected before reaching the pivoted part (rotation axis), the influence of the inertial force accompanying the ejection of the ball (the effect that the weight of the ball is not applied) is suppressed, The rolling member can be prevented from fluttering in the rotation direction. Therefore, the state of the displacement member can be stabilized (for example, temporary displacement of the displacement member to the side where the ball easily enters the passage or the side where the ball is difficult to enter the passage) can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported on the ball, and the ball that has entered the passage is rolled in a direction away from the supported portion. A gaming machine DA16 characterized by rolling members.

  According to the gaming machine DA16, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the ball that has entered the passage is separated from the rotatably supported portion. When the ball rolls on the rolling member, the displacement of the rolling member is maximized at a later stage (when the ball rolls beyond a predetermined amount). And can be. That is, the timing at which the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball easily enters the passage or the side where the ball is unlikely to enter the passage can be delayed. Therefore, when the distance between the ball that has entered the passage and the ball that follows the ball (another ball that has not entered the passage, a subsequent ball) is relatively large, the following ball Can easily enter the passage or hardly enter the passage.

  Further, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the displacement of the rolling member can be gradually increased. That is, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the displacement member can be gradually displaced toward the side where the ball easily enters the passage or the side where the ball is unlikely to enter the passage. Thereby, the expectation that the ball will enter the passage can be changed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA16, when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement member may be configured such that the ball easily enters the passage or the ball enters the passage. A gaming machine DA17 characterized in that displacement to a side where it is difficult to hit the ball is regulated.

  According to the gaming machine DA17, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines DA5 to DA16, the displacement member is a side or passage on which the ball easily enters the passage when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball. Since the displacement to the side where the ball is difficult to enter is regulated, the displacement member is forcibly displaced to the side where the ball easily enters the passage or the side where the ball is difficult to enter the passage. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine DA17, when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement of the transmission means is regulated by the rolling member, so that the ball is more likely to enter the passage or The gaming machine DA18, wherein a displacement of the displacement member to a side where a ball is difficult to enter the passage is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine DA18, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DA17, when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement of the transmission means is regulated by the rolling member, so that the ball is moved to the passage. Since the displacement of the displacement member to the side where the ball easily enters or the side where the ball is unlikely to enter the passage is regulated, there is no need to separately provide a component for regulating the forcible displacement of the displacement member. Can be diverted. That is, it is possible to simplify the structure for suppressing the injustice of forcibly displacing the displacement member.

  In any of the gaming machines DA5 to DA18, a predetermined gap is formed between the rolling member and the transmitting means, and the rolling member displaced by the weight of the ball fills the gap. A gaming machine DA19 which is in contact with the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine DA19, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA18, a predetermined gap is formed between the rolling member and the transmission means, and the rolling member displaced by the weight of the ball. Is contacted with the transmission means after filling the gap, so that when the displacement of the rolling member is relatively small, the displacement of the rolling member cannot be transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means. That is, in order to displace the displacement member to the side where the ball easily enters the passage or the side where the ball is unlikely to enter the passage, it is necessary to form a displacement exceeding the gap in the rolling member, It is difficult to succeed in displacing the rolling member by hitting the gaming machine and displacing the rolling member with foreign matter such as wire.
<About the concept of the invention in which the lower frames D86b to D8086b are an example>
In a gaming machine including a passage in which a ball can enter, and a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable and changing the likelihood of the ball entering the passage,
A gaming machine DB1 wherein the displacement speed of the displacement member is formed to be variable.

  2. Description of the Related Art There has been known a gaming machine including a passage through which a ball can enter and a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable and changing the ease of entry of the ball into the passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-124169). The prior art discloses a technique for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening / closing claw 15a). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the interest in the game is insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DB1, the displacement speed of the displacement member is formed so as to be changeable, so that the change speed of the ease with which the ball enters the passage can be changed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine DB1, the displacement member is characterized in that a displacement speed to a side where a ball easily enters the passage is faster than a displacement speed to a side where a ball is unlikely to enter the passage. Gaming machine DB2.

  According to the gaming machine DB2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine DB1, the displacement member has a displacement speed toward the side where the ball easily enters the passage and a displacement speed toward the side where the ball is unlikely to enter the passage. As a result, the state where the ball easily enters the passage is quickly formed, and a good tempo effect can be performed for a player who expects the ball to enter the passage. Also, the displacement speed to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage is relatively slowed, so that a period in which the ball can easily enter the passage is secured, and the ball enters the passage. It is possible to make a player who expects attention pay attention to whether or not the ball can enter the passage in time. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine DB1, the displacement member is characterized in that a displacement speed to a side where a ball easily enters the passage is slower than a displacement speed to a side where a ball is unlikely to enter the passage. Gaming machine DB3.

  According to the gaming machine DB3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine DB1, the displacement member has a displacement speed toward the side where the ball easily enters the passage and a displacement speed toward the side where the ball is unlikely to enter the passage. Since it is made slower than before, it is possible to gradually increase the ease with which the ball enters the passage and gradually increase the expectation of the player who expects the ball to enter the passage. Further, it is possible to quickly form a state in which the ball is hard to enter the passage, and to perform a good-tempo effect for a player who expects the ball to enter the passage. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines DB1 to DB3, the displacement member uses the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to allow the ball to enter the passage easily or the ball enters the passage. A gaming machine DB4 characterized in that the gaming machine DB4 is displaced to a side where it becomes difficult.

According to the gaming machine DB4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DB1 to DB3, the displacement member uses the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to make it easier for the ball to enter the passage or Since the ball is displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage, an actuator for driving the displacement member and a sensor for controlling the actuator are not required, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.
<About the concept of the invention in which the lower frames D86b to D8086b are an example>
In a gaming machine including a passage in which a ball can enter, and a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable and changing the likelihood of the ball entering the passage,
Comprising a plurality of the displacement members,
The gaming machine DC1, wherein one of the plurality of displacement members has a different displacement mode from the other displacement members.

  2. Description of the Related Art There has been known a gaming machine including a passage through which a ball can enter and a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable and changing the ease of entry of the ball into the passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-124169). The prior art discloses a technique for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening / closing claw 15a). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the interest in the game is insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DC1, since a plurality of displacement members are provided and one of the plurality of displacement members has a different displacement mode from the other displacement members in the passage, the displacement modes of the plurality of displacement members are different. By the combination of the above, the change in the ease with which the ball enters the passage can be increased. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that examples of the displacement mode include a timing (timing) at which displacement starts, a displacement direction, a displacement speed, and a combination thereof.

  In the gaming machine DC1, the displacement of the one displacement member is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the displacement of the other displacement member has started.

  According to the gaming machine DC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DC1, the displacement of one displacement member is started after the displacement of the other displacement member is started and a predetermined time has elapsed. The position at which the likelihood of entering a ball is changed can be changed, and the timing can be changed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine DC1 or DC2, an upstream passage for causing a ball to flow down to the passage is provided, and a displacement direction of the displacement member is substantially parallel to a rolling direction of the ball in the upstream passage. Machine DC3.

  According to the gaming machine DC3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine DC1 or DC2, an upstream passage for causing the ball to flow down to the passage is provided, and the displacement direction of the displacement member is substantially parallel to the rolling direction of the ball in the upstream passage. Therefore, the rolling direction and the rolling position of the ball rolling in the upstream passage and the displacement direction and the displacement position of the displacement member can be related to the ease with which the ball enters the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines DC1 to DC3, the displacement member uses the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to allow the ball to easily enter the passage or the ball to enter the passage. A gaming machine DC4, which is displaced to a side where it becomes difficult.

According to the gaming machine DC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DC1 to DC3, the displacement member uses the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to make it easier for the ball to enter the passage or Since the ball is displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage, an actuator for driving the displacement member and a sensor for controlling the actuator are not required, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.
<About the concept of the invention in which the lower frames D86b to D8086b are an example>
In a gaming machine including a passage in which a ball can enter, and a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable and changing the likelihood of the ball entering the passage,
The ball provided in the passage includes a rolling member formed to be rollable,
The displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball rolling the rolling member, is displaced to the side where the ball is likely to enter the passage or the side where the ball is unlikely to enter the passage,
The gaming machine DD1, wherein the rolling member is formed so that the ball can drop in the middle of the ball rolling path.

  2. Description of the Related Art There has been known a gaming machine including a passage through which a ball can enter and a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable and changing the ease of entry of the ball into the passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-124169). The prior art discloses a technique for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening / closing claw 15a). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the interest in the game is insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DD1, the ball provided in the passage includes a rolling member formed to be rollable, and the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball rolling the rolling member. The ball is displaced to the side where the ball easily enters the passage or to the side where the ball is difficult to enter the passage, and the rolling member is formed so that the ball can drop in the course of the ball rolling path. The period during which the weight of the ball can be used can be changed according to the distance that the ball rolls on the rolling path. That is, the likelihood of the ball entering the passage can be changed according to the state of the ball rolling the rolling member. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine DD1, in the gaming machine DA2, the displacement member is displaced to a side where the ball easily enters the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling the rolling member.

  According to the gaming machine DD2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DD1, the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball easily enters the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling the rolling member. While the ball that has entered the passage rolls on the rolling member, a ball following the ball (another ball that has not entered the passage, a subsequent ball) can be easily entered into the passage.

  That is, while one ball enters the passage and the ball is rolling on the rolling member, a state can be formed in which the following ball can easily enter the passage, and the following ball can enter the passage. If the ball is entered and the rolling member is rolled, a state can be formed in which the next trailing ball can easily enter the passage. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to expect the occurrence of a chain of entering balls into the passage by entering the ball into the passage. On the other hand, if the ball that has entered the passage falls in the middle of the rolling path of the rolling member, the weight of the ball cannot be used, and a state in which the following ball can easily enter the passage cannot be formed. . This allows the player to pay attention to the rolling state of the ball (whether or not the end of the rolling path can be reached). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine DD1, a gaming machine DD3 is provided with a drop means for easily dropping the rolling ball from the rolling member when a predetermined number or more balls roll on the rolling member.

  According to the gaming machine DD3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine DD1, when the rolling member rolls a predetermined number or more of balls, a drop means is provided to make the rolling ball fall easily from the rolling member. In a state where the ball is rolling on the rolling member, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not another ball further flows down to the passage. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the displacement member in the gaming machine DD3 may be one that is displaced to the side where the ball easily enters the passage by using the weight of the ball rolling the rolling member, and the ball is moved to the passage. It may be displaced to the side where it is difficult to enter the ball. In the former case, in a state where the ball is rolling on the rolling member, there is a high possibility that another ball will flow further down into the passage. Can be easily noticed by the player. In the latter case, while the ball is rolling on the rolling member, it is possible to reduce the possibility that another ball will further flow down to the passage, so that a sense of security can be given to the player.

  The gaming machine DD2 or DD3 is provided with a drop passage through which a ball dropped in the middle of the rolling path of the rolling member passes, and the ball passing through the drop passage has a more advantageous game than the ball passing through the passage. A gaming machine DD4 to which a condition is given.

  According to the gaming machine DD4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine DD2 or DD3, a falling path through which a ball dropped on the rolling path of the rolling member passes is provided. Since a more advantageous game condition than the passed ball is given, the player can be more strongly focused on whether or not the ball falls in the middle of the rolling path of the rolling member. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, F1 to F11, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, CC1 to CC4, and DA1 to DD4. The gaming machine Z1 is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, F1 to F11, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, CC1 to CC4, and DA1 to DD4. The gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, F1 to F11, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, CC1 to CC4, and DA1 to DD4. The gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board (part of area configuration means)
65b Opening / closing plate (part of introduction means, receiving state changing means, avoidance means)
86 Center frame (open part)
141 Prior design member (part of partitioning means and avoidance means)
163b Ball passage hole (first receiving means, second receiving means)
312 opening (second predetermined part, ball receiving part)
317 Front and rear long projecting part (part of the first flow-down path, part of the projecting part, second projecting part, part of the state switching means)
318 Left and right inner projections (part of branching means, part of projection, first projection, part of state switching means)
319 Left and right outer protruding parts (part of the second flow path, part of the state switching means)
310 Upper member (part of route configuration means)
330 Middle member (part of delay means, part of route construction means)
334 first flow path constituent part (part of path constituent means, front and rear flow path part)
335 second flow path constituent part (predetermined part, part of path constituent means, left-right path)
336 Third flow path constituent part (part of path constituent means, front / rear path, front / rear flow part)
351 Light emitting means 370 Slide displacement member (part of branching means, part of switching means, part of state switching means)
380 Lower member (part of route configuration means)
600 first operation unit (displacement means)
616 Guide slot (supporting means)
616a Linear part (part of support means, first area, restriction part)
616b Curved part (part of support means, second area, restriction part)
620 Rotating member (displacement means)
640 Supported member (part of arrangement means)
642 tubular part (first part)
652 Front rotating member (supported means)
652b Overhang decoration part (part of auxiliary means)
660 Second decorative rotating member (posture changing means)
661a First production surface (first visible surface, first surface)
661b Second production surface (second visible surface, second surface)
670 Decoration fixing member (part of auxiliary means)
700 second operation unit (displacement means)
787a1 First main decorative surface (part of first visible surface)
787a2 First auxiliary decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
787b1 Second main decorative surface (part of first visible surface)
787b2 Second auxiliary decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
800 third operation unit (displacement means, second displacement means)
813 Detection sensor (detection means)
823b Outside light emitting unit (light emitting means)
840 Outer rotating member (part of collecting part)
866 Torque limiter (release means)
870 First decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
875 1st covering part (part of the surface to be visually recognized)
880 second decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
885 2nd covering part (part of the surface to be visually recognized)
C1 color (part of installation means, second part)
C2 Dish-shaped lid part (part of arrangement means, second part)
P1 ball (part of displaceable means)
SE11 Probable change detection sensor (part of passing means)
SE12 Normal detection sensor (part of the passing means)
C13 game board C60 base board (game board)
C60a Opening C122, C2122, C4122 Lower bottom surface (reciprocating surface, first passage)
C122a Outflow surface (outflow part)
C123a, C4123a Notch (inflow part)
C130, C2130 Back member (base member)
C140, C2140 First intermediate member (base member)
C142, C2142 Bottom part (upstream surface, second passage)
C144, C2144 passage portion (first passage)
C170, C2170, C3170 Distributing member (displacement member, main body)
C172, C2172 Receiving part (1st surface)
C172b, C2172b Bottom part (first surface)
C173, C2173 Rolling part (second surface)
C2174 Shaft C190 Decoration member (weight)
C192 shaft C2300 Magnet (adsorption member)
C2400, C5400 Magnetic part (adsorption member, lower surface forming member)
COPin, COP2000in Inlet (inflow part)
CRt2 Second passage (first passage)
CRt3 Third passage (second passage)
CRt4 4th passage (1st passage)
CRt5 fifth passage (second passage)
CRt2001 1st passage (1st passage)
CRt2002 2nd passage (2nd passage)
CRt2003 3rd passage (1st passage)
CRt2004 4th passage (2nd passage)
CRt2005 5th passage (2nd passage)
CB1 ball (first ball)
CB2 ball (second ball)
D13 Gaming board (game machine)
D131f Projection (action means, projection)
D131fa Second protrusion (fall means)
D141g Projection (action means, projection)
D170, D3170, D8170 Rolling member D180 Displacement member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 Transmission member (transmission means)
D4220 Second rolling member (rolling member)
DRt3 Third passage (upstream passage)
DRt6 6th passage (passage)
DRt9 9th passage (falling passage)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine including a passage in which a ball can enter, and a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable and changing the likelihood of the ball entering the passage,
The ball provided in the passage includes a rolling member formed to be rollable,
The displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball rolling the rolling member, is displaced to the side where the ball is likely to enter the passage or the side where the ball is unlikely to enter the passage,
The gaming machine, wherein the rolling member is formed so that the ball can drop in the course of the ball rolling path.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the displacement member is displaced to a side where the ball easily enters the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member.   3. The game according to claim 1, further comprising a drop unit configured to easily drop the rolling ball from the rolling member when a predetermined number or more balls roll on the rolling member. 4. Machine.

Images